To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover to left or right.
Copyright
• When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument, this unit can
perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS).
This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production, and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works (such as your own compositions) that do not infringe on the
copyrights of others. (SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and later copying through a digital
connection. It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio equipment as a copyrightprotection feature.)
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no
responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your
use of this unit.
About the License Agreement
• The VS-1824 and its CD-R/RW capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding
technical prohibiting features of second-generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes
copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use
and enjoyment (private use). Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
VS-1824 Owner’s Manual
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or
in part, of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is
held by a third party is prohibited by law.
Owner’s Manual
Disclaimer of liability
Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other damages”
which may result from your use of the VS-1824. These damages may include but are not limited to the following
events which can occur when using the VS-1824.
• Any loss of profit that may occur to you
• Permanent loss of your music or data
• Inability to continue using the VS-1824 itself or a connected device
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s Manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” (Owner’s Manual p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s
Manual p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning the
proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you
have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, User
Guide, Owner’s Manual, and Appendices should be read in its entirety.
These manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
* IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
* Iomega is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* ZIP is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* Cakewalk Pro Audio and Cakewalk Professional are trademarks of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.
* FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn, Inc.
* VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG.
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
This owner’s manual is printed on recycled paper.
02781256
’02-4-E2-31KS
Roland Web Site: http://www.roland.co.jp/
To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover to left or right.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
For EU Countries
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
ADVARSEL!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table except as specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
2
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
008e
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
..........................................................................................................
002b
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit. (The only exception would be
where this manual provides specific instructions
which should be followed in order to put in place
user-installable options; see User Guide p. 6, 9.)
..........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
• Use only the attached power-supply cord.
..........................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
013
• In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
008a
• The unit should be connected to a power supply
only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the unit.
..........................................................................................................
3
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
022a
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power
cord before attempting installation of the circuit
board (model no. VS8F-2; User Guide p. 6, 9).
..........................................................................................................
023
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
..........................................................................................................
101a
• The unit should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
102b
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
107b
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from,
an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108a
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power
plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from
external devices.
..........................................................................................................
109a
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet ( p. 32).
..........................................................................................................
110a
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out
of the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
115a
• Install only the specified circuit board(s) (model
no. VS8F-2). Remove only the specified screws
(User Guide p. 6, 9).
..........................................................................................................
118
• Should you remove the optical connector caps and
screws fastening the effect expansion board cover,
make sure to put them in a safe place out of
children's reach, so there is no chance of them being
swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
4
IMPORTANT NOTES
291b
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2
and 4, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
Repairs and Data
301
452
• Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a storage
device (e.g., CD-R/RW disc or Zip disk) or DAT recorder,
or written down on paper (when possible). During
repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related
to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
Memory Backup
501b
• This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s
memory circuits while the main power is off. When this
battery becomes weak, the message shown below will
appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the
battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to
avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the battery
replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355
• To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a wet
area, such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture.
353
• Observe the following when using the unit’s CD-RW
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using CD-RW
drive” (p. 184, 233).
• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a storage device
(e.g., CD-R/RW disc or Zip disk), or DAT recorder.
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored on a storage device (e.g., CD-R/
RW disc or Zip disk), or DAT recorder once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
557
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during
normal operation.
5
IMPORTANT NOTES
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
❍ Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.
Handling the Internal Hard
Disk Drive
• Please note that the hard disk is a consuming product. To
protect yourself against risk of loosing important data by
accidental disk damage, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy on the storage device (e.g., Zip
disk or CD-R/RW recorder which is designated by
Roland.)
• Before performing any of the following actions, be sure to
perform the shutdown procedure. Failure to do so may
result in the loss of song data or damage to the hard disk.
❍ Turning off the power of the VS-1824
❍ Turning off the power of the disk drive connected with
SCSI connector
❍ Removing a disk from a removable disk drive
connected with SCSI connector
Shutdown (See Appendices p. 13)
Removable Disk Drive (See Appendices p. 13)
Copyright
851
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public
performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part,
of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a
third party is prohibited by law.
852a
• When exchanging audio signals through a digital
connection with an external instrument, this unit can
perform recording without being subject to the restrictions
of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS). This is
because the unit is intended solely for musical production,
and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as
it is used to record works (such as your own compositions) that do not infringe on the copyrights of others.
(SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and
later copying through a digital connection. It is built into
MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio
equipment as a copyright-protection feature.)
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
About the License Agreement
• The VS-1824 and its CD-R/RW capability are designed to
allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has
granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material
without permission of the copyright owner avoiding
technical prohibiting features of second-generation and
later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright
infringement and may incur penalties even in case such
reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment
(private use). Consult a copyright specialist or special
publications for more detailed information on obtaining
such permission from copyright holders.
• Do not turn off the power while the hard disk is operating.
• While using the VS-1824, be careful not to subject the unit
to vibration or shock, and avoid moving the unit while the
power is turned on.
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from
vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle, be sure
the installation does not exceed the permissible range.
• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive. When the unit has been moved, allow it to become
accustomed to the new environment (allow a few hours)
before operating it.
6
Disclaimer of liability
• Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct
damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other
damages” which may result from your use of the VS-1824.
These damages may include but are not limited to the
following events which can occur when using the
VS-1824.
❍ Any loss of profit that may occur to you
❍ Permanent loss of your music or data
❍ Inability to continue using the VS-1824 itself or a
connected device
Table of Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY.......................................................................................................... 3
IMPORTANT NOTES ................................................................................................................... 5
Preparations ..........................................................................................16
About the Package Contents................................................................................................... 16
Main Features............................................................................................................................ 16
The Latest in Compact Home Studio Environments ............................................................... 16
Simple Operation .......................................................................................................................... 17
Connectivity................................................................................................................................... 17
Major Options ................................................................................................................................ 17
Top and Rear Panels ............................................................................18
Mixer Section ............................................................................................................................ 18
Recorder Section ...................................................................................................................... 20
Rear Panel ................................................................................................................................. 22
Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 23
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology) ..........................24
Saving and Managing Data ...................................................................................................... 24
Managing Disk Contents (Partitioning).................................................................................... 24
The Location Where a Performance is Recorded (Song) ......................................................... 25
Sources, Tracks, and Channels.................................................................................................... 25
Takes and Phrases ......................................................................................................................... 25
About Events ................................................................................................................................. 26
About Button Names .................................................................................................................... 26
Mixer Section ............................................................................................................................ 27
Signal Flow (Busses) ..................................................................................................................... 27
Input Mixer .................................................................................................................................... 28
Track Mixer .................................................................................................................................... 28
Switching the Fader Functions.................................................................................................... 28
Master Block................................................................................................................................... 29
Recorder Section ...................................................................................................................... 29
Differences from a Tape-Type MTR ........................................................................................... 29
Track Minutes and Recording Time........................................................................................... 30
Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track ................................................................................................. 30
Effects Section.......................................................................................................................... 31
About the Effect Expansion Board ............................................................................................. 31
Connecting Effects ........................................................................................................................ 31
Chapter 2 Basic Operation...................................................................32
Turning the Power On and Off................................................................................................. 32
Turning On the Power.................................................................................................................. 32
Turning Off the Power ................................................................................................................. 32
Restarting ....................................................................................................................................... 33
If “STORE Current ?” is Displayed ............................................................................................ 33
Saving Your Song (Song Store) .............................................................................................. 33
Setting the Internal Clock ........................................................................................................ 34
Operating the VS-1824 ............................................................................................................. 35
Basic Navigation....................................................................................................................... 35
Adjusting the display Contrast ................................................................................................... 35
If You Have Trouble Understanding Displays or Operations ............................................... 35
Function Buttons ........................................................................................................................... 36
Mixer and System Initialize ...................................................................................................... 37
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Playback Operations...........................................................38
The Display................................................................................................................................ 38
Display Regions............................................................................................................................. 38
Selecting a Playlist Display.......................................................................................................... 39
Function Buttons (While on the Playlist Display) .................................................................... 40
Mixer Channel Display ............................................................................................................. 41
Changing Track Status............................................................................................................. 42
Muting and Soloing .................................................................................................................. 42
Muting Tracks................................................................................................................................ 42
Muting Inputs and Effect Returns .............................................................................................. 42
Quick Soloing................................................................................................................................. 43
Solo Mode....................................................................................................................................... 43
Using Locators.......................................................................................................................... 43
Storing Locators............................................................................................................................. 43
Recalling a Stored Locator ........................................................................................................... 43
Changing the Locator Bank ......................................................................................................... 44
Editing Stored Locators................................................................................................................ 44
Clearing Locator ............................................................................................................................ 44
Using Markers ........................................................................................................................... 45
Storing a Marker............................................................................................................................ 45
Locate to a Marker Using PREVIOUS and NEXT .................................................................... 45
Editing Marker Values ................................................................................................................. 46
Clearing Markers........................................................................................................................... 46
Other Ways to Move In a Song ................................................................................................ 47
Changing Playback Position Using JUMP................................................................................. 47
Change Playback Position Using TIME/VALUE Dial ............................................................ 47
Move to the Beginning or End of a Song Using [FF] and [REW]........................................... 47
Protecting Songs (Song Protect) ............................................................................................ 48
Protecting Performances .............................................................................................................. 48
To Remove Song Protect .............................................................................................................. 49
Selecting and Loading Songs (Song Select) ......................................................................... 49
Chapter 4 Recording Operations.........................................................50
Preparing for a New Recording ............................................................................................... 50
Create a New Song (Song New).................................................................................................. 50
The Recording and Mixing Process........................................................................................ 53
Connecting Instruments .......................................................................................................... 53
Recording to the Tracks........................................................................................................... 54
Recording on Other Tracks (Overdubbing)............................................................................ 56
Recording Using Different Virtual Tracks (V-Tracks)............................................................ 56
Manual Punch-In/Punch-Out.................................................................................................... 57
Manual Punch-In Using the RECORD Button.......................................................................... 57
Manual Punch-In Using the Foot Switch................................................................................... 57
Auto Punch-In and Punch-Out ................................................................................................ 58
Loop Recording ........................................................................................................................ 60
Undo and Redo ......................................................................................................................... 62
Recording and Editing Operation Which Can Be Undone (Undo) ....................................... 62
To use the Undo Function:........................................................................................................... 63
To cancel an Undo (Redo):........................................................................................................... 63
Cancel Only the Very Last-Performed Operation.................................................................... 63
Track Bouncing......................................................................................................................... 64
Track Bouncing With Effects ....................................................................................................... 65
Recording a Digital Source...................................................................................................... 66
Preparations for Recording a Digital Source............................................................................. 66
Recording From a CD................................................................................................................... 67
8
Table of Contents
Using the Metronome ............................................................................................................... 67
Turn On the Metronome .............................................................................................................. 67
Program the Tempo Map............................................................................................................. 68
Using an External MIDI Sound Source to Play the Metronome ............................................ 68
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer........................................................70
Fader/Mute Button .................................................................................................................... 71
Method One: Switching the Fader Functions (FADER/MUTE Button) ............................... 71
Method Two: Input Mixer Screen............................................................................................... 71
Determining Output .................................................................................................................. 72
MONITOR Output Connectors................................................................................................... 72
AUX Connectors............................................................................................................................ 73
Digital Out Connectors................................................................................................................. 73
Direct Out Connectors.................................................................................................................. 74
Changing settings of the Track Mixer Buttons and Faders (Fader Mode) .......................... 75
Mixer Routing............................................................................................................................ 75
Sources Assigned to Tracks ......................................................................................................... 75
Input Mixer Default Assignment.............................................................................................. 76
Channel Link ............................................................................................................................. 77
Link Adjacent Mixer Channels.................................................................................................... 77
Adjust the Levels of Linked Channels ....................................................................................... 77
Adjusting the Panning of Channel Linked Channels .............................................................. 78
Linking the Faders of Two or More Channels (Fader Group)............................................... 79
Selecting V-Tracks.................................................................................................................... 80
Using the Equalizer (EQ).......................................................................................................... 80
Attenuation................................................................................................................................ 82
Phase ......................................................................................................................................... 82
Copying Mixer Settings............................................................................................................ 83
Mixer Scenes............................................................................................................................. 84
Storing a Mixer Scene ................................................................................................................... 84
Recalling a Mixer Scene................................................................................................................ 85
Recalling a Scene Without Affecting the Current Fader Values ............................................ 85
Deleting a Mixer Scene ................................................................................................................. 85
Updating a Mixer Scene ............................................................................................................... 85
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail..................................................86
Input Mixer................................................................................................................................. 86
[F1 (MIX)] MIX Bus Enable/Pan................................................................................................. 86
[F2 (Low)], [F3 (Mid)], and [F4 (High)] Equalizer.................................................................... 86
[F6 (PRM.V)] Parameter View/ [F6 (CH.V)] Channel View................................................... 86
[F1 (FX1)] Effect 1 Send ................................................................................................................ 86
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Send ................................................................................................................ 87
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Send ................................................................................................................ 87
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Send ................................................................................................................ 87
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Send .................................................................................................................. 87
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert ........................................................................................................... 88
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert ........................................................................................................... 88
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert ........................................................................................................... 89
[F4 (FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert ........................................................................................................... 89
[F1 (Link)] Channel Link.............................................................................................................. 89
[F2 (ATT)] Attenuation................................................................................................................. 89
[F3 (Phase)] PHASE ...................................................................................................................... 90
[F4 (Group)] FADER GROUP ..................................................................................................... 90
[F1 (Meter)] METER...................................................................................................................... 90
[F3 (Solo)] SOLO............................................................................................................................ 90
[F4 (Mute)] MUTE......................................................................................................................... 90
[F5 (Fader)] FADER ...................................................................................................................... 90
9
Table of Contents
Track Mixer................................................................................................................................ 90
[F1 (MIX)] MIX Bus Enable/Pan................................................................................................. 90
[F2 (Low)], [F3 (Mid)], and [F4 (High)] Equalizer.................................................................... 90
[F5 (V.Trk)] V-Track Select........................................................................................................... 91
[F6 (PRM.V)] Parameter View/ [F6 (CH.V)] Channel View................................................... 91
[F1(FX1)] Effect 1 Send ................................................................................................................. 91
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Send ................................................................................................................ 91
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Send ................................................................................................................ 91
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Send ................................................................................................................ 92
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Send .................................................................................................................. 92
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert ........................................................................................................... 92
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert ........................................................................................................... 93
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert ........................................................................................................... 93
[F4(FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert ............................................................................................................ 94
[F1 (Link)] Channel Link.............................................................................................................. 94
[F2 (ATT)] Attenuation................................................................................................................. 94
[F3 (Phase)] PHASE ...................................................................................................................... 94
[F4 (Group)] FADER GROUP ..................................................................................................... 94
[F1 (Meter)] METER...................................................................................................................... 94
[F2 (Stats)] STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 94
[F3 (Solo)] SOLO............................................................................................................................ 95
[F4 (Mute)] MUTE......................................................................................................................... 95
[F5 (Fader)] FADER ...................................................................................................................... 95
Master Block ............................................................................................................................. 95
[F1 (MST)] MASTER ..................................................................................................................... 95
[F2 (MON)] MONITOR ................................................................................................................ 95
[F3 (AUX.A)] AUX A .................................................................................................................... 95
[F4 (AUX.B)] AUX B ..................................................................................................................... 96
[F5 (DOUT1)] DIGITAL OUT 1................................................................................................... 96
[F6 (DOUT2)] DIGITAL OUT 2................................................................................................... 96
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert ........................................................................................................... 96
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert ........................................................................................................... 97
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert ........................................................................................................... 97
[F4 (FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert ........................................................................................................... 97
[F5 (DIR)] DIRECT OUT .............................................................................................................. 98
[F1 (FX1)] Effect 1 Master Send ................................................................................................... 98
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Master Send ................................................................................................... 98
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Master Send ................................................................................................... 98
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Master Send ................................................................................................... 98
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Master Send ..................................................................................................... 98
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)..........................................99
Location of Effects ................................................................................................................... 99
Effect Types .............................................................................................................................. 99
Insert Effects................................................................................................................................... 99
Loop Effects.................................................................................................................................. 100
Making the Effect Connection ................................................................................................... 100
Procedure for Using Effects .................................................................................................. 100
Selecting Effect Patches ........................................................................................................ 101
Selecting a Preset Patch .............................................................................................................. 101
Creating and Saving User Effect Patches ............................................................................ 102
Create a User Effect Patch.......................................................................................................... 102
Save an Effect as a User Patch ................................................................................................... 102
Save an Effect Patch as Part of a Mixer Scene ......................................................................... 103
Connecting Insert Effects ...................................................................................................... 103
Connecting Insert Effects to Inputs and Tracks...................................................................... 103
Connecting Insert Effects in the Master Block ........................................................................ 105
Three Insert Effect Examples ..................................................................................................... 105
10
Table of Contents
Connecting Loop Effects ....................................................................................................... 107
Effects Return Section................................................................................................................. 107
Two Examples of Using Loop Effects ...................................................................................... 108
Using Effects While Recording ............................................................................................. 109
Listening to an Insert Effect While Recording ........................................................................ 109
Listening to a Loop Effect While Recording ........................................................................... 110
Recording Insert Effects ............................................................................................................. 110
Recording a loop effect............................................................................................................... 111
Recording Stereo Effects....................................................................................................... 112
Three Important Reminders About Using Effects ............................................................... 112
Chapter 8 EZ Routing .........................................................................113
Using EZ Routing Step Editing.............................................................................................. 114
Setting Up for Recording Using Step Editing ......................................................................... 114
Setting Up for Mixing Using Step Editing............................................................................... 116
Setting Up for Bouncing Using Step Editing........................................................................... 117
Setting Up for Mastering Using Step Editing ......................................................................... 119
Using EZ Routing Quick Editing ........................................................................................... 121
Using EZ Routing Templates................................................................................................. 123
Saving an EZ Routing Template ............................................................................................... 123
Recalling an EZ Routing Template........................................................................................... 123
Deleting an EZ Routing Template ............................................................................................ 123
Chapter 9 Automix ..............................................................................124
Mixer Automation ................................................................................................................... 124
Using Automix ........................................................................................................................ 125
Adjust the Display for Automix................................................................................................ 125
Realtime Automix ................................................................................................................... 125
Realtime Automix of Track Faders........................................................................................... 125
Realtime Automix of Input Faders ........................................................................................... 126
Automating the Master Stereo Mix and Monitor Output ..................................................... 126
Automating Effect Returns ........................................................................................................ 126
Snapshot Automation ............................................................................................................ 127
Snap Mode ................................................................................................................................... 128
Automating Effect Changes....................................................................................................... 128
Gradation...................................................................................................................................... 129
Updating Automix................................................................................................................... 131
Editing Automix Data ............................................................................................................. 132
Editing Automix Data (Micro Edit).......................................................................................... 132
Erasing Data from a Specific Area (Erase)............................................................................... 132
Copying Data to Another Location (Copy) ............................................................................. 133
Smooth Data Transitions (Gradation) ...................................................................................... 135
Increasing or Decreasing All Data Values (Shift/Expand) ................................................... 136
Erasing Automix Data ............................................................................................................ 138
Erasing Automix Data on Specified Channels........................................................................ 138
Erasing Automix Data on All Channels .................................................................................. 138
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing ...............................................139
Track Editing ........................................................................................................................... 139
Track Erase ................................................................................................................................... 139
Track Cut ...................................................................................................................................... 140
Track Move .................................................................................................................................. 142
Track Copy ................................................................................................................................... 144
Track Insert .................................................................................................................................. 146
Track Exchange............................................................................................................................ 147
Track Time Compression/Expansion ...................................................................................... 148
Track Name.................................................................................................................................. 150
Track Import ................................................................................................................................ 151
11
Table of Contents
Phrase Editing......................................................................................................................... 152
Phrase Delete ............................................................................................................................... 152
Dividing a Phrase (Phrase Divide/Split)................................................................................. 153
Phrase Move................................................................................................................................. 155
Phrase Copy ................................................................................................................................. 157
Phrase Trim In ............................................................................................................................. 159
Phrase Trim Out .......................................................................................................................... 160
Phrase New .................................................................................................................................. 161
Phrase Name ................................................................................................................................ 162
Naming Takes.............................................................................................................................. 162
Deleting a Take ............................................................................................................................ 163
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools........................................................164
Editing Operations.................................................................................................................. 164
Steps for Track Editing .......................................................................................................... 164
Step 1: Set the Edit Points........................................................................................................... 165
Step 2: Perform the Button-Pushes to Complete the Edit ..................................................... 169
Track Editing vs. Phrase Editing........................................................................................... 170
An Editing Note of Caution .................................................................................................... 171
Practical Editing Application ................................................................................................. 171
Chapter 12 Song Editing ....................................................................173
Song Arrange .......................................................................................................................... 173
Song Split ................................................................................................................................ 174
Song Combine ........................................................................................................................ 175
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering.....................................................177
Create Master Data (Mastering)............................................................................................. 177
Mastering Room .......................................................................................................................... 177
Mixing Down to the Mastering Tracks .................................................................................... 177
Mastering Tracks Status Shortcut ............................................................................................. 179
Playing Back the Mastering Tracks .......................................................................................... 180
To Prohibit Digital Copying ...................................................................................................... 181
Mixing Down While Inserting Effects...................................................................................... 181
Creating an Audio CD............................................................................................................. 183
Before Using the CD-RW drive................................................................................................. 184
Items Necessary for Creating an Audio CD............................................................................ 184
Creating a Master Stereo Mix .................................................................................................... 185
Finalizing...................................................................................................................................... 185
Assembling Multiple Songs for CD Recording .................................................................... 186
Copyright Protection .................................................................................................................. 186
CD Track Numbers ..................................................................................................................... 186
Writing Songs to CD-R Discs .................................................................................................... 188
Adding a Song to a Partially Recorded Disc ........................................................................... 190
Arranging and Recording Multiple Songs to a CD-R Disc ................................................... 190
CD Player Function................................................................................................................. 191
Capture Audio data from Audio CD (Capture function) ...................................................... 192
Connecting an external CD-R/CD-RW Drive......................................................................... 194
Chapter 14 Other Useful Functions...................................................195
Vari Pitch ................................................................................................................................. 195
Numerics/ASCII....................................................................................................................... 195
Entering Numbers....................................................................................................................... 195
Entering Letters ........................................................................................................................... 195
Stereo Input............................................................................................................................. 196
Using the MONITOR Knob to Adjust Channel Panning ...................................................... 196
12
Table of Contents
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices ..........................................197
Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers................................................................................... 197
Items Necessary for Synchronization....................................................................................... 197
Master and Slave ......................................................................................................................... 197
Using MTC ................................................................................................................................... 197
Synchronization Using the VS-1824 as the Master................................................................. 198
Synchronization Using the VS-1824 as the Slave.................................................................... 199
Using MTC Offset ....................................................................................................................... 200
Using the Sync Track (Master) .................................................................................................. 200
Recording MIDI Clock Messages.............................................................................................. 201
Synchronized Operation ............................................................................................................ 201
Using the Tempo Map................................................................................................................ 202
Synchronized Operation ............................................................................................................ 203
Other Methods to Generate A Sync Track or Tempo Map ................................................... 204
Using MIDI Controller Messages........................................................................................... 206
Switching Track Status ............................................................................................................... 206
Switching Scenes ......................................................................................................................... 207
Switching Effects ......................................................................................................................... 207
Adjusting Effects ......................................................................................................................... 208
MIDI Machine Control ............................................................................................................. 208
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers...........................................209
Common Terms ...................................................................................................................... 209
MIDI Clock................................................................................................................................... 209
MIDI Time Code (MTC)............................................................................................................. 209
MIDI Machine Control (MMC) ................................................................................................. 209
Song Position Pointer (SPP)....................................................................................................... 209
Synchronization........................................................................................................................... 209
Sequencer Tracks......................................................................................................................... 209
MIDI Interface.............................................................................................................................. 209
Specific Software Applications ............................................................................................. 210
Cakewalk Pro Audio .................................................................................................................. 210
Cubase VST .................................................................................................................................. 211
Logic Audio.................................................................................................................................. 212
Digital Performer ........................................................................................................................ 213
Vision DSP.................................................................................................................................... 214
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives ...........................................................216
General Information Regarding Hard Drives........................................................................ 216
Drive Partitioning ....................................................................................................................... 216
Recording Times vs. Sample Rate/Recording Modes........................................................... 217
Checking Remaining Space ....................................................................................................... 217
Recovering Drive Space......................................................................................................... 218
Song Optimize ............................................................................................................................. 218
Song Erase .................................................................................................................................... 219
Using External Hard Drives ................................................................................................... 220
Selecting an External Hard Drive ............................................................................................. 220
Connecting a Fixed External Hard Drive ................................................................................ 220
Connecting a Removable External Hard Drive ...................................................................... 221
Before Using the Zip Disk Drive............................................................................................... 221
Initializing (Formatting) the Drive ........................................................................................... 222
Saving a Song to an External Drive (Song Copy)................................................................ 223
Song Copy Playable .................................................................................................................... 224
Song Copy Archives ................................................................................................................... 225
Loading a Song from an External Drive ............................................................................... 226
Loading a Song from an External Drive Using Song Copy Playable .................................. 226
Loading a Song from External Disks using Song Archive Extract ...................................... 227
13
Table of Contents
Drive Select ............................................................................................................................. 228
Hard Drive Maintenance......................................................................................................... 229
Drive Initialize ............................................................................................................................. 229
Drive Check.................................................................................................................................. 230
Check Drive Reliability using Surface Scan ............................................................................ 231
Backup Options ...................................................................................................................... 232
DAT Backup................................................................................................................................. 232
External Removable Drive ......................................................................................................... 232
CD-R Backup ............................................................................................................................... 232
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup ...................................................................233
CD-R Backup and Recover .................................................................................................... 233
Before Using the CD-RW drive................................................................................................. 233
Items Necessary for CD-R Backup ........................................................................................... 234
Inserting a CD
.............................................................................. 234
If a disc tray does not open
.............................................................................. 234
CD-R Backup ............................................................................................................................... 235
CD-R Recover .............................................................................................................................. 236
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup) ...........................238
Before Backing Up to DAT..................................................................................................... 238
Items Necessary for DAT Backup............................................................................................. 238
About the Devices Used in DAT Backup ................................................................................ 238
Saving Song Data to DAT (DAT Backup).............................................................................. 239
Recovering Data from a DAT ................................................................................................. 241
DAT Recover................................................................................................................................ 241
Canceling the Recover Operation ............................................................................................. 242
Checking DAT Tape Contents ............................................................................................... 242
DAT Backup Verification........................................................................................................ 243
Chapter 20 Compatibility with Other VS Recorders ........................245
Drive Compatibility ................................................................................................................. 245
VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 → VS-1824 ...................................................... 245
VS-1824 → VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 ...................................................... 245
VS-840/840EX ↔ VS-1824 ......................................................................................................... 245
Song Import............................................................................................................................. 246
Song Export ............................................................................................................................ 247
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings...........................................249
System Settings for Each Song ............................................................................................ 249
Fader Match ................................................................................................................................. 249
Peak Hold ..................................................................................................................................... 250
Remaining Recording Time ....................................................................................................... 250
Foot Switch Settings.................................................................................................................... 251
Global Settings ....................................................................................................................... 251
Shift Lock...................................................................................................................................... 251
Numerics Type ............................................................................................................................ 252
Measure Display.......................................................................................................................... 253
SCSI ID Number.......................................................................................................................... 254
IDE Drive Switch......................................................................................................................... 254
Input Peak Level.......................................................................................................................... 255
Previous/Next Switch ................................................................................................................ 255
Adjusting the Button Sensitivity............................................................................................... 256
Fan Control .................................................................................................................................. 256
Removing a Direct Current Offset from the MIX Bus ........................................................... 257
MIDI Model ID ............................................................................................................................ 257
14
Table of Contents
Play and Record Settings ...................................................................................................... 258
Record Monitor............................................................................................................................ 258
Marker Stop.................................................................................................................................. 258
Fade Length ................................................................................................................................. 259
Scrolling the Waveform Display............................................................................................... 259
Alarm Clock............................................................................................................................. 260
Chapter 22 Specific Applications ......................................................261
Syncing Two VS-1824s or a VS-1824 and a VS-1680 with MTC and MMC......................... 262
Settings for the Master VS.......................................................................................................... 262
Settings for the Slave VS............................................................................................................. 263
Syncing a VS-1824 and VS-880/880EX or VSR-880 ............................................................. 263
Syncing the VS-880 to the VS-1824 Using MTC and MMC .................................................. 263
Using an External MIDI Device to Control the Mixer (Compu Mix) .................................... 265
Correspondence Between MIDI Channels and Controller Numbers.................................. 265
Preparations for Compu Mix..................................................................................................... 266
Recording with Compu Mix...................................................................................................... 267
Synchronizing with Video Equipment .................................................................................. 267
Using External Effects Units.................................................................................................. 268
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions..........................................269
How Do I Control the Stereo Tracks Independently? ........................................................... 269
Why Do I Hear the Inputs All of the Time? ............................................................................ 269
What is the FADER/MUTE Button Used For? ....................................................................... 270
How Do I Burn Audio CDs?...................................................................................................... 270
How Do I Create a Tempo Map? .............................................................................................. 272
How Do I Use Automix?............................................................................................................ 272
How Do I Create a User Template in EZ Routing? ................................................................ 273
How Do I Bounce Tracks?.......................................................................................................... 274
How Do I Bounce Tracks with Effects?.................................................................................... 275
Why Can’t I Hear My Effects?................................................................................................... 275
How Do I Use the Scrub and Waveform Display Features?................................................. 276
How Do I Record a Stereo Signal?............................................................................................ 277
How Do I Restore the Mixer Parameters to the Factory Settings?....................................... 277
How Do I Know How Much Time I Have Left On My Hard Drive, and How Big Is My Song? ..... 277
How Do I Import VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890/VSR-880 and VS-840/840EX Songs?................. 278
Index.....................................................................................................279
15
Preparations
About the Package Contents
The following items are included with the VS-1824. Please
check to make sure you have all the items.
❒ VS-1824
❒ AC cord
❒ Demo disc
❒ Blanc CD-R disc (VS-1824CD only)
❒ User Guide
❒ Owner’s Manual (this manual)
❒ Appendices
❒ Shortcut Seal
*
This shows the list of shortcut commands.
❒ Overlay Sheet
*
If you change setting of buttons and faders of track mixer
to “1880 mode.” It will be convenient to confirm
function assignment with the overlay sheet. As the back
side of this is adhesive, you can stick it to the top panel.
See “Change settings of the Track Mixer Buttons and
Faders (Fader Mode)” (p. 75) for detailed explanation of
change setting.
Main Features
The Latest in Compact Home
Studio Environments
The VS-1824 retains all of the features of Roland's VS-1880
Digital studio workstation, a revolution in the world of the
home studio, with the disk recorder, digital mixer, and multi
effects systematically integrated into a great sounding digital
recorder. From when you start picking mics to when you
actually record; from mixdown, to adding effects, and on to
creating the master data for playing through a PA or
mastering on a CD; you can easily control every aspect of the
recording process with the VS-1824 in your home studio.
Disk Recorder Section
● The digital disk recorder section provides 18 playback
tracks, and allows eight tracks to be recorded
simultaneously. Each track features 16 virtual tracks (VTracks), providing a total of 288 tracks altogether. This
means that you can record multiple takes, make
temporary mixes when editing and create songs that
require numerous tracks, all with room to spare.
● The VS-1824’s recording functions were designed for use
with professional digital equipment—DAT recorders,
digital mixers, digital effects, etc. You can record and edit
with top-quality sound, losing none of that quality in the
playback.
● You can instantly find the location of sections in a song
you want to hear repeatedly (locator), or places that you
wish to record over by placing marks at these points
(marker). These markers are recalled by a simple
procedure, and you will never have to wait for any
rewinding or fast-forwarding.
● Sounds are organized in phrases. Copying, moving, and
inserting these phrase units (using Phrase Edit), as well as
many other editing processes, are possible with the VS1824. For example, you can create “break beats” by
copying a four-measure drum pattern any number of
times, or have the same chorus both at the beginning and
end of a song.
● You to cancel and recover up to 999 previous recording
and editing operations (Undo/Redo).
● The internal clock runs on battery power, so it continues
to function even after the VS-1824’s power is turned off.
This allows you to manage your songs by “time stamp,”
the time and date of recording that is registered in the
song data.
16
Preparations
● You can store all mixer settings, including fader levels,
pan, and effects. Stored settings can be recalled very
simply, a convenient feature when adjusting balances
during mixdown and comparing mixes with effects.
● Changes in settings over time, such as fader levels and
pan, can also be stored (Automix), allowing you to perfect
fade-ins and fade-outs in your mixes.
● You can easily set up the VS-1824 for different situations
such as recording, track bouncing, and mixdown using its
handy EZ Routing feature.
Effects Section
● One effect expansion board, VS8F-2 is pre-installed in the
VS-1824. Up to two of these effect expansion boards can be
installed in the VS-1824. With the VS8F-2 effect installed in
the VS-1824, up to four high-quality stereo effects will be
available for your use.
● The VS8F-2 provides not only basic effects such as reverb
and delay, but also effects ideal for vocals and guitar (such
as guitar amp simulator) and even special effects such as
RSS and Roland’s exclusive COSM™ speaker modeling
that you can use when the VS-1824 is connected to digital
speakers such as Roland’s DS-90A Powered Monitors.
These effects are organized as 34 “algorithms” from which
you can easily create new sounds.
● The VS8F-2 provides 240 read-only effects, or “preset
patches,” that are designed for various uses. In addition,
the VS8F-2 provides 200 read-and-write effects, “user
patches,” that can be customized and re-saved. As a
result, you can instantly switch between a wide variety of
effects simply by selecting a preset or user patch.
Simple Operation
● The VS-1824 can be operated as easily as a conventional
multitrack recorder. You will be able to enjoy all of the
advantages of a home studio from the day of purchase.
● The VS-1824 uses the well-known graphics (“icons”) made
famous by Roland’s VG-8 and V-Drums. The large, fulldot graphic display is backlit and inclined, so it is easy to
read when used on stage, or wherever high visibility is
required.
Connectivity
● A wide variety of connectors and jacks are provided,
including two balanced XLR connectors. The VS-1824
features a wide input sensitivity range—from mic level
(-50 dBu) to line level (+4 dBu)—and phantom power,
allowing you to plug in condenser mics that require
external power.
● There are six sets of balanced input jacks, handling a wide
input sensitivity range, from line level (+4 dBu) to mic
level(-50 dBu). Furthermore, you can choose either the
high-input (GUITAR (Hi-Z)) jack for directly plugging in
an electric guitar, or the INPUT 8 jack.
● Besides the RCA phono type (stereo) MASTER jacks,
(stereo) AUX A and AUX B jacks, and (stereo) MONITOR
jacks are also provided. You can monitor an effect send
and other outputs without affecting the MASTER Out in
any way.
● The VS-1824 provides both coaxial and optical digital I/O
connectors. With these, you can digitally connect the
VS-1824 to popular consumer electronic devices such as
CD players, DAT recorders, MD recorders, and so on.
● A SCSI connector (DB-25 type) is also provided, allowing
you to connect the VS-1824 to external SCSI devices such
as a Zip drive or CD-R drive.
● MIDI IN and MIDI OUT/THRU connectors are also
provided. You can synchronize the VS-1824 with an
external MIDI sequencer, use the MIDI sequencer to
control the VS-1824’s mixer, sound an external MIDI
sound generator with the metronome, and more.
● Besides tracks for recording audio signals, the VS-1824 has
a sync track for storing MIDI clock messages. You can
even synchronize MIDI sequencers that are not
compatible with MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MMC (MIDI
Machine Control).
Major Options
CD-R Drive (approved by Roland):
A CD-R or CD-RW drive connected with a SCSI connector.
Such a device allows you to create songs on the VS-1824 and
burn them onto your own original audio CDs. Additionally,
you can use a CD-R for backing up song data to inexpensive
CD-R discs.
VS8F-2:
One VS8F-2 effect expansion board is pre-installed in the
VS-1824. Up to two of these effect expansion boards can be
installed in the VS-1824 by adding a second, optional VS8F-2
board. With two VS8F-2 effect boards installed in the
VS-1824, up to four high-quality stereo effects will be
available for your use.
You can add one more VS8F-2 which can supply two stereo
effects, so you can use up to a total of four stereo effects.
* The VS8F-1 effect expansion board is for use with the VS-880.
It cannot be used in the VS-1824.
17
Preparations
Digital Mixer Section
Top and Rear Panels
Mixer Section
fig.00-03
7 8
1
2
9
3
10
4
11
5
12
6
13
1. PEAK Indicators
3. SELECT/CH EDIT
Use these indicators to confirm the correct recording level as
set with the INPUT knobs. The indicators are set at the
factory to illuminate when the input audio reaches 0 dB. You
can change the peak level indicator setting so the indicators
illuminate when audio reaches -3 or -6 dB. (p. 255)
Use these buttons to change Input Mixer settings for the
analog inputs, digital inputs, stereo inputs, and effect
returns. The currently selected channel’s indicators will light.
2. INPUT Knobs
These knobs adjust the sensitivity of the INPUT jacks 1
through 8. Turn the knob fully clockwise for mic level (-50
dBu), or fully counter-clockwise for line level (+4 dBu).
(Select/Channel Edit) buttons
1–8:
Each input channel (1–8)
DIGITAL:
Digital input
ST IN:
Stereo in
EFFECT 1/3 RTN:
Effect 1/3 Return
EFFECT 2/4 RTN:
Effect 2/4 Return
You can assign an input to be recorded to a track by holding
down the track’s STATUS button, then pressing the desired
SELECT button for the input or source you wish to record.
Use these buttons to input alphabetical characters for Song
Names, etc., when the [NUMERIC/ASCII] is lit.
18
Top and Rear Panels
4. SELECT/CH EDIT
(Select/Channel Edit) buttons
7. MONITOR Knob
This adjusts the volume level output from the MONITOR
jacks.
1–18: Each track channel (1–18)
8. PHONES Knob
* If you want to display track channel 13-18, hold [SHIFT]
down and press the SELECT buttons for track channels
(13-18).
You can alter the correspondence between the panel's
buttons/faders and the Track Mixer channels. For detailed
information, refer to “Change settings of the Track Mixer
Buttons and Faders (Fader Mode)” (p. 75).
When you press these buttons while holding down the
STATUS button, you can select any desired bouncing
destination track.
Use these buttons to input alphabetical characters for Song
Names, etc., when the [NUMERIC/ASCII] is lit.
5. STATUS Buttons
These buttons switch the status of each track (p. 42). The
current status is shown by the button indicator.
SOURCE (orange):
The input source or track assigned to the channel is being
output.
REC (blinking red):
Front & Rear
Panels
Use these buttons when you wish to change Track Mixer
settings and to change track channels. The currently selected
channel’s indicators are lit.
This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones.
9. AUTOMIX Button
This button switches the Automix function on and off. The
button indicator lights when Automix is on.
10. EZ ROUTING Button
This button invokes the EZ Routing screen.
11. EDIT/SOLO Button
Press this button to make block settings for the master
section of the mixer.
To use the Solo function to monitor only a specific channel,
press this button while holding down the SELECT/CH EDIT
button.
12. FADER/MUTE Button
Each press of this button alternately assigns use of the
channel faders to the Input Mixer or to the Track Mixer. The
button indicator shows the faders’ current status. (p. 75)
To mute the channel, press this button while holding down
the SELECT/CH EDIT button.
The track is ready to be recorded. When blinking red,
previously recorded material on the track will be heard.
13. Master Fader
REC (blinking red and orange):
Use this fader to adjust the overall output level.
The track is ready to be recorded and the source will be
heard. This occurs when the VS-1824 is in Record Ready and
you press [PLAY], then press the blinking red status button.
PLAY (green):
The track assigned to the channel will play back.
OFF (off):
The channel is muted (silent).
When pressed in combination with the SELECT/CH EDIT
button, this selects the source or track to be assigned to a
track for recording.
6. Channel Faders
Use these faders to adjust the volume level of each channel or
track.
19
Top and Rear Panels
Recorder Section
fig.00-04
7
1
9
2
8
10
11
12
3
4
13
14–17
18
5
19
6
1. Graphic Display
4. PREVIEW Button
This displays shows various data related to the current status
of the VS-1824 during recording, playback, editing, changing
its settings, and so on.
Press this button to use the Preview function that plays back
a specific amount of time before and after the current
location.
2. FUNCTION Button
5. LOCATOR/SCENE Button
These buttons switch the display screen and execute
operations.
Pressing this button allows you to store or recall locators and
markers or to store or recall Scenes (mixer settings).
The function currently assigned to each button appears at the
bottom of the display.
PREVIOUS:
3. PAGE (JUMP) Button
Recalls the most recent start or end point of a phrase. Pressed
with [SHIFT], this button recalls the previous marker.
This button switches pages for screens that consist of several
pages.
When [SHIFT] is held down together with this button, the
Locator Jump screen is displayed.
NEXT:
Recalls the next start or end point of a phrase. Pressed with
[SHIFT], this button recalls the next marker.
TAP:
Press this button to set markers.
20
Top and Rear Panels
11. CURSOR Buttons
Pressing this with the LOCATOR buttons (1–8) selects the
locator bank.
Normally (i.e. in Play mode), these buttons are used to select
the time resolution for changing location using the
TIME/VALUE dial. When making settings (i.e. in Edit
mode), use these buttons to select parameters.
SCENE/0:
This is pressed when storing, recalling, and deleting Scenes.
CLEAR (Back Space):
This button deletes locators, markers, and Scenes.
NUMERICS/ASCII:
Press this when you want to use the STATUS and LOCATOR
buttons for entry of alphabetical characters or numbers.
1–8:
These select a locator or Scene.
6. Transport Control Buttons
These buttons operate the recorder.
ZERO:
This returns the current time to “00h00m00s00”
(zero return).
REW:
The current time is moved back only while this
button is held down. This corresponds to the
rewind button on a tape recorder.
FF:
While the button is held down, the current time is
moved forward. This corresponds to the fastforward button on a tape recorder.
STOP:
Stops recording or playback of the song.
PLAY:
Starts recording or playback from the current
time.
REC:
Press this button to record a song.
7. CONTRAST Knob
12. PLAY (DISPLAY) Button
Press this button to return to the screen that appears when
the VS-1824 is first turned on (normal playback status).
13. TIME/VALUE Dial
In normal (playback) mode, this dial adjusts the current time
for playback. When making settings (i.e. when editing), use
this dial to change parameter values.
14. LOOP Button
This button turns Loop Recording on and off. Pressed
together with first 1 and then another Locator button, it
specifies the range to be recorded in Loop Recording.
15. AUTO PUNCH Button
This button turns Auto Punch-In Recording on and off.
Pressed together with first 1 and then another Locator
button, it specifies the range to be recorded in Auto Punch-In
Recording.
16. UNDO (REDO) Button
Press this button to cancel a recording or editing step that
you have made (Undo function). Pressed with [SHIFT], this
button cancels the last Undo operation (Redo function).
Use this to adjust the brightness of the display screen.
8. CD-RW/MASTERING Button
Press this button to master a song, or to write it on a CD. It
also accesses CD backup and restore functions.
9. MIDI/DISK Indicator
This indicator lights green when MIDI messages are being
received, and red when data is being written or read on the
disk drive. If both occur, the indicator lights orange.
10. EXT SYNC (External Sync) Button
17. SHIFT Button
This button is pressed in conjunction with other buttons to
access additional functions of those buttons.
18. ENTER/YES Button
This is pressed to execute the current operation or select the
current screen.
19. EXIT/NO Button
This is pressed to cancel the current operation or exit the
current screen.
Press this button to designate the VS-1824 or an external
MIDI device as the master, or main, controlling
synchronization device. With the VS-1824 selected as the
master, the external MIDI device functions as the slave unit;
with the external MIDI device is selected as the master, the
VS-1824 functions as the slave unit.
21
Front & Rear
Panels
BANK/9:
Top and Rear Panels
Rear Panel
fig.00-05
14
1
2
3 4
5
7 9 11
6 8 10
15
12
16
13
1. POWER Switch
6. PHONES Jack
This switch turns the VS-1824’s power on and off. See Chapter
2.
Connect your headphones (not supplied) here. The PHONES
jack outputs the same signal as the MONITOR jack, and is
affected by the monitor level and both the MONITOR level
and the PHONES level knobs.
2. AC IN (AC Inlet)
Connect the included power cable here.
3. Cooling Fan Exhaust
The VS-1824 is equipped with a cooling fan, which prevents
overheating of the VS-1824's electronics. Heat from inside is
expelled here.
Do not place any object in a position where it would block
the cooling fan's exhaust or hinder the movement of air. This
will defeat the normal cooling action of the fan.
4. SCSI Connector
This is a DB-25 type SCSI connector for connecting SCSI
devices, such as an external hard disk, removable media, or a
CD-R.
5. MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/THRU)
Connect external MIDI devices (MIDI sequencers, MIDI
controllers, etc.) here.
7. MONITOR Jacks (L, R)
RCA-phono-type analog audio output jacks. With the factory
settings, all signals output from the MASTER OUT jacks also
output from the MONITOR jacks. This is determined by the
block settings of the mixer’s master section and the settings
of each channel.
8. AUX B Jacks (L, R)
9. AUX A Jacks (L, R)
RCA-phono-type analog audio output jacks. With the factory
settings, there is no output from either the AUX A or the
AUX B jacks. The output is determined by the block settings
of the mixer’s master section and the settings of each channel.
10. MASTER OUT Jacks (L, R)
RCA-phono-type analog audio output jacks. With the factory
settings, all signals are output from the MASTER OUT jacks.
The output is determined by the block settings of the mixer’s
master section and the settings of each channel.
IN: This connector receives MIDI messages. Connect it to the
MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI device.
11. FOOT SWITCH Jack
OUT/THRU: This connector can be used either as a MIDI
OUT or as a MIDI THRU jack. With the factory settings, it
will function as a MIDI OUT connector, which means it is set
to transmit MIDI messages generated by the VS-1824.
An optional foot switch (such as the DP-2 or the BOSS FS-5U)
can be connected here when you want to control recorder
operations, mark point settings, and punch in/out
operations, etc. with a foot switch. With the factory settings, a
foot switch is set to start and stop the recorder.
22
Top and Rear Panels
15. 1/4” INPUT Jacks (3-8)
The VS-1824 accepts both coaxial and optical digital I/O
connectors (conforming to S/P DIF).
Inputs 3 through 8 may be used as 1/4” phone-type TRS (Tip
Ring Sleeve) balanced connections, or as 1/4” phone-type
unbalanced connections, depending on the jack and cable
used. Use INPUT knobs 3-8 to adjust the input sensitivity of
these inputs.
IN:
This accepts a stereo digital audio signal. You can
select either the coaxial input connection or the
optical connection.
OUT:
This outputs a stereo digital audio signal. You can
use both the coaxial connector and the optical
connector simultaneously, and each can carry a
different signal.
S/P DIF (Appendices p. 13)
* Before recording a digital audio signal, certain system settings
must be made. To input a digital signal, refer to “Recording a
Digital Source,” p. 66
16. XLR Balanced Inputs
Inputs 1 and 2 are XLR balanced connections. Use INPUT
knobs 1 and 2 to adjust the input sensitivity of these inputs.
Front Panel
1
23
* The digital connectors cannot input or output analog audio
signals.
13. PHANTOM Switch
This turns phantom power (+48 V) on and off. With the
factory settings, this is set to “Off.”
Phantom Power (Appendices p. 13)
* Supplying phantom power to dynamic microphones or audio
playback devices may result in damage to your equipment.
Thoroughly read the owner’s manual of your microphone, and
make sure that the phantom power switch is set to “Off”
unless you are using a condenser mic that requires phantom
power.
* Switching the phantom power on or off while the VS-1824 is
turned on produces a loud noise that can damage amps and
speakers. Turn the phantom power on or off only when the
VS-1824 is turned off.
* When nothing is plugged into the INPUT 1–2 jacks, make
sure that the phantom power switch is set to “Off.” Also, we
recommend that the INPUT knob be turned fully to “LINE” to
capture as high a sound quality as possible.
14. GUITAR (Hi-Z) Jack (Guitar)
This 1/4” phone-type high-impedance jack is designed to
work best with a guitar, for less interference and a louder,
cleaner signal. It can be used instead of—but not at the same
time as—the regular INPUT 8 jack. If cables are connected to
both the GUITAR input and the regular INPUT 8 jack, the
GUITAR jack will take priority. Use the INPUT 8 knob to
adjust the input sensitivity of this input.
4
1. Disc Tray
Place the CD to be loaded on this tray.
2. Access Indicator
This indicator will light when the inserted CD is being read
or when data is being written to the CD.
3. Eject Button
This button opens or closes the CD disc tray.
4. Emergency eject hole
This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of an
emergency. See “If a disc tray does not open,” p. 234.
It is strictly restricted to eject tray using emergency eject
hall during VS-1824 is operating. This is cause error of
software.
23
Front & Rear
Panels
12. DIGITAL Connectors (IN, OUT)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
This chapter explains the basic concepts, internal structure,
and basic procedures that you will need to know in order to
operate the VS-1824. Please read this chapter thoroughly to
gain a better understanding of the VS-1824.
Saving and Managing Data
The VS-1824 saves all of the data, such as performance data,
mixing data, system data, etc., on a hard disk drive.
The internal hard disk is not removable.
Managing Disk Contents
(Partitioning)
The internal hard drive has 5 partitions. The size of each
partition is 2000 MB. If you would like to change partition
size, please refer to drive initializing on p. 229.
The VS-1824 is able to manage 500 MB, 1000 MB or 2000 MB
of disk space at once. If you use a disk drive with a capacity
that is greater than this, you will need to divide it into two or
more areas.
Each of these area is referred as a “partition.” Up to eight
partitions can be created in a single disk drive.
Ex. 1:
When the disk drive is 10 GB, and the
partition size is 2000 MB.
fig.01-05
Disk Drive
(10GB)
24
When the disk drive is 10 GB, and the
partition size is 1000 MB.
fig.01-04
Disk Drive
(10GB)
Partition 0
(1000MB)
Partition 1
(1000MB)
Partition 2
(1000MB)
Partition 3
(1000MB)
Partition 4
(1000MB)
Partition 5
(1000MB)
Partition 6
(1000MB)
Partition 7
(1000MB)
unusable
(2000MB)
Each partition on the VS-1824’s disk drive is treated as an
independent drive, and automatically given a partition
number (0–7). When a single hard disk has multiple
partitions, you can specify which partition drive will be used
(“Drive Select,” p. 228). This selected disk drive partition
used is referred to as the “current drive.”
* If you wish to use hard disks or song data with both the VS1824 and the VS-880/1680/880EX/890/VSR-880, there will
be limitations as to what you can do due to factors such as
differing partition sizes and numbers of tracks. For more
detailed information, please see “Drive Compatibility,” p. 245.
VS-1880's song data is identical to that of the VS-1824.
Partition 0
(2000MB)
Partition 1
(2000MB)
Partition 2
(2000MB)
Partition 3
(2000MB)
Partition 4
(2000MB)
Ex. 2:
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
The Location Where a
Performance is Recorded (Song)
On the VS-1824, data is managed in groups called “takes,”
and “phrases.” Please take a moment to make sure you
understand the differences between these terms.
Takes:
The data recorded to the disk is simply called a
“take”—a take is actually your audio data
recorded on the hard disk, along with time stamp
(time and date imprint) information. Each
recording is a take. Note that when you record
material onto a track that already contains a take,
the VS-1824 does not discard the earlier take.
• All data recorded on V-Tracks
• MIDI clocks of the sync track
• Points specified within songs—locator, marker, punchin/out points, loop-in/out points
• Scenes (mixer settings)
• Vari Pitch settings (p. 195)
• System settings—system, MIDI, disk, sync, Scene
• Effect settings
• Automix data
Phrases: A “phrase” is a set of pointers that tells the
VS-1824 what portion of a take is to be played by a
track. The length of a phrase may just be the entire
length of a take, or may consist of only part of a
take. Also, you can use any number of phrases
from the same take, and have a phrase played
back repeatedly as a sort of “break beat.” This is
displayed as one box in the playlist.
fig.01-06
Sources, Tracks, and Channels
On the VS-1824, the recorder section and mixer section use
the term “sources,” “tracks” and “channels.” These terms
may appear similar to each other, and can be confusing
unless their differences are clearly understood.
Source:
Track:
A signal which is input to the mixer section or
recorded in the recorder section. On the VS-1824,
this term refers in particular to the signals of the
analog INPUT jacks (1-8) and the DIGITAL IN
connector.
fig.01-07
A signal that is being input to or output from the
recorder section. It also refers to the location to
which a signal is being recorded or played back
from the hard disk.
Channel: A signal that is being input to or output from the
mixer section. This term refers in particular to the
faders and buttons of the mixer section on the top
panel.
fig.01-08
25
Chapter 1
The location where performance data is recorded is referred
to as a “song.” For example, on a cassette MTR, this would
correspond to a cassette tape. Up to 200 songs can be created
in each partition. Normally, you should set the partition size
at 2000 MB. When dealing with large numbers of songs at the
same time, or when you want to use the data on the VS-880
as well, setting the partition size to 1000 MB is
recommended. The song currently being recorded, played
back, or edited is referred to as the “current song.” The
following types of data are included in a song.
Takes and Phrases
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
About Events
About Button Names
The smallest unit of memory used by the VS-1824 to store
recorded information on disk is called an “event.” A newly
created song is provided approximately 18,000 events.
There are two groups of buttons referred to as SELECT/CH
EDIT (Select/Channel Edit) buttons.
For each track, one recording pass uses two events.
Operations such as punch-in/out or track copy also use up
events. The number of events that are used up will change
depending on what you are doing. For example, Automix
(p. 124) uses up six events for each marker.
Even when your disk has ample free space, one song can use
up all the available events, in which case no more data can be
recorded to the song.
The remaining number of Events can be saved with the
following procedures. Please use the most appropriate
procedure for your situation.
Execute Song Store (p. 33)
Use Execute Song Store if the UNDO indicator is lit. Events
served for Redo will be released. But please note that you
cannot cancel, or redo, the last Undo you once execute this
operation.
Execute Song Optimize (p. 218)
Execute Song Optimize if you have done a lot of punch-in
recording. Events used for now-unnecessary audio data will
be released. But please note that you lose all but one level of
Undo after you Optimize.
Erase AutoMix data (p. 138)
If you have recorded AutoMix data, erase unnecessary data.
Events used for unnecessary AutoMix data will be released.
26
fig.01-08a
Input Channel
Track Channel
Track
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
Mixer Section
The digital mixer specifies input or output status of the
recorder section.
* For more detailed information about the mixer section, please
refer to the “Mixer Section Block Diagram”
(Appendices p. 128).
Signal Flow (Busses)
On the VS-1824, signals flow through busses. Busses are
shared pathways through which multiple signals can be sent
to various tracks or channels. It may be easier to understand
this if we use the analogy of water pipes.
For example, the water that is supplied by the water
company to your house is branched to a variety of locations
within the house (kitchen, bathroom, etc.). The water that is
used at each of these locations is then collected and carried
away.
fig.01-09
Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus are routed to the
recorder section to be recorded. The RECORDING bus has
eight channels to which you can assign any output of the
Input Mixer, Track Mixer, and effects (effect return). Signals
assigned to the RECORDING bus cannot be routed to the
MIX bus.
MIX Bus:
Signals assigned to the MIX bus are sent to the MASTER
jacks for monitoring. It has two channels (L and R), and can
take output signals from the Input Mixer, Track Mixer, and
effects (effect return). Signals assigned to the MIX bus cannot
be routed to the RECORDING bus.
EFFECT Bus:
Signals assigned to the EFFECT bus are sent to the VS8F-2 in
order to add effects to them. The EFFECT bus has four
channels—FX1 L/R, FX2 L/R—and can process signals from
the Input Mixer and the Track Mixer. Signals assigned to the
RECORDING bus, as well as the MIX bus, can also be routed
to the EFFECT bus.
AUX Bus:
Signals assigned to the AUX bus are routed to the AUX jacks
to provide addition mixes for monitoring. This bus features
six channels (AUX1 L/R, AUX2 L/R, AUX3 L/R), and can
take signals from the Input Mixer and the Track Mixer.
Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus as well as the MIX
bus can also be routed to the AUX bus. This is convenient if,
for example, you want to connect an external effects device,
or when you want an additional output separate from that of
the MASTER Out jacks (an individual out).
If we think of the VS-1824 as the house, the water being
supplied from the water company corresponds to inputs
such as mic or guitar. Some of these inputs are sent to
recording tracks and are recorded. Other portions are sent to
the effects, and reverb or chorus are applied before they are
output.
EFFECT bus and AUX bus
If the VS-1824 contains two VS8F-2s, AUX bus (AUX1 L/
R, AUX2 L/R) serves as EFFECT bus (FX3 L/R, FX4 L/R).
The basic principle of the VS-1824 is that by specifying from
where—and to where—the common lines run, you can
determine which signals will be recorded on which track or
sent to which effects, and to where they will be output.
27
Chapter 1
The VS-1824’s mixers include the Input Mixer—which, in the
signal path, is situated before the recording section—the
Track Mixer, placed after the recording section, and the
Master Block, which is used for determining which jacks and
connectors output the signals from each of the other mixers.
RECORDING Bus:
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
Input Mixer
Track Mixer
The Input Mixer is placed before the recorder section, and
corresponds to the input jacks: INPUT 1–8, DIGITAL IN L/R.
The Track Mixer is placed after the recorder section, and
corresponds to Tracks (1–18).
fig.01-10
fig.01-11
Recorder
The output of each input channel is assigned to the track on
which it is to be recorded. Channels not assigned to tracks
are output directly from the MASTER jacks. Also, signals
assigned to tracks when the tracks are not in Record Standby
(STATUS indicator blinking red) are also output from the
MASTER jacks. At this time, the following signals are
assigned to the channel faders.
Channels 1–8:
INPUT jacks 1–8
DIGITAL:
DIGITAL IN connector L/R
ST IN:
Sources assigned to STEREO IN (p. 196)
EFFECT 1/3 RTN: FX1 return level or FX3 return level
EFFECT 2/4 RTN: FX2 return level or FX4 return level
Track Mixer (Track channel 1–18)
REC 1
Track1
EQ1
Fader1
Pan1
REC 2
Track2
EQ2
Fader2
Pan2
REC 3
Track3
EQ3
Fader3
Pan3
REC 1 (Recorder)
REC 4
Track4
EQ4
Fader4
Pan4
REC 2 (Recorder)
REC 5
Track5
EQ5
Fader5
Pan5
REC 3 (Recorder)
REC 6
Track6
EQ6
Fader6
Pan6
REC 4 (Recorder)
REC 7
Track7
EQ7
Fader7
Pan7
REC 5 (Recorder)
REC 8
Track8
EQ8
Fader8
Pan8
REC 6 (Recorder)
Track9
EQ9
Fader9
Pan9
REC 7 (Recorder)
Track10
EQ10
Fader10
Pan10
REC 8 (Recorder)
Track11
EQ11
Fader11
Pan11
Track12
EQ12
Fader12
Pan12
Track13
EQ13
Fader13
Pan13
Track14
EQ14
Fader14
Pan14
Track15
EQ15
Fader15
Pan15
Track16
EQ16
Fader16
Pan16
Track17
EQ17
Fader17
Pan17
Track18
EQ18
Fader18
Pan18
MIX L/R (MASTER)
All of the tracks are output from the MASTER jacks.
Additionally, tracks can also be routed back to the
RECORDING bus for overdubbing, or re-rerecording. The
channel faders 1–18 correspond respectively to Tracks 1–18.
Switching the Fader Functions
On the VS-1824, it is possible to adjust Input Mixer or Track
Mixer settings by switching the function of the channel
faders on the top panel.
Pressing [FADER/MUTE] on the top panel toggles the
function of the channel faders between controlling the Input
Mixer and the Track Mixer.
For more detailed information, please see “FADER/MUTE
Button,” p. 71.
fig.01-12
28
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
Master Block
Recorder Section
This selects the jacks or connectors—which are connected to
external equipment—to which the output of each mixer is
sent.
Differences from a Tape-Type MTR
fig.01-13
The ability to freely move to data regardless of the time or
sequence at which it was recorded is known as “random
access.” By contrast, having to move to data in the order of
the time or sequence at which it was recorded is known as
“sequential access.”
fig.01-14
● random access
● sequential access
29
Chapter 1
Unlike DAT recorders, which use tape, digital disk recorders
record performances (that is, sounds) on a disk, as do MD
recorders. Music that is recorded on disk can be recalled and
played back immediately, no matter where it is located on
the disk. This is obvious from the difference in speed with
which you can move to the beginning of a song on the VS1824 as opposed to a DAT recorder.
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
Track Minutes and Recording Time
With cassette tape recorders, the amount of time you can
record on a tape is predetermined by the length of that tape.
Moreover, any unused portion of the tape is wasted.
fig.01-15
For example, 10 track minutes can be used for 10 minutes of
monaural recording—this corresponds to the term’s basic
definition— or for five minutes of stereo recording since it
uses two tracks, or two minutes and 30 seconds of recording
on four tracks, and so on.
fig.01-17
By contrast, with disk recording, although the available
recording time is determined by the amount of disk space,
only the disk space used for recording is spent. Thus,
depending on the number of concurrent tracks and phrases
you record, the amount of available recording time will vary.
Therefore, it is a good idea to have a standard unit of
measurement that corresponds to the time of one continuous
monaural signal being recorded on one track. This unit is
referred to as a “track minute.”
fig.01-16
Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track
The VS-1824 provides 18 playback tracks. Each track contains
16 of its own supplementary tracks that can be used for
recording or playback. In other words, you can record
performances containing up to 288 (18 tracks x 16) tracks. On
each of the 18 tracks, any one—and only one—of its
supplemental tracks can be playing back at any given
moment. These auxiliary tracks are called “V-Tracks.”
fig.01-18
Track
2
4
6
8
V.Track
10
12
14
16
1
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
* The Appendices (p. 130) provides a blank virtual track sheet to
help you keep track of your virtual track recordings. Feel free
to copy the sheet to use when you record.
30
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1824 Terminology)
Effects Section
Loop:
About the Effect Expansion Board
Besides the RECORDING bus and the MIX bus, the output of
each channel can also be sent to the EFFECT bus. Use this
routing with effects such as reverb and delay, when you
want to mix the original un-effected, or “dry,” sound with
the sound after effects have been applied.
With just a single VS8F-2 installed, you will be able to use
EFFECT A (FX1/2). With two VS8F-2s installed, you will be
able to use both EFFECT A (FX1/2) and EFFECT B (FX3/4).
fig.01-21
EQ
Fader
Pan
FX Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX1
FX bus
* The VS8F-1 effect expansion board is for use with the VS-880.
It cannot be used in the VS-1824.
fig.01-19
* To install a VS8F-2, please refer to “Installing the Effect
Expansion Board” (User Guide p. 6, 9).
Connecting Effects
On the VS-1824, there are two ways to connect the effects
devices. Please read and understand these differences
described below.
Insert:
The channel’s signal is re-directed into and out of the effect
between the channel’s equalizer and fader, or before the
Master fader. Connect an effect in this manner if you want it
to change the characteristics of the sound itself, such as when
using distortion or overdrive effects or dynamics processing
such as compression or vocal multi-effects.
When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the
Master Block, the effect cannot be used in another channel.
For example, if you insert FX1 into Channel 1, then no other
channel can access FX1.
fig.01-20
EQ
Fader
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX1
31
Chapter 1
One VS8F-2 effect expansion board is pre-installed in the
VS-1824. Up to two of these effect expansion boards can be
installed in the VS-1824. With and additional VS8F-2 effect
installed in the VS-1824, up to four high-quality stereo effects
will be available for your use.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that
depict what the display typically shows. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the
system software, so what you actually see in the display may
not always match what appears in the manual.
Turning the Power On and Off
Turning On the Power
Turning Off the Power
The contents of any recorded song will be lost if you simply
turn the power off. This may also result in damage to the
hard drive. To safely turn off the power and be sure your
recorded performances are saved, always follow the
shutdown procedure when you finish working with the
VS-1824.
Shutdown (See Appendices p. 13)
* Once the connections have been completed (User Guide p. 12),
turn on the power to your various devices in the order
specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other
devices.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [STOP (SHUT/EJECT)].
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before
switching on the power. Even with the volume all the way
down, you may still hear some sound when the power is
switched on, but this is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction.
3. If you wish to save the current song, press
[ENTER/YES]. If you do not want to save it, or If you do
not want to save it, or if you don't want to save any
changes to the song since the last time you turned on the
VS-1824 or executed a Save procedure, press [EXIT/NO].
1. Turn on the power with the POWER switch on the rear
panel of the VS-1824.
* When you turn on the power of the VS-1824, the drive must
be recognized and certain required data must be loaded. Thus,
it takes a moment for the unit to finish booting up.
When the VS-1824 starts up properly, the following
display will appear.
fig.02-01
2. Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
3. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate
levels.
32
“SHUTDOWN/EJECT?” appears in the display.
2. Press [ENTER/YES].
“STORE Current?” appears in the display.
4. When shutdown has been completed properly,
“PowerOFF/RESTART” appears in the display.
5. Turn down the volume of your audio equipment.
6. Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
7. Turn off the power of the VS-1824 with the POWER
switch on the rear panel.
* After the power is turned off, the momentum of the hard drive
may cause it to continue spinning for a short while. Any
physical shock to the unit during this time may damage the
hard drive. Avoid moving the VS-1824 with a hard drive
installed for at least 30 seconds after turning off the power.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Restarting
You can restart the VS-1824 without turning off the rear
panel POWER switch. This is convenient for switching disks
when working off of a removable drive (such as a Zip drive)
connected to the VS-1824’s SCSI port.
1. Perform the Shutdown procedure as described in
“Turning Off the Power,” p. 32.
2. Make sure “PowerOFF/RESTART” appears in the
display.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (RESTART)].
Use the Shutdown procedure before turning the power off. If
you just turn the power off without using Shutdown, song
data could be lost and you could possibly damage your hard
drive. When you switch songs or change drives, a message
will ask to confirm whether the currently selected song
should be saved. Also, the contents of a recorded song can be
lost due to unforeseen accidents such as a power failure or
power outage. Once lost, the contents of a recorded song
cannot be restored to its previous condition. To prevent this
from happening, use the following procedure to save your
songs on the drive.
If “STORE Current ?” is Displayed
When you begin various operations, such as selecting a
different song or shutting down, the message “STORE
Current ?” may be displayed. This message asks whether
you wish to save the currently selected song, or any edits or
changes recently made to the current song, to the drive.
If you wish to save the song, press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to proceed with the shutdown without saving
the song, press [EXIT/NO].
If you press [ENTER/YES] in response to the “STORE
Current?” message when Song Protect is on, the message
“Song Protected” is displayed, and you will be unable to
save any changes or edits you made to the song. Before
editing a song, turn Song Protect off (p. 48). Otherwise, press
[EXIT/NO].
Current Song (See Appendices p. 12)
* When handling important song data, or when using the
VS-1824 for extended periods, we strongly recommend you
use the Song Store procedure frequently.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [ZERO/(STORE)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
2. Press [ENTER/YES].
If the song is saved properly, the Playlist display
reappears.
If you wish to cancel the STORE command, press
[EXIT/NO].
33
Chapter 2
This restarts the VS-1824.
Saving Your Song
(Song Store)
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting the Internal Clock
Time Edit
This sets the current time, displayed in a 24-hour format.
The VS-1824 features an internal clock. When you record a
performance, a time stamp consisting of the time, day, and
month of recording is entered automatically. This allows you
to organize recordings by day, time, and order. Use the
following procedure to set the time and date in your VS-1824.
* The internal clock is battery-powered. Once you set this, the
values are remembered each time you turn the VS-1824 off.
However, if for any reason the time setting is in error, use the
same steps to reset the clock.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears.
If the System menu icon does not appear, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (DATE)].
If “DATE” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “DATE” appears above [F2], then press [F2 (DATE)].
The System Date/Time screen appears.
fig.02-01a
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME / VALUE dial to change the
values for each setting.
Date Edit
This sets the date—year, month, and day —in the Western
time format.
Date Format
This selects the way the date is displayed.
mm/dd/yyyy: Month/Day/Year
dd/mm/yyyy: Day/Month/Year
yyyy/mm/dd: Year/Month/Day
MMM.dd’YY: Month/Day/Year
dd MMM ‘YY: Day/Month/Year
34
[F4 (Set)]:
Sets the date and time.
[F5 (Alarm)]: Sets the alarm function (p. 260).
(F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen without setting the date
and time.
4. After changing the date and time values, press [F4 (Set)]
to confirm.
The set time becomes effective immediately.
5. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Operating the VS-1824
The VS-1824 features a wide variety of features and settings.
They are organized by type, function, operation, etc. Similar
functions and operations are grouped together and are
referred to as a “mode.” A list of the different modes is
described as follows:
Play mode:
The default mode for recording and playback. The VS-1824
defaults to the Play mode whenever the power is turned on.
Basic Navigation
Adjusting the display Contrast
The text or icon display in the VS-1824’s operation display
(LCD) may be difficult to read immediately after the unit is
turned on or after it has been used for long periods, or
depending on the environment in which the unit is used. If
this occurs, rotate the CONTRAST knob to adjust the display
contrast.
Input Mixer mode:
Chapter 2
Used to make all Input Mixer settings and adjustments.
Track Mixer mode:
Used to make all Track Mixer settings and adjustments.
Master Block mode:
Used to make settings for the mixer’s Master section.
Song mode:
Used to make settings related to song maintenance and
organization.
Track mode:
Used to make all track and phrase edits such as Cut, Erase,
Copy, etc.
Effect mode:
Used to make changes and edits to the optional internal
Effects.
CD-RW mode:
Used for mastering songs and for writing data to CD. In
addition, use this mode to perform backups to CD, and to
restore data.
System mode:
Used to make overall system settings. These settings will
affect the entire operational environment.
If You Have Trouble Understanding
Displays or Operations
If you are unfamiliar with what is displayed on a screen, or
you find you are having difficulty understanding a certain
procedure, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. This allows you to
return immediately to the screen that appears when the
power is turned on. Then you can try whatever procedure
you were working on from the beginning once more.
• If you perform an operation incorrectly or it cannot be
executed correctly, an error message may appear in the
display. When this occurs, refer to “Error Messages”
(Appendices p. 9), and perform the required action.
• If, even after you perform an operation using the
prescribed procedure, the result differs from that stated
in the User Guide or Owner’s Manual, refer to
“Troubleshooting” (Appendices p. 5).
If the above steps do not resolve your problem, contact a
nearby Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor.
Utility mode:
Used for other miscellaneous operations, including those
relating to the internal hard drive, as well as external SCSI
devices.
Here is a general explanation of some of the buttons used
while operating and changing settings in the VS-1824.
35
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Function Buttons
The SELECT buttons
The function buttons are used for switching the display
screen, executing an operation, changing settings, etc. For
example, [F4 (Exec)] is used to proceed with (or execute) an
edit or command. The function assigned to a function button
is displayed directly above it in the LCD. White characters on
a black background denote screen-switching functions, and
black characters on a white background are used for
changing settings and executing operations.
The PAGE (Jump) button
Some screens have more than six functions, and these
multiple functions are presented on a number of pages.
These screens will show page boxes and page marks. The
number of
/
indicates the total number of pages, with
the currently selected page indicated by
. To switch the
display screen to the next group of functions, press [PAGE].
fig.02-01b
Page Boxes
Press the SELECT buttons for either an input, a track, or an
effect return to view its mixer settings. For example, press
Track 3 SELECT to see all mixer settings for Track 3. Once in
this screen, use one of two methods to move around: you can
use the CURSOR buttons located above the TIME/VALUE
dial or you can use the FUNCTION buttons.
The CURSOR buttons
The cursor is used to select a parameter on the screen. On the
VS-1824, the cursor is indicated by a highlighted parameter.
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to
the setting you want to change. For example, press Track 8
SELECT. Press [
Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effects One
switch. You may also use the FUNCTION buttons to
instantly jump to a setting. The label for each of the
FUNCTION buttons appears along the bottom of the display.
Press [F1 (PAN)] to move the cursor instantly to the MIX
setting. Press [F5 (V.Trk)] to move the cursor directly to the
V-Track section.
fig.02-05
Cursor
Page Marks
The SHIFT button
Press and hold [SHIFT] whenever you want to use a
command indicated on the VS-1824 by a white outlined box
with white lettering. For example, to locate to the end of your
song using SONG END hold [SHIFT] and press
[SONG END] simultaneously.
You can immediately enter some of the VS-1824’s operating
modes by holding SHIFT and pressing the desired function
button, such as [SHIFT] and [F2] to enter the Track mode.
fig.02-01c
Track Condition
Song Condition
System Condition
Effect Condition
Utility Condition
Most [SHIFT] commands are labeled on the VS-1824 front
panel.
36
] to move the cursor to the MIX setting.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Mixer and System Initialize
The TIME / VALUE dial
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change a value on the display.
Turning the TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise decreases
a value; turning it clockwise increases it. Value changes are
usually in single increment steps. If you hold SHIFT and turn
the dial, values will increase or decrease by ten times (or one
tenth) the normal rate, depending on the parameter.
fig.02-06
decrease
increase
[ENTER/YES]
The [ENTER/YES] button is used to respond to an onscreen
prompt. For example, if “Store Current?” is displayed, you
can press [ENTER/YES] to save your song in its current
state. On some screens, [ENTER/YES] will be blinking. In
that case, pressing [ENTER/YES] will allow you to view
more information than is presently shown on the display. For
example, when making changes to the EQ of a track, press
the blinking [ENTER/YES] button to see the pop-up EQ
curve. To cancel the operation, press [EXIT/NO].
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the startup playlist
display. Anytime you are in the middle of making a setting,
and you want to get back to the startup screen, just press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. It also helps to think of
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] as an “escape” button.
Even if you restore the settings to their initial state, the song,
scene (p. 84), tempo map (p. 202), and sync track (p. 200) data
will not be lost. Furthermore, the IDE drive (p. 254), SCSI self
ID (p. 254), Scene Mode (p. 84), Shift Lock (p. 251), and
Numerics Type (p. 252) settings will not return to their
default state.
If an operation has been performed incorrectly or cannot be
executed correctly, an error message appears in the display.
When this occurs, please refer to “Error Messages”
(Appendices p. 9) or “Troubleshooting” (Appendices p.5),
and perform the specified measure.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears.
If the System menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (INIT)].
If “INIT” does not appear above [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “INIT” appears above [F1], then press [F2 (INIT)].
“Init Mixer/System PRM Sure?” appears in the display.
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
If you wish to cancel the initializing, press [EXIT/NO].
fig.play/display
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If the above steps do not resolve your problem, contact to a
nearby Roland Service Center, or authorized Roland
distributor.
37
Chapter 2
Most value changes can be made while the VS-1824 is
playing. However, you must first press [STOP] before
changing V-Tracks and before changing mixer Scenes.
You can restore the default parameter settings of a song. This
is convenient when you have made many changes to the
Input Mixer, the Track Mixer, the Master Block, as well as
changes in the System Menu screens, and you want to
quickly restore the VS-1824 to its default settings. This
function is called Initialize System/Mixer parameter.
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
The Display
Center Part of the Display
The level meter is displayed here.
fig.12-03
Display Regions
Pre-fader / Post-fader indication
When you first turn on the VS-1824, the following display
will appear.
fig.02-01
You can switch between Pre-fader and Post-fader by turning
the TIME/VALUE dial or pressing [PAGE] until “PRE” or
“POST” appears above [F4], and by then pressing [F4].
■ Song Information display
If you hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] twice, the
level meter will be replaced by the Song Information display.
fig.12-02
Scene Number
Shift Lock Status
This display is separated into three different areas. You can
Sample Rate
Song Name
use [
], [
], [
], and [
] as well as the
Time / Value dial to change settings in each area. The
currently active area is outlined with a bold line.
Press [SHIFT] and [
active area.
] or [
] to change the currently
Comment
Icon
Remaining Disk Space Song Capacity
Recording Mode
Locator Bank
Synchronization Status
Upper Part of the Display
The current time of the song is displayed here in hours,
minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. To move the
timeline, press [
] and [
] to select the desired time
increment, then turn the TIME / VALUE dial to change the
value. You can also move the timeline in measure or beat
increments, or by Marker number.
fig.12-01
SMPTE Time Code
Cursor
38
Marker Number
Measure
Beat
Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] twice more to
return to the level meter.
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Lower Part of the Display
Selecting a Playlist Display
This area displays the Playlist.
You can select one of four Playlist displays by holding
[SHIFT] and pressing [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to toggle between
the displays:
fig.12-08
Cursor
Phrase name at the cursor position/current location
Track name at the cursor position
fig.playscreens
Playlist
V-track status
Current track
Tracks containing recorded data
Tracks not containing recorded data
The grid at the lower right corner shows the V-Track Status.
If you don’t wish to view the V-Track Status portion of the
display, hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. The next screen shows level meters, an expanded
Playlist, and hides the V-Track Status grid.
Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to switch to
the next Playlist display.
3. The next screen shows Song Information, the Playlist,
and the V-Track Status grid.
Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to switch to
the next Playlist display.
fig.12-09
4. The final screen shows Song Information, an expanded
Playlist, and hides the V-Track Status grid.
Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to switch
back to the first Playlist display.
39
Chapter 3
You can use the CURSOR buttons to select the track you
wish to view.
1. The initial screen shows level meters, the Playlist, and
the V-Track Status grid. Hold [SHIFT] and press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to switch to the next Playlist display.
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Function Buttons
(While on the Playlist Display)
In the Playlist display, the function buttons perform as follows.
* If “ZOOM+” does not appear above F1, press [PAGE] until it
does.
[F1 (ZOOM+)]:
[F5 (WAVE)]: This displays the audio waveform for the
corresponding track as selected using the [
] and [
]
cursors. Press [F5 (WAVE)] once to display the waveform.
Press [F5 (WAVE)] again to remove the waveform. (Make
sure that the track you have selected contains audio.)
fig.12-14
Cursor
Expansion in the level direction Expansion in the time direction
This enlarges, in three stages, the display of the tracks. When
a waveform is displayed, this will make it appear taller.
fig.12-10
Press [PAGE] to display the second set of functions (when
available).
[F1 (LMTrk)]:
Displays levels and meters of tracks.
[F2 (ZOOM-)]:
[F2 (LM In)]:
Displays levels and meters for inputs.
This reduces, in three stages, the display of the tracks. When
a waveform is displayed, this will make it appear shorter.
[F3 (LMAux)]:
Displays levels and meters of the AUX and
EFFECT Send busses.
fig.12-11
[F4 (→PRE)] / [F4 (→POST)]:
[F3 (← →)]:
This stretches the timeline in four stages. When a waveform
is displayed, this laterally stretches out the waveform.
fig.12-12
This switches the display of the meter from pre-fader to postfader. Press [F4] to switch back and forth between pre- and
post-fader levels. The current Levels setting is labeled either
“Pre” or “Post in the lower left corner of the center portion of
the display. If the current setting is pre-fader, you will see the
indicator “Pre” in the lower left corner of the level meter
display, and the label above [F4] will be “Post”. Pressing [F4]
at this point will switch the level meter to post-fader.
[F5 (→F/P)] or [F5 (→Metr)]:
This switches the display from Level Meters to Fader/Pan
positions for each channel.
fig.12-07
[F4 (→ ←)]:
This shrinks the timeline in four stages. If a waveform is
displayed, this will squeeze the waveform.
When the middle of the display is showing faders and
panning:
• Press [F1 (LMTrk)] to view the fader and pan positions
for the Track Mixer.
fig.12-13
• Press [F2 (LM In)] to view the fader and pan positions
for the Input Mixer.
• Press [F3 (LMAux)] to view the fader and pan positions
for the AUX and EFFECT busses.
40
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Mixer Channel Display
To view mixer settings, press any SELECT button for an
input or track. The SELECT buttons are divided into two
rows. The top row of buttons are referred to as the “Input
SELECT buttons” (p. 18). This section also contains the Stereo
In and Effects 1-4 Returns. The bottom row of buttons are
referred to as the “Track SELECT buttons” (p. 19).
2. Press Input 1 SELECT button.
All mixer settings for Input 1 appear in the display.
Here, you can change all settings for an input, including
phase, EQ, panning, and all effects routing.
fig.inputmixscreens
1. Press Track 1 SELECT button.
All mixer settings for Track 6 appear in the display.
Here, you can change all the settings for a track,
including V-Tracks, EQ, panning, and all effects routing.
fig.trackmixscreens
Chapter 3
3. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If you want to display track channel 13-18, hold [SHIFT]
down and press the SELECT buttons for track channels
(13-18).
When “VS-1880” is selected as the fader mode, the
correspondence of the track channel numbers switches to
those shown on the overlay sheet provided with the mixer
(p. 75).
When Channel Link (p. 77) is set to “Off” and Channel 7/8,
9/10, 11/12, 13/14, 15/16, or 17/18 is pressed with holding
[SHIFT] down, the Track Mixer screen for the corresponding
even numbered channels is displayed.
41
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Changing Track Status
Muting and Soloing
You can change the status of each track by pressing the
STATUS button. The color of the status button determines
the current state of the track.
When making EQ adjustments or checking the balance
during mixdown, you may want to listen to just one channel
or a specific combination of channels. Muting eliminates a
track from the monitor mix. Soloing selects a specific channel
or channels to monitor, muting other channels.
If you want to switch track status, press [FADER/MUTE].
The “TR” indicator lights or blinks. Then, switch to track
mixer. For further details, see “Switching the Fader
Functions” (p. 71)
Orange: Source
The input source assigned to the channel is heard.
Blinking Red: Record Ready
The track is ready to be recorded. When blinking red,
previously recorded material on the track will be
heard.
It is possible to select the channels you wish to monitor using
the STATUS buttons, but this involves a lot of button-pushes.
Instead, try one of these methods for muting and soloing:
Muting Tracks
To mute tracks while a song is playing:
1. During playback, press the STATUS button once for the
track you wish to mute.
The button changes from green to unlit. That track is
now muted. You may mute more than one track at a
time.
Blinking Red / Orange: Record Ready
The track is ready to be recorded and the source will
be heard. This occurs when the VS-1824 is in Record
Ready and you press [PLAY], then press the blinking
red status button.
Solid Red: Record
Signal is being recorded on that track.
Green: Play
The track will play back.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
2. Press the STATUS button again while the track is playing
to make it green.
That track can now be played back.
Off (unlit): Mute
The track is muted.
Blinking Red / Green: Play and Record
This indicates playback from and recording to the
same track simultaneously.
• To put a track directly into Record Ready status, press
and hold [REC] button and press the track’s STATUS
button once.
• To put a track directly into Play mode, press and hold
[STOP] and press the track’s STATUS button once.
• During playback, the STATUS button will only change
from green to off each time it is pressed. When the
STATUS button is off, the track is muted.
• To assign an input to a track for recording, press and
hold the track’s STATUS button, and then press the
SELECT button for the input (or track) you want to
record (see p. 41).
42
Muting Inputs and Effect Returns
1. Hold [FADER/MUTE].
2. Press any blinking SELECT button for a track, input or
effect return to mute it.
3. The SELECT button will stop blinking.
That channel is now muted.
4. While continuing to hold [FADER/MUTE], press the
SELECT button again to monitor that channel.
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Quick Soloing
Use this method to quickly solo a track or input with effects
in-place:
1. Press and hold [EDIT/SOLO].
The SELECT buttons for all tracks and inputs will begin
blinking.
2. While continuing to hold [EDIT/SOLO], press the
SELECT button for the track or input you wish to hear.
3. You can select more than one track or input, as long as
you continue to hold [EDIT/SOLO].
Using Locators
One of the fastest ways to move around in your song is to use
the locators. Time locators are stored for each song using the
LOCATOR buttons ([1]-[8]). The VS-1824 provides 64
different locators per song. The locators are organized into
eight banks, with eight locators per bank. Each button stores
a single time location in the song, and you can move
instantly to the stored time by pressing the button. The
locators also provide a useful and convenient way to define
sections of a song for Loop Recording, to store points for
Punch-In recording, and to store track editing values.
fig.02-06c
4. After you’re done checking the contents of a track, hold
[EDIT/SOLO] and press the SELECT button for the
tracks or inputs which have been soloed to un-solo them.
.
.
.
For situations where you may want to continue to solo
several different tracks over and over again, it may be better
to use the Solo mode.
Bank 1
2. “—-SOLO—-” will blink in the top of the display and
indicate that Solo mode is now turned on. Also, the
[EDIT/SOLO] button will begin blinking.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00h00m00s00
Chapter 3
Solo Mode
Bank 2
1. To turn on Solo mode, hold [SHIFT] and press
[EDIT/SOLO].
1
Bank 8
Time
Storing Locators
3. Press the SELECT button for the track or input you wish
to solo. You may solo more than one track and or input at
a time.
1. Move to the position in the song where you want to store
a locator.
4. When you are done, hold [SHIFT] and press
[EDIT/SOLO] again to turn off SOLO mode.
2. Press any of the eight LOCATOR buttons ([1]-[8]) that
are unlit. When a LOCATOR button is lit, it indicates that
a locate point is already stored there.
The [EDIT/SOLO] button will stop blinking.
5. Press [PLAY/DISPLAY] to return to the Playlist display.
For example, to set Locator 1, press [1].
* You can store locators while recording, during playback, or
when the song is stopped. When a locate point is stored, the
corresponding indicator lights.
Recalling a Stored Locator
1. Press the LOCATOR button for the locator you wish to
find.
For example, if you wish to move the play position to
Locator 3, press [3]. You can do this while the song is
playing, or when stopped.
43
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Changing the Locator Bank
Editing Stored Locators
1. Press [BANK].
If you store a locator and later decide to change its value, a
simple method is to clear it, move to the new position, and
re-store the locator at the new position. Here is another way
to change the locator values.
The LOCATE buttons now act as buttons to change
locator banks. A blinking locator button will now
indicate which bank is active. The currently active bank
will be blinking.
2. Press the LOCATOR button ([1]-[8]) corresponding to
the bank number you wish to select.
For example, if you wish to use Locator Bank 4, press [4].
3. Once you’ve selected a locator bank, the [Bank] indicator
goes out. To return to the previously selected bank, press
[Bank] once more, followed by the locator button
corresponding to the bank you want.
For example, if Bank 4 is current, and you wish to get
back to Bank 1, press [Bank], and then press [1].
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display. If it is not
displayed, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (Loc)].
If “Loc” does not appear above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“Loc” is displayed, and then press [F2 (Loc)].
3. Each of the locators is displayed. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor to the locator you
want to change. If no value is stored for a locator, “-h-ms-f- —-” appears in the display.
fig.02-06d
Auxiliary Cursor
Cursor
4. Move the cursors to the locator you wish to change. Use
the TIME / VALUE dial to modify the value of the
locator.
The function buttons work as follows:
[F2 (NOW)]: Enters the value for the current position of
the timeline, as indicated in the top of the
display.
[F3 (JUMP)]:Moves the current time to the value of the
locator.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen.
5. When you finish editing your locator values, press
[F6 (EXIT)] to return to the Utility menu, or press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Clearing Locator
1. Press and hold [CLEAR], and press the locator buttons
([1]-[8]) that you wish to clear.
44
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Using Markers
In addition to locators, you can store up to 1000 markers per
song. Markers also provide a useful and convenient way to
define sections of a song for loop recording, or to mark
points for punch-in recording. Markers are also used to store
Automix data and CD indexes. Markers used for Automix
are indicated by the letter “A” after the marker number,
while markers used for CD indexes are indicated by the letter
“C” after the marker number.
* An interval of at least 0.1 seconds must be left between
markers. It will not be possible to add a new marker if a marker
already exists at a location less than 0.1 seconds away.
Storing a Marker
Locate to a Marker Using
PREVIOUS and NEXT
To move to the marker immediately following the current
time location, hold [SHIFT] and press [NEXT]. You move
ahead one marker at a time, in the order they appear on the
timeline, each time you hold [SHIFT] and press [NEXT]. To
move to the marker immediately preceding the current
playback time, hold [SHIFT] and press [PREVIOUS]. Using
the default settings, pressing [NEXT] or [PREVIOUS]
(without holding SHIFT) will move by phrases instead of
markers.
fig.02-08
NEXT
PREVIOUS
0
1
2
Chapter 3
Press [TAP] to place a marker at the current location. You can
place a marker during recording or playback of a song, as
well as when the song is stopped.
fig.02-06e
Time
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00h00m00s00
Displaying Markers
Time
About Marker Numbers
Each marker is assigned a number 000-999 based on the
order of its location on the timeline. This means that if you
add a new marker at a location earlier than an existing
marker, the numbers of the subsequent markers will be
increased.
The marker number at any playback location is indicated in
the display. If there is no marker number at the current
location, then the closest preceding marker number is
displayed. If there are no markers in the song, “—-” is
indicated. If “***” is shown in the display, there are markers
placed in the song, and the current location of the timeline is
earlier in the song than the first marker’s location.
fig.02-07a
TAP
0
1
2
3
Time
Before setting a Mark point
fig.02-07
0
1
2
3
4
Time
After setting a Mark point
45
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Editing Marker Values
Clearing Markers
1. Move to the marker you want to change. Hold [SHIFT]
and press [PREVIOUS] or [NEXT] to move to the marker.
Setting markers makes it much easier to get to different places
within a song, but having too many markers can make it
more difficult. Delete unneeded markers whenever you can.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6(UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
Clearing Specific Markers
If it is not displayed, press [F6(EXIT)].
1. Move to the marker you wish to delete by holding
[SHIFT] and press [PREVIOUS] or [NEXT].
fig.02-08b
Marker Number
Time
Measure Beat
Status
2. Hold [CLEAR] and press [TAP].
The marker is cleared.
fig.02-10a
TAP
CLEAR
+
BACK
SPACE
0
1
2
3
4
When saving Auto Mixes
When setting track number Markers
3. Press [F1 (Mark)].
Time
If “Mark” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE]
until “Mark” is displayed, and then press [F1 (Mark)].
Before deleting a Marker
fig.02-10
0
4. Each marker is shown. Use [
], [
], [
1
2
3
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the marker you want to
change. If no value is stored for a marker, “—-:-h-m-s-f—-” appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME / VALUE dial to modify the value of the
marker. The time of a marker can only be modified
within the range between the preceding and following
markers.
1
1
1
After deleting a Mark point
Clearing All Markers
1. Hold down [SHIFT], [CLEAR] and [TAP] at the same
time.
fig.02-09
0
Time
2
“Clear ALL Tap Markers?” appears in the display.
fig.02-11a
SHIFT
CLEAR
+
TAP
+
BACK
SPACE
Time
0
1
2
3
4
Possible range of change
6. When you finish changing settings, press [F6 (EXIT)] to
return to the Utility menu. Or, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
to return to the Playlist display.
Time
Before deleting all Markers
fig.02-11
Time
After deleting all Markers
2. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to clear all markers.
If you want to cancel the procedure, press [EXIT/NO].
* This procedure will erase any existing Automix data and/or
CD indexes.
46
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Other Ways to Move In a Song
Move to the Beginning or End of
a Song Using [FF] and [REW]
Changing Playback Position
Using JUMP
1. To go to the beginning of actual recorded audio in a
song, hold [SHIFT] and press [REW (SONG TOP)].
Besides using markers and locators to move the current time
of the song, you can also directly specify a location or
measure and beat to move to. This is convenient when
designating locations during track and phrase editing.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [PAGE (JUMP)].
2. “Jump” appears in the display. Use [
] and [
]
and the TIME/VALUE dial to enter the time location.
3. Press [F4 (Exec)]. The designated time location is
recalled, and you will return to the previous mode.
2. To go to the ending of actual recorded audio in song,
hold [SHIFT] and press [FF (SONG END)].
fig.02-06b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Change Playback Position Using
TIME/VALUE Dial
The current playback time in the display is shown in SMPTE
time code. The current measure, beat and marker number are
also displayed. Use the following procedure to change the
current playback position.
Chapter 3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Song Top
Song End
SMPTE Time Code (See Appendices p. 13)
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Use the [
] and [
] buttons to underline the time
value you wish to change.
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the value.
fig.02-06a
Hour
Minute Second Frame
Measure Beat
Sub Frame
Marker Number
Cursor
Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the playback time
according to the position of the cursor. For example, if the
cursor is positioned under the Minutes indicator, each click
of the TIME/VALUE dial changes the timeline position by
one-minute increments. If the cursor is moved to the
subframe location, turning the dial moves the timeline
position in increments of 1/10th of a frame. To move the
timeline in 1/100th frame increments, hold [SHIFT] and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial.
47
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
Protecting Songs (Song Protect)
It is possible to mistakenly overwrite or record over an
existing song, or to erase a song you meant to keep. You can
protect a song from being erased or recorded over by using
the Song Protect function.
Song Protect disables the following operations:
• Recording
• Undo/Redo
• Song Name, Song Optimize, Song Arrange, Song Split,
and Song Combine
• Track Edit and Phrase Edit
• Recording to Sync Tracks
Protecting Performances
1. Make sure the current song is the one you want to
protect using Song Protect (Song Select; p. 49).
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.[
4. Press [F4 (PROTC)].
If “PROTC” does not appear above [F4], press [PAGE]
until PROTC” is displayed, and then press [F4 (PROTC)].
“Song Protect Off → On, Excute ?” appears in the
display.
• Creating Tempo Maps
• Song Store
About Song Protect
Song Protect performs the same function as the protect tab or
switch on floppy disks and magnetic optical disks. Even if
Song Protect is turned on, you can still place locate points
and markers, and carry out operations such as changing
Scenes. However, when you try to save your work, “Song
Protected” appears in the display, and you are prevented
from proceeding with the Save operation. However, when
you turn Song Protect off, any edits or changes to the song
you made during the time Song Protect was on will be lost. If
you are planning to make permanent edits and changes to a
song, make sure Song Protect is off before you start.
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message will ask you to confirm.
6. Press [ENTER/YES].
“STORE Current?” appears in the display.
7. If you wish to save the current song and then protect it,
press [ENTER/YES]. If you wish to protect the state in
which Song Store was last executed without saving any
recent changes, press [EXIT/NO].
The song will be protected. “---Complete---” appears in
If you work in an environment where many different people
use one VS-1824, you may want to use the following system:
When you have finished all work for the day, turn Song
Protect on immediately before shutting off the power to the
VS-1824. At the beginning of the next day, after turning on
the VS-1824, immediately turn Song Protect off.
48
the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 3 Playback Operations
To Remove Song Protect
1. Select the song from which you want to remove the
protect function (Song Select; p. 49).
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.[
4. Press [F4 (PROTC)].
If “PROTC” does not appear above [F4], press [PAGE]
until PROTC” is displayed, and then press [F4 (PROTC)].
“Song Protect On → Off, Excute ?” appears in the
display.
Selecting and Loading Songs
(Song Select)
Before you can play a song you have saved on the hard drive,
you must select and load the song into the VS-1824’s
memory. Use the following procedure to select and load the
desired song.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
3. Press [F1 (Sel)]—the Song Select screen appears, showing
the songs stored in the currently selected hard drive
partition.
4. Press [F1] to toggle between the icon display and the list
display to select the desired way of viewing the songs.
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
Icon display
List display
A message will ask you to confirm.
6. Press [ENTER/YES].
7. Song protect will be disabled. “---Complete---” appears
in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Press [F5] to toggle between date of creation → time of
creation → size.
Icon / Date of creation
Icon / Time of creation
Icon / Size
List / Date of creation
List / Time of creation
List / Size
6. Use TIME/VALUE to move the cursor to the song that
you wish to select and load.
7. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message will ask you to confirm.
8. Press [ENTER/YES].
The display will ask “STORE Current?”
9. If you wish to save the current song, press
[ENTER/YES]. If not, press [EXIT/NO].
After the current song has been saved—and the selected
song has been loaded—you are returned to Play mode.
49
Chapter 3
You can view the songs as icons or in a list. You can also
see the size of each song, and the date and time at which
it was created.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Preparing for a New Recording
5. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], and the TIME/
VALUE dial, enter the name of the song.
Items Necessary for Recording
• VS-1824
• Audio equipment for the Master Out signal, or stereo
headphones
• Recording source (microphones, electric guitar,
synthesizer, CD player, etc.)
Create a New Song (Song New)
You can also enter the name of your song by pressing
[NUMERICS/ASCII] so it is lit. Then you can enter
characters using the SELECT buttons.
The function buttons work as shown below:
[F1 (Hist)]:
Pressing this button will take you through a
list of the last 20 song names, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all the characters in the window.
Recording cannot take place when a demo song is selected.
This is because the demo songs are protected from being
changed or overwritten (p. 48). Use the following procedure
to create a new song. This process is analogous to exchanging
reels of tape on a multi-track recorder.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is
positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the Song Name screen without storing
the song name
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
3. Press [F2 (NEW)].
If “NEW” does not appear above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“NEW” appears above [F2], and then press [F2 (NEW)].
4. Press [F1 (Name)].
The Song Name screen appears in the display.
fig.03-02
[F5 (Write)]: Stores the song name and exits the Song Name
screen.
6. When you are done entering the song name, press
[F5 (Write)].
Song Names
It is not necessary to name your song every time you
create a new song. When you create a new song, it will
automatically be given a name like “InitSong 001.”
However, this makes it difficult to remember what song
it is. We suggest you assign a unique name to your song
to help you keep track of it. You can change the name of
the song later if desired.
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
], and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the settings for the Sample Rate,
Record mode, Icon, Copy System PRM, and Copy
Mixer/Scene PRM parameters, as explained below.
Sample Rate
Choose 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz for the sample rate. If
you are planning to use a digital source and want to make a
digital connection, you must match the sample rate to that of
the digital source. If you are planning to make a CD of your
own original music, select 44.1 kHz. You cannot change the
sample rate after the song is recorded. In addition, you
cannot mix different sample rates within the same song.
50
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Recording Mode
This selects the type of RDAC coding used by the song. For
most applications, Roland recommends using the MTP
(Multi-Track Pro) mode. Once a song is created, the
recording mode cannot be changed.
MTP (Multi-Track Pro):
Appropriate for use with professional quality equipment
(digital mixers, effects, processors, etc.). This provides
the highest recording quality for recording and editing.
CDR (CD-Writing):
This mode allows you to directly create a CD image file
on your hard disk—this file can later be burned onto a
CD-R. In CDR mode, Tracks 1-8 are linked in odd/even
fader pairs, with their levels controlled by the oddnumbered fader. See “Channel Link,” p. 77.
MAS (Mastering):
* When the Recording mode is set to “CDR” or “MAS,” you
can use a total of eight tracks. If you are recording onto the L
and R mastering tracks (Track 7/8), you can play back Tracks
1-6. If you are not recording onto the mastering tracks, you
can play back Tracks 1-8. Tracks 9–18 cannot be used.
MT1 (Multi-Track 1):
This recording mode provides approximately twice the
recording time of MAS mode.
MT2 (Multi-Track 2):
This recording mode provides even longer record times
than MT1.
LIV (Live 1):
This mode is appropriate when your hard drive lacks
free space or when recording live performances where
the total recording time is unknown.
LV2 (Live 2):
This mode provides the longest recording time. This
mode is appropriate for live recordings of speeches, and
recordings made for reference purposes. Use this mode if
you have very little drive space left or you aren’t sure
how long the recording will be.
Icon
Select from one of seven graphic icons to represent your
song.
Copy System PRM (Copy System Parameters)
When set to “on,” you can create a new song that has the
current song’s system parameters copied to it. This means
you don’t have to go back to the System menu to recreate
your favorite settings. This includes settings such as Preview
length (p. 166), metronome settings (p. 67) and so on.
Global System Parameters under [F2 (GLOBL)] are not
copied. This is useful, for example, if you are synchronizing
multiple 1824s and do not want to redo the synchronization
settings each time you create a new song.
Copy Mixer/Scene PRM (Copy Mixer/Scene
Parameters)
When set to “On,” you can create a new song that has the
current song’s mixer settings and stored Scenes.
8. Press [F4 (EXEC)] to accept the settings.
“Create New Song, Sure?” appears in the display.
9. Press [ENTER/YES].
“STORE Current?” appears in the display.
10. If you wish to save any changes or edits made to the
current song, press [ENTER/YES]. If the current song is a
demo song, press [EXIT/NO]. After the new song is
created, the Song menu icon appears in the display.
11. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
The new song is now the current song selected for
recording.
51
Chapter 4
Appropriate for use with CD players and DAT
recorders. Songs recorded in this recording mode can
play back a maximum of eight tracks at a time. If you are
recording mastering tracks, you can play Tracks 1-6. If
you are not using mastering tracks, you can play Tracks
1-8. Tracks 9-18 cannot be used.
With the VS-1824, you can select CDR as a recording mode
(p. 51). If the recording mode of the song is CDR, the VS-1824
works as a recorder with four stereo tracks. Please always
keep “Channel Link” (p. 77) of the track channel “On.” If
it accidentally turns “Off,” you cannot record on the tracks of
even numbers (tracks 2, 4, 6 and 8).
If “Channel Link” of the track channel turns “Off,” you can
recover by initializing the settings of the mixer and the
system (Initialize system/mixer parameters: p. 37). If you
execute “initialize system/mixer parameters,” mixer settings
(routing, EQ, etc.) and system settings (master clock, offset,
etc.) are set to their default settings.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
About Recording Times
Song Numbers
The available recording time for a hard drive depends on
the selected recording mode, the sample rate, and the size
of the hard drive. Both the recording mode and the
sample rate can be selected on a song-by-song basis.
Recording time in track minutes for a 2000 MB partition is
shown below:
On the VS-1824, every song is assigned a number. Newly
created songs are given the lowest available number. For
example, if there are five songs on the hard drive, the
next song created will be assigned Song Number 6. If
Song Number Three is deleted, the remaining songs will
be numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. The next new song created
will be assigned Song Number 3.
fig.03-03
If song numbers up to 5 are occupied
Track Minutes (See Appendices p. 13)
Sample Rate
Mode
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
32 kHz
MTP
742 minutes
808 minutes
1114 minutes
CDR/MAS 370 minutes
404 minutes
556 minutes
MT1
742 minutes
808 minutes
1114 minutes
MT2
990 minutes
1078 minutes
1484 minutes
LIV
1188 minutes 1292 minutes
1782 minutes
LV2
1484 minutes 1616 minutes
2228 minutes
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
InitSong 002
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
InitSong 003
Song New
InitSong 004
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 005
InitSong 006
(All times are approximate)
* The above chart is a general yardstick for estimating
recording time. Actual times may vary depending on your
hard disk’s specifications or the number of songs created.
If Song 3 is deleted
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
InitSong 002
InitSong 002
If “Drive Busy!” is Displayed
If this message appears during recording or playback, it
means the drive cannot keep up with the data read-write
speed. This is usually caused by disk fragmentation and
is fairly common with drives used for audio recording
on a daily basis. In most cases, it can be fixed by backing
up your songs (p. 232), initializing your hard drive
(p. 222), and then creating a new song or reloading an
existing song.
52
InitSong 003
Song New
InitSong 004
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 005
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
The Recording and Mixing Process
Connecting Instruments
The recording procedure with the VS-1824 is similar to the
process of recording with traditional multitrack recorders.
The general process of recording a song is outlined below.
1. Pull the Master fader all the way down.
2. Connect instruments and microphones to the desired
INPUT jacks.
1. Connect instruments and microphones to the VS-1824.
2. Record the basic rhythm tracks (i.e. drums, bass, etc.).
3. Record the other parts (electric guitars, synthesizers,
vocals, etc.) while playing back the basic rhythm tracks.
4. If there are any mistakes in the process, record over the
places where they occurred using punch-in and punch
out.
5. Adjust the volume level, panning, equalization, and
other settings for each track.
6. If you run out of empty tracks, you can merge the
contents of two or more tracks onto a different track
using track bouncing (p. 64).
Guitar (Hi-Z) (See Appendices p. 12)
* This instrument is equipped with balanced (XLR/TRS) type
input jacks. Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below.
Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of
other equipment you intend to connect.
fig.03-04
Chapter 4
7. Mix down the tracks to your stereo recorder to make a
master tape. Or, bounce down the tracks to a stereo track
within the VS-1824 to make your own original CD.
The INPUT 8 jack and the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack cannot be
used simultaneously. The GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack takes
priority when connections are made to both jacks at the same
time. If you wish to use the INPUT 8 jack, make sure nothing
is plugged into the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack.
Creates an original audio CD with the
internal CD-RW drive.
Creates an original audio CD with the
optional Roland VS-CDRII recorder.
* To prevent feedback from occurring, pay attention to the
position of “live” microphones connected near active speakers.
If feedback occurs:
• Change the position of the microphones.
• Move the microphones farther from the speakers.
• Lower the volume levels.
To prevent hazard or damage, ensure hat only microphone
cables and microphones designed to IEC-268-15A are
connected.
Afin d’éviter tout resque ou dommage, ne brancher que des
câbles de microphone et des microphones conformes à la
norme IEC-268-15A.
53
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Recording to the Tracks
12. Use the channel faders and the Master fader to adjust
channel volumes to an appropriate volume.
1. Select a track to record on. While holding down [REC],
press the STATUS button for that track. The STATUS
button will begin blinking red to indicate that it is
“record-ready.”
13. If you are satisfied with the results of your recording,
save the song using the procedure described in “Saving
Your Song (Song Store),” p. 33.
* If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
Sources Assigned to Tracks
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
In a newly created song, the inputs are assigned to tracks
as shown below. This is the default mixer routing.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
● When "VS-1824" is selected as the fader mode (p. 75)
2. To select the source to be recorded to the track, press and
hold the STATUS button for the track to be recorded.
Then, press the Input SELECT button for the input you
want assigned to the track. The SELECT button will
blink.
fig.03-05a
fig.03-05
3. Press [FADER/MUTE] several times until the “IN”
indicator lights.
4. Set channel fader to the 0 dB position.
5. Adjust the input sensitivity with the INPUT knob for
each input. Provide a strong input signal by having
instrument volumes as high as possible. Raise the INPUT
level as high as possible without having the PEAK
indicator light up. The level meters should show signal
peaking between -12 dB and 0 dB.
6. Press [REC]. The button indicator blinks red.
7. Press [PLAY]. The button indicator lights green, and
recording starts.
8. When the performance, and recording, is finished, press
[STOP].
9. To listen to the recorded performance, press [ZERO] to
return to the beginning of the song.
10. Press [FADER/MUTE] several times until the “TR”
indicator lights (for tracks 1-12) or blinks (for tracks
13-18).
11. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
54
● When "VS-1880" is selected as the fader mode (p. 75)
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
What to do About Low-Level Input Signals
When You Are Recording in Stereo
Occasionally, you may have a source which has a very
low input level, such as when using a large diaphragm
dynamic mic to record a soft-spoken vocalist. Use the
steps below to provide extra gain to low-level inputs:
When recording to tracks with Channel Link (p. 77) on, it
is best to turn Channel Link on for the inputs as well. If
you are recording independent mono signals to a linked
track, you will need to set the pan for each input channel.
After Step 3, perform the procedure described below.
1. Turn the INPUT sensitivity knob all the way
clockwise.
2. Press the input SELECT button. There are two
settings in the Input Mixer page that can provide
additional recording signal gain:
1. Press the SELECT button for the input you want
assigned to the track.
2. Press [F1 (MIX)]. If “MIX” does not appear in the
display, first press [PAGE] until “MIX” is displayed,
ATT (Attenuation):
then press [F1 (MIX)]. Or, you can use [
In addition to the Input Sensitivity knob used in Step 1,
this can provide attenuation—a reduction in volume—or
up to 6 dB of additional gain.
[
], and [
], [
],
] to move the cursor to “MIX.”
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the pan setting.
fig.03-06
Fader:
If you are using the fader to control the level of the input
source, make sure that the [FADER/MUTE] is set to
“IN.”
Mix Send Switch
Mix Send Pan
Mix Send Switch
When this is set to “On,” each input is sent to the MIX
bus. Keep this setting “On” when you want to simply
mix the inputs without recording them.
* When you are recording inputs, it is best to turn the MIX
bus OFF for all of your input channels. You will then be
monitoring your source audio via your recording tracks,
and not both from your recording tracks and from the
original inputs!
Mix Send Pan
This adjusts the pan setting (L63-R63) of the signal
sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING bus.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for all inputs you want to
make pan settings on. If you are recording a mono
source to a mono track, it is not necessary to change
the pan setting.
5. When you’re done, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return
to the Playlist display.
55
Chapter 4
This is the fader for the Input Mixer. Since all input
sources pass through the input fader before going to the
recorder, the position of this fader will determine
recording levels. The position of this fader defaults to
100, which corresponds to unity gain. This fader can be
increased up to 127.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Recording on Other Tracks
(Overdubbing)
Recording Using Different
Virtual Tracks (V-Tracks)
In multitrack recording, the standard procedure is to record
new tracks while listening to previously recorded tracks.
This is referred to as “overdubbing.”
The VS-1824 features 16 recordable tracks per channel. These
are called Virtual Tracks, or “V-Tracks.” By using V-Tracks,
you can record up to 288 tracks per song. You can use Virtual
Tracks to record over and over on the same track without
erasing or losing the previous recording.
1. Select the tracks you want to play back.
Hold [STOP] and press the STATUS button for the tracks
you want to play back (i.e. that you want to hear while
overdubbing).
The STATUS buttons light green.
* If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track whose V-Track
you wish to change. The button indicator lights. The
Track Mixer screen appears in the display.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
If you want to display track channel 13-18, hold [SHIFT]
down and press the SELECT buttons for track channels
(13-18).
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
2. Press [F5 (V.Trk)].
If “V.Trk” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE]
until it appears, and then press [F5 (V.Trk)]. Or, you may
Holding [STOP] and pressing a STATUS button will place
that channel in Play mode immediately. Hold [REC] and
press a STATUS button to place a channel in Record Ready
mode.
2. Select the tracks you want to record.
Hold [REC] and press the STATUS button for the tracks
you want to record to.
The STATUS buttons light red.
3. Select the inputs to Record for each track.
While holding the STATUS button for the track you will
record, press the Input SELECT button for the input you
want assigned to the track.
The SELECT button will blink, indicating it is now
assigned to the track.
4. Now you are ready for overdubbing. Follow Steps 4-12
of “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 54), to record and then
check the track’s recorded content.
56
simply use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor to “V. Trk” in the Track Mixer display.
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the V-Track you
want to use. Note, you cannot change the V-Track while
the song is playing. If the song is playing, press [STOP],
and then use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the
V-Track.
fig.03-21
Track onto which performance data is recorded
Track to be recorded or played back
Tracks with no performance data recorded on them
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Begin recording as explained in “Recording to the
Tracks,” p. 54.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Manual Punch-In/Punch-Out
Sometimes when listening to a recording, you may find
playing mistakes or lyrics that were sung incorrectly. You
may want to correct these sections without re-recording the
entire track, or without starting the song over. In such
instances, use the following procedure to re-record selected
parts. The switching from playback to recording while a song
is playing is called a “punch-in,” and the switching from
recording back to playback is called a “punch-out.”
Manual Punch-In Using the
RECORD Button
9. When you reach the exact point in the song you wish to
re-record, press [REC]. The VS-1824 goes into Record
mode, and begins recording the new performance.
10. When you have finished recording, press [REC] once
more to punch-out.
11. Each time the [REC] button is pressed, the recorder
alternately punches in and out. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 for
any other tracks you wish to re-record.
12. Press [STOP] to stop the song.
13. To listen to the results of the punch-in and punch-out,
press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song and
press [PLAY].
Use the transport control buttons to punch in and out.
Manual Punch-In Using the Foot
Switch
fig.03-07
Start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Recording
Stop
Playback
Time
Performing a manual punch-in punch-out when both playing
an instrument and engineering your recording is difficult. In
such cases, it is convenient to use a foot switch (such as the
DP-2 or BOSS FS-5U) to do your punch-ins and -outs.
fig.03-08
Punch-in
Playback
1. Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button for the
track you wish to re-record.
Punch-out
Recording
Chapter 4
Start
Stop
Playback
* If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
Time
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.
Connect the optional foot switch to the VS-1824’s FOOT
SWITCH jack.
fig.03-09
3. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
At this point, you will hear the performance that was
already recorded on the track.
4. Press the STATUS button.
The indicator alternately blinks red and orange. Confirm
that you can hear the source you want to record in the
monitors or headphones.
5. During playback of the song, each time the STATUS
button is pressed, you will alternately hear the
previously recorded track, and then the source (input).
If necessary, use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the
input level of the source so it matches the level of the
recorded track.
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press [STOP].
7. Move to the section of the song where you wish to rerecord.
8. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
57
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
3. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], select “Foot
Sw.” If “Foot Sw” does not appear in the display, press
[F2 (Prm 2)].
fig.03-10
FootSw (Foot Switch)
Set the function of the foot switch connected to the FOOT
SWITCH jack. You may select one of the following functions.
Auto Punch-In and Punch-Out
You can automatically punch in and punch out at preprogrammed locations. This process is called an auto punchin. This is convenient when you need to punch in or out at a
precise time. Before you begin recording, set the times for
punch-in and punch-out. There are three ways to set these
times as described below. Use the method appropriate for
your situation.
Play/Stop:
Alternates between playing back and stopping each time
the foot switch is pressed.
Using Locators
Record:
The same function as [REC]. Use this for performing
punch-ins and punch-outs with a foot switch.
TapMarker:
The same function as [TAP]. Press the foot switch to
place a marker at the current position of the time line.
Next:
Performs the same function as [NEXT]. Moves the time
line to the beginning or end of the next phrase each time
the foot switch is pressed.
Previous:
Performs the same function as [PREVIOUS]. Moves the
time line to the beginning or end of the previous phrase
each time the foot switch is pressed.
GPI:
Controls playback and recording depending on the GPI
trigger signal received from the FOOT SWITCH jack.
1. Find the position in the song where you want to punch
in. Place a locator at that point. Find the position in the
song where you want to punch out. Place another locator
there.
2. While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], press the locator
corresponding to the punch-in point.
3. While continuing to hold [AUTO PUNCH], press the
locator corresponding to the punch-out point.
fig.03-12
GPI (See Appendices p. 12)
4. Select “Record” with the TIME/VALUE dial.
Using Markers
fig.03-13
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Now you can punch in and punch out of record using the
foot switch. Follow the same steps as if you were going to
perform a manual punch-in (p. 57), but use the foot switch
instead of the [REC] button to perform the operations in
Steps 9 to 11.
1. Place two markers, one at the desired punch-in point,
and one at the desired punch-out point.
2. Move to the marker which corresponds with the punchin point.
3. Hold [AUTO PUNCH], and press [NEXT].
4. Without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press [PREVIOUS].
58
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Programming Points During Song
Playback
3. Enter the new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4. When you are done making changes, press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
g.03-14
Recording Procedure When Using Auto
Punch
1. Hold [REC] and press the STATUS button for the track
you wish to re-record. It begins blinking red.
* If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
1. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
2. Press and hold [AUTO PUNCH] as the song is playing.
When you reach the desired punch-in location, press
[TAP].
3. Continue to hold [AUTO PUNCH]. When you reach the
desired punch-out point, press [TAP] again.
4. Press [STOP].
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [AUTO PUNCH].
fig.03-15a
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.
3. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
At this point, you will hear the performance that has
already been recorded on the track.
4. Press the STATUS button. The indicator alternately
blinks red and orange. Confirm that you can hear the
source you want to record in the monitors or
headphones.
5. During playback of the song, each time the STATUS
button is pressed, you will alternately hear the
previously recorded track, and then the source (input). If
necessary, use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the
input level of the source so it matches the recorded level
of the track.
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press
[STOP].
2. The punch-in and punch-out values appear in the
display. Use [
][
], [
], [
], and [
]
7. Press [AUTO PUNCH]. The button indicator will be lit.
and [
] to move the cursor to the value you want to
adjust. If no value is stored, “—h—m—s—f ——”
appears in the display.
8. Locate to a point several seconds or measures before the
auto punch-in point.
The function buttons work as listed below.
9. Press [REC]. The button indicator will blink red.
[F1 (In)]:
10. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
Moves the cursor to the punch in location.
[F2 (NOW)]:
Enters the current time as the punch-in or punch-out
point, depending on which parameter is highlighted.
[F3 (JUMP)]:
Moves the time line to the currently stored punch-in or
punch-out point, depending on which is highlighted.
[F4 (Out)]:
Moves the cursor to the punch-out location.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen. Returns to the Utility menu screen.
11. The VS-1824 will automatically go into Record mode
where the punch-in point was set.
12. The VS-1824 will automatically go out of record where
the punch-out point was set. Once you’ve passed the
punch-out point, press [STOP].
13. To listen to the results of the punch-in and punch-out,
press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song and
press [PLAY].
14. Press [AUTO PUNCH] to disable auto punch when you
are finished. The button indicator will be unlit.
59
Chapter 4
Editing Punch-In and Punch-Out Points
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Loop Recording
Using Markers
fig.03-19
You can play back a specific section of a song over and over
again, and use the Auto Punch In feature to record many
quick takes. This is called “loop recording.” This can be
convenient when you want to rehearse a section of the song,
or record a number of takes of a solo, and compare the
different takes.
fig.03-16
Loop start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Recording
Loop end
Playback
1. Place two markers, one at the desired start point, and one
at the desired end point.
Time
2. Move to the marker that corresponds with the loop start
point.
3. Hold [LOOP], and press [NEXT].
4. Without releasing [LOOP], press [PREVIOUS].
Before you begin recording, specify the begin and end times
for the loop. There are three ways to specify the loop times.
Use the method appropriate to your situation.
Programming Points During Song
Playback
fig.03-20
* To specify the punch-in and punch-out points, refer to the
previous section “Auto Punch-In and Auto Punch-Out.”
Using Locators
fig.03-18
1. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
2. Press and hold [LOOP] as the song is playing. When you
reach the desired location for the start of the loop, press
[TAP].
3. Continue to hold [LOOP]. When you reach the desired
ending point, press [TAP] again.
1. Find the position in the song where you want to start the
loop. Place a locator at that point. Find the position in the
song where you want to end the loop. Place another
locator there.
2. While holding down [LOOP], press the locator
corresponding to the start point.
3. While continuing to hold [LOOP], press the locator
corresponding to the end point.
60
4. Press [STOP].
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Editing the Loop Points for Punch-In
and Punch-Out
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [LOOP].
fig.03-21a
3. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback. At this point, you
will hear the performance which has already been
recorded on the track.
4. Press the STATUS button.
The indicator alternately blinks red and orange. Confirm
that you can hear the source you want to record in the
monitors or headphones.
5. During playback of the song, each time the STATUS
button is pressed, you will alternately hear the
previously recorded track, and then the source (input). If
necessary, use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the
input level of the source so it matches the recorded level
of the track.
2. The loop start and loop end values appear in the display.
Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the value
you want to adjust. If no value is stored, “—h—m—s—f
——” appears in the display.
The function buttons work as described below.
[F1 (Start)]:
Moves the cursor to the start location.
Enters the current time as the loop start or loop end
point, depending on which parameter is highlighted in
the display.
[F3 (JUMP)]:
Moves the time line to the currently stored loop start or
loop end point, depending on which parameter is
highlighted in the display.
[F4 (End)]:
Moves the cursor to the loop end location.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen. Returns to the Utility menu screen.
3. Enter the new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4. When you are done making changes, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
7. Press [LOOP].
The button indicator lights, and Loop Play is enabled.
8. Press [AUTO PUNCH]. The button indicator lights. You
are now able to use Auto Punch for recording.
9. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song. The song
will play until it reaches the end of the loop. It will then
locate to the loop start, and play from that point. It will
continue to loop between the two specified points until
you press [STOP].
10. Press [REC] when you are ready to try recording.
The VS-1824 will automatically go into Record mode
where the punch-in point was set.
11. The VS-1824 will automatically go out of Record where
the punch-out point was set. Playback continues until the
end of the loop is reached, and the loop will begin from
the start point again.
12. During the playback of the loop, listen to what you just
recorded to check the result. If recording didn’t turn out
as you intended, repeat Steps 10 and 11.
13. When you are finished recording, press [STOP].
14. Press [LOOP] to disable loop play. The button indicator
goes out.
15. Press [AUTO PUNCH] to disable auto punch.
Recording Procedure Using Loop Play
1. Hold [REC] and press the STATUS button for the track
you wish to re-record. It begins blinking red.
The button indicator goes out.
16. To listen to the results of the recordings, press [ZERO] to
return to the beginning of the song and press [PLAY].
* If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE]
several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
You can assign a foot switch to enter and exit Record mode
(p. 42).
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.
61
Chapter 4
[F2 (NOW)]:
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press [STOP].
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Undo and Redo
If you decide a recording is unusable just after you’ve
recorded it, you can use Undo to instantly delete the
recording. When using Undo, you need to specify the
number of levels to be undone.
For example, suppose you use punch-in recording to create
five consecutive recordings at the same location. Each of
these recordings is given its own Undo level. If you decide
you want to revert to the second of the five recordings, you
would set the Undo level to three.
Recording and Editing Operation
Which Can Be Undone (Undo)
Recording or editing operations performed after creating a
song are recorded together with the song data as its
operation history, and the data itself is also preserved
without being erased. For example, suppose that you
perform 10 recording operations on song 1 and then create
song 2. The operation history of song 2 is newly recorded
from the time when song 2 was created. If you subsequently
select song 1 again, the history of the 10 previous recording
operations will still be there.
fig.11-15
The Undo function refers to the operation history of the
currently selected song, and restores the song to the
condition in which it was the specified number of operations
ago. In the case of song 1 in this example, you will be able to
cancel the 10 recording operations that were performed. A
maximum of 999 levels of operation history may be recorded
for each song.
Recording 5
Recording 4
Undo Level 3
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
Time
If after executing the Undo function, you decide you want
the last (fifth) recording back, you can use Redo to get it
back.
• Song Edit operations (Optimize, Erase, etc.)
• Saves to User Effect Patches
fig.11-16
Recording 5
• System operations (mixer initialization, Drive Initialize,
Sync Track Recording, etc.)
Redo
Recording 4
Recording 3
• Auto Mix operations (Snapshot, Gradation, Real time
Recording, etc.)
Recording 2
• Storing in EZ Routing
Recording 1
• Stored Locators, Markers, Scenes
Time
If you use Undo to revert back to the second of five
recordings, and then make a new recording, you will not be
able to get the old recordings 3-5 back. If after making the
new recording, you use Undo, you will be able to get back to
the original second recording.
fig.03-35
Recording 5
Recording 4
Recording 3
Undo
Recording 2
Recording 1
Time
62
Operations that can be undone are recording operations
and each of the Track Edit operations. Check the list below
for operations that cannot be undone.
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
To use the Undo Function:
1. Press [UNDO].
“Level=1” appears in the display.
2. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the level of Undo.
As you choose different levels of Undo, the date and time
stamp for each recording or edit is displayed.
fig.11-17
Undo Level
Cancel Only the Very LastPerformed Operation
If you most frequently use the Undo function to undo just the
previously performed recording/editing operation (i.e.,
undo level 1), you may prefer not to be bothered with the
messages that appear when [UNDO] is pressed. In this case,
make the following settings so that just the previous
operation will be undone immediately when [UNDO] is
pressed.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTM)].
Time Stamp
3. Press [ENTER/YES] or [F4 (Exec)] to execute the Undo.
Immediately after performing the Undo function, the
Undo button will stay lit. This is a visual reminder that
you can Redo your last Undo.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [UNDO].
“Cancel the last UNDO?” appears in the display.
3. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear in the display above [F1],
press [PAGE] until it appears, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
] and [
cursor to “UNDO message.”
] to move the
If “UNDO message” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm 1)].
fig.05-75
2. Press [ENTER/YES] or [F4 (Exec)].
The UNDO indicator light goes off. If you wish to cancel,
press [EXIT/NO].
You can also use Undo and Redo when editing tracks and
phrases.
UNDO message
This selects whether or not the Undo confirmation
message is displayed.
On:
The message is displayed, asking how many levels
you want to undo.
Off:
The message is not displayed, and only the
immediately preceding operation is undone.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “Off.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the playlist screen.
63
Chapter 4
To cancel an Undo (Redo):
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Track Bouncing
Selecting Source Tracks and
Destination Tracks
You can merge the performance of two or more tracks and
re-record them onto a different empty track. This operation is
known as “track bouncing.” Track bouncing comes in handy
when you have run out of free playback tracks. For this
example, we’ll mix the audio recorded on Tracks 5-8, and
bounce them onto the stereo Track 9/10.
1. Track 9 and 10 are linked as described in “Channel Link”
(p. 77).
2. Press [FADER/MUTE] so that “TR” is lit.
3. Hold [STOP], and press the STATUS buttons for source
Tracks 5-8.
4. The STATUS buttons light green.
fig.03-35
Track 5
Performance data 5
Performance data 5
Track 6
Performance data 6
Performance data 6
Track 7
Performance data 7
Performance data 7
Track 8
Performance data 8
Performance data 8
Performance data 5+7
Track 9
Performance data 6+8
Track 10
Before Track Bouncing
After Track Bouncing
For this example, Tracks 5-8 are called the “source tracks.”
Tracks 9-10 are called the “destination tracks.”
* Make all panning, level, EQ and effect settings on the source
tracks before doing the bounce. Once source tracks have been
bounced to the destination tracks, you cannot make individual
mixer settings for each source track without bouncing those
tracks again. Also, make sure that the EQ and effects are turned
off on Channels 9/10. Otherwise, the bounced tracks will sound
different than the source tracks.
* It is not possible to do track bouncing on songs saved with Song
Protect On. If you want to do track bouncing, you must turn
Song Protect Off first.
5. Press the STATUS buttons for the destination Track 9
and 10 so it is lit orange.
6. Hold the STATUS button for Track 9 (or Track10) and
press the SELECT buttons for the source Tracks 5–8 so
that they blink.
* On default settings, Input 1 is assigned to track 9, and Input 2
is assigned to track 10. If this is the case, the SELECT buttons
for Input 1 and 2 will be blinking. While continuing to hold
the STATUS button for track 9, press the SELECT button for
Input 1 and Input 2. The SELECT buttons will stop blinking.
7. The source Tracks 5-8 can now be monitored on Channel
9 and 10.
If you have done a lot of routing, the Input Assign screen can
become a bit cluttered. You can clear all existing routing
assignments and start from scratch by holding one of the
STATUS buttons and pressing [CLEAR].
Set Meters to Pre-Fader Track
While bouncing tracks, it’s a good idea to set your meters to
pre-fader track levels. This will allow you to view the levels
so you can create a track bounce that is as loud as possible
without distortion.
1. Press [PAGE].
2. Press [F1 (LMTrack)].
3. Look for “Pre” in the lower left area of the Levels
display. If it shows “Post,” press [F4 (Pre)] once.
4. While mixing, pay attention to the levels for the
destination Tracks 9 and 10.
64
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Adjust the Pan for Each Track and Check
the Volume Levels for Each Track
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
2. Press [FADER/MUTE] so that “TR” is lit.
3. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
4. Adjust the volume and mix balance using Faders 5-8. The
presently monitored sound—track volumes and
panning—will be recorded to Track 9 and 10 just as you
now hear them.
Record the Track Bounce
1. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.
2. While holding [REC], press the STATUS button for Track
9 or 10.
The STATUS button blinks red to indicate Record Ready.
3. Press [REC].
The button blinks red.
The button lights green, and recording begins.
5. As the recording occurs, you can make adjustments to
the fader levels of the source Tracks 5-8. Any change you
make will be reflected in the bounce.
6. Press [STOP] at the end of the song.
7. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.
8. Mute Tracks 5-8. Press the STATUS button for each of
these tracks once. The button will be unlit, indicating the
track is muted.
9. Press [PLAY] to hear the song. Use the track Fader 9 and
the Master fader to adjust the volume to a comfortable
listening level. You can now select empty Virtual Tracks
for Tracks 5-8 and record new material without
recording over the original material. It is a good idea to
keep your original takes stored on the Virtual Tracks in
case you need to re-bounce them later.
The process for bouncing tracks with effects is exactly as
explained above in “Track Bouncing,” except follow the steps
outlined below in “Select the Source Tracks and the
Destination Tracks” to set up effects on each of the source
tracks as desired. For specific information on how to apply
effects to playback tracks, see Chapter 7, Using Internal Effects
(VS8F-2), p. 99.
Bouncing With Effects: Selecting Source
Tracks and Destination Tracks
1. Track 9 and 10 are linked as described in “Channel Link”
(p. 77).
2. Press [FADER/MUTE] so that “TR” is lit.
3. Hold [STOP], and press the STATUS buttons for source
Tracks 5-8.
The STATUS buttons light green.
4. Press the STATUS buttons for the destination Track 9
and 10 so it is lit orange.
5. Hold one of the STATUS buttons and press [CLEAR].
This clears all existing routing assignments.
6. Hold the STATUS button for Track 9 and press the
SELECT buttons for the source Tracks 5 and 7 so that
they blink.
7. Hold the STATUS button for Track 9, press the SELECT
button for EFFECT 1 RTN and EFFECT 2 RTN.
This action will include Effect 1 and Effect 2 Returns in
the track bounce.
* While continuing to hold the STATUS button for Track 9,
hold [SHIFT] and press the SELECT button for EFFECT 1
RTN and EFFECT 2 RTN. This action will include Effect
3 and Effect 4 Returns in the track bounce.
8. Hold the STATUS button for Track 10 and press the
SELECT buttons for the source Tracks 6 and 8 so that
they blink.
9. Hold the STATUS button for Track 10, press the SELECT
button for EFFECT 1 RTN and EFFECT 2 RTN.
This action will include Effect 1 and Effect 2 Returns in
the track bounce.
* While continuing to hold the STATUS button for Track
10, hold [SHIFT] and press the SELECT button for
EFFECT 1 RTN and EFFECT 2 RTN. This action will
include Effect 3 and Effect 4 Returns in the track bounce.
10. The source Tracks 5-8 can now be monitored on Channel
9 and 10.
Continue using the steps for bouncing tracks found
above in “Track Bouncing.”
65
Chapter 4
4. Press [PLAY].
Track Bouncing With Effects
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Recording a Digital Source
You can record digital signals from CD players, digital
mixers such as the Roland VM-3100 or 7000 series, the
Roland VS series, DAT machines and other digital sources.
* The VS-1824’s digital interface conforms to S/P DIF. When
recording digital signals, be sure to use digital audio devices
that utilize the S/P DIF standards.
4. Set the Master Clock
In order to bring any digital signal into the VS-1824, you
must synchronize the VS-1824’s internal clock with the
digital signal from the your digital source.
a. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (System)].
The System icon appears in the display. If the System
menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
b. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE]
until it does, and press [F1].
S/P DIF (See Appendices p. 13)
Preparations for Recording a
Digital Source
1. Items Necessary for a Digital Recording
• VS-1824
c. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “MasterClk.”
] and [
] to move the
If “MasterClk” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm 1)].
d. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select either DIGIN1 or
DIGIN2, depending on whether you are using a coaxial
connector or an optical connector.
fig.03-33
• CD player, DAT, VS-880, VM-3100, VM-7000 or other
digital audio device
• Digital connector cable (coaxial or optical)
2. Making Connections
Connect the digital output connector of your audio
device to the VS-1824’s DIGITAL IN connector.
DIGITAL IN 1 is a coaxial connector, DIGITAL IN 2 is an
optical connector. Use the appropriate connector for
your digital device.
* DIGITAL IN 1 and DIGITAL IN 2 cannot be used
simultaneously.
3. Match Sample Rates
The VS-1824 can record digital signals only when the
sample rate of the song is set to the same sample rate of
the digital source. When a drive is initialized, the default
sample rate of a song is 44.1 kHz. If the sample rate of
the source is other than 44.1 kHz, create a new song with
that sample rate (p. 50). Many DAT players use a sample
rate of 48 kHz. If you wish to create original audio CDs,
you must use a sample rate of 44.1 kHz.
MasterClk (Master Clock)
This sets the VS-1824’s reference clock.
DIGIN1: Receives digital timing information from the
DIGITAL IN 1 connector (coaxial).
INT:
Uses the VS-1824’s own internal clock.
DIGIN2: Receives digital timing information from the
DIGITAL IN 2 connector (optical).
e. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Record your tracks as usual, following the steps for
“Recording to the Tracks,” p. 54. Press the SELECT button for
the Digital Input in Step 2.
If “Digital In Lock” is Displayed
This indicates the reference clock for the sample rate is
set by the digital signal from the DIGITAL IN connector.
You can now record using the digital connection.
If “Digital In Unlock” is Displayed
This indicates that no digital signal is being received
from the DIGITAL IN connector. Check for good
connections, or perhaps try another cable. It may also
indicate the sample rate for the selected song does not
match the sample rate of the digital source connected to
the DIGITAL IN connector. In this state, you cannot
record using the digital source.
66
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
Using the Metronome
Recording From a CD
The default setting of the VS-1824 does not permit recording
the output of CD players using the DIGITAL IN connector. If
you want to record from a CD using the DIGITAL IN
connection, use the following procedure. You will only need
to perform this procedure one time to enable the VS-1824 to
record digital signals from CD players.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (System)].
The System icon appears in the display. If the System
menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear in the display above [F2],
press [PAGE] until it appears, then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
] and [
cursor to “CD Digital Record.”
] to move the
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “On.”
The VS-1824 features a built-in metronome that will provide
a click track at any tempo you specify. By listening to the
click track as you record your instrument, you’ll be able to
record your performance with more accuracy. Recording
using a click track also allows song editing to be done by
measure and beat. The metronome tempo can be controlled
by the tempo map or sync track MIDI clock. When using this
feature, set up the tempo map (p. 202) or sync track (p. 200)
beforehand. When you create a new song, the tempo map
defaults to a 4/4 rhythm and a tempo of 120.
Turn On the Metronome
1. The metronome is output from both the MONITOR jacks
and the PHONES jack. Connect your playback audio
equipment to the MONITOR jacks.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
fig.11-28
Chapter 4
5. A message concerning copyright appears in the display.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES]. The
same message appears in the back cover of this Manual.
6. A message concerning Licensing Conditions is displayed.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES]. This
message appears in the back cover of this manual. From
now on, you can make digital connections and recordings
from CD players. If you do not agree to the conditions,
press [EXIT/NO]. If you press [EXIT/NO], you will not
be able to make any digital connections from CD players.
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Sync Gen. (Sync Generator)
This determines on which clock the metronome is played.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
You will now be able to record a CD from the digital
input (see p. 66 for details on recording from a digital
source).
Off:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
MTC:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
MIDIclk:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
SyncTr:
Metronome is played on Sync track.
4. Press [F6 (EXIT)].
The System menu icon appears.
5. Press [F5 (METRO)]. If “METRO” does not appear in the
display above [F5], press [PAGE] until you see
“METRO” above [F5], then press [F5 (METRO)].
The Metronome Parameter screen appears.
fig.11-26
67
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
6. Press [
], [
], [
] and [
] to move the
cursor to and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
settings.
3. Use [
] to move the cursor to “4/4” and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the time signature, if
desired.
Metronome Out
This selects where the metronome is output. For now, select
“INT.” Selecting “Off” prevents you from making any
settings related to the Metronome.
Off:
The metronome sound is not output.
INT:
The metronome sound is output from the MONITOR
and HEADPHONE jacks.
MIDI:
The metronome signal is only transmitted via the MIDI
OUT connector so you can trigger an external MIDI
sound source such as a drum machine or sound module.
If “MIDI” is selected, you will be able to specify the
MIDI note numbers and velocities for the beat and
downbeat as well.
Metro Level (Metronome Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0-127) of the metronome.
Metronome Mode
This determines when the metronome is played.
Rec Only:
The metronome sounds only during recording.
If your song contains any tempo and/or time signature
changes, you can enter them by pressing [F2 (NEW)]. Then,
you can use the [CURSOR] buttons and the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the new tempo, time signature, and the measure
where the change will take place. Up to 50 tempo and/or
time signature changes can be entered for each song.
4. When you are finished setting the Tempo Map, press
[F6 (EXIT)]. The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the
display.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Using an External MIDI Sound
Source to Play the Metronome
A MIDI sound source can be used as a metronome in place of
the VS-1824’s internal metronome. To do this, use the
following procedure:
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sound generator as
shown below.
fig.11-27
Rec&Play:
The metronome sounds during playback and recording.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Program the Tempo Map
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [TAP]. The tempo map appears
in the display.
fig.08-10
MIDI IN
VOLUME
Tempo Map Number
Tempo
Measure
Beat
MIDI IN B
PHONES
Cursor
2. Use [
] to move the cursor to “120.0” and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the tempo as desired.
MIDI Sound Generator
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)].
If “MIDI” does not appear in the display above [F4],
press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears, and then press
[F4 (MIDI)].
68
Chapter 4 Recording Operations
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting to “Out.”
9. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change each of
the settings.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
Metronome Out
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. The default setting is “OUT.”
This selects where the metronome is output. For now,
select “MIDI.” Selecting “Off” prevents you from
making any settings related to the Metronome.
Out:
Out put MIDI message of VS-1824 Select this in case
you want to send out note message of metronome or
settings of mixer parameters (message of control
change or exclusive message).
Thru:
Out put the MIDI message coming from MIDI IN
connector (through-out).
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
fig.11-28
Off:
The metronome sound is not output.
INT:
The metronome sound is output from the MONITOR
jacks.
MIDI:
The metronome signal is only transmitted via the
MIDI OUT connector.
Metronome Mode
This determines when the metronome is played.
Rec Only:
The metronome sounds only during recording.
Chapter 4
Rec&Play:
The metronome sounds during playback and
recording.
Metro Level (Metronome Level)
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Sync Gen. (Sync Generator)
This determines on which clock the metronome is played.
Off:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
MTC:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
MIDIclk:
Metronome is played on Tempo map.
SyncTr:
Metronome is played on Sync track.
7. Press [EXIT/NO].
The System menu icon appears in the display.
8. Press [F5 (METRO)].
The Metronome Parameter screen appears in the display.
fig.11-29
This adjusts the volume level (0-127) of the metronome
output.
MID:Acc.Note (Accent Note)
This sets the note number (C0-G9) for the downbeat.
When a drum set is playing, this selects specific
percussion sounds.
MID:Nrm.Note (Normal Note)
This sets the note number (C0-G9) for the upbeats. When
a drum set is playing, this selects specific percussion
sounds.
MID:MetroCh (Metronome Channel)
This sets the MIDI channel (1-16) for transmitting
Metronome sound MIDI Note Messages.
MID:Acc.Velo (Accent Velocity)
This sets the velocity (1-127) for the downbeats.
MID:Nrm.Velo (Normal Velocity)
This sets the velocity (1-127) for the upbeats.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
69
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
This chapter explains general information and applications of the digital mixer in the VS-1824. For detailed information about the
individual settings in each mixer channel, see Chapter 6, “Mixer Channel Settings.”
The built-in digital mixer in the VS-1824 provides many advantages.
• It keeps everything in the digital domain. There is no loss of fidelity when bouncing or mixing tracks.
• Digital mixers with automation, Snapshots, and Scenes give you more control over your mix.
• Dedicated digital faders and knobs make mixing faster and easier.
• A built-in digital mixer increases portability. There’s no need for an external mixer.
• You can compare different mixer settings instantly
• You can restore all effect and mixer settings when you re-load a song
• You can easily craft intricate mixes
• You can recall the levels and effects for bounced tracks to re-mix them
• You can automate your mix
The VS-1824 features a 28-channel digital mixer. The mixer is divided into three main sections, the 10-channel Input Mixer, which
in the signal path, is situated before the recorder, the 18-channel Track Mixer, which is placed after the recorder, and the Master
Block, which is used for determining which signal appears at each of the output jacks and connectors.
When recording new tracks, all sources go through the Input Mixer before arriving at the RECORDING bus. Thus, settings and
fader levels of the Input Mixer determine actual recording levels.
During a mixdown session, the Input Mixer and the Track Mixer can work side-by-side, for a total of 28 channels of automated
digital mixing. You can use the Input Mixer to bring additional sources into the master mix, such as tracks from a MIDI sound
module or another multitrack recorder. The 10-channel Input Mixer and the 18-Channel Track Mixer used together provide 28
channels of mixing.
To view the settings for any channel of the mixer, press the SELECT button for the channel you want to view or adjust. The top
row of SELECT buttons allow you to view any of the Input Mixer Channels 1-8, the DIGITAL inputs, or any of the effect returns.
The second row of SELECT buttons allow you to view any of the settings for the Track Mixer.
* For detailed information about the mixer signal flow, refer to the “Mixer Section Block Diagram” (Appendices p. 128).
70
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Fader/Mute Button
When “VS-1880” is selected as the fader
mode (p. 75)
There are two different ways to control the fader levels of the
Input and Track Mixers.
When “TR” is lit:
Method One: Switching the Fader
Functions (FADER/MUTE Button)
When “IN” is lit:
The physical faders on the VS-1824 can be used to control
either the 10-channel Input Mixer, or the 18-channel Track
Mixer. Press [FADER/MUTE] to assign the physical faders to
the mixer you want to control. When using this method,
always check the FADER/MUTE setting before you begin!
fig.01-12
You can adjust the volumes and STATUS buttons for Track
Channels 1–18.
The faders are used to control the Input Mixer (8 analog
inputs, 2 digital inputs), the Stereo Input, plus the Effects 1/3
Return and Effects 2/4 Return.
Faders 16 and 18 will control the Effect 3 and 4 Returns
respectively. They are accessed by holding [SHIFT] while
adjusting the fader.
Method Two: Input Mixer Screen
The display varies according to the “Fader Mode” (p. 75).
When “TR” is lit:
You can adjust the volumes and STATUS buttons for Track
Channels 1–12.
When “TR” is blinking:
You can adjust the volumes and STATUS buttons for Track
Channels 13–18.
When “IN” is lit:
The faders are used to control the Input Mixer (8 analog
inputs, 2 digital inputs), the Stereo Input, plus the Effects 1/3
Return and Effects 2/4 Return.
Faders 16 and 18 will control the Effect 3 and 4 Returns
respectively. They are accessed by holding [SHIFT] while
adjusting the fader.
When you create a new song, the fader positions of the Input
Mixer default to 100, which is equivalent to 0 dB. After
creating a new song, press any Input SELECT and you’ll see
this in the display. Simply use the INPUT Sensitivity knob to
adjust input recording levels. If you have a very low-level
signal, the Input Sensitivity knob is turned all the way up,
and you still can’t seem to get a loud enough signal, you can
move the cursor over to the “ATT” (attenuation) control in
the Input Mixer screen and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
boost the level of the incoming signal. You can also boost the
incoming signal level using an external preamp.
* Suggestion: The most common reason to switch the FADER/
MUTE button between TR and IN is if you need to mix more
than 18 tracks of audio. During mixdown of 18 tracks plus
additional sources (i.e. outputs from MIDI sound modules)
toggling [FADER/MUTE] between TR and IN allows you to
quickly assign the faders to Tracks and then to Inputs as
necessary for realtime mixing. During recording, you can
leave [FADER/MUTE] on TR.
71
Chapter 5
When “VS-1824” is selected as the fader
mode (p. 75)
Another way to use the mixer while recording is to leave the
FADER/MUTE button on TR. (It defaults to this setting
when you create a new song.) If you need to change the fader
level for an input, press SELECT button for the input you
wish to adjust, and then move the cursor to the FADER
setting. Move the cursor onto the fader value number (the
default level is 100) and use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
the level. With this method, the physical faders are only
controlling track playback levels, and have no affect on
record levels as long as “TR” remains lit.
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Determining Output
The VS-1824 has eight analog output jacks and two stereo
digital outputs. Each of these outputs can have various
signals assigned to them. Use the following procedure to
determine the signal for each output jack or connector.
3. Press [F2(Mon)]. If “Mon” does not appear above [F2],
press [PAGE] until “Mon” appears above [F2], and then
press [F2(Mon)].
fig.11-44
Level
MONITOR Output Connectors
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The Master Block is displayed.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “OUTPUT (MON).” Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to adjust the setting.
Balance
Level
This adjusts the volume level (0-127) for the MONITOR
jack. This is normally adjusted using the MONITOR
knob on the top panel.
Balance
fig.11-44a
This adjusts the left-right balance (L63-R63) for the
MONITOR jacks.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Mon (Monitor)
This selects what signal is to be assigned to the MONITOR
jacks.
MST:
The signal at the MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
FX1:
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
FX2:
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or EFFECT 3—the EFFECT 3
bus—when a second VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the
VS-1824.
AUX2/FX4:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or EFFECT 4—the EFFECT 4
bus—when a second VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the
VS-1824.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or AUX—the AUX bus—
when a second VS8F-2 Effect card is installed in the
VS-1824.
REC:
The signal at the RECORDING bus.
ST IN:
The signal assigned to the STEREO IN.
72
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
AUX Connectors
Digital Out Connectors
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The Master Block is displayed.
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The Master Block is displayed.
2. Press [F3 (AUX.A)].
2. Press [F5 (DOUT1)].
If “AUX.A” does not appear above [F3], press [PAGE]
until “AUX.A” appears above [F3], and then press
[F3 (AUX.A)].
If “DOUT1” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE]
until “DOUT1” appears above [F5], and then press [F5
(DOUT1)].
3. Determine what signal is assigned to the AUX jacks by
turning the TIME/VALUE dial.
3. Determine what signal is assigned to the DIGITAL OUT
1 connector by turning the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-45
fig.11-46
DOUT1 (DIGITAL OUT 1)
This selects which signal is assigned to the AUX A jacks.
FX1:
This selects what signal is assigned to the DIGITAL OUT
1 (coaxial) connector.
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
MST:
FX2:
The signal at the MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
MON:
AUX1/FX3:
The signal at the MONITOR jacks.
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or EFFECT 3 when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
FX1:
AUX2/FX4:
FX2:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or EFFECT 4 when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or EFFECT 3 when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or AUX when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 5
AUX A
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
AUX2/FX4:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or EFFECT 4 when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
AUX3/AUX:
The AUX B jacks are set using the same method. Press [F4
(AUX.B)] at Step 2.
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or AUX when a second
VS8F-2 effect card is installed in the VS-1824.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
The DIGITAL OUT 2 (optical) jacks are set the same way.
Press [F6 (DOUT2)] at Step 2.
73
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Direct Out Connectors
fig.09-16
The signal from each track of the recorder can be assigned
directly to each of the eight analog output jacks. This is
convenient for transferring tracks from the VS-1824 to
another multi-track recorder.
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The Master Block is displayed.
2. Press [F5 (DIR)].
If “DIR” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE] until
“DIR” appears above [F5], and then press [F5 (DIR)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings for DIRECT
OUT.
Track 9:
MASTER jack (L)
Track 10:
MASTER jack (R)
Track 11:
AUX A jack (L)
Track 12:
AUX A jack (R)
DIR OUT (DIRECT OUT)
Track 13:
AUX B jack (L)
Select Tracks to be assigned as Direct Out.
Track 14:
AUX B jack (R)
Off:
Track 15:
MONITOR jack (L)
Direct out is not used.
Track 16:
MONITOR jack (R)
1-8:
Tracks 1-8 are output from the analog output jacks 1-8.
When DIRECT OUT is used, the MASTER, MONITOR
and AUX jacks are used for the direct track outputs. The
signals at each of the DIGITAL OUT connectors can be
set as usual.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Tracks 17 and 18 cannot be output directly from the VS-1824.
fig.01-08.eps
Remember to turn the DIRECT OUT function off when you
are finished transferring your tracks.
Track 1:
MASTER jack (L)
Track 2:
MASTER jack (R)
Track 3:
AUX A jack (L)
Track 4:
AUX A jack (R)
Track 5:
AUX B jack (L)
Track 6:
AUX B jack (R)
Track 7:
MONITOR jack (L)
Track 8:
MONITOR jack (R)
9-16:
Tracks 9-16 are output from the analog OUTPUT jacks 18. When DIRECT OUT is used, the MASTER, MONITOR
and AUX jacks are used for the direct track outputs. The
signals at each of the DIGITAL OUT connectors can be
set as usual.
74
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Changing settings of the Track
Mixer Buttons and Faders
(Fader Mode)
Mixer Routing
You can switch the panel buttons and faders that are used to
affect each Track Mixer channel.
In a newly created song, inputs are assigned to tracks as
shown below. This is the default mixer routing.
Sources Assigned to Tracks
fig.03-05a
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display.
If the System menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
4. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], select “Fader
Mode.” If “Fader Mode” does not appear in the display,
press [F1 (Prm 1)].
Using the STATUS and SELECT buttons, it is possible to set
up almost any type of routing. To determine the source(s)
assigned to a track for recording, use the following procedure.
Fader Mode
VS-1824:
Assignments are as indicated on the panel.
VS-1880:
Assignments are according to the overlay
sheet provided with the workstation.
When “VS-1880” is selected as the fader mode (p. 75), inputs
are assigned to tracks as shown below.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
75
Chapter 5
Used for specifying the correspondence or assignment of
panel buttons and faders to each of the Track Mixer channels.
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
1. Press [FADER MUTE] several times until the “TR”
indicator lights.
→ “Switching the Fader Fuinction” (p. 71)
2. Press and hold the STATUS button for the track to be
recorded. The SELECT button for the default input
routed to that track blinks. The Input Assign screen
appears in the display for as long as the STATUS button
is held.
3. Press the Input SELECT button for the input you want
assigned to the track.
fig.03-05
Input Mixer Default
Assignment
You may have noticed that, after making a new recording,
you can still hear your live microphones or other sources that
are still plugged in. Or, you may hear sources that are
connected to inputs, even though you haven’t recorded a
track. The reason for this is that each channel of the Input
Mixer is automatically routed to the stereo master mix. This
is the default setting when a new song is created. Any source
connected to an INPUT jack in to the VS-1824 is routed to the
main stereo output. To change this setting, follow the
procedure below.
1. Press the Input SELECT button for each input being
used.
2. Use [
• You can assign more than one input to a track.
• You can assign a track to a track.
• You can assign more than one track to a track.
• You can assign the effect returns to a track.
• You can assign any combination of inputs, effect returns
and tracks to a track.
When you are done, the SELECT button for each source
routed to the track will be blinking.
To clear the mixer routing for all channels, press and hold
any STATUS button, and press [CLEAR].
* In this case, press [FADER MUTE] several times until the
“TR” indicator lights.
76
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the MIX section in the screen. Or, press
[F1 (MIX)]. If “MIX” does not appear above [F1], press
[PAGE] until you see “MIX” above [F1], and then press
[F1 (MIX)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the Mix Assign
Switch—located above the pan knob in the display—to
“Off.”
Mix Assign Switch
When this is set to “On”, the source at each Input
channel is assigned directly to the MIX bus. Set this to
“On” when you simply want to mix an input without
actually recording it.
4. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Channel Link
When recording or playing back a stereo source, traditional
mixers require you to control the left and right channels
separately, which can make it inconvenient to adjust EQ,
effects and other settings. With the VS-1824, it is possible to
link adjacent pairs of mixer channels so you can make
adjustments to both channels simultaneously. This feature is
called “Channel Link.” When Channel Link is on, adjacent
odd- and even-numbered channels are paired as shown
below. The settings of each odd-numbered channel will be
the same as the settings of the corresponding even-numbered
channel. When the settings of one channel are modified, the
settings of its paired channel will also change.
fig.11-20
Track 1
2
Track 3
4
Track 5
6
Track 7
8
Adjust the Levels of Linked
Channels
When Channel Link is on, the balance of both channels is
preserved, and their overall volume level is controlled with
the odd-numbered fader. Even-numbered faders do nothing
to stereo-linked channels. If you want to independently
adjust the fader levels of each channel, use the following
procedure.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track channel
that is linked.
2. Press [F5 (Fader)].
If “Fader” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE]
until you see “Fader” above [F5], and then press [F5
(Fader)].
3. Press [F6 (PRM.V)]. The values of each fader appear in
the display.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
setting.
fig.11-21
channel
Track 9
10
Chapter 5
Track 11
12
Track 13
14
Track 15
16
Even-Numbered Channel Level
Track 17
18
Total Level
Odd-Numbered Channel Level
Total Level
Link Adjacent Mixer Channels
It is possible to link adjacent channels on either the Input
Mixer or the Track Mixer. Use this when recording a stereo
input to a stereo track.
1. Press the SELECT button for the Input or Track channel
you want to have linked.
2. Press [F1 (Link)].
If “Link” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] until
you see “Link” above [F1], and then press [F1 (Link)].
This adjusts the total volume level (0-127). Use the fader
for the odd-numbered channel to change this setting.
Odd-Numbered Channel Level
This adjusts the total volume level (0-127) of the oddnumbered (left) channel.
Even-Numbered Channel Level
This adjusts the total volume level (0-127) of the evennumbered (right) channel.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “On.”
Link (Channel Link)
This turns the Channel Link function on and off.
4. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
77
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Adjusting the Panning of Channel
Linked Channels
When Channel Link is on, it is possible to adjust the
channels’ overall stereo position while preserving their pan
positions relative to each other. If you want to adjust the pan
for each channel independently, use the following procedure.
If you adjust the pan while sound is playing, you may notice
“blips” in the sound. This is not a malfunction. If you find it
annoying, adjust the pan when the sound is not playing.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track channel
that is linked.
2. Press [F1 (MIX)]. If “MIX” does not appear above [F1],
press [PAGE] until you see “MIX” above [F1], and then
press [F1 (MIX)].
3. Press [F6 (PRM.V)]. Each of the pan positions appears in
the display.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
setting.
fig.11-22
Channel
When “VS-1824” is selected on fader
mode (p. 75)
When a new song is created, CHANNEL LINK for the
DIGITAL input is ON. You can adjust parameters of
each individual channel if you turn OFF the CHANNEL
LINK. Once the CHANNEL LINK is turned OFF, you
can select the channel edit screen of the L channel on the
LCD by pressing the [DIGITAL].
To select the channel edit screen for the R channel, hold
down [SHIFT] and press [DIGITAL].
The volume of the L channel will be adjusted by moving
the [DIGITAL] channel fader.
If you want to adjust the volume of the R channel, move
the DIGITAL fader while holding the [SHIFT] down.
When “VS-1880” is selected on fader
mode (p. 75)
When a new song is created, the CHANNEL LINKs for
DIGITAL input and 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14 15/16 and
17/18 are ON. You can adjust parameters of individual
channels if you turn OFF their CHANNEL LINK. You
can select the edit screen for odd numbered channels by
pressing the [DIGITAL] button or SELECT button for the
target channel.
To select the channel edit screen for even numbered
channels, hold down the [SHIFT] and press the
[DIGITAL] button or press the SELECT button for the
target channel.
Even-Numbered Channel Pan
Total Balance
Odd-Numbered Channel Pan
Mix Assign Switch
When this is set to “On”, the source at each Input
channel is assigned directly to the MIX bus. Set this to
“on” when you simply want to mix an input without
actually recording it.
Total Balance
With the balance between both channels preserved, this
adjusts the total left-right balance (L63-R63).
Odd-Numbered Channel Pan
This adjusts the balance (L63-R63) of the odd-numbered
(left) channel.
Even Numbered Channel Pan
This adjusts the balance (L63-R63) of the even-numbered
(right) channel.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
78
The volume of the L channel will be adjusted by moving
the [DIGITAL] channel fader.
If you want to adjust the volume of the R channel, move
the fader for DIGITAL while holding the [SHIFT] down.
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Linking the Faders of Two or
More Channels (Fader Group)
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
The faders of two or more channels (inputs/tracks) can be
assigned to groups, so that when the fader of any channel is
operated, the fader levels (volume levels) of all channels in
that group will be adjusted as well.
When fader group settings have been made, you can adjust
the overall volume of a group while preserving the volume
balance of the channels included in that group.
Group
Select the group (1–8) to which you wish to assign the
fader. Channels for which the same number is selected
will be assigned to the same group. Moving any fader
within the group will adjust all faders assigned to that
group.
An image of fader group
(Faders cannot be moved.)
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play mode.
Chapter 5
1. Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] for the channel (input or
track) you wish to assign to a fader group.
If you select “Off,” the fader will not be assigned to any
group, and will function normally.
2. Press [PAGE] so that [F4] indicates “Group,” and then
press [F4 (Group)].
3. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
79
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Selecting V-Tracks
Using the Equalizer (EQ)
The VS-1824 provides 16 recordable tracks per channel.
These are called “V-Tracks,” short for “Virtual Tracks.” By
using the V-Tracks, you can record up to 288 tracks per song.
To change V-Tracks, use the procedure below.
Each channel of both the Input Mixer and the Track Mixer
has a user-definable EQ. You can choose either a two-band
(Low, High), or three-band (Low, Mid, High) parametric EQ
on a channel-by-channel basis. To use the EQ, first set up EQ
settings separately for each channel. Then, while listening to
the entire mix, make final adjustments to the EQ, panning,
and level for each channel.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track whose V-Track
you wish to change. The button indicator lights. The
Track Mixer screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “V. Trk” in the Track Mixer display. Or, press
[F5 (V.Trk)]. If “V.Trk” does not appear above [F5], press
[PAGE] until it appears, and then press [F5 (V.Trk)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the V-Track you
want to use. Note, you cannot change the V-Track while
the song is playing. If the song is playing, press [STOP],
and then use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the
V-Track.
fig.03-21
Track onto which performance data is recorded
Track to be recorded or played back
Tracks with no performance data recorded on them
* While adjusting the EQ when a track is playing, you may hear
short clicks, especially if you change the EQ value very
rapidly. This is not a malfunction. To avoid any such noise,
change EQ settings slowly.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track to which you want
to make EQ settings.
The Track SELECT button lights, and the Track Mixer
screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the EQ section of the display. Or, press
[F2 (Low)]. If “Low” does not appear in the display
above [F2], press [PAGE] until “Low” appears above
[F2], then press [F2 (Low)].
3. Press [YES]. The EQ curve display appears.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight
“SW” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “On.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the desired EQ parameter. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired value.
fig.03-34
Switch
Selector
Gain
Frequency
Q (definition)
Low-range
High-range
Middle-range
Sw (Equalizer Switch)
Turns the EQ on and off.
80
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
(Equalizer Select)
Mid
This setting selects how many bands of EQ are available.
2 Band EQ:
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB), the center
frequency (200 Hz-8 kHz), and the Q (0.5-16) of the midband EQ. The Mid band is not available when the 2 Band
EQ is selected.
Low and High bands are available for 28 inputs and/
or tracks at once.
3 Band EQ:
fig.03-34a
+
Low, Mid, and High bands are available for 16 Inputs
and/or Tracks at once.
You can use three-band EQ on as many as 16 tracks and/or
inputs at the same time. Three-band EQ cannot be used on
Tracks 17 and 18. Two-band EQ can be used on all 28 tracks
and inputs at the same time.
EQM gain
(-12–12dB)
Gain
0
Frequency
Low
-
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (40 Hz-1.5 kHz) of the low-band EQ.
+
fig.03-34c
+
EQM frequency (200Hz–8kHz)
fig.03-34b
EQM Q
(0.5–16)
EQL gain (-12–12dB)
Gain
0
Frequency
Gain
Chapter 5
0
Frequency
-
-
HIGH
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (500 Hz-18 kHz) of the high-band EQ.
EQL frequency (40Hz–1.5kHz)
fig.03-34d
+
EQH gain
(-12–12dB)
Gain
0
Frequency
-
EQH frequency (500Hz–18kHz)
6. Repeat Steps 1-4 to make EQ adjustments to other
channels.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
81
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Attenuation
Phase
You can adjust the overall volume of each channel of the
Input Mixer and the Track Mixer without using the channel
faders. You can lower (attenuate) the volume of a track that is
much louder than the others or increase the overall volume
of tracks that were recorded at too low a level. This makes
adjusting mix levels easier.
The VS-1824 features balanced (TRS) INPUT jacks. The pin
assignment of each input is configured as follows:
1. Press the SELECT button for the track (or input) you
want to attenuate or boost. The Track SELECT button
lights, and the Track Mixer screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “ATT.” Or, press [F2 (ATT)]. If “ATT” does not
appear in the display above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“ATT” appears above [F2], then press [F2 (ATT)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting.
fig.11-41
Some audio devices employ the opposite HOT (TIP) and
COLD (RING) wiring. Using such equipment as is may result
in poor sound placement, loss of correct left-right balance,
and loss of separation between left and right channels when
using stereo inputs. In such cases, you need to switch the
phase of each channel.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track whose phase you
want to switch.
The Track SELECT button lights, and the Track Mixer
screen appears in the display.
fig.11-40
Attenuation
ATT (Attenuation)
Lowers or boosts the volume level (-42 dB to +6 dB) of
the channel.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Phase.” Or, press [F3 (Phase)]. If “Phase” does
not appear in the display above [F3], press [PAGE] until
“Phase” appears above [F3], then press [F3 (Phase)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the Phase setting.
Phase
This selects the Phase (NRM, INV) for the channel.
Usually “NRM” is selected.
NRM:
Normal phase (same phase as input). Default setting.
INV:
Inverted (opposite) phase.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
82
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
When Phase Mismatch is a Problem
Audio equipment connected as shown below will result in
audio being out of phase. In such cases, select “INV” for any
of the channels that use the third lead as “hot.” It is
recommended that you check the HOT and COLD leads for
all of your audio equipment.
fig.11-42
Mixer
The third
HOT
Amplifier
Copying Mixer Settings
You can copy mixer settings—equalizer settings and levels—
from another channel to the channel currently shown in the
Channel Edit page.
The following settings can be copied.
Equalizer
Speaker
EQ low freq
The third
HOT
EQ low gain
The second
HOT
EQ mid freq
EQ mid gain
When Phase Mismatch is Not a
Problem
EQ mid Q
Audio equipment connected as shown below will not result
in audio being out of phase. In such cases, select “NRM.”
EQ high gain
fig.11-43
Mixer
The third
HOT
Amplifier
EQ high freq
Level
ATT
Speaker
Phase
The second
HOT
FX1 insert send level
The second
HOT
FX1 insert return level
FX2 insert send level
Mixer
Equalizer
Amplifier
The third
HOT
The second
HOT
The third
HOT
Speaker
FX2 insert return level
FX3 insert send level
Chapter 5
FX3 insert return level
FX4 insert send level
FX4 insert return level
Fader
Mix Send pan
FX1 send level
FX1 send pan
FX2 send level
FX2 send pan
FX3/AUX1 send level
FX3/AUX1 send pan
FX4/AUX2 send level
FX4/AUX2 send pan
AUX/AUX3 send level
AUX/AUX3 send pan
83
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
1. Press [SELECT (CH EDIT)] for the copy-destination
channel.
Mixer Scenes
2. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “Copy,” and then
press [F5 (Copy)].
There are two functions to quickly store and recall mixer
settings. One is referred to as “Scenes,” and the other is
referred to as “EZ Routing.” Use the method appropriate to
your situation.
Scene
A Scene stores all EQ, routing, fader-position, pan-position,
effects, V-Track selection, and master-level settings. You can
store eight different mixer Scenes per song, and each Scene
can be recalled using one of the eight dedicated Scene
buttons. Scenes are retained as part of the song data when
the song is saved. Scenes are useful for trying several
different mixes of a song using different combinations of
V-Tracks, effects and levels. When you copy a song to a
removable drive, such as a Zip drive, and then copy it into a
different VS-1824, the Scene settings are restored.
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy-source
channel.
* The monitoring level—the position of the MONITOR knob—
is not stored in a Scene. When you recall a stored Scene, the
monitor level will be determined by the current position of the
MONITOR knob.
EZ Routing
If the channel-linking is off for the copy-destination channel, the
channel-linking of the copy-source channel will also be considered
to be off even though it may actually be on, and only the settings of
individual channels will be copied. Similarly, when channel-linking
is on for the copy-destination channel, channel-linking of the copysource channel will also be considered to be on, even though it may
actually be off, and the settings of both channels will be copied.
4. Use the function buttons to select the settings to will be
copied.
[F1 (CpyEQ)]: Copy only the equalizer settings.
[F2 (CpyLv)]: Copy only the level settings.
[F4 (Exec)] or [ENTER (YES)]: Copy both the equalizer
and level settings.
[F6 (EXIT)] or [EXIT (NO)]: Exit without copying.
5. When the data has been copied, the display will indicate
“Complete.” Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
84
Similar to Scenes, EZ Routing also stores all settings related
to mixer routing, V-Track selection, effects, etc. However,
unlike Scenes, EZ Routing settings are global—that is, they
stay the same regardless of the song. EZ Routing templates
are not saved as part of a song. They can be saved within the
VS-1824. EZ Routing is useful for storing settings for
frequent activities, such as “Recording a Drum Kit,” or
“Bouncing Rhythm Section Tracks.” Use EZ Routing to store
mixer settings you might want to use on several different
songs. For detailed information on using EZ Routing, see
Chapter 8 “EZ Routing.”
Storing a Mixer Scene
1. Before storing a Scene, adjust and check all mixer
settings, including levels, panning, EQ, effects, V-Tracks,
etc.
2. Press [SCENE].
The button indicator lights.
3. Whenever [SCENE] is blinking, the LOCATOR buttons
are used to store or recall a Scene. Any LOCATOR which
already has a Scene stored will be blinking. LOCATOR
buttons that are available to store a Scene will be unlit.
4. Press any LOCATOR which is not lit. For example, if you
want to store the current mixer settings as Scene 7, then
press [7].
Chapter 5 Using the Digital Mixer
Recalling a Mixer Scene
Deleting a Mixer Scene
1. If the song is playing, press [STOP].
1. If the song is playing, press [STOP].
2. Press [SCENE]. The button indicator lights.
2. Press [SCENE]. The button indicator lights.
3. Whenever [SCENE] is blinking, the LOCATOR buttons
are used to recall a Scene. Any LOCATOR which already
has a Scene stored will be blinking.
3. Whenever [SCENE] is blinking, the LOCATOR buttons
are used to recall a Scene. Any LOCATOR which already
has a Scene stored will be blinking.
4. Press any lit LOCATOR. For example, if you want to
recall Scene 3, then press [3].
4. Hold [CLEAR], and press the LOCATOR for the Scene
you want to delete. For example, if you want to delete
Scene 3, hold [CLEAR] and then press [3].
Recalling a Scene Without
Affecting the Current Fader Values
Updating a Mixer Scene
When a Scene is recalled, the fader values will change to the
recalled settings. However, the positions of the top panel’s
faders themselves do not change. This means that the
locations of the faders will not match their actual values.
To make subtle changes in a Scene, you must recall the Scene,
then delete it, make the desired mixer setting changes, and
then re-store the scene. Follow the procedure described
below.
If you want just the fader values to remain unchanged when
you recall a Scene, make the following settings.
1. If the song is playing, press [STOP].
2. Press [SCENE]. The button indicator lights.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTM)].
3. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear in the display above [F1],
press [PAGE] until it appears, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
] and [
cursor to “Scene Mode.”
] to move the
If “Scene Mode” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm 1)].
Scene Mode:
This setting determines the fader settings when a Scene
is recalled.
All:
This changes the mixer settings to those of the Scene
being recalled. In this case, when a Scene is recalled, the
location of the faders on the top panel may no longer
match the actual fader settings.
4. After a Scene is recalled, the screen returns to the Playlist
display. The [SCENE] indicator goes off.
5. Press [SCENE]. The button indicator lights.
6. Hold [CLEAR], and press the LOCATOR for the Scene
you want to update. For example, if you want to clear
Scene 3, hold [CLEAR] and then press [3].
7. Make the desired changes to the mixer. It is not necessary
to re-configure the entire mixer. You only need to adjust
the value that you want updated from the previous
Scene setting. For example, just adjust the V-Track
setting for one playback track.
8. Once you’ve made the necessary mixer updates, press
[SCENE] and then press the LOCATOR button to store
the Scene again.
KeepF:
This changes the mixer settings to those of the Scene
being recalled, with the exception of the fader settings.
This means that even when a Scene is recalled, fader
settings will still match the fader positions on the top
panel.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “KeepF.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the playlist screen.
85
Chapter 5
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press the LOCATOR for the Scene you want to update.
For example, if you want to update Scene 3, then press
[3].
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
This chapter explains in detail each of the settings available
in the Mixer display for the Input Mixer, Track Mixer, and
the Master Block. For general information about signal flow,
busses, etc., see Chapter 5, “Using The Digital Mixer.”
Input Mixer
The following functions are found in the Input Mixer. Press
the SELECT button for any Input to view and adjust its
settings. Press the function button located under the display
corresponding to the setting you wish to change. Or, press
the [
], [
], [
], and [
] buttons to move the
cursor to the setting you wish to change. Use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the desired value.
You can use three-band EQ on as many as 16 tracks and/or
inputs at the same time. Three-band EQ cannot be used on
Tracks 17 and 18. Two-band EQ can be used on all 28 tracks
and inputs at the same time.
Low
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (40 Hz-1.5 kHz) of the low-band EQ.
Mid
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the center
frequency (200 Hz-8 kHz), and the Q (filter sharpness) (0.516) of the mid-band EQ. The Mid band is not available when
“2 Band EQ” is selected.
High
If you adjust the equalizer and the pan while sound is
playing, you may notice “blips” in the sound. This is not a
malfunction. If you find it annoying, adjust the equalizer and
the pan when the sound is not playing.
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (500 Hz-18 kHz) of the high-band EQ.
ENTER Button
When the cursor is positioned inside the EQ section, the
ENTER button will be blinking. Press [ENTER] to view a
graphic display of the EQ settings.
[F1 (MIX)] MIX Bus Enable/Pan
Sets the panning of the signal (L63-R63) sent to the MIX bus.
(Mix Assign Switch)
On:
The channel is assigned directly to the MIX bus. Set this
to “on” when you simply want to mix an input without
actually recording it.
Off:
[F6 (PRM.V)] Parameter View/
[F6 (CH.V)] Channel View
This changes the display from Channel View to Parameter
View. Press [F6 (PRM.V)] to view the parameter settings
(such as Pan or Effect Send) for all channels. Press [F6
(CH.V)] to view all of the mixer settings for just one channel.
The channel is not assigned to the MIX bus.
(Pan Knob)
[F1 (FX1)] Effect 1 Send
Sets the left-right balance (L63-R63) of the channel in the MIX
bus.
Channel settings for the EFFECT 1 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
[F2 (Low)], [F3 (Mid)], and
[F4 (High)] Equalizer
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
Sw (Equalizer Switch)
Turns the EQ on and off. The EQ switch must be ON to make
settings in the EQ section.
(Equalizer Select)
This setting selects how many bands of EQ are available in
the channel.
2 Band EQ:
Low and High bands are available.
3 Band EQ:
Low, Mid, and High bands are available.
86
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
Level
Sets the send level (0-127) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 1
Bus.
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 1
Bus.
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Send
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Send
Channel settings for the EFFECT 2 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Channel settings for the EFFECT 4 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
Pre:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
Post:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
Level
Level
Sets the send level (0-127) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 2
Bus.
Sets the send level (0-127) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 4
Bus.
Panning
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 2
Bus.
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 4
Bus.
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Send
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Send
Channel settings for the EFFECT 3 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Channel settings for the AUX Bus. Sets the AUX Send Switch,
the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Switches the channel to the AUX bus.
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
The channel is not sent to the AUX bus.
Pre:
Pre:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
The signal is sent to the AUX bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
Post:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
The signal is sent to the AUX bus after it passes through
the mixer fader.
Chapter 6
Off:
Level
Level
Sets the send level (0-127) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 3
Bus.
Sets the send level (0-127) of the signal sent to the AUX Bus.
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the signal sent to the AUX Bus.
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the signal sent to the EFFECT 3
Bus.
If you are not using VS8F-2 Effect Expansion Boards, the
Effect Send parameters will be replaced with additional AUX
send busses.
87
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert
After pressing [F1 (FX1In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER] (see “Effect Types,” p. 99).
After pressing [F2 (FX2In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
FX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
FX2 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
Off:
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Ins:
Ins:
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
InsL:
InsL:
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsR:
InsR:
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsS:
InsS:
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel. In other words, it is sent through one side
of a stereo effect before it passes through the other side
of the effect.
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel. In other words, it is sent through one side
of a stereo effect before it passes through the other side
of the effect.
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well (p. 105)
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well (p. 105).
Snd (Insert Send Level)
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
88
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert
InsL:
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
After pressing [F3 (FX3In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
InsR:
FX3 (Effect Insert Switch)
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
InsS:
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel. In other words, it is sent through one side
of a stereo effect before it passes through the other side
of the effect.
Ins:
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
InsL:
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsR:
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsS:
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel. In other words, it is sent through one side
of a stereo effect before it passes through the other side
of the effect.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
[F1 (Link)] Channel Link
Use this setting to link or unlink adjacent mixer channels.
Linking adjacent channels allows you to control both sides of
a stereo pair with a single set of parameters.
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
On:
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
Off:
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Adjacent channels are not linked.
[F4 (FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert
After pressing [F4 (FX4In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
Adjacent channels are linked.
[F2 (ATT)] Attenuation
Lowers or boosts the volume level (-42 dB to +6 dB) of the
channel.
FX4 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Ins:
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
89
Chapter 6
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well (p. 105).
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well (p. 105).
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F3 (Phase)] PHASE
This selects the Phase (NRM, INV) for each channel. If you
are using two microphones to record one source, it is
possible that you will experience “phase cancellation.” This
is usually caused by a microphone that is wired in an
inverted fashion and results in the lowering or muting of
your signal when both channels are played. If you are
experiencing this, try setting this parameter to “INV” for one
of the microphones. Usually, “NRM” is selected.
Track Mixer
The following functions are found in the Track Mixer. Press
the SELECT button for any Track to view and adjust the
settings. Press the function button located under the display
corresponding to the setting you wish to change. Or, press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to
settings you wish to change. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the value.
NRM:
Normal phase (track has same phase as the input). This is the
default setting.
Inverted (opposite) phase.
If you adjust the equalizer and the pan while sound is
playing, you may notice “blips” in the sound. This is not a
malfunction. If you find it annoying, adjust the equalizer and
the pan when the sound is not playing.
[F4 (Group)] FADER GROUP
[F1 (MIX)] MIX Bus Enable/Pan
Turn the TIME/VALUE knob to assign the selected channel
to one of the eight Fader Groups.
Assigns the channel to the MIX bus and determines the
balance of the signal in the Master Stereo Mix.
(Mix Assign Switch)
INV:
[F1 (Meter)] METER
Switches the Meter Display in the Mixer screen between prefader and post-fader signal levels. Pre-fader indicates the
level of the signal before it passes through the channel fader
and post-fader indicates the level of the signal after it passes
through the channel fader.
[F3 (Solo)] SOLO
On:
The channel is assigned directly to the MIX bus. Set this
to “on” when you simply want to mix an input without
actually recording it.
Off:
The channel is not assigned to the MIX bus.
(Pan Knob)
Sets the left-right balance (L63-R63) of the channel in the MIX
bus.
Use this to turn the SOLO function on and off for a mixer
channel (p. 43).
[F2 (Low)], [F3 (Mid)], and
[F4 (High)] Equalizer
[F4 (Mute)] MUTE
Sw (Equalizer Switch)
Use this to turn the MUTE function on and off for a mixer
channel (p. 42).
Turns the EQ on and off. The EQ switch must be on to make
settings in the EQ section.
(Equalizer Select)
[F5 (Fader)] FADER
This setting selects how many bands of EQ are available in
the channel.
2 Band EQ:
Controls the level (0-127) of the signal.
Low and High bands are available.
3 Band EQ:
Low, Mid, and High bands are available.
You can use three-band EQ on as many as 16 tracks and/or
inputs at the same time. Three-band EQ cannot be used on
Tracks 17 and 18. Two-band EQ can be used on all 28 tracks
and inputs at the same time.
90
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
Low
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (40 Hz-1.5 kHz) of the low-band EQ.
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Send
Channel settings for the EFFECT 2 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Mid
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the center
frequency (200 Hz-8 kHz), and the Q (filter sharpness) (0.516) of the mid-band EQ. The Mid band is not available when
“2 Band EQ” is selected.
High
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
This adjusts the gain (-12 dB to +12 dB) and the shelving
frequency (500 Hz-18 kHz) of the high-band EQ.
ENTER Button
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
When the cursor is positioned inside the EQ section, the
ENTER button will be blinking. Press [ENTER] to view a
graphic display of the EQ settings.
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
Level
[F5 (V.Trk)] V-Track Select
Sets the channel’s send level (0-127) to the EFFECT 2 Bus.
Selects the V-Track (1-16) for playback or recording. The
V-Track setting is only available in the Track Mixer. The
VS-1824 must be stopped before this value can be changed. A
small box indicates that a recording has been made on the
V-Track. A flat line indicates the V-Track has not yet been
recorded.
Sets the channel’s panning (L63-R63) in the EFFECT 2 Bus.
[F6 (PRM.V)] Parameter View/
[F6 (CH.V)] Channel View
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
[F1(FX1)] Effect 1 Send
Channel settings for the EFFECT 1 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Send
Channel settings for the EFFECT 3 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
Chapter 6
Changes the display from Channel View to Parameter View.
Press [F6 (PRM.V)] to view the Parameter settings (such as
Pan or Effect Send) for all channels. Press [F6 (CH.V)] to view
the entire mixer settings for just one channel.
Panning
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
Level
Sets the channel’s send level (0-127) to the EFFECT 3 Bus.
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the channel to the EFFECT 3
Bus.
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
Level
Sets the channel’s send level (0-127)to the EFFECT 1 Bus.
Panning
Sets the channel’s panning (L63-R63) in the EFFECT 1 Bus.
91
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Send
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert
Channel settings for the EFFECT 4 Bus. Sets the Effect Send
Switch, the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
After pressing [F1 (FX1In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
FX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
Switches the channel to the EFFECT bus.
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
Off:
The channel is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Pre:
Ins:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
Post:
InsL:
The signal is sent to the EFFECT bus after it passes
through the mixer fader.
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
Level
InsR:
Sets the channel’s send level (0-127) to the EFFECT 4 Bus.
Panning
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
Sets the channel’s panning (L63-R63) in the EFFECT 4 Bus.
InsS:
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Send
Channel settings for the AUX Bus. Sets the AUX Send Switch,
the Send Level (0-127) and panning.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
Switches the channel to the AUX bus.
Off:
The channel is not sent to the AUX bus.
Pre:
The signal is sent to the AUX bus before it passes
through the mixer fader.
Post:
The signal is sent to the AUX bus after it passes through
the mixer fader.
Level
Sets the send level (0-127) of the channel to the AUX Bus.
Panning
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the channel to the AUX Send
Bus.
If you are not using the VS8F-2 Effect Expansion Boards, the
effect send parameters will be replaced with additional AUX
send buses.
92
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel.
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert
After pressing [F2 (FX2In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
After pressing [F3 (FX3In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
FX2 (Effect Insert Switch)
FX3 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Ins:
Ins:
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
InsL:
InsL:
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsR:
InsR:
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsS:
InsS:
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel.
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel.
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well.
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the track or input that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
93
Chapter 6
Off:
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F4(FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert
[F3 (Phase)] PHASE
After pressing [F4 (FX4In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
This selects the Phase (NRM, INV) for each channel. If you
are using two microphones to record one source, it is
possible that you will experience “phase cancellation.” This
is usually caused by a microphone that is wired in an
inverted fashion and results in the lowering or muting of
your signal when both channels are played. If you are
experiencing this, try setting this parameter to “INV” for one
of the microphones. Usually “NRM” is selected.
FX4 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effect is connected in the mixer.
Off:
The effect is not inserted in the channel.
Ins:
Both channels of the stereo effect are inserted into the
channel.
InsL:
The left channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
NRM:
Normal phase (same phase as input). (Default setting).
INV:
Inverted (opposite) phase.
InsR:
The right channel of the effect is inserted into the mixer
channel.
InsS:
Each channel of the effect is inserted in series into the
mixer channel.
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be inserted on
any other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect
can be inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the name of
an input or track appears as the Insert Switch setting, the
effect is already being inserted in the displayed input or track.
You will need to select the input or track that is using that
effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off. Remember that
effects can be inserted in the MIX bus as well.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
[F4 (Group)] FADER GROUP
Turn the TIME/VALUE knob to assign the selected channel
to one of the eight Fader Groups.
[F1 (Meter)] METER
Switches the Meter Display in the Mixer screen between prefader and post-fader signal levels. Pre-fader indicates the
level of the signal before it passes through the channel fader
and post-fader indicates the level of the signal after it passes
through the channel fader.
[F2 (Stats)] STATUS
After pressing [F2 (Stats)] or moving the cursor to the
“Status” area, press [ENTER]. The display shows the Track
Status. (The Track Status is changed by pressing the STATUS
button above the channel fader.)
PLAY
The track is set for playback.
[F1 (Link)] Channel Link
Use this setting to link or unlink adjacent mixer channels.
On:
Adjacent channels are linked.
Off:
Adjacent channels are not linked.
[F2 (ATT)] Attenuation
Lowers or boosts the volume level (-42 dB to +6 dB) of the
channel.
94
MUTE
The track is muted.
SOURCE
The input source or track assigned to the channel is heard.
REC
The track is ready to be recorded, or is being recorded.
Use this area as another way to assign inputs, tracks, and
effect returns to a track to be recorded. Move the cursor to
the source, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to place a mark
for all sources to be assigned to the track.
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F3 (Solo)] SOLO
Use this to turn the SOLO function on and off for a mixer
channel.
[F4 (Mute)] MUTE
Use this to turn the MUTE function on and off for a mixer
channel.
[F5 (Fader)] FADER
Controls the level (0-127) of the signal.
Master Block
The following functions are found in the Master Block
section of the mixer. Press [EDIT/SOLO] to view and adjust
the settings of the Master Block. Press the function button
located under the display corresponding to the setting you
wish to change. Or, press [
], [
], [
], and [
]
to move the cursor to the setting you wish to change. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired value.
If you adjust the pan while sound is playing, you may notice
“blips” in the sound. This is not a malfunction. If you find it
annoying, adjust the pan when the sound is not playing.
[F1 (MST)] MASTER
Adjusts the level and balance of the master mix.
Level
This adjusts the volume level (0-127) for the MASTER OUT
jacks. This is normally adjusted using the Master fader.
Balance
This adjusts the left-right balance (L63-R63) for the MASTER
OUT jacks.
[F2 (MON)] MONITOR
Adjusts the level and balance of the Monitor mix.
Level
Balance
This adjusts the left-right balance (L63-R63) for the
MONITOR jacks.
[F3 (AUX.A)] AUX A
This selects the signal to be assigned to the AUX A jacks.
FX1:
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
FX2:
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 3 bus.
AUX2/FX4:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 4 bus.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the AUX bus.
95
Chapter 6
This adjusts the volume level (0-127) for the MONITOR jack.
This is normally adjusted using the MONITOR knob on the
top panel.
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F4 (AUX.B)] AUX B
[F6 (DOUT2)] DIGITAL OUT 2
This selects the signal to be assigned to the AUX B jacks.
FX1:
This selects the signal to be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT 2
(optical) connector.
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
FX2:
MST:
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
MON:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 3 bus.
FX1:
AUX2/FX4:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 4 bus.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the AUX bus.
The signal at the MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
The signal at the MONITOR jacks.
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
FX2:
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 3 bus.
AUX2/FX4:
[F5 (DOUT1)] DIGITAL OUT 1
This selects the signal to be assigned to the DIGITAL OUT 1
(coaxial) connector.
MST:
The signal at the MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
MON:
The signal at the MONITOR jacks.
FX1:
The signal at the EFFECT 1 bus.
FX2:
The signal at the EFFECT 2 bus.
AUX1/FX3:
The signal at the AUX1 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 3 bus.
AUX2/FX4:
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 4 bus.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the AUX bus.
The signal at the AUX2 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the EFFECT 4 bus.
AUX3/AUX:
The signal at the AUX3 bus, or, when a second VS8F-2 Effect
card is installed in the VS-1824, the AUX bus.
[F1 (FX1In)] Effect 1 Insert
After pressing [F1 (FX1In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
FX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
This connects the effect in the Master Block section of the
mixer.
Off:
The effect is not inserted.
Ins:
The stereo effect is inserted into the Master Block.
* When Ins is selected, that effect cannot be used on any mixer
channel. If the name of an input or track appears as the Insert
Switch setting, the effect is already inserted in the displayed
input or track. You will need to select the input or track that is
using that effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
96
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F2 (FX2In)] Effect 2 Insert
[F4 (FX4In)] Effect 4 Insert
After pressing [F2 (FX2In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
After pressing [F4 (FX4In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
FX2 (Effect Insert Switch)
FX4 (Effect Insert Switch)
This connects the effect in the Master Block section of the
mixer.
This connects the effect in the Master Block mixer section.
Off:
Off:
The effect is not inserted.
The effect is not inserted.
Ins:
Ins:
The stereo effect is inserted into the Master Block.
The stereo effect is inserted into the Master Block.
* When Ins is selected, that effect cannot be used on any mixer
channel. If the name of an input or track appears as the Insert
Switch setting, the effect is already inserted in the displayed
input or track. You will need to select the input or track that is
using that effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
* When Ins is selected, that effect cannot be used on any mixer
channel. If the name of an input or track appears as the Insert
Switch setting, the effect is already inserted in the displayed
input or track. You will need to select the input or track that is
using that effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
[F3 (FX3In)] Effect 3 Insert
After pressing [F3 (FX3In)], or moving the cursor to the
FXIns area, press [ENTER].
Chapter 6
FX3 (Effect Insert Switch)
This connects the effect in the Master Block section of the
mixer.
Off:
The effect is not inserted.
Ins:
The stereo effect is inserted into the Master Block.
* When Ins is selected, that effect cannot be used on any mixer
channel. If the name of an input or track appears as the Insert
Switch setting, the effect is already inserted in the displayed
input or track. You will need to select the input or track that is
using that effect and turn its Effect Insert Switch off.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
97
Chapter 6 Mixer Channel Strip Detail
[F5 (DIR)] DIRECT OUT
[F2 (FX2)] Effect 2 Master Send
This selects tracks to be assigned as Direct Outputs.
Master Block settings for the EFFECT 2 Bus.
Off:
Level
Direct out is not used.
Sets the master send level (0-127) of the EFFECT 2 Bus.
1-8:
Panning
Tracks 1-8 are output from the analog output jacks 1-8. When
DIRECT OUT is used, the MASTER, MONITOR and AUX
jacks are used for the direct track outputs. The signals at each
of the DIGITAL OUT connectors can be set as usual.
Sets the overall panning (L63-R63) of the EFFECT 2 Send.
Track 1:
MASTER jack (L)
Master Block settings for the EFFECT 3 Bus.
Track 2:
MASTER jack (R)
Level
Track 3:
AUX A jack (L)
Sets the master send level (0-127) of the EFFECT 3 Bus.
Track 4:
AUX A jack (R)
Panning
Track 5:
AUX B jack (L)
Sets the overall panning (L63-R63) of the EFFECT 3 Send.
Track 6:
AUX B jack (R)
Track 7:
MONITOR jack (L)
Track 8:
MONITOR jack (R)
9-16:
[F4 (FX4)] Effect 4 Master Send
Master Block settings for the EFFECT 4 Bus.
Level
Tracks 9-16 are output from the analog output jacks 1-8.
When DIRECT OUT is used, the MASTER, MONITOR and
AUX jacks are used for the direct track outputs. The signals
at each of the DIGITAL OUT connectors can be set as usual.
Sets the master send level (0-127) of the EFFECT 4 Bus.
Panning
Sets the overall panning (L63-R63) of the EFFECT 4 Send.
Track 9:
MASTER jack (L)
Track 10:
MASTER jack (R)
[F5 (AUX)] AUX Master Send
Track 11:
AUX A jack (L)
Master Block settings for the AUX Bus.
Track 12:
AUX A jack (R)
Level
Track 13:
AUX B jack (L)
Sets the master send level (0-127) of the AUX Bus.
Track 14:
AUX B jack (R)
Panning
Track 15:
MONITOR jack (L)
Sets the panning (L63-R63) of the master AUX Send.
Track 16:
MONITOR jack (R)
Tracks 17 and 18—since they are typically used for
mastering—are not routed to direct outputs.
[F1 (FX1)] Effect 1 Master Send
Master Block settings for the EFFECT 1 Bus.
Level
Sets the master send level (0-127) of the EFFECT 1 Bus.
Panning
Sets the overall panning (L63-R63) of the EFFECT 1 Send.
98
[F3 (FX3)] Effect 3 Master Send
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
One effect expansion board, VS8F-2 is pre-installed in the
VS-1824. Up to two of these effect expansion boards can be
installed in the VS-1824. With two VS8F-2s installed, four
high-quality stereo effects are available for use during
recording, bouncing and mixing.
Some of the procedures described in this chapter require the
installation of the second (optional) VS8F-2 Effect Expansion
Board.
Effect Types
There are two types of effects patches in the VS8F-2 Effects
Expansion Board: insert effects, and loop effects. The effect
type determines how the effect should be connected in the
mixer. The two ways to connect an effect within the mixer
are referred to as “insert effects,” and “loop effects.” The
differences in these methods are explained in the following
sections.
Insert Effects
Location of Effects
Each VS8F-2 effect expansion board installed in the VS-1824
is given its own control area. These areas are called EFFECT
A and EFFECT B. With two VS8F-2s installed, each of the
effects in EFFECT A—FX1 and FX2—and the effects in
EFFECT B—FX3 and FX4—may be used. You can apply up to
four effects at a time to each channel of the VS-1824’s mixer.
fig.05-01
EFFECTS
With insert effects, the effect is added directly, either
between the mixer channel’s equalizer and fader, or before
the Master fader. Effects such as compressors, EQs, guitar
amp simulators and mic simulators are normally patched as
inserts. If you set up an effect as an insert on either a track or
an input, it cannot be used on any other tracks or inputs.
When an effect is inserted on a mixer channel, that effect
cannot be used in a loop on another channel. For example, if
you select Preset Patch P067 Limiter as Effect 1 and insert it
on Track 8, no other inputs or tracks can be routed to Effect 1.
fig.05-03
EFFECT A
FX1
EQ
(2band, 3band)
FX2
Level
(Fader)
FX1
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX1
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX1
FX2
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX2
MIX bus or REC bus
FX3
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX3
MIX bus or REC bus
FX4
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX4
MIX bus or REC bus
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFFECT B
FX3
FX4
AUX bus
99
Chapter 7
* Depending on the effects used, when mixing with different
effects inserted into each channel, or mixing some channels
having effects inserted while other channels have no effects,
slight timing shifts between tracks may occur.
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Loop Effects
Making the Effect Connection
With loop effects, the original sound and the effected sound
are mixed together. Effects such as reverbs and delays are
typically connected using a loop.
The VS-1824 Channel Mixer display provides two different
areas for connecting effects. One area is used for connecting
insert effects only, and is labeled “FXIns.” The other area is
used for connecting loop effects. This area appears at the
bottom of the Mixer screen, and is labeled “FX1”, “FX2”,
“FX3”, and “FX4.” To find out if an effect should be
connected as an insert or as a loop, see “Preset Patch List”
(Appendices p. 20). Look under “Type.” The Type of effect
determines which area of the Mixer display should be used
to connect it.
fig.05-07
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Level
(Fader)
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
FX1
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX1
MIX bus or REC bus
FX2
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX2
MIX bus or REC bus
FX3
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX3
MIX bus or REC bus
FX4
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
FX4
MIX bus or REC bus
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
AUX bus
In a loop effect, the original signal is copied and sent to the
effect. Later in the signal flow, the output of the effect
processor is mixed back in with the original signal. A loop
effect provides independent control of the original signal
(using the channel fader) and the Effect Return Level. All 28
channels of the VS-1824s mixer can be routed to a single
effect using a loop effect. For example, you can have up to 28
different mixer channels routed to the same reverb, with
different send levels on each channel.
A mixer channel can be connected to a loop effect using
either of two different switch positions. These are referred to
as “pre-fader” and “post-fader.”
Pre Fader
With the effect switch set to Pre Fader, the signal is sent to
the effect before it passes through its channel fader. The
position of the channel fader has no affect on the amount of
signal going to the effect. The signal is sent to the effect at the
level set with the Effect Send Level value.
Post Fader
With the effect switch set to Post Fader, the signal is sent to
the effect after it passes through the channel fader. The
position of the channel fader has a direct bearing on the
amount of signal going to the effect. As the channel fader is
lowered, the amount of signal going to the effect is lowered.
As the channel fader is raised, the amount of signal going to
the effect is raised. As a result, the direct signal and the
effected signal always stay in proportion.
100
Procedure for Using Effects
To use an effect in the VS-1824, follow these three general
steps:
1. Select the Effect Patch to use.
2. Determine whether the effect should be used as an insert
effect or in a loop effect.
3. Connect the effect within the mixer. The exact methods
for each of these three steps are explained below.
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Selecting Effect Patches
An effect setting is referred to as a “patch.” The VS8F-2
provides over 240 preset patches and 200 user patches. Use
the following procedure to select a preset patch.
* Patches using the Reverb, Gated Reverb, Vocoder 2, Voice
Transformer or Mastering Tool Kit algorithms cannot be
selected for FX2 and FX4. A horizontal line is drawn through
the effect name in such cases. If you want to use these
algorithms, select them from FX1 or FX 3:
fig.05-11
Selecting a Preset Patch
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. To use EFFECT A (FX1 and FX2), hold [SHIFT] and press
[F3 (EFFECT A)]. To use EFFECT B (FX3 and FX4), hold
[SHIFT] and press [F4 (EFFECT B)].
3. Press [F1 (FX1)]. The Effect 1 screen appears in the
display. If “FX1” does not appear above [F1], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX1)].
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
], [
], [
* With some effects, you may not want the direct sound output,
or other special settings may be required. Please refer to
“Algorithm List” (Appendices p. 25) when making these
settings.
],
and [
] to move the cursor to the effect you wish to
use. The function buttons work as shown below.
fig.05-02
Cursor
Current Effect
Function Buttons
[F1 (Preset)]: Displays the Preset patch list.
Chapter 7
[F2 (User)]: Displays the User patch list.
[F4 (Exec)]: Selects the effect and exits the screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen without selecting the effect.
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 1 screen appears in the display.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If “No Effect Board” Appears in the Display
This indicates there is no VS8F-2 installed. In this case,
you cannot use the internal effects. If the message
appears even when a VS8F-2 is installed, it indicates that
the effect board is not installed properly. Perform the
shutdown procedure and turn the power off as
described in “Turning Off the Power” (p. 32), and then
reinstall the VS8F-2 correctly.
101
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Creating and Saving User
Effect Patches
A VS-1824 with one or two of the optional VS8F-2 effect
boards installed will have 200 user patches, which are the
same as the first 200 preset patches. It is possible to overwrite
the user patches to store your own custom effects. To create
your own user patch, first select the preset patch whose
sound is closest to what you wish to create. Then alter the
settings of that patch. If you do not save the changes as a user
preset effect, your edits are lost once you select another patch
or recall a different Scene.
The function buttons work as shown below:
fig.05-13
[F1 (← Blk)]:
Displays the settings of the previous effect block.
[F2 (Blk →)]:
Create a User Effect Patch
1. Using the first six steps described in “Selecting Effect
Patches” (p. 101), select the patch containing the effect
algorithms you will base your new effect on. The
following screen is displayed:
Displays the settings of the next effect block.
[F4 (SAVE)]:
Displays the Effect Save screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
fig.05-12
Patch Number
Algorithm Name
Patch Name
This Block is On
Cursor
This Block is Off
2. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor in the screen.
When you select a multi-effect patch (e.g., Guitar Multi
2), use the TIME/VALUE dial to turn each effect within
that patch on or off. In the display, effect blocks that are
currently activated and on are highlighted. Move the
cursor to the highlighted effect block whose settings you
wish to change.
5. When saving an effect settings, it is necessary to either
save it as a user patch, or save the mixer settings as a
Scene. If you want to use a custom effect in a different
song, save it as a user patch. If you are only going to use
it in the currently selected song, you can save it as part of
a mixer Scene. At this point, save the effect using one of
the two methods described below.
Save an Effect as a User Patch
1. Press [F4 (SAVE)]. The Effect Name screen appears in the
display.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination
patch number (U000-U199).
fig.05-14
Patch Number
Patch Name
3. Press [F3 (Edit)] or press [ENTER/YES]. A list of settings
available in the effect block is displayed.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor in the screen. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
settings. For more detailed information about the
settings included in each effect algorithm, refer to the
“Algorithm List” (Appendices p. 25).
3. Use [
] and [
], and the TIME/VALUE dial to
create the name of the user patch. The function buttons
work as shown:
[F1 (Hist)]:
Press this button to take you through a list of the last 20
user patch names entered, one at a time.
102
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
[F2 (Clr)]:
Connecting Insert Effects
Clears all the characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]:
Stores the user patch and exits the screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen without storing the user patch.
If you press [NUMERICS/ASCII] so it is lit, you can use the
SELECT buttons to enter characters in a manner similar to a
computer keyboard.
4. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)]. The user
patch is saved.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Save an Effect Patch as Part of a
Mixer Scene
Connecting Insert Effects to Inputs
and Tracks
The following section explains in detail the steps to connect
insert effects, and provides examples for each method.
1. Select the channel on which the effect is to be inserted.
Press the SELECT button for either an input channel or a
track channel. The button indicator lights, and the Mixer
Screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F1 (FX1In)]. If “FX1In” does
not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX1In”, and then press [F1 (FX1In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
] and [
you want to insert.
] to move the cursor to the effect
Effect Insert Switch
For more detailed information, refer to “Storing a Mixer
Scene,” p. 84.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Press [SCENE]. The button indicator lights.
3. Press a SCENE button (1-8) that is not blinking. For
example, if you wanted to store the settings to Scene 6,
then press [6].
5. If you wish to clear the scene, press [SCENE] once. Then
hold [CLEAR] and press the blinking SCENE button
which you wish to clear.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the selected effect's
Effect Insert Switch.
FX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effect is connected.
About Algorithms
An algorithm determines the composition or structure of
an effect. The VS8F-2 provides 36 different algorithms.
Each effect patch uses at least one, and in many cases
more than one of these algorithms. Check the algorithms
used in each patch in “Preset Patch List” (Appendices p.
20). For details on each algorithm, refer to “Algorithm
List” (Appendices p. 25).
Off:
The channel is not routed into the effect.
Ins:
The channel is routed into both channels of the
stereo effect.
InsL: The channel is routed into the left channel of
the stereo effect.
InsR: The channel is routed into the right channel of
the stereo effect.
InsS: The channel is routed into both channels of the
stereo effect, in series.
103
Chapter 7
4. After the Scene is stored, the [SCENE] indicator goes off.
Insert Return Level
Insert Send Level
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Snd (Insert Send Level)
fig.05-05
Ins
L
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to the
effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
R
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
FX
R
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
InsL
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
L
6. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
FX
Use the above steps to insert FX2-FX 4.
InsR
EQ
(2band, 3band)
FX
R
R
InsS
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
L
FX
R
R
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be used on any
other channel. When InsL or InsR is selected, that effect can be
inserted only on one other mixer channel. If the effect is
already being used as an insert effect, the display shows you
the channel on which the effect is inserted, as shown in the
following illustration.
When FX1 is used in Track 6
The way you insert an effect can help you utilize the VS8F-2
effect processors to their fullest potential. For example, the
InsL and InsR options allow you to insert separate
compressors (using the Stereo Compressor patch) into two
channels using only one effects processor. Using all four
effects processors will allow you to insert eight separate
compressors into eight individual channels at the same time.
The InsS option will allow you to turn the stereo four-band
parametric EQ patch into a mono eight-band parametric EQ
by inserting a single channel into one side of the stereo EQ
and then routing the signal through the other side of the
stereo EQ patch.
104
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Connecting Insert Effects in the
Master Block
It is possible to insert an effect into the MIX bus. For example,
you might want to send the entire song mix through a
compressor or limiter. Use the following steps to do so.
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The button indicator lights, and the
Master screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F1 (FX1In)]. If “FX1In” does
not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX1In”, and then press [F1 (FX1In)].
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effect
you want to insert. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
the desired setting for Effect Insert Switch.
Effect Insert Switch
Three Insert Effect Examples
Example 1: Process a Recorded Guitar
Solo Through a Guitar Amp Simulator.
General Strategy: Insert the effect in the Track Mixer.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P088 as FX1, Insert on
Track 3.
Begin by Selecting the Effect
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
3. Press [F1 (FX1)]. The Effect 1 screen appears in the
display. If “FX1” does not appear above [F1], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX1)].
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P088
“GuitarMulti1.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 1 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
Insert Return Level
1. Press the SELECT button for Track 3. The button
indicator lights, and the Track Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
Insert Send Level
Ins:
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
This sets how the effect is connected.
Off:
The channel is routed into both channels of the stereo
effect.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) sent to
the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
4. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to FX1. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the Effect Insert Switch to
“Ins.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of signal (-42 dB to +6 dB) returned
from the effect. The default setting is 0 dB.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Insert FX2-FX 4 into the MIX bus using the same steps.
105
Chapter 7
The channel is not routed into the effect.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns,” or, press [F1 (FX1In)]. If “FX1In” does
not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX1In”, and then press [F1 (FX1In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
FX1(Effect Insert Switch)
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Example 2: Use a Microphone
Simulator on a Vocal Track to be
Recorded.
Example 3: Place a Limiter on the
Stereo Mix Master Output
General Strategy: Insert the effect in the Input Mixer.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P067 as FX2, insert on
Master Block.
General Strategy: Insert the effect on the MIX bus.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P128 as FX3, insert on
Input 2.
Begin by Selecting The Effect:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F4 (EFFECT B)].
3. Press [F4 (FX2)]. The Effect 2 screen appears in the
display. If “FX2” does not appear above [F4], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F4 (FX2)].
3. Press [F1 (FX3)]. The Effect 3 screen appears in the
display. If “FX3” does not appear above [F1], press
[F6 (EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX3)].
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the Time/VALUE dial or [
and [
], [
], [
],
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P128
“DR20 → 87.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 3 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set Up the Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Input 2. The button
indicator lights, and the Input Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F3 (FX3In)]. If “FX3In” does
not appear above [F3], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX3In”, and then press [F3 (FX3In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to FX3. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the Effect Insert Switch to
“Ins.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
106
Begin by Selecting the Effect
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
and [
], [
], [
],
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P067
“Limiter.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 2 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set Up the Mixer
1. Press [EDIT/SOLO]. The button indicator lights, and the
Master screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F2 (FX2In)]. If “FX2In” does
not appear above [F2], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX2In”, and then press [F2 (FX2In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
], and [
] to move the cursor to FX2. Use
the TIME/VALUE dial to change the Effect Insert Switch
to “Ins.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Connecting Loop Effects
Effects Return Section
The following section explains in detail the steps to connect
loop effects, and provides examples for each method.
When used in a loop effect, each of the four effects has its
own return level. You can adjust the return level for each
effect using the following procedure.
1. Select the channel to which the effect is to be added.
Press the SELECT button for either an input channel or a
track channel. The button indicator lights, and the Mixer
Screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FX1,” or press [F1 (FX1)]. If “FX1” does not
appear above [F1], press [PAGE] a few times until you
see “FX1”, and then press [F1 (FX1)].
fig.05-08
Effect Send Switch
* The effect return settings for an individual effect will not
function if that effect is being used as an insert effect.
1. Press the EFFECT 1/3 RTN SELECT button. The Effect
Return screen appears in the display.
2. Press [F3 (FX1)], or use [
[
], [
], [
], and
] to move the cursor to “FX1Rtn.”
3. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the value.
fig.05-09
Effect Send Leve
Effect Send Pan
Return Level
3. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the values.
Return Balance
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
This selects how the signal is sent to the EFFECT bus.
Off:
Signal is not sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pre:
(Pre-fader). The signal is sent based on its level before
the mixer fader.
Return Level
This sets the volume level (0-127) of the effect. The default
setting is 100.
Return Balance
This adjusts the stereo placement of the effect (L63-R63) in
the Master Mix. “L63” designates hard left and R63
designates hard right. The default value is 0 (center).
Pst:
(Post-fader). The signal is sent based on its level after
the mixer fader.
Send Level
Send Pan
This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal (L63-R63)
sent to the EFFECT bus. “L63” is hard left and R63 is
hard right. The default value is “0” (center). This is
useful for isolating channels to the left or right side of a
stereo effect so they can be processed independently.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Connect FX2-FX4 using the same method.
Chapter 7
This adjusts the volume level of the signal (0-127) sent to
the EFFECT bus. The default setting is 100.
Adjust the Effect Return Level using the
Channel Faders
1. Press [FADER/MUTE] so “IN” is lit.
2. Use the EFFECT 1 fader to adjust the FX1 return
level.
3. Use the EFFECT 2 fader to adjust the FX2 return
level.
4. Hold [SHIFT] and use the EFFECT 1 fader to adjust
the FX3 return level.
5. Hold [SHIFT] and use the EFFECT 2 fader to adjust
the FX4 return level.
6. After you are finished adjusting the Effect Return
levels, press [FADER/MUTE] so “TR” is lit.
107
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Two Examples of Using Loop
Effects
Example 2: Add Reverb to Drum
Tracks
Example 1: Add a Delay to a Recorded
Vocal Track.
General Strategy: Connect the effect in the Track Mixer,
post-fader.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P024 as FX2, connect
to Track 6.
Begin by Selecting the Effect:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Press [F1 (FX3)]. The Effect 3 screen appears in the
display. If “FX3” does not appear above [F1], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX3)].
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
3. Press [F4 (FX2)]. The Effect 2 screen appears in the
display. If “FX2” does not appear above [F4], press [F6
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
], [
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F4 (FX2)].
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P024
“Long Delay.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 2 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Track 6. The button
indicator lights, and the Track Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FX2.” Or, press [F2 (FX2)]. If “FX2” does not
appear above [F2], press [PAGE] a few times until you
see “FX2”, and then press [F2 (FX2)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the FX Switch to
“Pst” (“post-fader”).
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effect
Send Level, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
level to “70.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
108
Details for this Example: Select Patch P006 as FX3, and
connect on Tracks 7-12.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F4 (EFFECT B)].
Begin by Selecting the Effect:
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
General Strategy: Connect the effect on multiple Track
Mixer channels, post-fader.
and [
], [
], [
],
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P006
“Medium Room.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 3 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
1. Press Track 7 SELECT. The button indicator lights, and
the Track Mixer Screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FX3.” Or, press [F3 (FX3)]. If “FX3” does not
appear above [F3], press [PAGE] a few times until you
see “FX3”, and then press [F3 (FX3)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change FX Switch to “Pst.”
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effect
Send Level, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
level to “70.”
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for Track 8-12. Press the Track SELECT
button for each of these tracks to make the effect settings.
6. When you are finished setting up effect loops on Tracks
7-12, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist
display.
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Using Effects While Recording
It is possible to apply effects while recording so that the
effect becomes a permanent part of the recorded track, or so
that the effect is only used during recording for monitoring
purposes. The method for applying effects while recording
depends on whether you want the track recorded with the
effect or not.
Here are a few recording terms you should be familiar with:
Listening to an Insert Effect While
Recording
Use the following procedure when you want to record a
guitar track dry, without any effects or processing, while
allowing the guitar player to hear the guitar processed by
one of the guitar amp simulators in the VS-1824.
General Strategy: Insert the effect in the Track Mixer.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P088 as FX1, insert on
Track Mixer Channel 8.
“Print”
Begin by Selecting the Effect:
This verb means the same as “record.”
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
“Wet”
Processed using an effect. A wet track has an effect on it.
“Dry”
The track has no effects on it.
“Clean”
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
3. Press [F1 (FX1)]. The Effect 1 screen appears in the
display. If “FX1” does not appear above [F1], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX1)].
Same as “dry.”
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
“Print Wet”
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
Record with an effect. Use an effect while recording so
that the effect becomes a permanent part of the
recording. If you print a vocal track “wet” using a
reverb, it is impossible to remove the reverb from the
vocal track later to hear just the “dry” vocal.
Four Methods of Using Effects While
Recording:
1. Listening to an Insert Effect While Recording
Using an insert effect while recording a track, without
the effect becoming a permanent part of the track.
2. Listening to a Loop Effect While Recording
3. Recording Insert Effects
Using an insert effect while recording a track so the
effect becomes a permanent part of the track.
4. Recording Loop Effects
Using an Effect Loop while recording a track so the effect
becomes a permanent part of the track.
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P088
“Guitar Multi 1.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 1 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Track Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Track 8. The button
indicator lights, and the Track Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F1 (FX1In)]. If “FX1In” does
not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX1In,” and then press [F1 (FX1In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to FX1. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the Effect Insert Switch to
“Ins.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Now you’re ready to record as usual.
The most important thing to keep in mind while using effects
during the recording process is deciding whether you want
the effect to “print” or not. That decision will determine
where the effect should be connected. In some cases, the
effect will need to be connected in the Input Mixer. In other
cases, the effect will need to be connected in the Track Mixer.
Later, when you play the track with the effect still inserted,
you will hear the effect. This doesn’t mean you’ve recorded
the track with the effect. As soon as you turn the effect off,
you’ll hear the dry guitar. This is a great way to record, as it
provides you the flexibility to decide which effect to use after
the recording has been made.
109
Chapter 7
Using a loop effect while recording a track, without the
effect becoming a permanent part of the track.
], [
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Listening to a Loop Effect While
Recording
Begin by Selecting the effect:
General Strategy: Connect the effect loop in Track Mixer
Details for this Example: Select Patch P024 as Effect 3,
connect post-fader to Track Mixer on Channel 2, record from
Input 2.
Begin by Selecting the Effect:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F4 (EFFECT B)].
3. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P024
“Long Delay.”
5. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 3 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Track 2. The button
indicator lights, and the Track Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FX3.” Or, press [F3 (FX3)]. If “FX3” does not
appear above [F3], press [PAGE] a few times until you
see “FX3,” and then press [F3 (FX3)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set FX Switch to “Pst.”
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effect
Send Level, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
level to “70.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Even though you will hear the effect while recording, the
track will actually be printed dry.
Recording Insert Effects
Sometimes you may want an effect to become a permanent
part of the track so that, after recording, the effect processor
can be used on a different track. This is called recording
“wet,” which means recording with an effect. To do this,
simply insert the effect in the Input Mixer instead of in the
Track Mixer.
110
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
3. Press [F4 (FX2)]. The Effect 2 screen appears in the
display. If “FX2” does not appear above [F4], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F4 (FX2)].
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
2. Press [F1 (FX3)]. The Effect 3 screen appears in the
display. If “FX3” does not appear above [F1], press [F6
(EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F1 (FX3)].
], [
General Strategy: Insert effect in input Mixer
Details for this Example: Select Patch P096 as Effect 2, insert
on Input 1.
Example: A lead singer wants to hear reverb in the
headphones while recording, but you want to record the
track “dry.”
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
Example: Record a Vocalist through a compressor
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P096
“Dual Comp/Lim.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 2 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Input 2. The button
indicator lights, and the Input Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FXIns.” Or, press [F2 (FX2In)]. If “FX2In” does
not appear above [F2], press [PAGE] a few times until
you see “FX2In,” and then press [F2 (FX2In)]. This will
move the cursor directly to “FXIns.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES].
4. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to FX2. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the Effect Insert Switch to
“Ins.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Now you’re ready to record.
* Important Reminder: After recording with the effect inserted
on Input 2, don’t forget to turn it off. Repeat the steps above
for “Next, Set up the Mixer, but use the TIME/VALUE dial to
turn the Effect Insert Switch to “off.”
Summary: Using Insert Effects While
Recording
To print an insert effect, insert it on the input.
To hear an insert effect while recording, but not have it
print, insert it on the track.
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Recording a loop effect
Finally, Assign both Input 1 and Effects Return
2 to Stereo Track 9/10
This example explains how to use an effect loop while
recording so the effect is recorded as a permanent part of the
track.
1. Press [FADER/MUTE] so “TR” is lit.
2. Press and hold STATUS for Track 9 or Track10.
General Strategy: Connect an effect loop in the Input Mixer,
assign the input to a stereo track and assign the effect return
to the same stereo track.
3. Press Input 1 SELECT so it is blinking.
Details for this Example: Select Patch P024 “Long Delay” as
Effect 2, record Input 1 and Effect Return 2 onto stereo Track
9/10.
5. Press Effect 2 SELECT once. Both Input 1 and Effect
Return 2 are now routed to stereo Track 9/10.
Begin by Selecting the Effect:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
3. Press [F4 (FX2)]. The Effect 2 screen appears in the
display. If “FX2” does not appear above [F4], press
[F6 (EXIT)] until it does. Then, press [F4 (FX2)].
4. Press Input 2 SELECT so it does not blink.
Begin recording on Track 9/10 as usual. As soon as you are
done recording, re-route the effect return off the track. If an
effect return is assigned to a track, you won’t hear the output
of the effect (unless the track happens to be in Source or
Record status). To re-route the effect return back to the main
stereo mix—the MIX bus—hold the STATUS button for
Track 9 (or Track10) and the SELECT button for each effect
assigned to the track.
4. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial or [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to Effect Preset Patch P024
“Long Delay.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)] or press [ENTER/YES] to select the
effect. The EFFECT 2 screen appears in the display.
Next, Set up the Mixer
1. Press the SELECT button for Input 1. The button
indicator lights, and the Input Mixer Screen appears in
the display.
Chapter 7
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “FX1.” Or, press [F2 (FX2)]. If “FX2” does not
appear above [F2], press [PAGE] a few times until you
see “FX2,” and then press [F2 (FX2)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change FX Switch to “Pst.”
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the Effect
Send Level, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
level to “75.”
Then Pan the Input to Center
Since Input 1 is a mono source and is being recording to a
stereo track, set the panning for Input 1 to “Center.”
1. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the “Pan” section.
2. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the panning to “0”
(center).
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
111
Chapter 7 Using Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Recording Stereo Effects
Most of the effects in the Effects Expansion Board are stereo.
To record the output of a stereo effect so that it sounds the
same as it does in the MIX bus, it must be recorded onto two
tracks. To do so, turn Link to “On” for both the input and the
track. For example, use the following procedure to set up the
VS-1824 to record a stereo effect on Input 8 to Tracks 7/8:
1. Press the SELECT button for Input 8.
2. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “Link.”
], and [
] to move the
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to turn Link “On.”
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to FX INS and press [ENTER/YES].
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select the
desired effects processor and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select “INSERT.”
It is important that you insert the effect after the inputs are
linked.
6. Press the SELECT button for Track 8.
7. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “Link.”
], and [
] to move the
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to turn Link “On.”
9. Press [PLAY/DISPLAY] to return to the main Play
screen.
10. Hold the Channel 8 STATUS button and press the Input
8 SELECT button so that it is flashing (the Input 7
SELECT button will also flash). This routes Input 8 to
Tracks 7 and 8 for recording.
Now, with Tracks 7 and 8 grouped as a stereo pair, any
stereo effect inserted on Input 8 will be recorded in stereo on
Tracks 7/8.
112
Three Important Reminders
About Using Effects
1. If you insert an effect anywhere in the Track Mixer, Input
Mixer, or Master Block, that effect cannot be used on any
other tracks or inputs. The exception is when you use a
two-channel effect, and insert it on one channel of the
mixer using “InsL,” and on another channel using
“InsR.” When an effect has already been inserted on
another channel—or on the Master Block—the display
will tell you so.
2. If you’ve assigned an effect return to a track in order to
print the effect, you must un-assign the effect return from
the track in order to have it return to the main stereo mix.
3. To print an insert effect applied to an input, make sure
that it is inserted on the input and not the track. To listen
to an insert effect while recording, without printing it,
make sure that the effect is inserted on the track and not
the input.
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
As you work with the VS-1824, you will often make settings related to mixer connections—including settings that route inputs to
tracks for recording—settings that determine how signals are output, and settings that determine which effects are used. The
VS-1824’s “EZ Routing” features can make this process easier and faster. EZ Routing allows the VS-1824 to guide you step-by-step
through the making of these connections, or helps you get quickly to the parameters you need to change. In addition, your
favorite and most-frequently used setups can be stored as EZ Routing templates in the VS-1824’s memory—when you recall an
EZ Routing template, the VS-1824 is immediately re-configured for the task at hand.
There are three ways that EZ Routing makes working with the VS-1824 simpler:
Step Editing
EZ Routing Step Editing walks you through the required setup steps when recording, mixing, bouncing and mastering. Step
Editing is especially handy if you are not sure what needs to be done, and would like some guidance.
Quick Editing
Quick Editing allows you to quickly jump to the parameters that must be set when preparing to record, mix, bounce or
master. If you know what you want to change, and want to do it quickly, use Quick Editing.
Templates
When you have set up the VS-1824 for a particular task—and would like the VS-1824 to remember your settings for re-use
some time in the future—you can save the setup as an EZ Routing template. When you recall the template, the VS-1824’s
parameters are instantly reset, and your setup is once more in place. You can save up to 29 EZ Routing templates. In addition,
the VS-1824 provides four of its own: one each for recording, mixing, bouncing and mastering.
At the time of purchase, the VS-1824 comes with four read-only EZ Routing templates. The VS-1824 also offers 29 reusable user
EZ Routings. You can choose one of the four templates, make changes to it, and then save those settings as one of the user EZ
Routings.
EZ Routing templates may seem similar to Scenes; however, there is one important difference: while Scenes are associated—and
saved—with particular songs, EZ Routing templates are always available for use in any song.
Chapter 8
113
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
Using EZ Routing Step Editing
* You cannot assign a DIGITAL input to more than one stereolinked pair of tracks.
EZ Routing Step Editing walks you through the necessary
setup procedure for recording, mixing, bouncing and
mastering. As you begin your setup, the VS-1824 presents the
first screenful of parameters that must be set. When you are
ready, press [F2 (STEP)] to proceed to the next set of
parameters until the entire setup is complete. Step Editing
can help you learn how the VS-1824 works and is therefore a
great tool for beginners.
* Using EZ Routing, it is not possible to assign a stereo-linked
input to tracks that are not linked. For example, to record the
DIGITAL input on Tracks 3 and 4, you must first turn
Channel Link on for Track 3.
When you have finished your setup, you can save it as an EZ
Routing template. The following pages describe how to use
EZ Routing Step Editing.
fig.02-19
Source assigned to the track
Source assigned to the MIX bus
Source
Track
Setting Up for Recording Using
Step Editing
Select this when you want to make a new recording from a
source connected to one of the INPUT jacks. If you wish to
cancel the settings procedure, press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (Exec)].
If “Exec” does not appear in the display above [F5], press
[PAGE] until you see “Exec,” and then press [F5 (Exec)].
V-Track
5. Press [F2 (STEP →)].
6. Only the source and destination channels you specified
during Step 4 will be shown. Use [
], [
], [
and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/VALUE
dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-20
fig.02-18
Cursor
Pan/Balance
Level
Output destination
(MIX us or track)
7. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [[F1 (STEP←)].
3. Press [F1 (Rec)].
4. Specify which input source is to be recorded to each
track. To do this, first press the Input SELECT for the
input you want to use, then press the Track STATUS
button for the track you want to record on. Using this
method, you can assign a single Input to two different
tracks for recording. Use [
] and [
] to move the
cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the V-Track
on which you want to record.
114
],
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
12. Select mixer channels to be output to the AUX bus.
8. Make the settings for the effects.
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the
values. Press [F3 (FX A)] to make settings to EFFECT A
(FX1/2); press [F4 (FX B)] to make settings to EFFECT B
(FX3/4).
The AUX bus is useful for creating a separate headphone
mix for the performer you are recording. Use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor and the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-23
fig.02-21
AUX Switch
Effect Switch
AUX Send Switch
AUX Send Pan/Balance
Send Level
Cursor
Cursor
Send Balance
9. Press F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP←)].
10. Decide whether or not to record the output of each effect
to a track. First, press the Effect SELECT button for Effect
1 or Effect 2, then press the STATUS button for the track
you want the effect recorded on. To select FX 3 or FX 4,
hold [SHIFT] and press the Effect SELECT button.
13. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP←)].
14. Select the Master Section settings.
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the
values.
fig.02-24
fig.02-22
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Tracl to be recorded
15. Press [F4 (Exec)]. “EZ ROUTING Step Edit is finished!!”
appears in the display.
WARNING: EZ Routing settings will override any existing
mixer settings you have already made.
16. You can save your setup as an EZ Routing template, or
Exit [F6 (EXIT)] to leave this display without saving. To
save the setup, press [F3 (SAVE)]. The Routing Save
screen appears in the display. Save the setup using the
procedure described in “Saving an EZ Routing
Template,” p. 123.
115
Chapter 8
11. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP←)].
Effect Insert
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
Setting Up for Mixing Using Step
Editing
Select this when you want to adjust the balance of each track,
or to mix your song to an external two-track recorder. Select
this to use the Input Mixer during mixdown to mix external
sources along with your 18 tracks to the VS-1824’s stereo
MASTER mix outputs. If you want to cancel the settings
procedure before completing it, press [F6 (EXIT)] at any time.
5. Press [F2 (STEP →)].
6. Only the sources—Input Mixer Channels and Track
Mixer Channels—you specified during Step 4 will be
shown. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of
the values.
fig.02-26
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (Exec)].
If “Exec” does not appear in the display above [F5], press
[PAGE] until you see “Exec,” and then press [F5 (Exec)].
Cursor
Pan
fig.02-18
Level
Input Channel
Track Channel
7. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
8. Make the settings for the effects. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values. Press
[F3 (FX A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (FX1/2); press
[F4 (FX B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (FX3/4).
fig.02-27
Cursor
3. Press [F2 (Mix)].
4. Specify which sources are to be output to the MIX bus.
Press the Input SELECT buttons and the Track SELECT
buttons for all mixer channels you want to include. Use
[
] and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the V-Track you want to play back.
fig.02-25
Effect
Switch
Send
Level
Send
Pan
Source assigned to the MIX bus
Track assigned to the MIX bus
9. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
Source
Track
V-Track
116
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
10. Select mixer channels to be output to the AUX bus.
The AUX bus is useful for creating a separate headphone
mix for the performer you are recording, or for sending
tracks to an external effects processor. Use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor and the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-28
Setting Up for Bouncing Using
Step Editing
Select this when bouncing audio recordings from a group of
tracks onto another track or tracks. To cancel the settings
procedure, press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in the display
above [F5], press [PAGE] until you see “Exec,” and then
press [F5 (Exec)].
AUX Switch
3. Press [F3 (Bounc)].
AUX Send Switch
AUX Send Pan/
Balance
fig.02-18
Cursor
Input Channel
Track Channel
11. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
12. Select the Master Section settings. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-29
4. Specify the source tracks for the bounce and the
destination track(s). First press the Track SELECT for the
source track, then press the Track STATUS button for the
destination track. Using this method, you can assign a
single source track to two different destination tracks for
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
recording. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor and
the TIME/VALUE dial to select the V-Track for both the
source tracks as well as for the track you want to record
on.
* You can only assign the bounce to one track-linked destination.
fig.02-24a
fig.02-31
Playback track assigned to be recorded on a track
WARNING: EZ Routing settings will override any existing
mixer settings you have already made.
14. You can save your setup as an EZ Routing template, or
Exit [F6 (EXIT)] to leave this display without saving. To
save the setup, press [F3 (SAVE)]. The Routing Save
screen appears in the display. Save the setup using the
procedure described in “Saving an EZ Routing
Template,” p. 123.
Playback Track
Recording Track
V-Track
117
Chapter 8
13. Press [F4 (Exec)]. “EZ ROUTING Step Edit is finished!!”
appears in the display.
* You cannot assign a stereo-linked track to tracks that are not
linked. For example, it is not possible to assign source Tracks
9/10 to record on Tracks 3 and 4 unless you first turn Channel
Link to “On” for Track 3.
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
5. Press [F2 (STEP →)].
10. Decide whether or not to record the output of each effect
6. Only the source tracks you specified during Step 4 will
be shown. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each of the values.
to a track. First, press the Effect SELECT button for Effect
1 or Effect 2, then press the STATUS button for the track
you want the effect recorded on. To select FX 3 or FX 4,
hold [SHIFT] and press the Effect SELECT button.
fig.02-34
fig.02-32
Pan
Cursor
Track to be recorded
Level
Track to be recorded
Track Channel
7. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
8. Make the settings for the effects. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to adjust each of the values. Press [F3 (FX
A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (FX1/2); press [F4 (FX
B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (FX3/4).
fig.02-33
Cursor
11. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
12. Select mixer channels to be output to the AUX bus. The
AUX bus is useful for sending tracks to an external
effects processor. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
]
to move the cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each of the values.
fig.02-35
Effect Switch
Send Level
AUX Switch
Send Pan
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/
Balance
Cursor
9. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
13. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
118
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
14. Select the Master Section settings.
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the
values.
fig.02-36
Setting Up for Mastering Using
Step Editing
Select this when creating mixing down to create a final twotrack stereo master tracks for burning onto a CD-R. To cancel
the settings procedure, press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
2. Press [F5 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in the display
above [F5], press [PAGE] until you see “Exec,” and then
press [F5 (Exec)].
fig.02-18
15. Press [F4 (Exec)]. “EZ ROUTING Step Edit is finished!!”
appears in the display.
fig.02-24a
WARNING: EZ Routing settings will override any existing
mixer settings you have already made.
16. You can save your setup as an EZ Routing template, or
Exit [F6 (EXIT)] to leave this display without saving. To
save the setup, press [F3 (SAVE)]. The Routing Save
screen appears in the display. Save the setup using the
procedure described in “Saving an EZ Routing
Template,” p. 123.
3. Press [F4 (Mstng)].
4. Specify which sources are to be output to the MIX bus.
Press the Input SELECT buttons and the Track SELECT
buttons for all mixer channels you want to include. Use
[
] and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the V-Track you want to play back.
fig.02-25
Source assigned to the MIX bus
Track assigned to the MIX bus
Chapter 8
Source
Track
V-Track
5. Press [F2 (STEP →)].
119
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
6. Only the sources—Input Mixer Channels and Track
Mixer Channels—you specified during Step 5 will be
shown. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of
the values.
fig.02-26
10. Select mixer channels to be output to the AUX bus. The
AUX bus is useful for sending tracks to an external
effects processor. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
]
to move the cursor and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each of the values.
fig.02-28
AUX Switch
AUX Send Switch
Pan
Cursor
AUX Send Pan/
Balance
Cursor
Input Channel
Track Channel
Level
Track Channel
7. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
8. Make the settings for the effects. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to adjust each of the values. Press [F3 (FX
A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (FX1/2); press [F4 (FX
B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (FX3/4).
11. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
12. Select the Master Section settings. Use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-29
fig.02-27
Cursor
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Switch
Send Level
Send Pan
Effect Insert
CDR Recording
Mode
Destination V-Track
13. Press [F4 (Exec)]. “EZ ROUTING Step Edit is finished!!”
appears in the display.
9. Press [F2 (STEP →)]. You can return to the previous
screen by pressing [F1 (STEP ←)].
fig.02-24a
WARNING: EZ Routing settings will override any existing
mixer settings you have already made.
14. You can save your setup as an EZ Routing template, or
Exit [F6 (EXIT)] to leave this display without saving. To
save the setup, press [F3 (SAVE)]. The Routing Save
screen appears in the display. Save the setup using the
procedure described in “Saving an EZ Routing
Template,” p. 123.
120
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
Using EZ Routing Quick Editing
Quick Editing lets you quickly get to VS-1824’s Input Mixer, Track Mixer, effect and mastering parameters so that you can change
their values in a hurry. Once you become familiar with the many things you can do on the VS-1824, you may find Quick Editing
to be the fastest way to create a new setup.
1. Press [EZ ROUTING]. The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [PAGE] so “COMON” appears in the display above [F1]. The function buttons perform as described here:
[F1 (COMON)]:
This status indicator—when highlighted—shows that you are viewing the EZ Routing Common Menu. This menu shows you
the EZ Routing templates in the VS-1824’s memory. The currently selected template provides a starting point for your editing.
[F2 (INPUT)]:
Press this to display and edit Input Mixer parameters.
[F3 (TRACK)]:
Press this to display and edit Track Mixer parameters.
[F4 (FX)]:
Press this to display and edit effect parameters.
[F5 (MST)]:
Press this to display and edit Master Block parameters.
[F6 (SAVE)]:
Press this button if you wish to save your current settings as an EZ Routing template.
3. Press the F1-F5 button for the section in which you want to make changes.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to a parameter you wish to edit, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the desired value. If, while making settings, the ENTER indicator blinks, press [ENTER] to adjust level and pan settings.
After the level and pan settings have been made, press [F6 (EXIT)], or you can press [EXIT/NO].
fig.02-13
Input Mixer Settings
Cursor
Output destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
Effect Send Switch
Chapter 8
AUX Send Switch
Stereo Link
Pop-up Window
Mix Send Level
Mix Send Pan
121
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
fig.02-14
Track Mixer Settings
Cursor
Output destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
Track Status
Effect Send Switch
AUX Send Switch
Stereo Link
V-track
Pop-up Window
Mix Send Level
Mix Send Pan
fig.02-15
Effect Settings
Cursor
Selecting Effects
Output Destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
fig.02-16
Master Block Settings
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
If you wish to save your current setup as an EZ Routing template, press [F6 (SAVE)] and follow the instructions in “Saving an EZ
Routing Template,” p. 123.
122
Chapter 8 EZ Routing
Using EZ Routing Templates
Recalling an EZ Routing Template
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
Saving an EZ Routing Template
1. When you have pressed the SAVE button after creating a
new setup, the Routing Save screen appears in the
display. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
number of the desired memory location for your EZ
Routing template.
fig.02-17
Routing Number
Routing Name
2. Press [
] to move the cursor. Use [
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] or use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the routing you
want to use.
3. Press [F5 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear above [F5],
press [PAGE] until you see “Exec” above [F5], then press
[F5 (Exec)].
fig.02-18
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor and the TIME/
VALUE dial to enter the user EZ Routing’s name.
The function buttons work as shown below:
[F1 (Hist)]:
Pressing this button will take you through a list of the
last 20 names entered, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all the characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]:
Stores the routing and exits the Routing Save screen.
Exits the Routing Save screen without storing the
routing.
If you press [NUMERICS/ASCII] so it is lit, you can use the
SELECT buttons to enter characters in a manner similar to
using a computer keyboard.
3. After entering the name, press [F5 (WRITE)]. The routing
is saved.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Press [YES] to recall the EZ Routing settings. (Or, if you
wish to cancel the operation, press [NO].)
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Deleting an EZ Routing Template
1. Press [EZ ROUTING]. The EZ Routing icon appears in
the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] or use the TIME/
VALUE dial to move the cursor to the routing you want
to delete.
3. Press [F6 (Del)]. If “Del” does not appear above [F6],
press [PAGE] until you see “Del” above [F6], then press
[F6 (Del)]. “EZ ROUTING Delete OK ?” appears in the
display.
4. Press [YES]. (Or, if you wish to cancel the operation,
press [NO].) The EZ Routing is deleted. The four factory
templates—“Recording,” “Mix Down,” “Bouncing” and
“Mastering”—cannot be deleted.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
123
Chapter 8
[F6 (EXIT)]:
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor to “Use
Template” and press [F5 (Exec)] once more. “Apply this
ROUTING ?” appears in the display.
Chapter 9 Automix
Mixer Automation
With the VS-1824, you can record the present status or
condition of the mixer as a Scene. However, you cannot
change a Scene while the song is playing. If you want to store
mixer settings that change as the song plays, use Automix.
Automix allows both static (Snapshot) and dynamic
(realtime) changes in mixer settings during song playback.
Automix information includes mixer settings, fader
movements, and other settings. This is convenient when
mixing a song with elaborate fader movements that are
difficult to reproduce manually or for automating effect
changes during a song.
All of the following mixer settings can be recorded as
Snapshots in Automix.
* You can also record realtime automation for the functions
marked below in bold.
INPUT Channel/TRACK Channel:
MASTER BLOCK:
Faders
Master Level
Panning
Master Balance
FX 1 Lev (Effect 1 Send Level)
Monitor Level
FX 1 Pan (Effect 1 Send Pan)
Monitor Balance
FX 2 Lev (Effect 2 Send Level)
Master Effect 1 Send Level
FX 2 Pan (Effect 2 Send Pan)
Master Effect 1 Send Balance
FX 3 Lev (Effect 3 Send Level)
Master Effect 2 Send Level
FX 3 Pan (Effect 3 Send Pan)
Master Effect 2 Send Balance
FX 4 Lev (Effect 4 Send Level)
Master Effect 3 Send Level
FX 4 Pan (Effect 4 Send Pan)
Master Effect 3 Send Balance
AUX Lev (AUX Send Level)
Master Effect 4 Send Level
AUX Pan
Master Effect 4 Send Balance
STEREO IN:
Fader
Balance
EFFECT RETURN:
Effect 1 Return Level
Effect 1 Return Balance
Effect 2 Return Level
Effect 2 Return Balance
Effect 3 Return Level
Effect 3 Return Balance
Effect 4 Return Level
Effect 4 Return Balance
124
Master AUX Send Level
Master AUX Send Balance
EFFECT:
FX 1 (Effect 1 Program Number)
FX 2 (Effect 2 Program Number)
FX 3 (Effect 3 Program Number)
FX 4 (Effect 4 Program Number)
Chapter 9 Automix
Using Automix
fig.11-06
To begin using Automix, press [AUTOMIX].
The button indicator lights, indicating that
Automix mode is on.
lit
After turning on Automix, all the SELECT
buttons and the EDIT/SOLO button begin
blinking. In a new song, Automix record is
enabled for all inputs, tracks, effect returns,
and for the Master fader.
To disable Automix on individual channels, press and hold
[AUTOMIX], and press the Input SELECT, Track SELECT or
[EDIT/SOLO] buttons. While holding down [AUTOMIX],
each time you press a SELECT button, the status changes as
follows:
fig.11-07to09
Indicator off:
Automix disabled.
Manual fader control.
dark
Indicator on:
Automix Playback
enabled.
Realtime Automix
With realtime Automix, actual physical fader movements
you make during song playback are recorded and stored as
marker data. This type of automation is also known as
dynamic automation, as dynamic fader movements are
recorded and stored.
* If you want to create dynamic panning changes, you can do so
by using a combination of snapshot and gradation Automix.
See “Snapshot Automation” (p. 127).
Realtime Automix of Track Faders
1. Locate to the point in the song where you wish to record
realtime Automix.
2. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
3. Decide which track fader’s movement you want to
record using Automix. While pressing [AUTOMIX],
press the Track SELECT button for the tracks you want
to automate so that their indicators are blinking.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC]. The AUTOMIX
indicator blinks, showing Automix recording is enabled.
5. Make sure the FADER/MUTE indicator is set to “TR” for
tracks.
lit
Indicator blinking:
Automix Record
Enable and Playback.
blink
You may, for example, find it convenient to leave the Master
fader on manual control while recording Automix on the
Track mixer. To do so, hold [AUTOMIX] and press
[EDIT/SOLO] so the indicator is off.
Adjust the Display for Automix
While recording Automix, it is helpful to change the display
to view fader and panning positions.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
6. Adjust the track faders for the beginning fader levels as
desired.
* If you want to adjust TR 13-18 fader levels, press [FADER/
MUTE] several times until “TR” indicator blinks (p. 71).
* If Fader Match (p. 249) in System Parameters is set to “Null,”
and the current physical fader positions do not match the actual
volume levels, you must first move the physical faders to match
the position of the recorded fader. This is referred to as “crossing
the null point.” When the display is set to view faders and
panning, the position of each physical fader is represented by a
black dot, and the actual level that is recorded using Automix is
represented by a white circle. Before beginning Automix, slide
each physical fader all the way up and then all the way down so
the black dot disappears. Make sure that the [FADER/MUTE] is
set appropriately (IN or TR) depending on whether you are trying
to control the inputs or the tracks.
7. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
3. Press [F5 (F/P)]. The Fader/Pan display appears.
8. While the song is playing, move the track faders to adjust
the mix of your song as you like. New Automix data will
only be recorded for those faders that are moved during
song playback.
4. Press [F (LMTrk)] to view fader and panning positions
for the Track Mixer.
5. Press [F2 (LM In)] to view fader and panning positions
for the Input Mixer.
6. Press [F3 (LMAux)] to view fader and panning positions
for the Effect Sends and Aux Send.
9. When the song is finished, press [STOP]. Automix
markers (markers with an “A” after the marker number)
will appear in the Playlist display where Automix data
was created.
125
Chapter 9
2. Press [PAGE] so you see “F/P” above [F5].
Chapter 9 Automix
If “!!! Lack of EVENT!!” Appears in the
Display
If you do a lot of recording or make numerous edits
using functions such as Track Copy, the remaining
number of events may fall below 1000. When this
happens, you will not be able to continue recording
Automix data in realtime. Please refer to “About
Events,” p. 26. In addition, when planning to record for
an extended period with Automix, check the remaining
number of events frequently, as described in “Checking
Remaining Space,” p. 217.
Realtime Automix of Input Faders
For a song that incorporates both recorded tracks as well as
additional sources, such as outputs from MIDI sound
modules, you may decide to automate both the input mix as
well as track mix. It doesn’t matter which mixer you
automate first, and it is possible to simultaneously automate
both the Input Mixer and the Track Mixer. If you wish to
automate the Input Mixer, use the following steps:
1. Move to the location in the song where you wish to
record realtime Automix.
2. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
Automating the Master Stereo
Mix and Monitor Output
Just as it is possible to automate the Input Mixer and the
Track Mixer, you can also automate the master stereo mix as
well as the monitoring output level.
1. Move to the location in the song where you wish to
record realtime Automix.
2. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
3. While pressing [AUTOMIX], press [EDIT/SOLO] so it
blinks, indicating Automix record is enabled for the
Master fader.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC]. The AUTOMIX
indicator blinks, showing Automix recording is enabled.
5. Adjust the Master fader and the MONITOR knob for the
beginning level as desired.
6. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
7. While the song is playing, move the Master fader to
adjust the level of your song. Use the MONITOR knob to
make changes to the monitoring output level.
8. When the song is finished, press [STOP]. Automix
markers will appear in the Playlist display where
Automix data was created.
3. Decide which input fader’s movement you want to
record using Automix. While pressing [AUTOMIX],
press the Input SELECT button for the inputs you want
to automate so that they begin blinking.
Automating Effect Returns
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC].
1. Move to the location in the song where you wish to
record realtime Automix.
The AUTOMIX indicator blinks, showing Automix
recording is enabled.
5. Make sure the FADER/MUTE indicator is set to “IN” for
Inputs. This assigns the physical faders to the Input
Mixer.
6. Adjust the faders for the beginning fader levels as
desired.
7. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
8. While the song is playing, move the faders to adjust the
mix of your song as you like. New Automix data will
only be recorded for those faders that are moved during
song playback.
9. When the song is finished, press [STOP]. Automix
markers will appear in the Playlist display where
Automix data was created.
126
Just as it is possible to automate both the Input Mixer and the
Track Mixer, you can also automate the effect returns.
2. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
3. Confirm the SELECT button for EFFECT 1/3 RTN is
blinking. If it is not, hold [AUTOMIX] and press the
SELECT button for EFFECT 1/3 RTN so it blinks,
indicating Automix Record Ready for the Effect 1 Return.
4. Confirm the SELECT button for EFFECT 2/4 RTN is
blinking. If it is not blinking, hold [AUTOMIX] and press
the SELECT button for EFFECT 2/4 RTN so it blinks,
indicating Automix Record Ready for the Effect 2 Return.
Chapter 9 Automix
5. To automate Effect 3 Return, press [SHIFT]. Confirm the
SELECT button for EFFECT 1/3 RTN is blinking. If it is
not blinking, continue to hold [SHIFT], then hold
[AUTOMIX] and press the SELECT button for EFFECT
1/3 RTN so it blinks, indicating Automix Record Ready
for the Effect 3 Return.
6. To automate Effect 4 Return, press [SHIFT]. Confirm the
SELECT button for EFFECT 2/4 RTN is blinking. If it is
not blinking, continue to hold [SHIFT], then hold
[AUTOMIX] and press the SELECT button for EFFECT
2/4 RTN so it blinks, indicating Automix Record Ready
for the Effect 4 Return.
7. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC]. The AUTOMIX
indicator blinks, showing Automix recording is enabled.
Snapshot Automation
Static mixer settings can be recorded with Automix. This
type of Automix involves taking a mixer “Snapshot.” When
you play to the point in the song where the Snapshot was
recorded, all mixer settings stored with the Snapshot are
instantly re-called. This is convenient for making
instantaneous level changes in the middle of a song, or for
changing effects on a guitar solo, for example. To record a
mixer Snapshot, follow the procedure below.
1. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
8. Press [FADER/MUTE] so “IN” is lit.
2. Play or locate to the point in the song where you want
the Snapshot to occur.
9. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
3. Press [STOP].
10. Use Fader 11 to control Effect 1 Return levels when “IN”
is lit.
4. Select the mixer channels whose settings you want
recorded in the Snapshot. Any blinking SELECT button
will be recorded. If the SELECT button is not blinking for
a channel you wish to record, hold [AUTOMIX] and
press the SELECT button so it blinks.
11. Use Fader 12 to control Effect 2 Return levels when “IN”
is lit.
12. Hold [SHIFT] and use Fader 11 to control Effect 3 Return
levels when “IN” is lit.
13. Hold [SHIFT] and use Fader 12 to control Effect 4 Return
levels when “IN” is lit.
14. As the song is playing, continue to move the faders to
adjust the effect return levels as you like.
15. When the song is finished, press [STOP].
5. Make all mixer settings, including panning, fader
positions, effect send levels, etc., for each channel.
6. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP]. A marker is placed at
the current time location. A Snapshot of all mixer settings
is recorded and stored with the marker. Any marker that
stores Automix data will appear in the display followed
by an “A.”
fig.11-10
16. Press [ZERO] to rewind to the beginning of the song, and
then press [PLAY].
17. To watch the effect return fader levels change as a result
of Automix, press the EFFECT 1/3 SELECT button to see
the “Stereo In/Effect Return” display.
* If a marker already exists within 0.1 seconds before or after the
location of the new Snapshot, the Snapshot information will be
stored at the previously existing marker location. A new
Snapshot marker will not be created.
Chapter 9
If you are adjusting Effect Returns 3 and/or 4, you can turn
on the Shift Lock function (p. 251) so that you can adjust
levels with the faders without holding the SHIFT button.
127
Chapter 9 Automix
Snap Mode
Automating Effect Changes
You can specify whether or not the fader levels will be
recorded when you create an Automix Snapshot. This is
useful, for example, if you want to automate effect changes
without affecting the levels of your tracks. Use the following
procedure to set the “Snap mode:”
Use Snapshot automation to program effect patch changes
“on the fly.” Use the following steps to create effect-change
Snapshots.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)] to display the
Utility menu.
If the Utility menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F5 (A.mix)]. If “A.mix” does not appear above
[F5], press [PAGE] until it does; then, press [F5 (A.mix)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired Snap
mode.
Snap Mode Settings
ALL:
All settings are recorded as part of the Snapshot.
MaskFader:
Fader settings are ignored.
1. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
2. To automate the effect changes for Effect 1 and Effect 2,
make sure the Effect 1/3 and Effect 2/4 SELECT buttons
are blinking. If the Effect SELECT button is not blinking,
hold [AUTOMIX] and press the SELECT button so it
begins blinking.
3. To automate the effect changes for Effect 3 and Effect 4,
hold [SHIFT] and make sure the Effect 1/3 and Effect 2/4
SELECT buttons are blinking. If a SELECT button is not
blinking, continue to hold [SHIFT], hold [AUTOMIX]
and press the SELECT button so it begins blinking.
4. Locate to the point in the song where you want the effect
to change.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the main Play
screen.
5. To change the effect preset, hold [SHIFT] and press
[F3 (FX A)]. Here you can change the settings for Effect 1
and Effect 2.
5. Record an Automix Snapshot (as described in “Snapshot
Automation,” p. 127).
6. Press [F1 (FX1)] to select Effect 1. If “FX1” does not
appear above [F1], press [F6 (EXIT)] until it does. Then,
press [F1 (FX1)].
7. Press [F2 (Sel)] to select a different preset.
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the Effect.
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
10. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
11. Repeat Steps 3-10 for each effect change you want to store.
12. When you’re done, press [ZERO] followed by [PLAY] to
hear the effect Snapshots.
This procedure automates effect patch changes only. You can
automate effect parameter changes by creating multiple versions
of your effect with different settings as user effect patches. Then
you can use Snapshot automation to recall the desired version at
any point in your song. For example, let’s say you are using the
GuitarMulti1 effect with the delay turned off and you want the
delay portion of GuitarMulti1 turned on for the solo section of
the guitar track. You can create two versions of the GuitarMulti1
effect, one with delay and one without, and save them as
separate patches in the user bank. Then, using Automix, you can
create a Snapshot at the beginning of your song with the “no
delay” version of the effect selected. Next, advance the VS-1824
to the beginning of the guitar solo. Select the “delay” version of
your effect and create a second Snapshot. Finally, move to the
end of the guitar solo. Select the “no delay” version of the effect
again and create a third Snapshot. When you play back your
song with Automix turned on, your guitar part will only have
delay during the solo section.
128
Chapter 9 Automix
Gradation
After creating two Snapshots, you can have the VS-1824
automatically create a smooth crossfade between these
Snapshots using “gradation.” Gradation can be used to
create fade-ins and fade-outs, as well as dynamic panning
sweeps. The following is a quick overview of the gradation
procedure:
When the timeline is positioned between two
Snapshot markers.
Press either [SCENE] and [NEXT] or [SCENE] and
[PREVIOUS]. The gradation will take place between the two
adjacent Snapshot markers.
fig.11-11
Marker 1
Current Time
Marker 2
1. Follow the operation as described in “Snapshot
Automation” to record two Snapshots.
2. Adjust the mixer settings as desired.
Time
3. Place one Snapshot at the point you want the crossfade to
begin.
4. Change the mixer settings as desired.
5. Place a second Snapshot at the point you want the
crossfade to end.
6. From the position of the second of the two Snapshots,
hold [SCENE] and press [PREVIOUS]. “Gradation *** *** Sure ?” appears in the display. “***” indicates the
Automix marker number.
Gradation Range
When the timeline is positioned at a Snapshot
marker:
If you press [SCENE] and [NEXT], the gradation will occur
between the present Snapshot marker and the next one.
If you press [SCENE] and [PREVIOUS], the gradation will
occur between the present Snapshot marker and the previous
one.
fig.11-12
7. Press [ENTER/YES].
Marker 1
Current Time
Marker 2
Marker 3
Time
Gradation Range
Gradation Range
Chapter 9
129
Chapter 9 Automix
Two Gradation Examples
Example 2: Fade Out at End of Song
Example 1: Crossfade Between Stereo Tracks
Another way to use a gradation is to create a smooth fade out
at the end of a song. Here are the steps for programming a
10-second fadeout at the end of a song.
When creating your own original CD, you may decide you
want one song to fade out and the next to fade in
simultaneously. You can dictate the length of the crossfade
by determining the time between two Snapshots. Here are
the steps to creating a seven-second crossfade from Tracks 9/
10 to Tracks 11/12 using Snapshot gradation.
1. Make sure Automix is on. The AUTOMIX button should
be lit.
2. Make sure the Track 9/10 SELECT and Track 11/12
SELECT buttons are blinking. If either SELECT button is
not blinking, hold [AUTOMIX] and press the SELECT
button so it begins blinking.
3. Locate to the point in the song where you want the crossfade to begin.
1. Make sure Automix is on.
2. Make sure the [EDIT/SOLO] button is blinking. This
indicates Automix Record Ready for the Master fader. If
it is not blinking, hold [AUTOMIX] and press [EDIT/
SOLO].
3. Locate to the end of your song by holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [FF (Song End)].
4. Pull the Master fader all the way down.
5. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP]. The current position of
the Master fader is stored as a Snapshot.
6. Press [REW] ten times. Each time you press [REW], the
play line backs up by exactly one second.
4. Bring the fader for Track 9/10 to the 0 dB position. Bring
the fader for Track 11/12 all the way down.
7. Put the Master fader up to 0 dB.
5. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
8. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
6. Press [FF] slowly seven times to advance exactly seven
seconds on the timeline to the position where you want
the crossfade to end.
9. Hold [SCENE] and press [NEXT].
7. Bring the fader for Track 9/10 all the way down. Bring
the fader for Track 11/12 to the 0 dB position.
11. Press [ENTER/YES].
8. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
9. Hold [SCENE] and press [PREVIOUS]. “Gradation *** *** Sure ?” appears in the display. “***” indicates the
Automix marker number.
10. Press [ENTER/YES].
11. Rewind to a point before the start of the crossfade. Press
[PLAY] to hear the crossfade.
130
10. “Gradation *** - *** Sure ?” appears in the display. “***”
indicates the Automix marker number.
12. Rewind back to before the beginning of the fadeout, and
press [PLAY] to hear the results.
Chapter 9 Automix
Updating Automix
When using Automix, it is not necessary to mix all track
faders simultaneously. You can mix just the first eight tracks,
for example, and then go back and mix the next eight tracks.
Or, select a combination of faders that is most comfortable
for you. After the first Automix pass, you can go back and
update the mix, either on a channel-by-channel basis, or
based on a particular section of your song.
Updating Automix for a Selected
Group of Faders
You can revise your Automix data at any time, easily
updating any track or combination of tracks. All you need to
do is disable Automix Record for the channels you are
satisfied with.
1. Press [ZERO] to rewind to the beginning of the song.
2. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
3. Hold [AUTOMIX], and press the Track SELECT button
for the Tracks whose Automix data you are satisfied
with, so they are lit, but not blinking. The SELECT
buttons for the track or tracks you want to update should
be blinking, indicating Automix recording is enabled.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC]. The AUTOMIX
indicator blinks, showing Automix recording is enabled.
5. Make sure the FADER/MUTE indicator is set to “TR” for
tracks.
6. Adjust the track faders for the track you wish to update.
Since the other track faders are now set to Automix
playback, you don’t need to touch them at all.
* If you want to adjust TR 13-18 fader levels, press [FADER/
MUTE] several times until “TR” indicator blinks ( p. 71).
7. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
To update Automix data for a section of a song, you must
first change the Fader Match setting from “Jump” (the
default setting), to “Null.” See the following section
“Understanding Fader Match.”
1. Change the Fader Match setting to “Null.” See “Fader
Match,” p. 249.
2. Move to the location in the song where you wish to rerecord realtime Automix.
3. Press [AUTOMIX].
The AUTOMIX indicator lights, indicating that the
VS-1824 is in Automix mode.
4. Decide which track fader’s movement you want to
record using Automix. While pressing [AUTOMIX],
press the Track SELECT button for the Tracks you want
to mix so they are blinking.
5. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC]. The AUTOMIX
indicator blinks, showing Automix recording is enabled.
6. Make sure the FADER/MUTE indicator is set to “TR” for
tracks.
7. While watching the Fader/Panning display for track
faders, slowly raise the physical faders until they match
the stored fader level. The physical fader position is
represented on the screen by a black dot, whereas the
stored track level is represented by an empty circle.
* If you want to adjust TR 13-18 fader levels, press [FADER/
MUTE] several times until “TR” indicator blinks ( p. 71).
8. Press [PLAY] to begin recording Automix data.
9. While the song is playing, move the track faders to adjust
the mix of your song as you like. New Automix data will
only be recorded for those faders that are moved during
song playback.
10. When the song is finished, press [STOP]. Automix
markers will appear in the Playlist display where
Automix data was created.
Chapter 9
8. While the song is playing, move the track faders to adjust
the mix of your song as you like. New Automix data will
only be recorded for those faders that are moved during
song playback.
Updating Automix for a Section of a
Song
9. When the song is finished, press [STOP]. Automix
markers will appear in the Playlist display where
Automix data was created.
131
Chapter 9 Automix
Editing Automix Data
Erasing Data from a Specific Area
(Erase)
Editing Automix Data (Micro Edit)
This operation erases the Automix data from a specific area.
Markers will not be erased.
You can check and change the values for settings pertaining
to all Automix data. The general method is as follows.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
The Utility menu icon appears.
0 M0
2. Press [F5 (A.Mix)].
If “A.Mix” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE]
and then press [F5 (A.Mix)].
3. Press [F2 (Micro)].
The Micro Edit screen appears in the display.
M2
M1
Time
M4
M3
M5
0 M0
M2
M1
Time
M4
M3
M5
Editing of the Automix data cannot be cancelled by the Undo
function.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
fig.11-13
Setting Value
Auto Mix to be edited
(in the example, the volume level of Track 1)
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
3. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “A.Mix,” and then
press [F5 (A.Mix)].
4. Press [F2 (Micro)].
5. Press [PAGE] so that [F1] indicates “In.”
fig.4-03
4. Press [
]. The cursor moves to “Edit Target.” Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the Automix parameter you
want to edit.
5. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to make changes to each of the
settings.
* The only thing that can be edited here is Automix data. If you
want to change markers, refer to “Editing Marker Values”
(p. 46).
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for any other Automix data you
wish to edit.
7. When you have finished editing, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
132
6. Make sure that the cursor is located at “Edit Target,” and
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Automix data
that you wish to erase.
7. Use [
] and [
] to move to the first marker of the
area from which you wish to erase Automix data, and
press [F1 (In)].
Chapter 9 Automix
8. Use [
] and [
] to move to the last marker of the
area from which you wish to erase Automix value, and
press [F1 (Out)].
Checkmarks will be added to the area specified for erasure.
fig.4-04.e
Copying Data to Another Location
(Copy)
This operation copies Automix data from a specific area, and
overwrites it onto another location (specified data/time).
fig.4-07.e
Copy area
0 M0
M2
M1
Destination
Marker
Time
M4
M3
0 M0
M5
M2
M1
Time
M4
M3
M5
Editing of the Automix data cannot be cancelled by the Undo
function.
Check marks
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Even if you wish to erase the Automix data for only one marker,
press [F1 (In)] and then [F1 (Out)] for the desired marker.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
3. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “A.Mix,” and then
press [F5 (A.Mix)].
You can turn the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the Automix
setting value at the cursor location. If you wish to re-select
4. Press [F2 (Micro)].
the Automix value that will be erased, press [
5. Press [PAGE] so that [F1] indicates “In.”
].
9. Press [F2 (Erase)].
fig.4-03
fig.4-05_80
Target
This will indicate the type of Automix data that you selected
to be erased in Step 6. If you wish to erase all Automix data,
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “All Level and Pan.”
10. If you wish to erase the data, press [F4 (Exec)].
If you press [F6 (EXIT)], you will return to Step 7 without
erasing any data.
11. A message will ask you to confirm the operation. Press
6. Make sure that the cursor is located at “Edit Target,” and
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the type of Automix
data that you wish to edit.
7. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the first
marker of the area from which you wish to copy
Automix data, and press [F1 (In)].
Chapter 9
[ENTER/YES]. If you press [EXIT/NO], the erasure will
be halted, and you will return to Step 10.
fig.4-06
12. When the data has been erased, the display will indicate
“Complete.” Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
133
Chapter 9 Automix
8. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the last
Destination Mark
marker of the area from which you wish to copy
Select the first marker of the copy destination.
Automix data, and press [F1 (Out)]. A checkmark will be
The markers that had originally been assigned to the copy
added to the copy area.
destination will remain, but the data will be rewritten. Also,
the markers from the copy source will be added.
fig.4-04.e
fig.4-10.e
Copy area
1
2
3
Destination Marker
4
5
6 7
8 9 10
11
9 10 11 12
13
Destination Marker
Check marks
1
2
6, 10:
Even if there is only one marker for the Automix data that
you wish to copy, press [F1 (In)] and then [F1 (Out)] for the
desired marker.
the Automix data that will be copied, press [
].
9. Press [F3 (Copy)].
10. Use [
], [
4
5
6 7 8
The Automix data of the copy-destination
markers will be rewritten.
7, 9, 11: Since copy-source markers corresponding to
the copy-destination markers do not exist, the Automix
data will be erased.
8, 12:
You can turn the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the Automix
setting value at the cursor location. If you wish to re-select
3
Markers with Automix data will be created.
11. To copy the data, press [F4 (Exec)]. If you press
[F6 (EXIT)], you will return to Step 7 without copying the
data.
12. A message will ask for confirmation. Press [ENTER/
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.4-08
YES]. If you press [EXIT/NO], the data copy operation
will be halted, and you will return to Step 11.
fig.4-11
13. When the data has been copied, the display will indicate
Target
This will indicate the type of Automix data that you selected
to be copied in Step 6. If you wish to copy all Automix data,
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “All Level and Pan.”
Destination Target
Select the copy destination for the Automix data.
There is no limitation on the copy-source and copydestination data. For example, you can copy the volume level
data (0–127) from a track and overwrite it onto the pan data
(L63–0–R63). However, if you do so, the results may not be
what you expect.
134
“Complete.”
14. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 9 Automix
Smooth Data Transitions
(Gradation)
6. Make sure that the cursor is located at “Edit Target,” and
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the type of Automix
This operation creates Automix data that smoothly connects
the first Automix marker in the specified area with the last
data to which you wish to apply the Gradation
operation.
7. Use [
marker.
] and [
] to move the cursor to the first
marker of the Automix data to which you wish to apply
fig.4-12.e
Gradation area
Gradation area
the Gradation operation, and press [F1 (In)].
8. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the last
marker of the Automix data to which you wish to apply
0
M1
M7
Time
0
M1
M7
Time
the Gradation operation, and press [F1 (Out)].
checkmarks will be added to the range selected for
Gradation.
Editing of the Automix data cannot be cancelled by the Undo
function.
fig.4-04.e
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
3. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “A.Mix,” and then
press [F5 (A.Mix)].
4. Press [F2 (Micro)].
5. Press [PAGE] so that [F1] indicates “In.”
Check marks
fig.4-03
You can turn the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the Automix
setting value at the cursor location. If you wish to re-select
the type of Automix data that will be edited, press [
].
9. Press [F4 (Grad)].
10. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set each
parameter.
fig.4-16
Chapter 9
Value
Adjust the beginning (In:) and end (Out:) of the Gradation
area.
135
Chapter 9 Automix
Gradation Curve
Select the curve by which the gradation will be created.
Linear:
Linear.
Exp+:
Convex above (exponential curve).
Exp-:
fig.4-17
Convex below (exponential curve).
Increasing or Decreasing All Data
Values (Shift/Expand)
This operation increases or decreases the values of the
Automix data in a specific area. This can be done in two
ways:
Shift adds (or subtracts) the same amount to each Automix
data value.
Expand increases or decreases all Automix data values by
the same proportion relative to a specified standard value.
Linear
Exp+
Exp-
fig.4-20.e
Shift
Marker Add
If this is turned on, markers will automatically be added to
the area specified for gradation in the optimal locations for
the curve that you selected in “Gradation Curve.” If this is
0
turned off, markers will not be added.
M1
M8
Time
0
M1
M8
Time
0
M1
M8
Time
fig.4-18.e
Gradation area
Gradation area
Expand
0 M1
M5
Time
0 M1
M8
Time
0
M1
M8
Time
11. To execute the Gradation operation, press [F4 (Exec)]. If
you press [F6 (EXIT)], you will return to Step 7 without
executing the Gradation operation.
12. A message will ask you to confirm the operation. Press
[ENTER/YES]. If you press [EXIT/NO], the Gradation
operation will be halted, and you will return to Step 11.
fig.4-19
Editing of the Automix data cannot be cancelled by the Undo
function.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
3. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “A.Mix,” and then
press [F5 (A.Mix)].
4. Press [F2 (Micro)].
5. Press [PAGE] so that [F1] indicates “In.”
fig.4-03
13. When the Gradation operation has been executed, the
display will indicate “Complete.” Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
136
Chapter 9 Automix
6. Make sure that the cursor is located at “Edit Target,” and
Shift
use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Automix data
Specify the actual amount (-50–50) by which the Automix
that will be increased or decreased.
data values will be increased or decreased.
7. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the first
fig.4-25.e
marker of the Automix data you wish to increase or
Shift
decrease, and press [F1 (In)].
8. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the last
marker of the Automix value that you wish to increase or
decrease, and press [F1 (Out)]. Checkmarks will be
added to the selected area.
0 M1
M8
Time
Expand
fig.4-04.e
Specify the ratio (0.5–2.0) by which the Automix data values
will be increased or decreased relative to the “Threshold.”
Threshold
When using Expand to increase or decrease the Automix
data values by a specified proportion, this specifies the center
value.
fig.4-26.e
Expand
Check marks
Threshold
Even if there is only one marker for the Automix data that
you wish to increase or decrease, press [F1 (In)] and then [F1
(Out)] for the desired marker.
0 M1
M8
Time
11. To execute the Shift/Expand operation, press [F4 (Exec)].
If you press [F6 (EXIT)], you will return to Step 7 without
You can turn the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the Automix
setting value at the cursor location. If you wish to re-select
the Automix data that will be edited, press [
].
], [
12. A message will ask you to confirm. Press [ENTER/YES].
If you press [EXIT/NO], you will return to Step 11
9. Press [F5 (Exp)].
10. Use [
executing the Shift/Expand operation.
without executing the Shift/Expand operation.
], [
], and [
] to move the
fig.4-27_80
cursor. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the parameters.
the display will indicate “Complete.” Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Target
This will indicate the type of Automix data whose data will
be increased or decreased, as you selected in Step 6. If you
wish to shift or expand the values of all Automix data, use
the TIME/VALUE dial to select “All Level and Pan.”
137
Chapter 9
13. When the Shift/Expand operation has been completed,
Chapter 9 Automix
Erasing Automix Data
Erase Mode:
Selects the Automix data to be erased
Erasing Automix Data on
Specified Channels
Event:
1. Locate to the point where you want to erase the Automix
data.
Marker:
2. Confirm that Automix is on.
Only automation events are erased. Markers will remain
in place.
Both regular markers as well as Automix markers are
erased.
3. Select the channels for which you want Automix erased.
Hold [AUTOMIX] and press the desired Input SELECT,
Track SELECT, or SOLO/EDIT buttons so they are
flashing.
Erase From:
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [CLEAR].
Specify the ending marker number of the range you
want erased.
Automix is erased on the selected channels.
Specify the beginning marker number of the range that
you want erased.
Erase To:
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
Erasing Automix Data on All Channels
You may end up recording Automix data only to
immediately decide you want to try it again. Do not try to
use the UNDO button to erase Automix. Erase Automix data
using one of the following two methods.
To Quickly Erase all Automix Data, Including
Snapshots
This procedure will erase ALL markers in the VS-1824!
1. Hold [SHIFT] and [CLEAR], and press [TAP].
“Clear All Tap Markers?” appears in the display.
2. Press [ENTER/YES]. Or, if you wish to cancel the
operation, press [EXIT/NO].
6. “Erase *** - *** Sure?” appears in the display. “***”
indicates the Automix marker number. Press [ENTER/
YES]. Or, press [EXIT/NO] if you wish to cancel the
operation.
Saving and Exiting Automix
In some cases, you may want to temporarily switch back
to manual mixing after you’ve recorded Automix data.
The easiest way to do this is to simply press [AUTOMIX]
to turn Automix off. Later, you can press [AUTOMIX]
again to turn Automix back on, and your previously
recorded Automix data will play back. Since all recorded
Automix data is stored when you use Song Store, you
can be confident your automated mix is only a button
touch away.
To Erase Selected Automix Data
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTIL)].
The Utility menu icon appears.
2. Press [F5 (A.Mix)].
If “A.Mix” does not appear above [F5], press [PAGE]
and then press [F5 (A.Mix)].
3. Press [F4 (Erase)]. The Automix Erase screen appears in
the display.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change settings.
fig.11-14
138
If you perform Song Store when Automix is on (i.e.
[AUTOMIX] is lit), the next time you select the song, it
will load and Automix will be turned on.
If you record Automix data, then turn Automix off (i.e.
[AUTOMIX] is not lit), and then use Song Store, the next
time you select the song, Automix will be off. However,
you can press [AUTOMIX] to turn it on, and your
previously recorded Automix data will be in place.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Editing
The VS-1824 offers some powerful editing functions for
manipulating the audio you record. Track edit functions such
as Erase, Cut, Move, Copy, Insert, Import, and Time
Compression/Expansion allow you to edit your audio
quickly and easily within the digital domain. Phrase edit
functions such as Delete, Split, Move, Copy, Trim In, and
Trim Out allow you to define and edit entire sections of your
song at once. Best of all, because the VS-1824’s Undo function
(p. 62) works during editing in the same way that it does
when recording, you can experiment without fear of losing
your original version. This chapter explains, in detail, the
editing functions available in the VS-1824.
* Make sure that track editing does not end up leaving any
sections of audio that are 0.5 seconds or shorter. Any sound
left over as a result of track editing which is 0.5 seconds or
shorter will not be played.
* Track editing may make it seem that a portion of the audio has
disappeared, however, the data itself has not been deleted from
the hard disk. Thus, even when you carry out a track editing
procedure, the available disk space shown in the display does
not change.
Track Erase
This operation erases audio from the specified area, leaving
empty space in its place. Compared to a tape recorder, this is
like recording silence over an unwanted section of tape.
fig.04-25
A
Start
End
Time
* Make sure the Track Erase function does not end up leaving a
remaining section of audio that is 0.5 seconds or shorter. Any
sound left over as a result of Track Erase that is 0.5 seconds or
shorter will not be played.
* While it may seem that the audio has disappeared, the data
itself has not been deleted from the hard disk. Even when you
carry out the Track Erase procedure, the available disk space
shown in the display does not change.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F2 (Erase)] for Track Erase.
If you don’t see “Erase” above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“Erase” appears, and then press [F2 (Erase)].
4. Press the Track STATUS button to specify the track to be
erased. The STATUS button turns red, indicating it is the
track to be edited. You can press more than one STATUS
button if you wish to erase more than one track. If you
press a STATUS button and then change your mind,
press it again to change it back to green.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternate method:
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to erase.
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
d.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks will be selected to be
erased.
e.
Press [F1 (Back)].
139
Chapter 10
a.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set the START and END values. You can enter
the START and END times in a number of different ways
such as using LOCATOR buttons, markers, the
TIME/VALUE dial, Transport controls, or by Measure/
Beat.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
SHIFT+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
Track Cut
This operation cuts audio from the specified area. The area of
audio between the Start point and the End point is removed
completely, and the remaining section of audio is spliced on.
When a section of audio is cut, audio following the section is
moved earlier on the timeline to fill in the gap. Compared to
a tape recorder, this is like using a razor blade to slice out a
region of tape, and then splicing the two remaining ends
together.
fig.04-21
A
fig.04-27
Start
End
Time
* Make sure the Track Cut function does not end up leaving a
remaining section of audio that is 0.5 seconds or shorter. Any
sound left over as a result of Track Cut that is 0.5 seconds or
shorter will not be played.
* While it may seem that the audio has disappeared, the data
itself has not been deleted from the hard disk. Even when you
carry out the Track Cut procedure, the available disk space
shown in the display does not change.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
START (Start Point)
Specifies the start time of the segment to be erased.
3. Press [F6 (Cut)] for Track Cut.
END (End Point)
If you don’t see “Cut” above [F6], press [PAGE] until
“Cut” appears, and then press [F6 (Cut)].
Specifies the end time of the segment to be erased.
All V.Tracks
Normally, audio is erased only from the currently
selected V-Track. If you want the same segment of audio
to be erased on all V-Tracks, set this to “On.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Erase.
7. When Track Erase is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
4. Press the Track STATUS button to specify the track to be
cut. The STATUS button turns red, indicating it is the
track to be edited. You can press more than one STATUS
button if you wish to cut more than one track. If you
press a STATUS button and then change your mind,
press it again to change it back to green.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
140
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Alternate method:
START (Start Point)
a.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
Specifies the start time of the segment to be cut.
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to the track you want to cut.
] to move the
END (End Point)
Specifies the end time of the segment to be cut.
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
All V.Tracks
d.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be
cut.
Normally, audio is cut from only the currently selected
V-Track. If you want the same segment of audio to be cut
on all V-Tracks, set this to “On.”
fig.04-22
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Cut.
7. When Track Cut is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
e.
Press [F1 (Back)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set the START and END values.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (p. 43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
SHIFT+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
fig.04-23
Chapter 10
141
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Move
Alternate method:
This operation moves audio to a new location on the
timeline, and simultaneously, to another playback track, if
desired. This is useful for correcting timing mistakes that can
occur during recording.
fig.04-08
Example 1: Moving within the same track
a.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to move.
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
e.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be
moved.
fig.04-09
A
Start
A
End
To
Time
Example 2: Moving to a different track
B
B
f.
Start
End
To
Time
* Make sure the Track Move function does not end up leaving a
remaining section of audio that is 0.5 seconds or shorter. Any
sound left over as a result of Track Move that is 0.5 seconds or
shorter will not be played.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired
V-Track for the destination track. The V-Track is
indicated by the number to the right of the dash. For
example, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-Track 1,” and
“9L-1” indicates “Track 9, V-Track 1.”
* Do not designate V-Tracks that have already been specified as
move destinations for other tracks.
g. Press [F1 (Back)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F3 (Move)] for Track Move.
If you don’t see “Move” above [F3], press [PAGE] until
“Move” appears, and then press [F3 (Move)].
4. The track SELECT buttons are used to select the source
track(s) and the STATUS buttons are used to select the
destination track(s). Press the Track SELECT button to
specify the track to be moved. The SELECT button stops
blinking, indicating it is the track to be moved.
Press the Track STATUS button for the desired
destination track. The STATUS button turns red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
For example, if you wanted to move the section of audio
from Track 3 to Track 7, you would first press the Track
3 SELECT button, the press Track 7 STATUS.
142
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set the START, END, FROM, and TO values.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
[SHIFT]+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
fig.04-10
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
• Even on the mastering tracks, “CDR” V-tracks can only
be moved to V-tracks which already have been recorded
with “CDR” data, or to new V-tracks which have no data
recorded on them.
• V-tracks recorded within a song with a recording mode
other than “CDR” cannot be moved to mastering tracks
which are already recorded with the “CDR” recording
mode ON.
START (Start Point)
Specifies the start time of the segment to be moved.
END (End Point)
Specifies the end time of the segment to be moved.
FROM (From Point)
Specifies the reference position of the segment to be
moved, in relation to the TO point. Normally, this is set
as the same as the START point.
TO (To Point)
Specifies the time point the segment will be moved to.
Specifies the destination point.
+Insert
When this is set to “On,” a blank space is inserted at the
destination location (the To Point) that is equal in length
to the section of audio being moved. Then the Track
Move is carried out. This is useful for moving a section
of audio within your song without altering any audio
that is currently there.
If the above rules are not followed, and the MOVE
command would mix CDR audio with regular audio,
then “Found Illegal Track Pair!” appears in the display
and track move cannot be executed. Please press
[ENTER/YES] and select the copy destination again.
7. When Track Move is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
fig.04-12
A
A'
Start
End
To
Time
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Move.
Chapter 10
143
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Copy
This operation copies audio to another location on the
timeline, and simultaneously, to another playback track, if
desired. This is convenient when you want the same chorus
to occur at several different points of the song, but you don’t
want to re-record it each time.
* Set the track copy so it is longer than 0.5 seconds. If this is less
than 0.5 seconds or shorter, the performance data will be
copied but may not be played.
For example, if you wanted to copy the section of audio
from Track 3 to Track 7, you would first press the Track
3 SELECT button, then press Track 7 STATUS.
Alternate method:
a.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to the track you want to copy.
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
] to move the
fig.04-02
Example 1: Copying twice to the same track
If you would like to copy entire sections of your song, you
can press [F2 (All)] to select all tracks for copying.
fig.04-03
A
Start
A'
End
A"
To
Time
Example 2: Copying twice to a different track
B
B'
B"
e.
Start
End
To
Time
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F2 (Copy)] for Track Copy.
If you don’t see “Copy” above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“Copy” appears, and then press [F2 (Copy)].
4. The track SELECT buttons are used to select the source
track(s) and the STATUS buttons are used to select the
destination track(s). Press the Track SELECT button to
specify the track to be copied. The SELECT button stops
blinking, indicating it is the track to be copied.
Press the Track STATUS button for the desired
destination track. The STATUS button turns red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
144
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the V-Track
for the destination. For example, “1-1” indicates
“Track 1, V-Track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track 9,
V-Track 1.”
* Do not designate V-Tracks that have already been specified as
copy destinations for other tracks.
Press [F1 (Back)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set the START, END, FROM, and TO values.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (p. 43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
[SHIFT]+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
fig.04-04
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
• Even on the mastering tracks, “CDR” V-tracks can only
be copied to V-tracks which already have been recorded
with “CDR” data, or to new V-tracks which have no data
recorded on them.
• V-tracks recorded within a song with a recording mode
other than “CDR” cannot be copied to mastering tracks
which are already recorded with the “CDR” recording
mode ON.
START (Start Point)
Specifies the start time of the segment to be copied.
END (End Point)
Specifies the end time of the segment to be copied.
FROM (From Point)
Specifies the reference position of the segment to be
copied, in relation to the TO point. Normally, this is set
as the same as the START point.
Copy Time (Copy Time)
If the above rules are not followed, and the Copy
command would mix CDR audio with regular audio,
then “Found Illegal Track Pair!” appears in the display
and track move cannot be executed. Please press
[ENTER/YES] and select the copy destination again.
7. When Track Copy is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Specifies the times (1–99) of copying.
TO (To Point)
Specifies the time point the segment will be copied to.
Specifies the destination point.
+Insert
When this is set to “On,” first a blank space is inserted at
the destination location (the To Point) that is equal in
length to the section of audio being copied. Then the
Track Copy is carried out.
fig.04-06
A
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
If you plan on using Track Copy to arrange sections of your
song, it is a good idea to use the metronome when you
record. Then you will be able to select sections of your song
for copying by using the measure and beat indicators.
A'
Start
End
To
Time
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Copy.
Chapter 10
145
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Insert
This operation inserts blank space at the specified location.
* Do not leave sound shorter than 0.5 seconds before or after
there area to be inserted. Any sound within 0.5 seconds will be
copied but may not be played.
fig.04-17
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set the START and TO values.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (p. 43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
[SHIFT]+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
fig.04-19
START
TO
Time
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F5 (Ins)] for Track Insert.
If you don’t see “Ins” above [F5], press [PAGE] until
“Insert” appears, and then press [F5 (Ins)].
4. Press the Track SELECT button to select the tracks on
which you want to insert blank space. The SELECT
button stops blinking, indicating it is the track to be
edited.
Alternate method:
START (Start Point)
a.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
Specifies the start time insert.
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to insert on.
TO (To Point)
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
e.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be
inserted on.
f.
Press [F1 (Back)].
fig.04-18
Specifies the time point the segment will be copied to.
Specifies the destination point.
All V.Tracks
Normally, silence is inserted only on the currently
selected V-Track. If you want silence to be inserted on all
V-Tracks, set this to “On.”
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Insert.
7. When Track Insert is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
146
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Exchange
fig.04-15
This operation swaps the audio data on two tracks.
fig.04-14
Example: Exchanging tracks 1 and 2
Track1
A
B
C
Track2
D
E
D
E
Track1
Track2
A
B
C
d.
Time
1. Select the V-Track containing the source playback audio
to be exchanged.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the V-Track
for the destination. For example, “1-1” indicates
“Track 1, V-Track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track 9,
V-Track 1.”
* Do not designate V-Tracks that have already been specified as
exchange destinations for other tracks.
6. Repeat Step 5 if you want to exchange more than one
pair of tracks.
7. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes Track Exchange.
4. Press [F4 (Xchg)] for Track Exchange.
If you don’t see “Xchg” above [F4], press [PAGE] until
“Xchg” appears, and then press [F4 (Xchg)].
5. The track SELECT buttons are used to select the source
track(s) and the STATUS buttons are used to select the
destination track(s). Press the Track SELECT button to
specify the track to be exchanged. The SELECT button
stops blinking, indicating it is the track to be exchanged.
Press the Track STATUS button for the desired
destination track. The STATUS button turns red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
For example, if you wanted to exchange the audio from
Track 3 to Track 7, you would first press the Track 3
SELECT button, then press Track 7 STATUS.
Alternate method:
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to exchange.
b.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
c.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be
exchanged.
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
• “On” cannot be exchanged to other V-tracks which are
not on the mastering tracks.
• Even on the mastering tracks, “CDR” V-tracks can only
be exchanged with V-tracks which already have been
recorded with “CDR” data, or with new V-tracks which
have no data recorded on them.
If the above rules are not followed, then “Found Illegal
Track Pair!” appears in the display and track move
cannot be executed. Please press [ENTER/YES] and
select the copy destination again.
8. When the exchange is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
9. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
147
Chapter 10
a.
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Time Compression/
Expansion
This operation allows you to expand or compress the
playback time of a track or a group of tracks by a specified
time. You can specify the amount of time compression or
time expansion in a range of 75-125%, but the more extreme
the setting, the more the sound quality may be affected. We
recommend you try to keep the compression and expansion
within a range of 93-107%.
fig.04-29
Example 1: Compression
4. Press the Track STATUS button to specify the track to be
time-compressed or -expanded. The STATUS button
turns red, indicating it is the track to be edited. You can
press more than just one STATUS button if you wish to
edit more than just one track. If you press a STATUS
button and then change your mind, press it again to
change it back to green.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternate method:
Start
To
End
Time
a.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
b.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to time compress.
c.
Press [F3 (MARK)].
d.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be
cut.
e.
Press [F1 (Back)].
fig.04-30
Example 2: Expansion
Start
End To
Time
* Track Compression/Expansion creates new performance data
with a different playback time. For this reason, it cannot be
executed if there is not sufficient space on the current drive.
* It is not possible to use Time Compression/Expansion when
the elapsed time from the Start Point to the End Point or from
the Start Point to the To Point is less than 0.5 seconds.
* Do not time compress audio to a period of 0.5 seconds or
shorter. Any sound 0.5 seconds or shorter will not be played.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F3 (CmpEx)].
If you don’t see “CmpEx” above [F3], press [PAGE] until
“CmpEx” appears, and then press [F3 (CmpEx)].
148
5. [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor.
Set the START and END values.
A quick way to enter edit points (START, END, FROM, and
TO) is to create a locator for each edit point (p. 43) before
entering the edit screen. Then go to the desired edit screen
(such as Erase, Copy, Cut). You can enter your edit points by
pressing a LOCATOR button and then holding [SHIFT] and
pressing [LOC 1] to enter that point as the START time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 2] to enter that point as the END time,
[SHIFT] + [LOC 3] to enter that point as the FROM time, or
[SHIFT]+ [LOC 4] to enter that point as the TO time.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
6. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the compression or
expansion.
fig.04-31
* Be aware that depending on conditions, it may take some time
for compression or expansion to be completed. This is not a
malfunction. Progress of the operation is shown in the display.
Do not turn off the power until the compression or expansion
is completed! You can cancel compression or expansion by
pressing [EXIT/NO].
7. When Track Compression/Expansion is completed
correctly, “Complete” appears in the display.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
START (Start Point)
Specifies where the time compression or expansion will
start.
If you are unhappy with the edit you made, press [UNDO].
“UNDO Level 1” will be displayed. Press [ENTER/YES] to
restore your track(s) to their condition prior to the edit.
END (End Point)
Specifies where the time compression or expansion will
end.
Pitch Mode
Variable: The pitch of the audio will change
Fixed: The pitch will remain at the original level.
Type
This selects which algorithm is used to complete the
Time Compression/Expansion. The type will also affect
how long the process takes. Select the setting that
matches the type of song or material you are working
with.
A: Vocal, Narration
B: Slow-tempo Songs
C: Fast-tempo Songs
To Point
This specifies the ending time location that will result
from the compression or expansion.
Amplitude
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [SONG END].
2. Make a note of the current measure and beat settings.
3. From the Tempo Map screen, use the [CURSOR] buttons
and the [TIME/VALUE] dial to select the new tempo.
4. Advance your song to the measure and beat location
noted in Step 2. Don’t worry that the measure and beat
indicator doesn’t match your song.
5. Make a note of the current time location (e.g.,
00h07m32s00f).
6. Proceed with the Time Compression/Expansion
procedure and use the following edit points:
START: 00h00m00s00f
END:
[SHIFT] + [SONG END]
TO:
The time location from Step 5
Chapter 10
This specifies the volume level that will result from the
compression as a percentage of the original source (50,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100%). The default value of 60% is
recommended. If the volume level after conversion is too
low, use the Undo function to return to its original state,
increase the Amplitude setting, and try the operation
again. Excessively high Amplitude settings can
introduce distortion in the audio.
If you have used the metronome while recording, here is a
quick way to change the tempo of your song using Time
Compression/Expansion:
149
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Track Name
Normally, each track is given a name as shown below.
6. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], and the
TIME/VALUE dial, enter the name of the Track.
fig.04-33
If you press [NUMERICS/ASCII] so it is lit, you can use the
SELECT and STATUS buttons to enter characters in a fashion
similar to a computer keyboard.
The function buttons work as shown below:
[F1 (Hist)]:
Track V-Track
Track Name (up to 16 characters)
You can change the name for each track. This helps you to
remember what performance is recorded on each track. Give
your tracks names such as “Lead Vocal” or “Rhythm Guitar”
to help keep your work organized.
1. You can change the names of all V-Tracks that are
presently selected. If you wish to change the name of a
recorded track, first make sure it is the currently selected
V-Track.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
4. Press [F4 (Name)].
If you don’t see “Name” above [F4], press [PAGE] until
“Name” appears, and then press [F4 (Name)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to rename, and then press
[F1 (Name)] or [ENTER/YES].
The Track Name screen appears in the display.
fig.04-33a
Pressing this button will take you through a list of the
last 20 track names, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all the characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]:
Stores the track name and exits the Track Name screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Track Name screen without storing the track
name
7. When you are done entering the track name, press
[F5 (Write)].
8. Repeat Steps 5-7 to rename additional tracks as desired.
9. Hold [SHIFT] and press [ZERO (STORE)].
“STORE OK ?” appears in the display.
10. Press [ENTER/YES]. This saves the song including the
new track names.
11. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
150
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
6. Press [F4 (Step →)].
Track Import
fig.04-38
This allows you to copy recordings from other songs into the
current song.
fig.04-35
Current Drive
Current Song
Other Song
Performance Data
Performance Data
7. Press [
]. The cursor moves to “Source Track.”
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the source track to
be copied.
9. Press [
]. The cursor moves to “Destination Track.”
10. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination track
in the current song.
* You can only import a standard track from a song that has the
same sample rate and recording mode as the current song.
fig.04-39
* You can import a pair of tracks containing a stereo CD image
file (p. 183) from any song, regardless of the song’s recording
mode. If the current song uses the CDR recording mode, you
can import the image file to any pair of V-Tracks. If the
current song uses MTP, MAS, MT1, MT2, LIV or LV2, you
can the import image file only to V-Tracks on Tracks 17 and
18—in addition, the destination V-Tracks must not already
contain any standard recorded data.
* If there is insufficient disk space on the current drive, the
Track Import procedure cannot be successfully performed.
1. First select the song into which you want to import the
track.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display.
If it does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
4. Press [F5 (Imprt)] for Track Import.
If you don’t see “Imprt” above [F5], press [PAGE] until
“Imprt” appears, and then press [F5 (Imprt)].
Recording mode of the current song: “CDR”
→ Source track to import should be “CDR.”
Recording mode of the current song: other than “CDR”
→
If the source track to import is "CDR," the destination track
should be one of the mastering track (tracks 17/18 or 7/8),
and include "CDR" tracks or tracks with no data recorded.
• If the source track you are importing is not “CDR,” the
destination track should be the same recording mode as the
source track, and include no “CDR” tracks or no data recorded.
If the above rules are not followed, “Found Illegal Track Pair!”
appears in the display and track import cannot be executed. Please
press [ENTER/YES] and select the import destination again.
12. When the Track Import is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
151
Chapter 10
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the source song—
the song containing the track—and press [F3 (Mark)].
The source song you select must have the same recording
mode and sample rate as the current song.
11. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes Track Import.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase Editing
Phrase Delete
In Play mode, you can select the phrase that you wish to edit,
This operation deletes the specified phrase. This operation does not
change the position of other phrases or tracks on the timeline.
and quickly jump to the desired editing window using the
fig.04-60
following shortcut method.
A
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Move the current time so that it falls within the phrase
that you wish to edit.
3. Use [
], [
] to highlight the phrase that you wish
to edit.
Time
Select the phrase
for editing
Reverse indication
* While it may seem that the audio has disappeared, the data
itself has not been deleted from the hard disk. Even when you
carry out the Phrase Delete procedure, the available disk space
shown in the display does not change.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F6] indicates “Del,” and then press
[F6 (Del].
Current time
If the bottom line of the display is enclosed in a heavy line,
you can also turn the TIME/VALUE dial to highlight the
phrase that you wish to edit.
4. Press [PAGE] so that the function buttons display the
Phrase Edit Menu.
5. Press the STATUS button for the phrase that you wish to
delete. The STATUS indicator will light in red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
divide, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can mark or unmark all phrases
simultaneously.
At this time, the function buttons take you to the desired
editing operation’s window.
[F1 (Copy)]: Opens the Phrase Copy window, 157.
[F2 (Move)]: Opens the Phrase Move window, 155.
[F3 (TrimI)]: Opens the Trim In window, 159.
[F4 (TrimO)]: Opens the Trim Out window, 160.
[F5 (Del)]:
Opens the Phrase Delete window, below.
6. Press [F4 (Exec)].
[F6 (Split)]:
Opens the Phrase Divide/Split window,
153.
7. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
152
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Dividing a Phrase
(Phrase Divide/Split)
The Phrase Split function allows you to divide the selected
phrase (or phrases) at the Now Time location on the time axis
using Phrase Divide and Phrase Split. This can be useful
for isolating a section of audio that you want to loop.
Automatically Dividing a Phrase
(Phrase Divide)
This function automatically detects silent portions of a
phrase according to the volume level that you specify—the
Threshold Level—and divides the phrase into two or more
7. Press [F1 (Back)].
phrases at these points.
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
Time
parameters.
Time
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F2] indicates “Split,” and then
press [F2 (Split)].
Select how the phrase will be divided. In this case, select
“Divide.”
5. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
6. Press the STATUS button for the phrase that you wish to
divide. The STATUS indicator will light in red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternatively, you can use [
Type
], [
], [
], and
Divide:
Automatically divide the phrase into two or
more phrases.
Split:
Manually divide the phrase into two separate
phrases.
IN Threshold
Specify the volume (-84 - 6 dB) that will be used when
searching for the point at which the phrase begins to sound.
The VS-1824 will search for a point that exceeds this level.
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
divide, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
Chapter 10
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can mark or unmark all phrases
simultaneously.
153
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Specify the length of time (0.1–9.9 sec.) that will be preserved
Splitting a Phrase into Two Parts
(Phrase Split)
before reaching the “IN Threshold.”
This operation divides a phrase into two parts at the
IN Margin
specified location (time) in the time axis.
IN Threshold
Time
IN Margin
When IN Margin is short
Time
To
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
When IN Margin is long
OUT Threshold
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
Specify the volume (-84-6 dB) that will be used when
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
searching for the point at which the phrase stops sounding.
The VS-1824 will search for a point that falls below this level.
OUT Margin
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F2] indicates “Split,” and then
press [F2 (Split)].
5. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
Specify the length of time (0.1–9.9 sec.) that will be preserved
after reaching the “OUT Threshold.”
6. Press the STATUS button of the phrase that you wish to
split. The STATUS indicator will light in red.
*
OUT Threshold
OUT Margin
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
split, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
When OUT Margin is short
When OUT Margin is long
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
10. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
154
By pressing [F2 (ALL)] you can mark or unmark all phrases
simultaneously.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase Move
7. Press [F1 (Back)].
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
This operation moves the specified phrase to another
location on the timeline, or to a different track. This is
convenient for correcting timing mistakes that can occur
when recording.
* Each phrase needs to be longer than 0.5 seconds. Otherwise,
short phrases will not be played.
fig.04-47
A
A'
TO
Time
Type
Select how the phrase will be divided. In this case, select
B
“Split.”
Divide:
Automatically divide the phrase into two or
more phrases.
Split:
B'
Manually divide the phrase into two separate
phrases.
TO
To (to point)
Time
Specify the time location at which the phrase will be split.
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
10. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
ig.04-63
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F3] indicates “Move,” and then
press [F6 (Move)].
5. Press [F1 (Selph)].
6. The track SELECT buttons are used to select the source
track(s). Press the Track SELECT button to specify the
phrase to be moved.
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
move, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
The SELECT button stops blinking, indicating it is the
track to be moved.
155
Chapter 10
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be moved.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Quantize
If you set this to “ON”, the TO time (destination time of
the Move) will be set at the beginning of the measure set
by the tempo map or sync track. For example, it's easy to
Move a phrase one measure when the phrase length is
2.0 seconds as when the tempo map setting is 120.
However, you will need a complicated calculation if the
tempo is 119.1. If you set Quantize ON, you can avoid
this.
Further, if this is set to ON, Overlap will be
automatically set to ON also.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
7. Press the Track STATUS button for the desired
destination track. The STATUS button turns red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
8. Press [F1 (Back)].
9. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor,
and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the parameters.
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
• Even on the mastering tracks, “CDR” V-tracks can only
be moved to V-tracks which already have been recorded
with “CDR” data, or to new V-tracks which have no data
recorded on them.
• V-tracks recorded within a song with a recording mode
other than “CDR” cannot be moved to mastering tracks
which are already recorded with the “CDR” recording
mode ON.
FROM (From Point)
You can specify the exact sync point of the phrase to be
moved as the FROM time. The FROM time will be
moved to the position designated as the TO time. You
can specify a FROM time that is not necessarily located
within the phrase. The destination of the Move is the TO
time.
TO (To Point)
You can specify the destination time of move as TO time.
156
If the above rules are not followed, and the MOVE command
would mix CDR audio with regular audio, then “Found
Illegal Track Pair!” appears in the display and phrase move
cannot be executed. Please press [ENTER/YES] and select
the move destination again.
11. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase Copy
9. Use [
This operation copies the audio of a specified phrase to
another location. This is convenient when you want, for
example, a four-measure rhythm pattern to loop seamlessly.
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
* Each phrases needs to be longer than 0.5 seconds. Otherwise,
short phrases will not be played.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F2] indicates “Copy,” and then
press [F2 (Copy)].
FROM (From Point)
5. Press [F1 (Selph)].
6. The track SELECT buttons are used to select the source
track(s). Press the Track SELECT button to specify the
track to be copied.
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
move, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
The SELECT button stops blinking, indicating it is the
phrase to be copied.
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be moved.
You can specify the exact sync point of the phrase to be
copied as the FROM time. The FROM time will be copied
to the position designated as the TO time. You can
specify a FROM time that is not necessarily located
within the phrase.
TO (To Point)
The destination of the Copy is the TO time.
Quantize
If you set this to “ON”, the TO time (destination time of
the Copy) will be set at the beginning of the measure set
by the tempo map or sync track. For example, it's easy to
Copy a phrase one measure when the phrase length is
2.0 seconds as when the tempo map setting is 120.
However, you will need a complicated calculation if the
tempo is 119.1. If you set Quantize ON, you can avoid
this.
Further, if this is set to ON, Overlap will be
automatically set to ON also.
Overlap
7. Press the Track STATUS button for the desired
destination track. The STATUS button turns red.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
(see illustrations below)
8. Press [F1 (Back)].
157
Chapter 10
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
If you set this to “OFF”, the phrase will copy so that the
first copy begins exactly at the end of the original and
the copying procedure will be the same as if the
beginning/ending time of the phrase is same as the
START/END time of the Copy. If you carry out a copy
twice or more under this condition, there will be no
blank spaces between the copied phrases. If you set this
to “ON”, the interval between FROM and TO will be
kept. Therefore, if the phrase length is shorter than the
interval, there will be blank spaces between the copied
phrases. If phrase length is longer than the interval, the
phrases will be overlapped.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
EX1 : Phrase is shorter than interval of FROM and TO
EX : In case phrase length defers
A
A
FROM
TO
Time
B
C
Copy Times="2," Overlap="Off"
FROM
A
A'
FROM
TO
Time
A''
TO
Time
Copy Times="2," Overlap="Off"
A'
A
Copy Times="2," Overlap="On"
A
B
A'
B'
TO
C'
C"
Time
FROM
EX2 : Phrase is longer than interval of FROM and TO
A
FROM
B"
A''
C
FROM
A"
TO
Time
TO
Time
If you are setting Overlap to ON, you do not need to
select phrases with the same length. However, it is
possible that the ending part of the phrase could be
missed if the interval between FROM and TO do not
match the phrase length.
Copy Time
Specifies the times (1–99) of copying.
Copy Times="2," Overlap="Off"
A'
A
FROM
A''
TO
Time
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
Copy Times="2," Overlap="On"
A'
A
FROM
TO
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
A''
Time
About phrase copying
Please be careful if you copy 2 or more phrases at the
same time when Overlap is OFF. If the lengths of the
selected phrases are not exactly the same, you will find
that the beginning points of each phrase will be different.
If you want to carry out such a copying procedure, be
very sure the length of the selected phrases are the same.
Phrases captured simultaneously with punch in
recording or trimmed phrases using the Trim In/Trim
Out functions (see p. 159-160), for example, could be
used.
• Even on the mastering tracks, “CDR” V-tracks can only
be copied to V-tracks which already have been recorded
with “CDR” data, or to new V-tracks which have no data
recorded on them.
• V-tracks recorded within a song with a recording mode
other than “CDR” cannot be copied to mastering tracks
which are already recorded with the “CDR” recording
mode ON.
If the above rules are not followed, and the Copy
command would mix CDR audio with regular audio,
then “Found Illegal Track Pair!” appears in the display
and phrase move cannot be executed. Please press
[ENTER/YES] and select the move destination again.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
11. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
158
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase Trim In
This adjusts the point at which the phrase begins without
changing the phrase’s position on the timeline. This is
convenient for trimming the edges of a phrase to be looped.
fig.04-52
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be moved.
7. Press [F1 (Back)].
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
TO
Time
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F4] indicates “TrimI,” and then
TO (To Point)
You can specify time of trim in.
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
press [F4 (TrimI)].
10. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
5. Press [F1 (Selph)].
6. Press the STATUS button for the track that you wish to
trim.
*
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
Chapter 10
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
trim, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
The STATUS button turns red.
159
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase Trim Out
This adjusts the point at which the phrase ends without
changing the phrase’s position on the timeline. This is
convenient for trimming the edges of a phrase to be looped.
fig.04-56
If [F2 (All)] is pressed, all tracks are selected to be moved.
7. Press [F1 (Back)].
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
TO
Time
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F5] indicates “TrimO,” and then
10. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
5. Press [F1 (Selph)].
6. Press the STATUS button for the track that you wish to
trim.
If you want to select TR 1-12, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select TR 13-18, press [FADER/MUTE] several
times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
Alternatively, you can use [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to move the cursor to the phrase that you wish to
trim, and press [F3 (MARK)] or [ENTER/YES].
The STATUS button turns red.
160
You can specify time of trim out.
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
press [F5 (TrimO)].
*
TO (To Point)
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Phrase New
The alphabetical order of the take names
You can create a new phrase any time you wish from any
recorded take in the song.
Creating a New Phrase
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F3] indicates “New,” and then
press [F3 (New)].
5. Press [F1 (Take)].
6. At this time, pressing [F3 (Sort)] will switch the order in
which the takes are sorted, cycling through the following
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the take that will be
the basis of the newly created phrase.
8. Press [F4 (Sel)] or [ENTER (YES)].
choices.
HIST:
The order in which the takes were recorded
V.Tr:
The order of the V-Tracks on which the takes
are recorded
NAME:
The alphabetical order of the take names
9. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
parameters.
The order in which the takes were recorded
Take
This will show the take that you selected in Step 8. You
may re-select the take if desired.
Track
Select the track on which you wish to create the new
phrase.
fig.6-05.e
The order of the V-tracks on which the takes are recorded
To
Specify the time at which you wish to create the new
phrase.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)]. The Phrase New command will be
executed.
Chapter 10
161
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
Naming Takes
You cannot mix on one V track regularly recorded audio
with audio that has been recorded with the CDR Recording
Mode ON.
You can assign a name to a take in the Phrase New window.
In Songs that use a Recording Mode other than “CDR”
follow these rules:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
• Even on the mastering tracks, new phrases from takes
recorded in CDR Mode can only be created on V-tracks
which already have been recorded with “CDR” data, or
to new V-tracks which have no data recorded on them.
• V-tracks recorded within a song with a recording mode
other than “CDR” cannot be used as takes for new
phrases on mastering tracks which are already recorded
with the “CDR” recording mode ON.
When you do so, you also have the option of automatically
re-naming any phrases that play a part of the take.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] to make the Phrase Edit Menu appear.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F3] indicates “New,” and then
press [F2 (New)].
5. Press [F1 (Take)].
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
take whose name you wish to change.
If the above rules are not followed, and the New Phrase
command would mix CDR audio with regular audio,
then “Illegal Track!” appears in the display and phrase
new cannot be executed. Please press [ENTER/YES] and
select the destination track to create a new phrase again.
7. Press [F6 (Name)].
8. The Take Name window will appear. Use [
[
], [
], and [
],
] and the TIME/VALUE knob
to assign a name to the take.
11. When the display indicates “Complete,” press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
Phrase Name
With each recording, the following phrase names are
assigned automatically.
fig.04-70
At this time, the function buttons perform the following
operations.
4-digit number
Phrase Name (same as Track Name)
[F1 (Hist)]: Each time you press the button, you will
cycle backward through the last twenty names that were
assigned.
V-track containing the Phrase
Track containing the Phrase
You can change phrase names. Identifying a phrase by its use
can make editing simpler, since it leaves you less to
remember. For example, on a guitar track, one phrase might
be labeled “Riff,” and another phrase labeled “Solo.”
If you press [NUMERICS/ASCII] so it is lit, you can use the
SELECT buttons and STATUS buttons to enter characters in a
fashion similar to a computer keyboard.
162
[F2 (Clr)]:
Delete all characters.
[F3 (Del)]:
Delete the character at the cursor location.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Insert a space at the cursor location.
[F5 (Write)]: Finalize the take name and exit the
window.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exit the window without finalizing the
take name.
Chapter 10 Track and Phrase Editing
9. After assigning the name, press [F5 (Write)].
Deleting a Take
A message will ask whether you also want to change the
names of the phrases used by that take.
A deleted take cannot be recovered using the Undo function.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
10. If you also want to change the name of any phrase that
plays the take, press [ENTER/YES]. If you press
[EXIT/NO], the phrase names will remain the same, and
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that the Phrase Edit Menu appears.
4. Press [PAGE] so that [F3] indicates “New,” and then
press [F3 (New)].
only the take name will change.
5. Press [F1 (Take)].
Phrase names will have an incrementing number added to
the end of the take name. For example, if the take is named
“AcousticGuitarLR,” the phrase names will be
“AcousticGuitar-1,” “AcousticGuitar-2,” etc.
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
take you wish to delete.
11. When the display indicates “Complete,” hold down
[SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
12. Press [ENTER/YES]. The song will be saved.
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play mode.
7. Press [F5 (Del)]. A message will ask you to confirm.
8. If you wish to delete the take, press [ENTER/YES].
If you press [EXIT/NO], you will return to Step 6
without deleting the take.
9. When the take has been deleted, the display will indicate
“Complete.” Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. You will return to
Play mode.
When you delete a take, the song will be stored
automatically.
163
Chapter 10
When a take is deleted, all phrases it uses are also deleted.
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Editing Operations
On a tape recorder, in order to modify a performance, you
would have to erase the performance you recorded
previously. Also, if you wanted to change the composition of
a song, you would have to record it from the beginning, or
use a razor blade and splicing tape to splice sections of the
recording together. In either case, with the tape itself being
physically altered, the recording could never be restored
back to its original condition. This type of editing is known
as destructive editing.
FROM (From point)
Specifies a reference point within the section of audio to be
edited that will be placed at the “TO” point to align the edit.
In most cases, the FROM point will be the same as the START
point. It could also be the downbeat of a measure or a sound
effect—anything that can be used for precise alignment.
TO (To point)
Specifies the alignment point (or destination) for the section
of audio to be edited, as in a Move or Copy edit.
Using the FROM Point Effectively
With digital disk recorders, you can make copies of your
audio without affecting the original material. Copying data
has no effect on the sound quality. It is easy to copy parts of
the recording to different locations, or to erase specified
portions of the track. Even if you make a mistake during
punch-in recording or track bouncing, you can restore the
data back to its original condition. Editing that allows the
original audio to be recovered is known as non-destructive
editing.
Non-destructive track and phrase editing are some of the
most powerful tools available in the VS-1824. Since the
VS-1824 also has 999 levels of UNDO, you can edit your
audio without risk.
Steps for Track Editing
Normally, audio is moved starting at the specified
START time, and moved to the TO point. However, if
you want to move audio based on a point between the
START and END points, you can define this using the
FROM point.
For example, suppose you want to move a sound effect that
consists of a time bomb ticking and then exploding, but you
want the beginning of the explosion to land at a specific point
in time. In this case, the START point would be the very
beginning of the “ticking” sound effect, and the END point
would be the very end of the sound effect, after the
explosion. The FROM point would be the point in the sound
where the explosion begins. The TO point would be the
position on the timeline where you want the explosion to
occur. This type of edit is called a back-time edit. You don’t
have to figure out where the ticking should begin in order to
have the FROM and the TO points line up.
fig.04-05
There are two basic editing steps on the VS-1824:
Step 1:
Set the edit points.
Step 2:
Complete the button presses to perform the edit.
Example3: Copying using the “FROM” setting
C
As you approach the editing process, certain information is
necessary to perform the edit. You should determine:
C'
• What kind of edit you want to do (Erase, Copy, Insert,
etc.—see Chapter 10)
• Which track or tracks you want to edit (one, several, or all)
• Where the edit points are (Start, End, From, To)
Simple edits such as Track Erase and Track Cut only have
two edit values: START and END. Edits such as Track Move
and Track Copy have two additional values: FROM and TO.
These terms are explained here:
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the audio to be edited.
END (End Point)
Specifies the ending time of the audio to be edited.
164
Start From
End
To
Time
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Step 1: Set the Edit Points
The first step to editing audio on the VS-1824 is finding the
START and END edit points. These edit points indicate
where on the track you want to start the edit, and where on
the track you want to end the edit. There are many different
ways to do this, and many different tools available to help
you, including locators, Preview and Scrub.
Here are some common ways to set edit points:
• Create locators while the song is playing
• Use [FF] and [REW] to locate to point you want to edit
• Preview To and Preview From
• Scrub
Typically, you will use a combination of the above methods
to define edit points.
For example, as you’re listening to your song, you may press
a LOCATOR button to establish a point close to where an
edit needs to occur. Now that you’re in the ballpark, you
might use Preview and Scrub to define a precise edit point.
Quick Editing
3. Locate the point in the song where you want to end your
erasing. Press [LOCATOR 2].
Now try the edit:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F2 (Erase)] for Track Erase. If you don’t see
“Erase” above [F2], press [PAGE] until “Erase” appears,
and then press [F2 (Erase)].
3. Press the Track 5 STATUS button to select Track 5 for
erasure. The STATUS button turns red, indicating it is
the track to be edited. You can press more than one
STATUS button if you wish to erase more than one track.
To deselect a track, press the STATUS button again to
change it back to flashing green.
SPECIAL SHORTCUT: The first four LOCATOR buttons can
be used to enter the current time location into the START,
END, FROM and TO fields by holding [SHIFT] and the
respective LOCATOR button. See Steps 4 through 7 below:
Setting Edit Points Using LOCATORS
4. Press [LOCATOR 1]. This moves the timeline to the point
where you want to begin erasing.
One of the fastest ways to set edit points is to set locators “on
the fly,” that is, while your song is playing. Start by clearing
the first two locators (if necessary).
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [LOCATOR 1]. This enters the
current time value (recalled by LOCATOR 1) as the
“START” point for the edit.
1. Hold [CLEAR] and press [LOCATOR 1]. Hold [CLEAR]
and press [LOCATOR 2].
6. Press [LOCATOR 2]. This moves the timeline to the point
2. Press [PLAY].
7. Hold [SHIFT] and press [LOCATOR 2]. This enters the
current time value (recalled by LOCATOR 2) as the
“END” point for the edit.
3. Press [LOCATOR 1] at the spot where you would like to
start an edit.
4. Press [LOCATOR 2] at the end of the section you wish to
edit.
where you want to stop erasing.
8. Press [F4 (Exec)] to execute the edit based on the
parameters you’ve defined. If it didn’t work, press
[UNDO] and then [ENTER] to “undo” the edit.
LOCATOR Editing Example: Track Erase
Below is a specific example of how to perform one of the
most basic edits on the VS-1824, Track Erase. In Track Erase,
the area of audio between the Start and End points is
replaced with silence. Study the basic steps involved in track
editing using this example: editing Track 5.
Before entering Track Edit mode, set your locators.
1. Hold [CLEAR] and press [LOCATOR 1]. Hold [CLEAR]
and press [LOCATOR 2].
Precision Editing
In the previous example, we used locators to set edit points.
This is a fast and easy way to perform most edits. For some
edits, you may need to define edit points with more
precision. To precisely position your edit points, you will
need to become familiar with the following tools: The
PREVIEW section, Scrub function, and the Waveform
display.
Chapter 11
2. Locate the point in the song where you want to start
erasing. Press [LOCATOR 1].
165
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Setting Edit Points Using Preview
4. Press [TO] or [FROM] to check the actual playback time.
fig.11-02
The Preview function allows you to search for specific edit
points on a track.
For locating precise points in a song, Preview offers a way to
hear a short portion of audio leading up to the current time
location, just after the current time location, or just before
and after the current time location.
Preview [TO], [THRU], and [FROM]
Preview provides a fast and convenient method to audition a
short portion of a track. You can specify the length of the
audition from 1 to 10 seconds. Press the appropriate Preview
button [TO], [THRU], or [FROM] when the song is stopped.
[TO]:
A preview of the song is played back one time for the
specified duration. If the Preview To value is set at two
seconds, you will hear two seconds of the song leading
up to the point of the current play position. You will hear
two seconds of audio playing up to the current timeline.
Use [TO] when you are trying to determine the exact
location of the beginning of a sound, for example the
beginning of a snare hit, or the start of a vocal track.
[THRU]:
A preview of the song is played back one time for the
specified duration. Based on the Preview Lengths for
both the Preview To and Preview From, you will hear a
portion of the song playing through the current position
of the timeline. Use [THRU] when you are trying to
determine the transition between two tracks, and you
want to hear how one ends and the other begins.
5. After you have finished adjusting the Preview Length,
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] or [EXIT] to return to the
Playlist display.
Setting Edit Points Using Scrub
Another part of the Preview section of the VS-1824 is the
Scrub function. Scrub provides an exact method to find edit
points. With analog tape recorders, edit points were
determined by slowly rocking the tape back and forth across
the playback head of the tape machine. The Scrub function
on the VS-1824 emulates this process. During Scrub, you use
the TIME/VALUE dial to slowly rock a portion of your
recording past the VS-1824’s virtual “playback head.”
The following buttons are used during Scrub.
[
], [
]:
Selects the track to be heard during Scrub.
[TO]:
The track is played repeatedly up to the position of the
timeline.
[FROM]:
The track is played repeatedly from the position of the
timeline.
fig.11-03a
[FROM]:
A preview of the song is played back one time for the
specified duration. If the Preview From value is set at
two seconds, all tracks will play for two seconds,
beginning at the current play position. You will hear two
seconds of audio playing from the current timeline. Use
[FROM] when you are trying to determine the exact
location of the end of a sound, for example the ending of
a bass guitar note.
Scrub Length (FROM)
Adjusting the Preview Length
1. To adjust the Preview To length, hold [SHIFT] and press
[TO].
2. To adjust the Preview From length, hold [SHIFT] and
press [FROM].
3. The Preview Length is displayed. Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to adjust the time. When you are first getting
familiar with the Preview functions, you may want to try
a longer Preview length, such as three seconds.
166
Scrub Length (TO)
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Setting Scrub Length
Before you try using Scrub for the first time, you may want to
adjust the Scrub Length, as this setting affects how Scrub
sounds.
1. To adjust the Scrub length, hold [SHIFT] and press
[SCRUB].
2. The Scrub length is displayed. Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to adjust the time. When you are first getting
familiar with the Scrub function, you may want to try a
longer length, such as 70 or 80ms.
fig.11-04
Scrub Length
This sets the length (25ms to 100msec) of audio that is
looped when the SCRUB button is pressed.
3. After you have finished adjusting the Scrub Length,
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] or [EXIT] to return to the
Playlist display.
General Guidelines for Using Scrub
For scrubbing, start with the cursor under the Frame value.
Then later, as you need a finer editing resolution, press
[
] to move the cursor over to Sub Frames. As you try
scrubbing, turn the TIME/VALUE slowly and smoothly for
the best results.
Setting Scrub Direction
When using the Scrub function in the VS-1824, it is possible
to scrub both forward and backward. That is, you can turn
the TIME/VALUE dial either clockwise or counter-clockwise
to find an edit point. If you are trying to find the beginning of
a note or a kick drum, you will most likely start by turning
the TIME/VALUE dial clockwise.
If you are editing dialog and need to find the end of a spoken
word, you would likely locate just past the word and scrub
backwards by turning the TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise until you begin to hear the sound that signifies the
end of the word. When editing dialog, radio or TV spots, you
will probably use the counter-clockwise method of scrubbing
more frequently than when editing music tracks.
Whenever you use Scrub, program the scrub direction for
either clockwise scrubbing or counter-clockwise scrubbing.
Before using Scrub, you should do two things:
• Set the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust frame increments.
Clockwise Scrubbing:
• Set the Scrub Direction using Preview To and Preview
From.
Press [PREVIEW TO] once before pressing [SCRUB]
Set the TIME/VALUE Dial to Adjust Frame
Increments
Counter-clockwise Scrubbing:
Press [PREVIEW FROM] once before pressing [SCRUB]
fig.11-03a
1. Cursor up [
] to access the top section of the VS-1824
display screen.
2. Press [
] to move the cursor to the last pair of
numbers just after the small “f” in the time display.
These are Sub Frames.
Scrub Length (FROM)
fig.02-06a
Hour
Minute Second Frame
Measure Beat
Sub Frame
Marker Number
Cursor
There are 100 Sub Frames in each frame. With the cursor at
this position, each click of the TIME/VALUE dial advances
the play position by 11 hundredths (11/100th) of a frame.
Hold [SHIFT] and slowly turn the TIME/VALUE dial. Now
each click moves the edit line by exactly one hundredth of a
frame. One hundredth (1/100th) of a frame is equivalent to
one three thousandths (1/3,000th) of a second.
Scrub Length (TO)
Chapter 11
167
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Summary of Using Scrub
Before using Scrub, remember to do these five things:
1. Cursor up [
] to access the top section of the VS-1824
display screen.
2. Press [
] so the cursor (underline) is positioned under
either Frames or Sub Frames in the Time Display.
3. Press [TO] once to set the Scrub direction to Clockwise or
[FROM] for Counter-clockwise.
4. Use [
] and [
during Scrub.
] to select the track which is heard
Waveform Display
The pop-up waveform display in the VS-1824 is very useful
for precision editing. The waveform shows audio amplitudes
of the recorded track. You can use the function buttons to
manipulate the resolution of this waveform for very precise
location of edit points.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to view the Playlist Display.
2. Cursor down [
] to access the lower section of the
VS-1824 display screen.
3. Press [F5 (WAVE)]. If “WAVE” does not appear above
[F5], press [PAGE] until it appears, and then press [F5
(WAVE)].
fig.12-14
Expansion in the level direction Expansion in the time direction
4. Use[
] and [
] to select the track to view.
5. If after you press [F5 (WAVE)], a flat line appears in the
waveform window, try the following:
Make sure you have selected a location on a track that
has audio on it.
Press [F1 (ZOOM+)] three times to increase the
amplitude of the waveform.
Press [F3 (←→)] four times to decrease the time zoom of
the waveform.
168
[F1 (ZOOM+)]:
Increases the amplitude of the waveform display, in
three steps. This makes the waveform taller in the
display.
[F2 (ZOOM-)]:
Decreases the amplitude of the waveform display, in
three steps. This makes the waveform shorter in the
display.
[F3 (←→)]:
Decreases the time-zoom of the waveform display, in
four stages. This zooms back on the timeline.
5. Press [SCRUB].
Cursor
6. When the waveform is displayed, the function buttons
operate as follows:
[F4 (→←)]:
Increases the time-zoom of the waveform display, in
four stages. This zooms in on the timeline.
[F5 (WAVE)]:
Removes the waveform display from the screen.
7. When you are done viewing the waveform for a track,
press [F5 (WAVE)] to turn the waveform display off.
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Step 2: Perform the ButtonPushes to Complete the Edit
Entering Editing Time Values
Once you’ve entered a track editing screen, you must then
place the time locations you’ve established for the edit points
(START, END, etc.) into the appropriate fields in the display.
There are several ways to do this. The examples below will
explain how to get your time locations for the START, END,
etc. into the corresponding fields in an edit screen. We’ll use
Track Erase in these examples. See p. 171 for an example
using Track Copy.
fig.04-27
Using [F2 (Now)]:
1. Press [FF] or [REW] or turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
locate to the time at which you want to START the edit.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display. If it
does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
4. Press [F2 (Erase)] for Track Erase. If you don’t see
“Erase” above [F2], press [PAGE] until “Erase” appears,
and then press [F2 (Erase)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to the START field.
] to move the
6. Press [F2 (Now)]. This captures the current time value
and places it in the START field.
7. Press [FF] or turn the TIME/VALUE dial to locate to the
time at which you want to end the edit.
8. Press [
] to move the cursor to the END field.
9. Press [F2 (Now)]. This captures the current time and
places it in the END field.
* Continue this method for FROM and TO fields in applicable
edit functions (e.g., Track Copy). See page p. 171 for a
practical example.
Using the LOCATOR buttons:
Using the TIME/VALUE Dial:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display. If it
does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
3. Press [F2 (Erase)] for Track Erase. If you don’t see
“Erase” above [F2], press [PAGE] so “Erase” appears,
and then press [F2 (Erase)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the START field. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the value of hours, minutes, seconds, frames and
sub frames. If your song was recorded using a tempo
map, you can use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
Measures and Beats as well.
5. Press [
] to move the cursor to the END field. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the value of hours,
minutes, seconds, frames and sub frames, or use the
TIME/VALUE dial to choose Measures and Beats.
Before using this method, hold [CLEAR] and press
[LOCATOR 1] and then press [LOCATOR 2]. This will clear
these two locators, making them available for new
assignments. For edit functions that make use of the From
and To fields, clear Locators 3 and 4 as well.
1. Go to the time location at which you want to START the
edit and press [LOCATOR 1].
2. Go to the time location at which you want to END the
edit and press [LOCATOR 2].
* In applicable edit functions, continue this process for the
FROM and TO points using Locators 3 and 4 respectively.
See p. 171 for a practical example.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
4. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display. If it
does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
Chapter 11
* Continue this method for FROM and TO fields in applicable
edit functions (e.g., Track Copy). See p. 171 for a practical
example.
169
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
5. Press [F2 (Erase)] for Track Erase. If you don’t see
“Erase” above [F2], press [PAGE] until “Erase” appears,
and then press [F2 (Erase)].
SPECIAL SHORTCUT: The first four LOCATOR buttons can
be used to enter the current time location into the START,
END, FROM and TO fields by holding [SHIFT] and the
respective LOCATOR button. See Steps 6 through 9 below:
6. Press [LOCATOR 1] to go to the time location you’ve
designated as the START point.
7. Hold [SHIFT] and press [LOCATOR 1]. This places the
current time value into the START field.
8. Press [LOCATOR 2] to go to the time location you’ve
designated as the END point.
9. Hold [SHIFT] and press [LOCATOR 2]. This places the
current time value into the END field.
* Continue this method for FROM and TO fields using Locators
3 and 4 respectively. See p. 171 for a practical example.
Track Editing vs. Phrase
Editing
The VS-1824 offers two different types of editing. These are
called “track editing” and “phrase editing.” Every time you
start and stop recording, the VS-1824 creates a block of audio
in the display. These blocks are called “phrases,” and they
include the instructions that tell the VS-1824 which portion of
your recordings should be played. If you put a track into
Record at the very beginning of a song, press [PLAY] and
record all the way to the end, you will have one phrase that
plays the entire newly recorded disk file. On the other hand,
if you punch in and out several times over the length of a
track, you will end up with many different phrases—one for
each punch-in and punch-out—that tell the VS-1824 to play a
bit of this recorded disk file, a bit of that one, and so on.
In a track edit, you must specify the START and END points
in a section of audio you wish to edit. For track edits such as
Cut and Erase, you only need to specify the start and end
points. Most editing functions other than Cut and Erase have
four parameters: START, END, FROM and TO. (see Section II
in this chapter for definitions of these parameters).
In track editing, you must select all four points. In phrase
editing however, the START and END points are already
defined as the edges of the phrase.
When to Use Phrase Editing
Phrase Editing can work well when you punch in and out
frequently while recording, since it allows you to work with
the individual pieces of audio that make up the final track.
The START and END points for each piece are defined
during each punch-in and -out. The VS-1824 calculates the
START and END point as defined by the edges of the phrase.
In many cases, phrase editing can be a time-saver. For more
information on phrase editing, see p. 152.
170
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
An Editing Note of Caution
The VS-1824 is not able to play individual pieces of audio
that are 0.5 seconds in length or smaller. If you have a phrase
that is five seconds long, and you erase from the beginning
up to 4.5 seconds, you will be left with a phrase 0.5 seconds
long. Phrases 0.5 seconds or shorter will not be played. While
editing, try to avoid leaving an isolated piece of audio that is
shorter than 0.5 seconds. This applies to Track Erase, Track
Cut, Track Insert and Track Move. For Track Copy, Track
Move, and Track Expansion/Compression, you must choose
a section of audio to be edited greater than 0.5 seconds.
Don’t confuse this with editing resolution. It is possible to
choose edit points in increments of 1/3000th of a second. It is
also possible to erase or cut a portion of audio shorter than
0.5 seconds within a longer section.
Practical Editing Application
Seamless Looping using Track Copy
It is possible to isolate a portion of a rhythm track and use
Track Copy to create a drum loop. Since the Track Copy
function does not actually re-write audio to the hard drive,
creating rhythm loops (or any other edit function) will not
decrease available disk space.
Very carefully determine the START point. The START point
for the loop should be on a downbeat, or on a beat of a
measure that has a clearly audible “edge,” such as a snare hit
or a solid kick drum beat. Then carefully determine the END
point. The END point for the loop should also be on a
downbeat, or on a beat of a measure that has an edge, such as
a snare hit or a solid kick drum beat. If the START point is on
the second beat of a measure, then the END point must also
be on the second beat of a measure, to assure a smoothsounding loop of the correct length.
• Make sure you have complete measures of music
between the START point and the END point.
• For looping, the START and FROM points must be the
same, and the END and TO points must be the same.
The smoothness of the loop will depend on the accuracy with
which you find the START and END points. If your music
was recorded using a Tempo Map and Metronome, finding
the START and END points may be as simple as using the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the measure numbers you want.
If the song was recorded without using the metronome, you
may need to use [SCRUB], [PREVIEW TO], [PREVIEW
FROM] and the Waveform display to find the edit points.
1. Determine the START and END points of the loop, using
one of the previously discussed methods. Place
LOCATOR 1 at the START point. Place LOCATOR 3 at
the same position. Place LOCATOR 2 at the END point.
Place LOCATOR 4 at the same position.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Make sure “Track Edit Menu” appears in the display. If it
does not, press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] once.
4. Press [F2 (Copy)] for Track Copy. If you don’t see
“Copy” above [F2], press [PAGE] until “Copy” appears,
and then press [F2 (Copy)].
171
Chapter 11
5. Press the Track SELECT button to specify the track to be
copied. The SELECT button stops blinking, indicating it
is the track to be copied.
Chapter 11 Editing Tips & Tools
Method #3: Using a Tempo Map
SPECIAL SHORTCUT:
If you do not wish to use locators to define your edit
points or if you want to use locators other than Locators
1 through 4 to define your edit points, you can still use
the [SHIFT] functions of Locators 1 through 4 to assign
the current time location to an edit position (START,
END, etc.)
1. From the normal Playlist Display, simply hold
[SHIFT] and press [LOCATOR 1] (START). The current
time location will now be the START time of any edit
you perform.
2. Continue this procedure for END, FROM and TO by
holding [SHIFT] and the respective Locators 2 thru 4.
Whatever the current time is, when you hold [SHIFT]
and the first four LOCATOR buttons, will be entered
into their corresponding edit positions. You do not have
to be in an edit screen to do this!
6. Enter the START, END, FROM, and TO values:
Press [LOCATOR 1]. Hold [SHIFT] and press
[LOCATOR 1].
b.
Press [LOCATOR 2]. Hold [SHIFT] and press
[LOCATOR 2].
c.
Press [LOCATOR 3]. Hold [SHIFT] and press
[LOCATOR 3].
d.
Press [LOCATOR 4]. Hold [SHIFT] and press
[LOCATOR 4].
Method #2: Using [
and [F2 (Now)]
a.
], [
Press [LOCATOR 1]. Use [
], [
], [
Use [
] to move the cursor to the three-digit
Measure Number in “END.” Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the measure number where you want
the loop to end.
c.
Use [
] to move the cursor to the three-digit
Measure Number in “FROM.” Use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the same measure number you
did for START.
d.
Use [
] to move the cursor to the Measure
Number in “TO.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the same measure number you did for “END.”
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Copy Time.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the number of loops you want.
10. When Track Copy is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
]
],
and [
] to move the cursor to “START.” Press [F2
(Now)].
b.
Press [LOCATOR 2]. Use [
to “END.” Press [F2 (Now)].
c.
Press [LOCATOR 3]. Use [
] to move the cursor
to “FROM.” Press [F2 (Now)].
d.
Press [LOCATOR 4]. Use [
to “TO.” Press [F2 (Now)].
172
b.
9. Press [F4 (Exec)]. This executes the Track Copy.
], and [
], [
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the three-digit Measure Number in
“START.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
measure number where you want the loop to start.
8. Use [
] to move the cursor to “+Insert.” Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “On.” The VS-1824 will now
automatically insert the amount of blank space necessary
for the copy. This ensures that any existing audio on the
selected track(s) will not be copied over. Instead, it will
be pushed back in time to the point immediately after the
copied data.
Method #1: Using LOCATORS
a.
a.
] to move the cursor
] to move the cursor
11. Press [LOCATOR 1] to locate to the beginning of your
Track Loop. Press [PLAY]. Listen to the loop. If it does
not sound as you expected, use the Undo function. You
may need to adjust the values of the START and END
points. If you change the START or END points, make
sure you also change the FROM and TO values
accordingly. Then press [F4 (Exec)] to try the loop again.
12. When you are finished with Track Copy, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 12 Song Editing
Song Arrange
Song Arrange allows you to easily rearrange song structure.
To use Song Arrange, place markers at the beginning of
major sections of your song. Next, set the order in which the
markers are to be played back. This operation can be undone
using the UNDO function.
fig.11-33
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 3 Marker 4
A
B
C
6. Press [ENTER]. This will move the cursor to the second
section. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to define the second section
of your song, as defined by the audio which plays
between the two markers you specify.
You can arrange up to a maximum of 99 separate segments.
The function buttons work as follows:
[F1 (NEW)]:
Specifies the next segment.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all segments.
[F3 (Del)]:
Clears just the segment where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
B
C
A
1. Follow the procedure as described in “Using Markers”
(p. 45), place markers at the beginning of each section of
your song (e.g. Intro, Verse 1, Verse 2, Chorus, etc.).
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (Song)].
The Song menu icon appears.
3. Press [F6 (Arang)].
Inserts a segment in front of where the cursor is
positioned.
[F5 (Exec)]:
Executes Song Arrange.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Song Arrange screen.
7. When all the segments have been set, press [
move the cursor to “Destination Time.”
] to
fig.11-34a
If “Arang” does not appear in the display above [F6],
press [PAGE] until you see “Arang,” and then press
[F6 (Arang)].
fig.11-34a
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “START.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to enter
the marker number which defines the start of the first
section of your song.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “END.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to enter the
marker number that defines the end of the first section of
your song.
8. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to set the time location where the
newly created song is to begin. The function buttons
work as follows.
[F2 (NOW)]:
Enters the time where the timeline is currently
positioned.
[F3 (JUMP)]:
Moves the timeline to the current value of “Destination
Time.”
173
Chapter 12
This chapter explains editing that can be done across an
entire song, rather than on a track-by-track basis.
Chapter 12 Song Editing
[F4 (Arng)]:
Song Split
Moves the cursor back to “Arrange.”
[F5 (Exec)]:
Executes Song Arrange.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Song Arrange screen.
* If the time for the new playlist to begin is set at a point earlier
than the previous song end, the original playlist is
overwritten. If the time for the new playlist to begin is set after
the last mark point of the original song, a mark point is set at
the beginning of the new playlist.
Song Split allows you to make a copy of a song, and to
specify which tracks (and V-Tracks) are to be included in the
copy. The new song created as a result of Song Split will
include all markers, locators, Automix data, tempo maps,
sync tracks, and system settings from the original song. The
newly created song will have the same song name as the
original song, except with the last character replaced by the
letter A.
9. Press [F5 (Exec)]. “Song Arrange Sure ?” appears in the
display.
Song Split cannot be carried out if there is not enough hard
drive space. Song Split cannot be undone using the Undo
procedure. However, it is possible to delete the newly
created song.
10. Press [ENTER/YES]. Or, if you wish to cancel the
procedure, press [EXIT/NO].
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (Song)].
11. When Song Arrange is completed, the screen returns to
the Playlist display.
The Song menu icon appears.
2. Press [F1 (Split)].
If “Split” does not appear in the display above [F1], press
[PAGE] until you see “Split,” and then press [F1 (Split)].
3. Use [[
], [
], [
], and [
], or turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the track you
want to include in the new song. Press [F3 (MARK)] or
press [ENTER/YES]. The track with the mark next to it
will copied.
fig.11-35
174
Chapter 12 Song Editing
Shortcuts for Selecting Tracks During Song
Split
When the cursor is moved to “Track,” you can have
marks simultaneously set or deleted from all selected
tracks. For example, if you move the cursor to the actual
track number column, and press [F3 (Mark)], marks will
be set for all V-Tracks on the selected track. Similarly, if
you move the cursor to the row for the V-Track number
and press [F3 (Mark)], all V-Tracks will be selected. For
example, if you move the cursor to “V-Track 3” and
press [F3 (Mark)], the third V-Track in all tracks will be
marked. Press [F2 (ALL)] to place or remove marks from
all tracks and V-Tracks simultaneously.
4. Check the track name by pressing [F1 (SelTr).
The Song Split Select Track screen appears. You can also
choose tracks to be copied in this screen by pressing
[F3 (MARK)]. When you are done choosing tracks, press
[F1 (Back)].
fig.11-36
Song Combine allows you to combine the V-Tracks of two
different songs. When Song Combine is executed, all tracks
from a second song (source song) are moved to the current
song (destination song), and the second song is deleted.
It is not possible to cancel Song Combine using the Undo
function, so it is recommended that before you perform Song
Combine, make a backup of both the source and destination
songs using a CD-R, CD-RW or DAT recorder.
You can perform Song Combine with any two VS-1824 songs
that have the same sample rate and Record mode. The
information copied to the current song includes performance
data (audio) and the information that designates the track
numbers the performance data is recorded on. Other settings
such as markers, locators, Automix, tempo maps, sync tracks
and system settings are not copied, and will be lost when the
source song is erased.
As a result of Song Combine, it is possible for the tracks of
the source song to overwrite the tracks of the destination
song. To prevent this from happening, use Track Exchange to
move all the V-Tracks in the source song to odd-numbered
positions, and all the V-Tracks in the destination song to
even-numbered positions. Later, after Song Combine is
finished, you can use Track Exchange to re-position all the
V-Tracks as desired.
1. First, select the desired song to be used as the destination
and current song.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (Song)].
The Song menu icon appears.
3. Press [F2 (Combn)].
5. Press [F5 (Exec)]. The Song Split confirmation message
appears in the display.
If “Combn” does not appear in the display above [F2],
press [PAGE] until you see “Combn,” and then press [F2
(Combn)].
fig.11-37
6. Press [ENTER/YES]. Or, if you wish to cancel the
operation, press [EXIT/NO].
7. “STORE Current ?” appears in the display. If you want to
save changes made to the current song, press
[ENTER/YES]. Otherwise, press [EXIT/NO].
8. When Song Split is finished, the screen will return to the
Playlist display.
175
Chapter 12
Song Combine
Chapter 12 Song Editing
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
source song and press [F3 (MARK)]. The song with the
mark will be combined with the current song.
5. Press [F1 (SelSg)], and a directory of song names will
appear. From this screen, you can use the TIME/VALUE
dial to choose the source song. Then press [F3 (MARK)].
When you are done choosing a song, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.11-39
6. Press [F4 (Exec)].
The Song Combine confirmation message appears in the
display.
7. Press [ENTER/YES]. (Or, if you would like to cancel the
operation, press [EXIT/NO].) “STORE Current ?”
appears in the display.
8. If you want to save changes made to the current song,
press [ENTER/YES]. Otherwise, press [EXIT/NO].
When Song Combine is finished, the screen will return to the
Playlist display.
176
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Now try making an original audio CD
using the internal CD-RW drive.
For more detailed information about SCSI, refer to “About
SCSI” (Appendices p. 4).
Create Master Data (Mastering)
Mastering Room
The VS-1824’s Mastering Room contains everything you
need to turn your song into a final master that can be burned
onto your own original audio CD.
The process involves mixing up to 16 of your tracks down to
the L and R “mastering tracks” (Tracks 17 and 18). You can
select the V-Track you want to use—with the factory settings,
V-Track 16 of Tracks 17 and 18 (i.e., 17-16 and 18-16) are
selected. For example, you can play back V-Tracks 1-1, 2-1, 3-
Here’s how to select the mastering tracks and perform a
Chapter 13
You can connect an optional CD-R/RW
drive to the VS-1824's SCSI connector. Adding the CD-R/RW
drive allows you to create original audio CDs. Please refer to
the CD-R/RW drive Owner's Manual for more information.
Mixing Down to the Mastering
Tracks
mixdown.
In some countries—such as the United States—the VS-1824 is
shipped with a hard drive already installed. If you need to
purchase an internal hard drive for your VS-1824, be sure to
purchase an appropriate drive. The successful playing back
of 16 tracks while you mix down to the mastering tracks is
significantly affected by the speed of the hard disk. For this
reason, depending on the structure of the song data—
sampling rate and recording mode, or if punch-in/out is
used frequently, etc.—or depending on the drive that you
use, the display may show “Drive Busy,” and the operation
may not take place correctly.
* In order to take full advantage of the VS-1824’s potential—the
number of tracks that can be recorded/played simultaneously
and recording capacity—we recommend that you use a hard
disk that is 2.1 GB in size or greater.
1. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
2. Press [F1 (MastRm)].
The Mastering Room screen will appear.
1...15-1, and 16-1 (a total of 16 tracks), and record the result
fig.2-03
onto the L and R mastering tracks.
VS-1824
Track 1–16
TR1
MIX
L R
Mastering
Track
MIX
Sw
TR17-16
Digital Out
Select
L R
MASTER OUT
TR18-16
MASTER
DIGITAL OUT
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the value
When the Recording mode (p. 51) is set to “MAS” or “CDR,”
you can use a total of eight tracks. If you are recording onto
the L and R mastering tracks (Tracks 7 and 8), you can play
back Tracks 1-6. If you are not recording onto the mastering
tracks, you can play back Tracks 1-8. Tracks 9–18 cannot be
used.
for each parameter.
When playing back mastering tracks, playback of all other
tracks is silenced.
177
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Sw
fig.2-05.e
Mixdown
Phrase
This parameter turns the Mastering Room feature on and off.
Since you’ll first want to rehearse your mix before actually
recording the mastering tracks, set this to “Off.”
On:
When Sw is turned on, Tracks 17 and 18 are
designated as the mastering tracks—and will be
shown as “L” and “R” on the Playlist display.
Off:
When Sw is turned off, Tracks 17 and 18
function normally.
Original
Phrase
0
to ZERO
0
Time
Play:
Play back the mastering tracks. The sound of
Tracks 1-16 will not be output from the
MASTER jacks.
Time
0
Time
0
Time
CDRRecMode
This parameter determines whether or not a CD disk
image is to be created as your master.
Specify the status of the mastering tracks. For this example,
select “Rec.”
Play back Tracks 1-16 while recording them to
the mastering tracks.
0
to LastPhrs:2s
Stay HERE
Time
On:
When CDRRecMode is on, a CD disk image is
created during the recording of the mastering
tracks using the VS-1824’s CDR recording mode.
Off:
When CDRRecMode is off, no CD disk image is
Status
Rec:
to LastPhrs:0s
to LastPhrs:0s
0
* Remember that audio on Tracks 17 and 18 will not be included
in the final mixdown once Sw is set to “On,” since Tracks 17
and 18 will be used as mastering tracks. If you wish to include
audio from Tracks 17 and 18 in your final mix, you must
bounce it to any track from 1-16.
Time
created during the recording of the mastering
tracks. The mastering tracks are created using
the currently selected recording mode.
Marker
If this is turned “On,” a track number marker will
automatically be assigned to the beginning of the data that is
For details on signal flow—routing—refer to p. 27.
V. Trk
While Tracks 17 and 18 are automatically selected as
mastering tracks, you can select which of their V-Tracks will
be used for mastering. When a new song is created, V-Track
16 of tracks 17/18—17-16, 18-16—are selected by default.
After Rec (after recording)
Specify the time location of the mastering track to which the
mixed down. Normally, you will set this “On.”
If “Can’t Set Marker” Appears in the
Display
CD markers must be set at least 4 seconds apart. If you
see this message, your markers are set too closely
together. To fix this, try a longer After Rec setting. You
can also reset the markers manually—see “CD Track
Numbers,” p. 186.
mixdown will be recorded. When creating an original audio
4. Press [FADER] so that the TR (track) indicator lights.
CD, it is usually best to select “to ZERO.”
fig.2-07.e
to ZERO:
Place the data starting at 00h00m00s00f.
to last Phrs:0S:
Dark
Lit
Place the data after the end of the last phrase in the
mastering tracks.
5. Hold down [STOP], and press the STATUS button for all
tracks (1–12) that you wish to mix down.
to last Phrs:2S:
Place the data two seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the mastering tracks.
to last Phrs:4S:
Place the data four seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the mastering tracks.
Stay HERE:
Place the data at the time location at which it was
actually recorded.
178
The STATUS indicators will light green.
fig.2-06
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
6. Press [FADER] so that the TR (track) indicator blinks.
Mastering Tracks Status Shortcut
fig.2-07.e
The “Status” of the mastering tracks can also be set as
follows.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
7. Hold down [STOP], and press the STATUS button for all
2. Press [PAGE] so that [F6] indicates “M→***” (*** is either
Rec, Ply, or Off).
tracks (13–16) that you wish to mix down.
fig.2-11
The STATUS indicators will light green.
8. Press [PLAY]. The song will play back.
9. Raise and lower the Master fader to set the overall
mixing volume.
The sound that passes through the Master fader will be
recorded on the mastering tracks. In order to record at the
optimal audio quality, you should normally set this to the 0
dB position.
10. Use the channel faders (1–15/16) to adjust the volume
balance of each track. At this time the sound that is being
output from the MASTER jacks—including volume
levels and panning—will be recorded to the mastering
tracks. It is best to set the volume as high as possible
3. The mastering tracks can be turned off, or set to record or
play back. [F6] toggles between these settings. The
indicator above [F6] shows the setting that will be
selected when you next press [F6], as indicated by an
arrow. The current status of the mastering tracks can be
viewed in the level meter in the display. For this
without causing it to distort.
example, press [F6] until “M→Off” appears above [F6].
11. When you have finished adjusting the volume, press
[STOP].
Press [F6] once more to select this setting.
fig.2-12.e
12. Move to the location at which you wish to begin the
Off
Record wait Status
Playback Status
mixdown (such as 00h00m00s00f).
13. Use the cursor buttons and the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the Sw setting to “On.”
14. Press [REC]. The REC indicator will light in red.
15. Press [PLAY]. The PLAY indicator will light in green,
and recording will begin.
16. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
Signal flow (routing)
Track 1–16
TR1
MIX
L R
Mastering
Track
MIX
Sw
TR17-16
TR18-16
MASTER OUT
MONITOR OUT
MASTER
179
Chapter 13
Dark
Blink
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Playing Back the Mastering
Tracks
Here’s how you can verify the audio that was mixed down to
the mastering tracks. You will listen to the mastering tracks.
Tracks 1-16 themselves will not be played.
5. Press [PLAY]. The mastering tracks will play back. Use
the master fader to adjust the volume to a comfortable
listening level.
At this time, the function buttons will perform the following
actions.
[F1 (ZOOM+)]:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Press [PAGE] so that [F6] indicates “M→***” (*** is either
Enlarges the playlist display in the track direction (three
levels).
[F2 (ZOOM-)]:
Rec, Ply, or Off).
Reduces the playlist display in the track direction (three
levels).
fig.2-11
[F3 (←→)]:
Enlarges the playlist display in the time direction (five
levels).
[F4 (→←)]:
Reduces the playlist display in the time direction (five
levels).
[F5 (WAVE)]:
3. Press [F6] until “M→Ply” appears above [F6].
Press [F6] once more to select this setting. The current
status of the mastering tracks is shown in the display.
fig.2-12.e
Off
Record wait Status
Displays the sound level (waveform) that is recorded in
the tracks.
6. When playback ends, press [STOP].
Signal flow (routing)
Playback Status
Track 1–16
TR1
MIX
L R
Mastering
Track
MIX
Sw
TR15-16
MASTER OUT
MONITOR OUT
TR16-16
MASTER
For details on the signal flow, see p. 27.
4. Move to the location at which you started the mixdown.
180
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
To Prohibit Digital Copying
You can insert effects as you mix down.
While performing a mixdown, it is common to insert an
effect such as a parametric equalizer or a compressor. For
this example, we will insert the Mastering Tool Kit (FX1;
p. 99) to adjust the overall volume balance as we mix down.
1. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
2. Press [F1 (MstRm)].
The Mastering Room screen will appear.
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the value
for each parameter.
fig.2-18
SCMS (See Appendices p. 13)
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear in the display above [F1],
press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1
(SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Digital Copy Protect.”
] to move the
Digital Copy Protect
This setting determines whether or not a DAT master
created from the Digital Output jacks of the VS-1824 can
be later copied digitally.
Off:
Digital copying of the DAT tape is allowed.
On:
Digital copying of the DAT tape is prohibited.
4. If you want to prohibit the digital copying of a master
DAT created from the VS-1824, use the TIME/VALUE
dial set Digital Copy Protect to “On.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Sw
This parameter turns the Mastering Room feature on and off.
To rehearse your mix before actually recording your
mastering tracks, select “Off.”
On:
When Sw is turned on, Tracks 17 and 18 are
designated as the mastering tracks—and will be
shown as “L” and “R” on the Playlist display.
Off:
When Sw is turned off, Tracks 17 and 18
function normally.
* Remember that audio on Tracks 17 and 18 will not be included
in the final mixdown once Sw is set to “On,” since Tracks 17
and 18 will be used as mastering tracks. If you wish to include
audio from Tracks 17 and 18 in your final mix, you must
bounce it to any track from 1-16.
Status
This specifies the status of the mastering tracks. For this
example, select “Rec.”
Rec:
Play back Tracks 1-16 while recording them to
the mastering tracks.
Play: Play back the mastering tracks. The sound of
Tracks 1-16 will not be output from the
MASTER jacks.
For details on the signal flow, see p. 27.
181
Chapter 13
When mixing down from the VS-1824 to a DAT recorder or
similar recorder via a digital connection, you can prevent
digital copying of the tape on which the mixdown has been
recorded. Many DAT recorders implement “SCMS”—the
Serial Copy Management System. With a DAT recorder
which uses SCMS, you are allowed to make only one digital
copy of a regular audio CD onto a DAT tape. Once the digital
copy exists on the DAT tape, you cannot make additional
digital copies using the DAT tape as the source. This function
makes DAT tapes recorded digitally from the VS-1824
function as those recorded digitally from a CD. With the
following procedure, you can prevent your digitally mixed
master tapes from being later copied digitally onto DAT
tapes or other similar digital media.
Mixing Down While Inserting
Effects
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
9. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
cursor to “FXIns.”
effect that you wish to use. For this example, select an
effect such as “P210 MTK:Mixdown.”
fig.2-19
fig.2-21
10. After selecting an effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
5. Press [ENTER (YES)].
6. Use [
], [
], [
11. Press [F6 (EXIT)].
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to make your
12. Press [FADER] so that the TR (track) indicator lights.
fig.2-07.e
settings.
fig.2-20.e
Effect Insert Switch
Dark
Lit
13. Hold down [STOP], and press the STATUS button for all
tracks (1–12) that you wish to mix down.
The STATUS indicators will light green.
fig.2-06
Insert Return Level
Insert Send Level
FX1 (effect insert switch 1)
Select how the effect will be connected.
Off:
The effect will not be inserted.
Ins:
The stereo effect will be inserted into both
channels. The inserted effects are shown as icons and as
patch names of up to ten characters.
14. Press [FADER] so that the TR (track) indicator blinks.
fig.2-07.e
Dark
Blink
Snd (effect send level)
Adjust the volume level of the signal that is sent to the insert
effect (-42–6 dB). The default is “0 dB.”
15. Hold down [STOP], and press the STATUS button for all
tracks (13–16) that you wish to mix down. Press [PLAY].
The song will play back.
Rtn (effect return level)
Adjust the volume level of the signal that is output from the
16. Raise and lower the master fader, and verify that the
volume of each track changes.
insertion effect (-42–6 dB). The default is “0 dB.”
7. Press [F1 (FX1)].
8. Press [F2 (Sel)].
182
The sound that has passed through the master fader will be
recorded on the mastering tracks. In order to record at the
optimal audio quality, you will normally set the master fader
to 0 dB.
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
17. Use the channel faders (1–16) to adjust the volume
balance of the tracks. At this time, the sound—the
volume level and panning—that is output from the
tracks. Adjust the volume to as high a level as possible
without causing distortion.
18. When you are finished adjusting the volume, press
[STOP].
19. Move to the time location at which you wish to begin the
mixdown (e.g., 00h00m00s00f).
20. Use the cursor buttons and the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the Sw setting to “On.”
21. Press [REC]. The REC indicator will light in red.
22. Press [PLAY]. The PLAY indicator will light in green,
and recording will begin.
You can create your own audio CD by choosing audio from
two individual tracks in the VS-1824 and writing those to a
CD-R disc. A CD can contain as many as 99 tracks—typically,
each song on a CD is a track—up to a total length of 74
minutes.
To conform to CD audio standards (Red Book), the VS-1824
turns your song into an “image file,” or “disk image,” that is
written, or “burned,” to the CD. This image file can be
created as you burn a CD, during the recording process—
using the CDR recording mode—or during mastering, which
can also use the CDR recording mode (see p. 178).
In both cases, the image file is created on the VS-1824’s
internal IDE drive. The image file must also be located on the
internal IDE drive during the actual CD burning.
An internal IDE hard drive is therefore required for burning an
audio CD. Some countries, such as the United States, ship the VS1824 with an internal IDE drive installed.
23. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
When a disk image is created using the CDR recording mode
or during mastering, it is saved when you save the song.
You can store a song containing an image file on an external
drive or removable disk, such as a Zip disk. However, when
you wish to make an audio CD of the song, you must first
copy the song back to your internal IDE drive.
When an image file is created during the actual CD-burning
procedure, it is temporarily stored on the VS-1824’s internal
IDE drive before being written to the CD-R disc. The song
itself can be stored on the internal drive, or on an external
drive or removable disk. The internal drive must have
enough free space to hold the image file—all available free
space on the drive can be used for this purpose, regardless of
the partition in which the space is located. After the image
file is written to the CD-R disc, it is automatically deleted
from the internal IDE drive.
183
Chapter 13
MASTER jacks will be recorded “as is” to the mastering
Creating an Audio CD
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Before Using the CD-RW drive
Handling the CD-RW Drive
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free
from vibration.
• Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or
down.
• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the drive
and/or damage discs. When the unit has been moved,
allow it to become accustomed to the new environment
(allow a few hours) before operating it.
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only discs with
into the CD-RW drive. Never
insert any other type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips,
coins, or any other foreign objects inside the drive.
• Do not attempt to remove the disc from the CD-RW
drive while the drive is functioning (while the MIDI/
DISK indicator of VS-1824 or busy indicator of external
CD-RW drive is lit).
• Do not attempt to carry a VS-1824 equipped with a
CD-RW drive (VS-1824 CD) while a disc is loaded in the
CD-RW drive.
• Do not touch the lens.
• When the lens is dirty, clean the lens with a commercial
lens blower.
Handling CD-R/CD-RW Discs
• When handling the discs, please observe the following.
❍ Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.
❍ Do not use in dusty areas.
❍ Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed
vehicle.
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty discs
may not read/write properly. Keep your discs clean
using a commercially available CD cleaner.
• Keep the disc in the case.
• Do not keep the disc in the CD-RW drive for a long time.
• Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.
• Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from
inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.
• Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of
any kind.
• Do not bend the disc.
184
Items Necessary for Creating an
Audio CD
• VS-1824
• Blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable) or CD-RW
(Compact Disc-Rewritable) disc
* The audio recorded on CD-RW discs cannot be played on
conventional CD players. If you want to play CD-RW
discs, it is recommended to use the “CD Player Function”
(p. 191) on the VS-1824.
* You cannot use high-speed compatible
CD-RW discs. This mark is printed on
high-speed compatible CD-RW discs.
It is recommended to use CD-R discs from the following
manufacturers.
Taiyo Yuden Co., TDK Co., Mitsui Chemicals Co.,
Mitsubishi Chemicals Inc., Ricoh Co.,Ltd,
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.
It is recommended to use CD-RW discs from the
following manufacturers.
Ricoh Co., Ltd, Mitsubishi Chemicals Inc.
Recommended CD-R/CD-RW discs (approved by Roland)
are shown in the owner's manual of the CD-R/RW drive.
• Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER
output jacks, or stereo headphones
If you are using a VS-1824 that is not
equipped with an internal CD-RW drive, you will need to
purchase a separately available CD-RW drive (approved by
Roland). For instructions on connecting the drive, refer to
“Connecting an External CD-R/CD-RW Drive” (p. 194).
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Creating a Master Stereo Mix
fig.07-03
00h00m00s00
Blank Space
Performance Data
Blank Space
Before Track Cutting
Performance Data
It is a good idea to prepare the final stereo recording of your
song using the tools found in the VS-1824’s Mastering
Room—see p. 177. In particular, we recommend turning on
the Mastering Room’s CDRecMode parameter to create a CD
image file of your song as you record your final mix. This
image file will then be saved when you save your song.
Song data that can be written to CD-R discs must satisfy the
following conditions:
1. Sample Rate and Recording Mode:
Only tracks recorded with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz can be
written to CD-R discs. Make sure you select the 44.1 kHz
sample rate when you create a new song. You may use any
of the recording modes; however, it is recommended you
use either MTP, CDR, MAS, or MT1 for best results.
2. Levels
Audio transferred to the CD will only be the actual audio
data as stored on the hard drive. Mixer, EQ, effects
settings, and Automix data on these tracks will not be
transferred. Thus, any desired level settings, panning,
EQ and effects must be recorded as a part of the tracks’
audio. Make all EQ, level, pan and other settings on the
source tracks during track bouncing—you can use
Automix during the track bouncing process (p. 64).
3. Effects
Audio transferred to the CD will only be the actual audio
data as stored on the hard drive. Effects settings made
with the Track Mixer on these tracks will not transfer to
the CD. Even if reverb or delay is applied to a track, the
reverb or delay will not be written to the CD-R disc. All
desired effects must be recorded as a part of these tracks.
Make all effect settings during track bouncing.
4. Track Bouncing
You can select any two tracks (including any V-Tracks)
to be written to the CD-R disc. One track will become the
left channel of the CD-R, the other the right channel. If
your song exists in a multitrack format, it must be mixed
and bounced down to two tracks before being written to
a CD-R. Designate the resulting stereo tracks as the
tracks to be written to the CD-R disc.
5. Track Editing
The two tracks designated for writing to the CD-R disc
are written from the beginning of the tracks (normally
“00h00m00s00”) to the end of the tracks. Any blank
After Track Cutting
Time
Finalizing
Before a CD can be played on a standard audio CD player—
or can be duplicated—it must be “finalized.” Finalizing
writes certain important information onto the CD, including
the track numbers and Table of Contents (TOC). It is the final
step in the creation of a CD—once a CD has been finalized,
no more songs can be added to the CD.
You can add songs to a CD one-by-one without finalizing the
CD until you are done adding songs, though an un-finalized
CD can only be played using the CD Player feature (p. 191).
This lets you create the CD in stages as you finish each of its
songs. When you are ready to, you can finalize the CD.
If all of the songs are finished, you can burn and finalize the
entire CD at once.
If you plan on having a CD duplicated, burn and finalize the
entire CD at the same time (this is often referred to as the
“disk at once,” or “DAO” method). Some professional
duplicators will not accept a CD created a track at a time.
Two CD-Writer parameters—Finalize and Write Method—
work together to determine how and when a CD is finalized.
When you are adding songs to a CD one-by-one:
- If you may be adding more songs later on, set Write
Method to “Track at Once” and set Finalize to “Off.”
- If you are writing the final song, set Write Method to
“Track at Once” and set Finalize to “On.”
- If you have already written all of the songs you wish
to have on the CD, but have not yet finalized it, you
can do so by setting Write Method to “Track at Once”
and Finalize to “OnlyFin.”
When you are writing the entire contents of a CD at once:
- set Write Method to “Disk at Once.” The VS-1824 will
automatically finalize the CD regardless of the Finalize
setting.
185
Chapter 13
CD standards only allow two tracks (left and right) to be
written to a CD-R. Before recording an audio CD, it is
necessary to create a stereo recording of your song within the
VS-1824. You can do this easily by bouncing your existing
tracks to two available tracks on the VS-1824 (see “Mastering
Room,” p. 177). Or, if you mix your songs to an external
stereo recorder such as a DAT recorder, you can transfer the
stereo mixes back into the VS-1824 for CD recording.
space or silence on the tracks before and after the actual
performance will be written as silence on the CD-R disc.
To avoid this, use Track Cut to remove any unwanted
silence at the beginning of the tracks and at the end of
the tracks, or Track Insert to create space between tracks.
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Assembling Multiple Songs
for CD Recording
It is not necessary to use a DAT machine or some other
digital stereo recorder in order to create professional quality
CD masters. Here’s an example of how you would use the
VS-1824 for creating Disc At Once CD-Rs:
1. Record each of your multitrack songs, using 44.1 kHz
sample rate, and MTP recording mode.
2. Adjust EQ, adjust levels, and add effects on each track as
desired.
3. Use the Mastering Room to bounce the tracks to a stereo
mix.
4. Create a New Song, using 44.1 kHz sample rate, MTP
recording mode. For example, you might name it “My
CD Project.”
5. Use Track Import (p. 151) to assemble the stereo bounces
of each of your songs into the song “My CD Project.” The
sample rate and recording mode of the song “My CD
Project” must match the sample rate and recording mode
of each of the songs.
6. Use Track Move, Track Cut, and Track Insert to
determine the sequence of each of the songs.
7. Place CD track markers.
8. Continue with CD Recording as described in “Writing
Songs to CD-R Discs,” p. 188.
Copyright Protection
Duplication of a copyrighted CD is a violation of the rights of
manufacturers and of the owners of the recorded work. If
you use a part or an entire CD in your compositions with the
VS-1824 and write the song onto a CD-R, obey the copyright
notice on the original CD. The VS-1824 and its CD recording
function is designed to assist you in reproducing material for
which you own the copyright or have obtained permission to
copy material from the copyright owner. Unless you own the
copyright or have permission to copy it from the copyright
owner, you may be violating copyright law and may be
subject to payment of damages and other remedies. If you
are uncertain about your rights, you should contact your
legal advisor.
186
CD Track Numbers
When creating a CD-R with Finalize on, it is recommended
that you designate the position of CD track numbers on the
CD-R by first placing CD track markers in the VS-1824 song.
The location of a track number on a finished CD-R is
determined by the position of CD track markers in the
VS-1824 song. A CD track marker is placed by holding down
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] and pressing [TAP]. A new marker
number appears in the VS-1824 display. This marker will
have a small “c” following it, to designate it as a CD track
number.
Before placing CD track markers, use Track Cut to remove
any unwanted silence from the beginning and end of your
song. Cut the silence so that the beginning of actual audio is
placed at 00h00m00s15f. Do not place a CD track marker at
this point (the VS-1824 automatically places a CD track
marker at 00h00m00s00f). The first CD track marker should
be at the beginning of your second song. Place this CD track
marker by holding [PLAY (DISPLAY)] and pressing [TAP]. If
no other markers are placed in the song, the display will
show 000c for this marker. If you hold [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
and press [TAP] at the beginning of the third song, the
display will show Marker 001c. The following page shows
what you’ll end up with.
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
No CD marker is needed
Becomes CD Track 1
Beginning of Song #2
CD Track Marker # 000c
Becomes CD Track 2
Beginning of Song #3
CD Track Marker # 001c
Becomes CD Track 3
Beginning of Song #4
CD Track Marker # 002c
Becomes CD Track 4
Chapter 13
Beginning of Song #1
and so on...
* Due to audio CD standards, songs on a CD must be at least
four seconds long. Thus, you cannot set two CD track markers
within four seconds of each other. If you attempt to do this,
“Can’t Set Marker” appears in the display, and the process
cannot be carried out. Make sure your CD markers are at least
four seconds apart.
The placement of a CD track marker in a VS-1824 song sends
a command to the CD-R to increment the track number on
the CD-R disc by one. It is not possible to create a CD-R with
non-sequential track numbers, or to skip track numbers.
place all your CD track markers and then use Track Cut or
Track Insert, you will need to go back and re-do all your
markers.
Once you are completely satisfied with the timing and
transitions between songs, place your CD track markers.
Check them by pressing [NEXT] then [PLAY]. If you need to
erase a marker, press [CLEAR]+[SONG]+[TAP].
If you are only recording one song to the CD-R, it is not
necessary to place any CD track markers, whether or not
Finalize is on or off.
Do all your editing first. Use Track Cut and Track Insert to
create exactly the desired transitions between songs. If you
CD Track Number Tip
When setting up CD track markers for a full length CD-R, it’s easy to get confused by the discontinuity between the CD track
marker number and the actual CD track number created. During the CD-R writing process, regular markers—placed by
pressing [TAP]—are ignored by the CD-R. By placing two regular markers during the first song, the subsequent CD track
markers match the actual CD track numbers which they will create.
Before using the CD Write function, place two “dummy” markers somewhere during the first song. It doesn’t matter where
the two dummy markers are placed, as they will be ignored by the CD-R. The first two marker numbers are 000 and 001.
Place the next marker using [PLAY (DISPLAY)]+[TAP] (to indicate a CD track number) where you want the second track of
the CD to begin. This will be marker 002c.
Beginning of Song #1
No CD marker is needed
Becomes CD Track 1
Middle of Song #1
Normal Marker #000
(ignored by CD-R)
Middle of Song #1
Normal Marker #001
(ignored by CD-R)
Beginning of Song #2
CD Track Marker # 002c
Becomes CD Track 2
Beginning of Song #3
CD Track Marker # 003c
Becomes CD Track 3
(etc.)
187
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Writing Songs to CD-R Discs
7. Wait a moment for the CD-R Writer display to appear.
Press [F1 (SelTr)].
fig.07-05
You can create a CD using a CD-RW disc, but it is impossible
to play back audio data recorded on a CD-RW disc using
most CD players, even if the disc is finalized. Audio data
recorded on a CD-RW disc can be played back using the “CD
Player Function” (p. 191) on the VS-1824. Consider using a
CD-R disc instead of a CD-RW disc—CD-R discs can be
played back on a wider variety of CD players.
1.
Make sure that the CD-R/CD-RW drive is properly
connected (see p. 194).
2. Place a blank CD-R disc in the CD-R/CD-RW drive.
For details refer to the column
“Inserting a CD” (see p. 234).
3. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
4. Press [F2 (CD Wt)].
8. Select the left and right tracks from the VS-1824 that you
want written to the CD-R. Use [
], [
], [
],
and [
] and the TIME/VALUE dial to move the
cursor to the V-Track you want written as the left
channel of the CD-R, and press [F3 (Sel L)]. Move the
cursor to the V-Track you want written as the right
channel of the CD-R and press [F4 (Sel R)].
You can use [
], and [
] to jump from track to track,
and then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired
V-Track.
9. Press [F1 (Back)].
fig.07-06
Track which you want written as the right track
Track which you want written as the left track
Song Name
5. “CD-R Write Ready ?” appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES].
6. “Store Current ?” appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES]. If you don’t want to save any changes
made to the current song, press [EXIT/NO].
If the CD-RW disc you are using contains data, “Erase?”
appears in the display. To erase the existing data, press
[ENTER/YES]. “Erase Disc” appears and all the contents
of the CD-RW disc are erased. If you do not wish to erase
the data, press [EXIT/NO], and insert a new disc.
When erase is finished, “Can’t be played back with
Audio CD player” appears in the display. This is to
confirm that regular audio CD players cannot play back
an audio CD made with a CD-RW disc. Press [ENTER/
YES]. Or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel the procedure.
188
Internal IDE hard disk free space
CD-R disc free space
Disk space occupied by a song when written to a CD-R disc
Size of the contentwritten to the CD-R disc
Length of the song which is to be written to the CD-R disc
Number of tracks after writing to the disc is finished
Number of Markers used for track numbers
Determining whether or not the CD-R disc has data written to it
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
10. Verify that the Length M (Megabyte) value is less than
the value for IDE Free. (This step does not apply if your
image file has already been created.)
Write Method
Track at Once:
Two seconds of silence is automatically added to the
CD-R disc before the markers placed in the song to
designate the track number (the same condition as
when writing additional songs).
Source Track Length (in Mbyte) compared
to Free Disc Space on CD-R/CD-RW
You can write additional songs to a CD-R disc written
using Track at Once, as much as the available space
on the disc allows.
The amount of drive space source tracks occupy on the
VS-1824 may not be the same amount of disc space it
occupies on a CD-R/CD-RW disc. The track size on the
VS-1824 varies depending on the number of tracks and
recording mode used. You can make a rough estimate of
the space required on a CD-R/CD-RW disc for a track to
be written by using the following calculation:
M1
M2
VS-1824
0
Time
M1
Source track length (in seconds) x 2 (bytes) x 2 (stereo
tracks) x 44,100 = SIZE (bytes)
For example, a source track that is 60 minutes long (3,600
seconds) occupies:
3,600 x 2 x 2 x 44,1000 = 635,040,000 bytes = 635 MB
12. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
setting.
Finalize
A TOC (Table Of Contents) will be written so that the
audio CD created by the VS-1824 can be played back on
a standard CD player. It is possible to write additional
data to an audio CD that has been finalize.
Off:
Write only the song, and do not finalize.
On:
Write the song, and then finalize.
OnlyFin: Only finalize without writing the song.
Select this if you have inserted a CD-R disc
to which you have already written songs,
but which has not yet been finalized.
M3
M2
M3
Audio CD
0
Time
Disc at Once:
The song and the track number markers added to the
song are written as is to the CD-R disc. However,
additional songs cannot be written to CD-R discs that
have been written using Disc at Once (the same state
as when finalize has been executed).
Even if “Finalize” has been set to “Off,” once you
write a song yo a CD-R disc with “Disc at Once”
selected, additional material can no longer be written
to that disc.
M1
M2
M3
VS-1824
Time
0
M1
M2
M3
Audio CD
0
Time
CD Speed
x4:
The song will be written at quadruple speed
(706 kilobytes per second).
x2:
The song will be written at double speed (353
kilobytes per second).
The available speeds will depend on the Rolandapproved CD drive connected to the VS-1824.
189
Chapter 13
11. Verify that the Length M value is less than the value for
Free (the amount of free space on the CD).
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
13. Press [F5 (Exec)].
A message will ask you to confirm.
When you are using CD-RW discs:
“Track at Once” cannot be selected as the writing mode for
“Writing Method.” The following message appears on the
LCD and it will be unable to carry out the operation if you
try to write CD-RW discs using the Track at Once method.
Adding a Song to a Partially
Recorded Disc
You can add new songs to a CD-R disc that has not been
finalized. Repeat the procedure described in “Writing Songs
to CD-R Discs,” p. 188. Approximately two seconds of silence
is inserted between the new song and the song before it. The
track number is recorded automatically.
fig.07-09
Track Number
In this case, press [ENTER/YES].
Previous Song
Added Song
Silent Portion (approx. 2 sec.)
14. “Audio CD-R Write Sure ?” and “CD Track No. OK?”
appears in the display. This message confirms the
Finalize setting, and makes sure CD track markers are
set. Press [ENTER/YES], or to cancel the operation, press
[EXIT/NO].
15. A message regarding copyright appears in the display.
After reading this message carefully, if you agree to the
conditions, press [ENTER/YES]. To cancel, press
[EXIT/NO].
16. A message regarding licensing conditions appears in the
display. After reading this message carefully, if you
agree to the conditions, press [ENTER/YES]. To cancel
the operation, press [EXIT/NO].
Arranging and Recording
Multiple Songs to a CD-R Disc
By sequencing a number of different songs on stereo tracks,
you can arrange these songs and write them to a CD-R disc.
You can program CD track numbers by placing CD track
markers at song boundaries.
fig.07-10
00h00m00s00
Song 1
Time
Before Marker Setting
00h00m00s00
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 3
If “Not 44.1kHz Song !” Appears in the Display
The sample rate is not 44.1 kHz, so the song cannot be
written to the CD-R disc. Press [YES/ENTER] to cancel
the procedure. Please refer to “Create a New Song (Song
New),” p. 50. Make sure to use 44.1 kHz sample rate for
songs to be recorded to the CD-R/CD-RW drive.
If “Please Insert Disc!” Appears in the Display
This indicates the CD-R/CD-RW drive loading tray is
open, that there is no disc loaded, or the CD-R/CD-RW
drive is not ready for use. Insert a CD-R disc, wait a few
moments for the CD-R drive to read the disc, and then
press [ENTER/YES].
17. After the CD-R writing is finished, “Write Another ?”
appears in the display. If you want to write the same
track data to another CD-R disc, place a new disc in the
CD-R/CD-RW drive and press [ENTER/YES]. Press
[EXIT/NO] to return to Step 2.
190
Song 1
Song 2
After Marker Setting
Song 3
Time
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
CD Player Function
Only the following buttons, knobs, and faders can be
used in the CD Player function.
You can use the CD-R/CD-RW drive to play a partially
recorded CD-R disc—a disc which has not been finalized (see
p. 185)—or to listen to commercially recorded CDs. To listen
to partially recorded CD-R discs, use the CD Player function.
[ZERO]:
1. Insert the partially recorded CD-R disc or a pre-recorded
commercial CD into the CD-R/CD-RW drive.
For details refer to the column
“Inserting a CD” (see p. 234).
Chapter 13
* You can listen to the contents of the disc only through the
VS-1824’s MASTER output, MONITOR output, or from the
PHONES jack. You cannot output the audio from the CD-R/
CD-RW headphone jack or AUDIO OUT jacks.
Goes to the start of the first song.
[REW]:
Rewinds as long as the button is held down.
* [REW] actives when be stooping.
[FF]:
Rapidly advances as long as the button is held down.
* [FF] actives when be stooping.
[STOP]:
Stops the CD.
[PLAY]:
Begins playback from the present location.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
4. Press [F3 (CDPly)].
[PREVIOUS] or [
]:
Returns to the beginning of the previous song.
[NEXT] or [
]:
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
MASTER Fader:
Adjusts the overall volume.
MONITOR Knob:
Adjusts the volume output from the MONITOR jacks.
PHONES Knob:
Adjusts the headphone volume.
* When using the CD Player function, the transport control
buttons do not control standard VS-1824 transport functions.
* The audio playing from the CD-R/CD-RW drive cannot be
recorded back into the VS-1824.
The CD Player screen appears in the display.
Information is displayed as shown in the following:
fig.07-07
Total number of songs on the disc
Song currently being performed
* When listening to a partially recorded CD-R, the last 0.5
second (approximate) of the song cannot be played back until
the disc is finalized.
5. In the CD Player screen, the function buttons perform as
described below.
[F3 (Eject)]:
Ejects the CD-R/CD-RW tray.
[F5 (SelDr)]:
If more than one CD-R/CD-RW drive is connected to the
VS-1824, you can choose another drive to use.
[F6 (EXIT]:
Exits the CD Player screen and returns to the Song Menu
icon.
Current play time
Total running time
Total number of tracks
Disc type (finalized/not finalized)
6. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the CD
track you want to hear.
7. Press [PLAY] to begin CD playback.
191
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
8. Press [STOP] when you are finished with the CD Player
function.
9. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Capture Audio data from
Audio CD (Capture function)
VS-1824 have function to capture Audio data from Audio CDs.
If “Please Insert Disc!” Appears in the
Display
This indicates the CD-R/CD-RW drive loading tray is
open, that there is no disc loaded, or the CD-R/CD-RW
drive is not ready for use. Insert a CD-R disc, wait a few
moments for the CD-R/CD-RW drive to read the disc,
and then press [ENTER/YES].
This can capture audio from CD only in case the
sampling rate setting of current song is 44.1kHz.
If you are using a VS-1824 that is not
equipped with an internal CD-RW drive, you will need to
purchase a separately available CD-RW drive.
For instructions on connecting the drive, refer to “Connecting
an External CD-R/CD-RW Drive” (see p. 194).
If “Blank Disc” Appears in the Display
You are attempting to use the CD Player function with a
CD-R disc that has no audio recorded on it. Insert a
commercially recorded CD or a CD-R disc on which a
recording has been made, and try the operation once
more.
PX-4220Te, PX-8220Te, PX-W124TSe, and PX-W1210TSE
manufactured by PLEXTOR is supported. In case you
are using other drives approved by Roland, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor.
1. Load an Audio CD or CD-R/RW disc that contains audio
you like to capture on CD-R/CD-RW drive.
For details refer to the column
“Inserting a CD” (see p. 234).
2. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
CD-RW/Mastering Menu will appear.
192
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
3. Press [F6 (CDCap].
CD Capture screen will appear.
5. Once the above parameters are set, select the track of CD
shown under “CD Track” pressing [PREVIOUS] or
[NEXT]. The highlighted track is the target to capture.
Chapter 13
● CD Track
Select the track of CD shown under “CD Track.”
Press [PLAY] to play the highlighted track.
When the cursor is in list of “CD Track,” you can select track
of CD pressing [
][
].
6. Press [F5 (Exec)] after completion all the settings.
A message concerning copyright appears in the display.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES].
4. Press [
][
][
][
]to move curser and set
each of following parameters using TIME/VALUE dial.
If following cases, the tracks to capture audio must be set as
Stereo Pair. In case it is not set as Stereo Pair, a message of
“Illegal Track Pair!” appears and unable to capture audio.
The same message appears in the back cover of Owner’s
Manual.
A message of “Capture to Mastering Tr. In CDR mode?”
appears in case of followings.
• “CDR” is selected as recording mode of the current song.
• 17 and 18 tracks * are selected as destination tracks and
• Any phrases in CD-R mode is recorded in destination
tracks.
• those tracks are selected as stereo pair and
• no song data exists on 17 and 18 tracks *.
● L-Ch Dest Track (L channel destination track)
Select the destination track of audio to capture. Select the
destination track of left channel audio here.
● R-Ch Dest Track (R channel destination track)
Select the destination track of audio to capture. Select the
destination track of right channel audio here.
* In case the track which contain any phrases in CD-R mode is
selected as destination of “L-Ch Dest Track,” it is impossible
to change “R-Ch Dest Track” with TIME/VALUE dial.
● Capture TO
You can adjust the time of placement.
to ZERO:
Place the audio data starting at 00h00m00s00f.
to Last Phrs:0S:
Place the audio data after the end of the last phrase in the
destination tracks.
to Last Phrs:2S:
Place the audio data two seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the destination tracks.
*
Press [ENTER/YES] when you want to capture in CDR mode.
If you press [EXIT/NO], the recording mode of current song
will be applied.
If you find message “Illegal Track Pair!”
In the following cases, the tracks to capture audio must
be set as Stereo Pair. Unless, unable to capture.
• “CDR” is selected as recording mode of the current
song.
• Any phrases in CD-R mode is recorded in destination
tracks.
In this case, press [ENTER/YES] and re-set destination
track. (See process 4. above)
7. A message concerning Licensing Conditions is displayed.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES]. This
message appears in the back cover of Owner’s manual.
A message “CD Capture..” appears on display and starts
capture.
to Last Phrs:4S:
Place the audio data four seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the destination tracks.
This is applicable to 7 and 8 tracks instead of 17 and 18 in case
the Recording mode is “MAS.”
8.
If you want to capture other audio data from same CD,
go back to process 4. above.
9. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
193
Chapter 13 CD-RW and Mastering
Canceling the capture
If you want to cancel capture in the middle, operate as follows.
Connecting an external
CD-R/CD-RW Drive
1. Press [EXIT/NO]
A message “Abort?” appears.
2. Press [ENTER/YES] to cease capture.
Press [EXIT/NO] to re-start capture.
Capturing Time
Capturing time differs according to recording mode as
follows.
Recording Mode
CDR (CD writing) .... Approx 40% of actual time
* To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
1. Make sure both the VS-1824 and the CD-R/CD-RW drive
are off. Connect the CD-R/CD-RW drive to the VS-1824
as shown below. If the CD-R is the only SCSI device
connected to the VS-1824, or if it is the last device in the
chain, make sure that the terminator plug is connected to
the remaining SCSI port on the CD-R.
2. Turn on the power of the CD-R/CD-RW drive.
fig.07-01
MAS (Mastering) ...... Approx 80% of actual time
Others......................... Approx 150% of actual time
0
3. Turn on the power of the VS-1824.
* In order for the VS-1824 to properly recognize the CD-R/CDRW drive upon boot-up, it is very important to turn the CDR/CD-RW drive on first, and then turn on the VS-1824.
4. Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
5. Raise the volume of the audio devices as desired.
194
Chapter 14 Other Useful Functions
Vari Pitch
Numerics/ASCII
Vari Pitch allows the VS-1824 to match the pitch of
previously recorded tracks to the instrument currently being
recorded, or to produce certain special effects.
It is possible to enter text using the buttons on the top panel
as an ASCII keyboard. This is useful for entering song, track,
and phrase names, naming user effect patches and EZ
Routings.
In such cases, you can change the pitch of the recorded
performance being played to match the pitch of the
instrument you want to record. This is done by changing the
playback speed of the VS-1824.
To use Vari Pitch, use the following procedure.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM].
Entering Numbers
1. Press [NUMERICS/ASCII]. The button indicator lights.
2. Use the [LOCATOR], [BANK(9)], and [SCENE(0)]
buttons to enter numerals as indicated below.
fig.11-24
1
2
3
9
0
4
5
6
7
8
* For some settings, you can enter “-” (a minus sign) by
pressing [0] twice.
3. After you have finished entering the numbers, press
[ENTER/YES]. This sets the numbers.
The System Menu appears in the display.
Entering Letters
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)].
If you don’t see “PLAY” above [F3], press [PAGE] until
“PLAY” appears, and then press [F3 (PLAY)]. The Play/
Rec Parameter screen appears.
3. Use [
], [
“VariPitchSw.”
], [
], or [
] to cursor to
1. Press [NUMERICS/ASCII]. The button indicator lights.
2. Use all the SELECT and STATUS buttons to enter letters
and numerals as indicated below.
fig.11-25
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select “On.”
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
5. Use [
Pitch.”
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
Space
], [
], [
], or [
] to cursor to “Vari
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the value for
sample rate, which will change playback speed. Listen
during playback to see how the pitch changes.
7. When you have finished adjusting the Vari Pitch, press
[F6 (EXIT)] to return to the Playlist display.
3. After you have finished entering the letters, press
[ENTER/YES]. This sets the text and exits the Numerics/
ASCII mode.
When Vari Pitch is active, a small “V” appears next to the
current time in the upper part of the display.
8. To return to normal playback speed, repeat Steps 1-3 and
turn VariPitchSw to “Off.”
195
Chapter 14
When recording an ensemble performance, all the
instruments normally tune to an instrument such as an
acoustic piano whose tuning cannot easily be changed.
However, it is sometimes necessary to record (overdub) an
acoustic piano onto an existing recording. If, in this case, and
the pitch of the recording is different than the pitch of the
acoustic piano, the new recording will be out of tune relative
to the previously recorded tracks.
Chapter 14 Other Useful Functions
Stereo Input
You can assign input signals from the INPUT jacks or
DIGITAL IN connector directly to the MIX or RECORDING
bus without having them pass through the Input Mixer. You
can also monitor these signals without having them pass
through the Input Mixer or Track Mixer. This is referred to as
the STEREO IN bus. This can be used to bring an additional
stereo input source into the VS-1824. Use the following
procedure to route a signal to the STEREO IN bus.
1. Press the [ST IN] SELECT button. The Stereo In/Effect
Return screen appears in the display.
2. Press [F1(St In)].
3. Press [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the settings as
desired.
Stereo In Select
This setting determines which external input is assigned
to the STEREO IN bus.
Using the MONITOR Knob to
Adjust Channel Panning
You can use the MONITOR knob to directly adjust the pan
(or balance) of the specified channel.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down the SELECT button for the channel whose
pan you wish to adjust, and do so by turning the
MONITOR knob.
Be Careful!
If you turn the MONITOR knob without pressing
SELECT buttons, you will adjust the volume level. If you
are attempting to adjust panning and inadvertently turn
the MONITOR knob toward the right without pressing
SELECT buttons—or if you let go of SELECT buttons
while turning the knob, a high-volume noise capable of
damaging your amp or speakers may occur.
Off:
The STEREO IN bus is not used.
Input 1/2:
Assigns INPUT jacks 1 and 2 to the STEREO IN bus.
Input 3/4:
Assigns INPUT jacks 3 and 4 to the STEREO IN bus.
Input 5/6:
Assigns INPUT jacks 5 and 6 to the STEREO IN bus.
* When you release SELECT button after adjusting the pan, the
edit screen of that channel may appear, but the MONITOR
knob will adjust the pan only for the channel whose SELECT
button is being pressed. For example, even when the edit
screen for Track 1 is displayed, turning the MONITOR knob
while holding down the Track 2 SELECT button will adjust
the Track 2 pan.
Input 7/8:
Assigns INPUT jacks 7 and 8 to the STEREO IN bus.
Digital:
Assigns the DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial or optical) to
the STEREO IN bus.
Level:
Adjusts the volume level (0-127) of the STEREO IN bus.
Balance:
Adjusts the balance (L63—R63) for the STEREO IN bus.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Adjust the STEREO IN bus level using the channel fader.
6. Press [FADER/MUTE] so the “IN” indicator is lit.
7. Use the ST IN fader to adjust the STEREO IN bus level.
8. After you’re finished adjusting the STEREO IN bus level,
press [FADER/MUTE] so “TR” is lit or blinking (p. 71).
* You can quickly assign an INPUT jack to the STEREO IN
bus by holding [ST IN] and pressing the SELECT button for
the input you want. The inputs are assigned in pairs (Inputs 1
and 2, Inputs 3 and 4, Inputs 5 and 6, etc.).
196
If you adjust the pan while sound is playing, you may notice
“blips” in the sound. This is not a malfunction. If you find it
annoying, adjust the pan when the sound is not playing.
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
This chapter describes the MIDI messages that can be used
by the VS-1824 and the operations that the VS-1824 can
perform using MIDI messages. For more detailed
information about MIDI, refer to “About MIDI” (Appendices
p. 3).
Synchronizing with MIDI
Sequencers
This section explains how the VS-1824 can be synchronized
with a MIDI sequencer that implements MTC (MIDI Time
Code). When using MTC, you can choose to have the VS-1824
be the master that controls the MIDI sequencer, or to have the
MIDI sequencer be the master that controls the VS-1824.
MTC Type
The VS-1824 can work with the following types of MTC.
Check the specifications of the MIDI devices that you are
using, and select the appropriate type of MTC in the VS-1824.
30 frames per second non-drop format. This is the VS1824 default value, which is used by most sequencers,
audio devices such as analog tape recorders, and for
NTSC format black and white video.
30:
29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is
used for NTSC format color video.
29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is used
for NTSC live broadcast color video.
25:
25 frames per second. This is used for SECAM or
PAL format video, film, and audio equipment.
24:
24 frames per second. This is used for film and
some audio devices in the US.
MTC (See Appendices p. 12)
Items Necessary for
Synchronization
• VS-1824
• Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER jack,
or stereo headphones
• External MIDI sequencer or computer sequencer
software (such as Emagic® Logic™)
• MIDI Cables
Frame (See Appendices p. 12),
NTSC Format (See Appendices p. 13),
SECAM format/PAL format (See Appendices p. 13)
Drop Frame and Non-Drop Frame
There are two types of time code used by NTSC format
video recorders: drop frame, in which the time code is
not continuous, and non-drop frame, which features
continuous time code. In drop, which is used for NTSC
color video formats, the first two frames of every minute
are dropped, except for those at ten-minute intervals.
fig.08-01
Master and Slave
When synchronizing the VS-1824 with a MIDI sequencer, the
device that sends or transmits MTC or MIDI Clock and acts
as the reference device is referred to as the “master.” The
device that receives the MTC or MIDI Clock signals from the
controlling device is called the “slave.” When using MTC,
you can choose whether to have the MIDI sequencer be the
master that controls the VS-1824, or to have the VS-1824 be
the master that controls the MIDI sequencer. When you use
MIDI Clock, you can synchronize a MIDI sequencer using
the VS-1824 as the master, but it is not possible to
synchronize the VS-1824 as a slave to MIDI Clock.
Non-Drop Frame (29N)
00m59s
...
01m00s
25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 05f ...
Drop Frame (29D)
00m59s
...
01m00s
25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 07f ...
Non-drop is generally used for most video and audio
productions, since formats with continuous frames are
easier to deal with. In contrast, in situations such as live
broadcasts, where the time code clock must match actual
clock time, drop frame is used.
197
Chapter 15
The VS-1824 can be operated in synchronization with a MIDI
sequencer. Refer to the owners’ manual for your sequencer in
conjunction with this manual. There are two main ways to
accomplish synchronization via MIDI. One method is to use
MTC (MIDI Time Code), and the other method is to use
MIDI Clock. MIDI Clock provides two methods within itself;
sync track and tempo map, either of which can be selected.
MIDI Time Code is more precise and should be used for
applications such as syncing to video and syncing the
VS-1824 as a slave to another device. MIDI Clock references
tempo and time signature settings and can be used when
slaving a sequencer or drum machine to the VS-1824.
Using MTC
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Synchronization Using the
VS-1824 as the Master
6. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
fig.08-03
When you want the VS-1824 to control the MIDI sequencer,
use the following procedure:
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer as shown
in the following illustration.
fig.08-02
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Sync Gen. (Sync Generator)
This setting determines what type of MIDI signal is
generated at the MIDI OUT connector on the VS-1824.
For this application, choose “MTC.”
MIDI IN
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
Off:
No MIDI signals are transmitted.
MTC:
2. Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
MIDIclk:
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
The sync track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
5. Use[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
MIDI Thru
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. For this application, use “OUT.”
Out:
MIDI messages are sent from the VS-1824. Select this
when sending MIDI messages such as metronome note
messages, mixer parameter settings (Control Change or
Exclusive messages), and/or synchronization messages.
Thru:
This echoes MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN
connector without changing them.
198
The tempo map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr:
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC frame rate (30, 29N, 29D, 25,24).
Select the MTC rate that matches the rate used in your
MIDI sequencer.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer to slave to the MIDI Time Code
messages received from the VS-1824, and set it to play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on the VS1824, the MIDI sequencer begins playback as well.
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Synchronization Using the
VS-1824 as the Slave
When you want to use the MIDI sequencer as the master to
control the VS-1824, use the following procedure:
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer as shown
in the following illustration.
fig.08-04
6. Press [EXT SYNC]. The button will begin blinking,
indicating the VS-1824 is set to synchronize using MTC
from the external MIDI sequencer.
7. Press [PLAY]. The button blinks green, indicating the VS1824 is in MTC receive-standby mode. When the MIDI
sequencer begins playback and begins transmitting
MTC, playback will begin on the VS-1824. During
synchronization, the EXT SYNC indicator and PLAY
indicator remain lit.
If MIDI Time Code is Unstable
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
fig.08-05
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
settings.
Sync Error Level
This sets the interval (0-10) for checking MTC reception
when synchronizing the VS-1824 to MTC transmitted by
an external MIDI device. When MTC is not sent
continuously, the VS-1824 checks the MTC and cancels
synchronization if there is an error. By setting a longer
interval under such circumstances, synchronization can
continue, even if there are errors in the source MTC.
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC frame rate (30, 29N, 29D, 25,24).
Select the MTC rate that matches the rate used in your
MIDI sequencer.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Set your MIDI sequencer to transmit MTC.
199
Chapter 15
When using MIDI sequencer software for personal
computers, depending on the hardware specifications
and the playing conditions, the MTC signal sent to the
VS-1824 may be unstable. If the synchronization is
erratic, try using the VS-1824 as the master device, or try
raising the VS-1824 Sync Error Level as described above.
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Using MTC Offset
When the VS-1824 is running under the control of MTC from
an external MIDI device, you can synchronize the song’s
playback time and the MTC time. The difference in these two
times is called the “offset.” For example, if the MTC time is
01h00m00s00f00, and the song’s time is 00h10m00s00f00, the
offset is as follows:
Offset
= (MTC Time)-(song time)
Offset
= 01h00m00s00f00-00h10m00s00f00
Offset
= 00h50m00s00f00
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Offset,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Offset
When the VS-1824 is used as a slave to an external MIDI
device, you can synchronize the song’s playback time
and the MTC time. The offset settings range varies
depending on the MTC frame rate selected for the
current song.
Time Display Format
The time display can be set to either Relative (REL) or
Absolute (ABS). For this application, choose “ABS.”
REL:
If the offset value turns out to be a negative number, add
24h00m00s00f00 to the MTC time before subtracting the song
time. For example if the MTC time transmitted is
00h00m50s00f00, and you want the song to playback at
00h01m00s00f00, then the offset works out as shown below:
Offset
= (MTC Time)-(song time)
= 00h00m50s00f00-00h01m00s00f00
= (24h00m00s00f00 + 00h00m50s00f00)
- 00h01m00s00f00
= 23h59m50s00f00
If the VS-1824 is slaved to a MIDI device using a negative
offset, song playback across 00h00m00s00f00 will
momentarily stop at 23h59m59s29f99 before resuming
playback. Be careful not to record any audio until after this
point in time.
The starting time of the song is displayed as
00h00m00s00f00.
ABS:
The starting time of the song is based on the offset
time.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Using the Sync Track (Master)
If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position Pointer
messages, you can use MIDI Clock for synchronization.
There are two methods of synchronizing using MIDI Clock.
One is to use the sync track, and the other is to use the tempo
map. The following material explains how to control the
MIDI sequencer from the VS-1824 using the sync track.
Tempo mapping is described in the next section.
fig.08-05a
What is the Sync Track?
Song
23h59m59s00
00h00m00s00f
Time
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear in the
display above [F1], press [PAGE] until “SYSPM”
appears, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
In addition to the tracks for recording audio signals, the VS1824 has a separate track for recording MIDI Clock signals.
This is called the “sync track.” Unlike conventional
multitrack tape recorders, it is not necessary to reserve one of
the audio tracks for recording the sync track.
To use the sync track, simply record the MIDI Clock
messages from your sequencer onto the sync track. Then put
your sequencer in external sync mode and transmit the sync
track data from the VS-1824 back to your sequencer.
The sync track can be very convenient if you have already
created a tempo map in your sequencer and you want the
measure/beat display on the VS-1824 to match that of your
sequencer. Many sequencers also provide more precise
control over things such as tempo and meter changes than is
possible from the tempo map editing parameters within the
VS-1824.
200
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Recording MIDI Clock Messages
Synchronized Operation
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer as shown
below:
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer as shown
below:
fig.08-06
fig.08-07
MIDI IN
MIDI Sequencer
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
3. Press [F1 (STRec)].
4. If you wish to cancel the MIDI clock data recording,
press [EXIT]. “Wait for Start Command” appears in the
display, and the sync track is ready to record MIDI clock
data.
5. Start playback of the MIDI song. The MIDI clock data is
recorded on the sync track. While MIDI clock data is
being recorded, the input sources can be monitored, but
audio tracks cannot be recorded or played back. When
the MIDI song data is finished playing back, the VS-1824
automatically stops recording MIDI clock data.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 15
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
MIDI Thru
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. For this application, use “OUT.”
6. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
fig.08-08
201
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Sync Gen. (Sync Generator)
This setting determines what type of MIDI signal is
generated at the MIDI OUT connector on the VS-1824.
For this application, choose “SyncTr.”
Off:
Using the Tempo Map
If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position Pointer
messages, you can use the MIDI Clock to synchronize
operations. There are two methods of synchronization using
the MIDI Clock: one is to use the sync track, and the other is
to use the tempo map. This section provides an explanation
of how to control the MIDI sequencer from the VS-1824 using
a tempo map.
No MIDI signals are transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIclk:
The tempo map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr:
The sync track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer to follow the MIDI Clock
messages received from external devices, and to play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on the VS1824, the MIDI sequencer will begin playback as well.
What is a Tempo Map?
A tempo map is a song’s measure, beat, and tempo
information. By transmitting this information to MIDI
sequencers and other devices, it can be used to synchronize
operation with external MIDI devices. The tempo map sets
tempo changes for each measure, so you can record
information that specifies changes in rhythm and tempo to
be played from any designated measure. With the VS-1824,
tempo map s are numbered sequentially from the beginning
of the song, with Tempo Map 1 first, followed by Tempo
Map 2, Tempo Map 3, and so on. Tempo Map 1 is already
specified at the beginning of the song, and determines the
initial tempo of the song. To change the tempo at a
subsequent measure, create a new tempo map at each
location where you want the tempo to change. You can create
up to 50 tempo maps per song.
fig.08-09
Example 1: Song with no tempo changes
Tempo Map 1 (120 BPM)
Example 2: Song with tempo changes occurring during the song
Tempo Map 1
(120 BPM)
Tempo Map 2
(117 BPM)
Tempo Map 3
(108 PBM)
Time
202
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Creating A Tempo Map
Synchronized Operation
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [TAP]. The Tempo Map screen
appears in the display. Tempo Map 1 (the starting
tempo) is displayed.
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer as shown
below:
fig.08-11
2. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
settings as desired.
fig.08-10
Chapter 15
Tempo Map Number
Tempo
Measure
Beat
Cursor
(Tempo)
MIDI IN
Sets the tempo (25.0-250.0) of each tempo map
Meas (Measure)
Selects the measure number of the song (1-999) where
the next tempo map starts.
Beat
This sets the tempo map time signature (1/1 to 8/1, 1/2
to 8/2, 1/4 to 8/4, 1/8 to 8/8). The function buttons
work as shown below.
MIDI Sequencer
[F2 (New)]:
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Adds a new tempo map to the current ending
location.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
[F3 (Ins)]:
Inserts a new tempo map at the current position of the
cursor.
[F4 (Del)]:
Deletes a tempo map at the position of the cursor.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Tempo Map screen.
* Tempo Map 1 is the song’s initial tempo. You cannot delete
Tempo Map 1.
3. When you are finished setting the tempo map, press [F6
(EXIT)]. The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
MIDI Thru
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. For this application, use “OUT.”
6. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
fig.08-12
203
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Sync Gen. (Sync Generator)
This setting determines what type of MIDI signal is
generated at the MIDI OUT connector on the VS-1824.
For this application, choose “MIDIclk.”
Off:
No MIDI signals are transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIclk:
MIDI Clock messages, as determined by the tempo
map, are transmitted.
Other Methods to Generate A
Sync Track or Tempo Map
There may be instances when audio is recorded into the VS-1824
before a sync track is recorded, or before a tempo map is
generated. It is possible to create a sync track or tempo map to
match previously recorded audio. This is helpful when you
want to record a new MIDI sequence on an external sequencer
based upon the previously recorded tracks in the VS-1824. For
example, you might want to program a drum machine to add
percussion parts to a previously recorded live drum track in the
VS-1824. If you create a sync track or tempo map which matches
the live drum track, the MIDI sequence will be in sync.
Place Markers Along with the Tempo
1. Press [ZERO].
SyncTr:
2. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback.
MIDI Clock messages, as determined by the sync
track, are transmitted.
3. While listening to the song, press [TAP] on each beat of
each measure, for the entire song.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer to follow the MIDI Clock
messages received from external devices, and to play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on the VS1824, the MIDI sequencer begins playback as well.
4. When the song is finished, press [STOP].
Create a Sync Track from Markers
After placing markers at each beat of a song, it is possible to
convert the marker data into a sync track. This is useful when
you have already recorded a guitar or vocal performance in
the VS-1824, and now you want to synchronize a MIDI
sequencer to the recording.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F1 (TP→ST)].
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
fig.08-13
Beat
Specify the time signature (number of beats per
measure).
Tap Beat
Specify the number of markers in each measure.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
6. “Overwrite Tempo Map” appears in the display. Press
[YES], or to cancel the operation, press [NO].
7. When the operation is finished, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
to return to the Playlist display.
204
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Create a Tempo Map from Markers
Create a Tempo Map from a Sync Track
After placing markers for each beat of a song, it is possible to
convert the marker data into a tempo map. This is useful
when you have already recorded a guitar or vocal
performance in the VS-1824, and now you want to
synchronize a MIDI sequencer to the recording.
If you have already recorded a VS-1824 sync track from an
external MIDI source, you can convert it into a tempo map.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
3. Press [F3 (ST→TM)].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
3. Press [F2 (TP→TM)].
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
fig.08-15
Chapter 15
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
fig.08-14
Sync Track Beat
Beat
Specify the time signature (number of beats per
measure) for the MIDI clock data recorded in the sync
track.
Specify the time signature (number of beats per
measure).
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
Tap Beat
6. “Overwrite Tempo Map” appears in the display. Press
[YES], or to cancel the operation, press [NO].
Specify the number of markers in each measure.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
6. “Overwrite Tempo Map” appears in the display. Press
[YES]. Or, to cancel the operation, press [NO].
7. When the operation is finished, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
to return to the Playlist display.
7. When the operation is finished, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
to return to the Playlist display.
Creating a Sync Track Automatically
In cases where live audio was recorded into the VS-1824
before a tempo map was set, you can automatically create a
sync track based on two points in the song, and then convert
the sync track to a tempo map using the method explained
above (“Creating a Tempo Map from a Sync Track”). For this
procedure to work you must know the exact number of
measures in the song, and there cannot be any tempo or time
signature changes in the song.
To automatically create a sync track, you must specify a start
time, an end time, and the exact number of measures
between the start time and the end time.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F4 (TI→TM)].
4. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
205
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Using MIDI Controller
Messages
fig.08-16
The VS-1824 can transmit its mixer settings and functions as
MIDI messages, and MIDI messages from an external MIDI
controller can be used to control the VS-1824’s track status
and mixer settings.
Start Time
Specify the actual start time.
End Time
Switching Track Status
Specify the actual end time.
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to switch the
status of each track. MIDI channels 1-16 carry MIDI data to
and from Tracks 1-16 respectively. MIDI channels 1 and 2
also receive and transmit data for Tracks 17 and 18 (see
p. 265). Use Controller # 3 to switch a track’s status.
Depending on the value of Controller # 3, the track status
changes as shown below:
Measure
Specify the exact number of measures between the Start
Time and the End Time.
Beat
Specify the time signature (number of beats per
measure).
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
When stopped:
6. “Overwrite Tempo Map” appears in the display. Press
[YES]. Or, to cancel the operation, press [NO].
VALUE
0-31
32-63
64-95
96-127
STATUS
Mute
Mute
Mute
Mute
→Mute
→Play
→Rec
→Source
Play
Play
Play
Play
→Mute
→Play
→Rec
→Source
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
→Mute
→Play
→Rec
→Source
Source
Source
Source
Source
→Mute
→Play
→Rec
→Source
7. When the Time to SyncTrack Conversion is finished,
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Delaying Sync Track and Tempo Map
Start Times
Usually, a sync track or tempo map is created with
00h00m00s00f00 as the beginning of the song. However,
actual audio recording doesn’t typically start at
00h00m00s00f00. If this is the case, you can determine how
much later recording begins after the start of the song. This
time is referred to as the “offset.” If you want the first
measure of the song to begin ten seconds from the beginning
of the song, set the offset time to 00h00m10s00f00.
During playback or recording:
VALUE
0-31
32-63
64-95
96-127
STATUS
(*1)
Mute
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
Rec
Rec
→Rec
→Source (*2)
Source
Source
→Play
* During recording or playback, when the beginning of a sync
track or tempo map is reached, the start message is sent from
the MIDI OUT connector. This is convenient when you want
to synchronize the VS-1824 with an external MIDI sequencer.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “Sync Offset”
], and [
Play
→Mute
→Play
(*1)
(*1)
Source
→Mute
(*1)
→Rec (*2) →Source
] to move the
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the offset.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
206
Play
(*1) Ignored
(*2) Cannot be switched while recording. “Source” here
means “the status in which the track indicator blinks
alternately red and orange” and is only valid when
Record Monitor is set to “Auto Punch” (p. 58)
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Switching Scenes
Switching Effects
You can switch mixer Scenes with MIDI Program Change
messages sent by an external MIDI controller.
You can use MIDI Bank Select and Program Change
messages transmitted from an external MIDI controller to
switch effects.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
During Playback of a Song
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “P.C.Eff,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
P.C.Eff (Program Change Effect)
With this set to “On,” the effect is changed when
Program Change messages are received. For this
application, select “On.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Use[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “P.C.Scene,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
P.C.Scene (Program Change Scene)
With this set to “ON,” the scene is changed when
Program Change messages are received. For this
application, select “on.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Use MIDI Channel 16 for switching Scenes. The relationship
between the Program Change number received by the VS1824 and the Scene Number it switches to is shown here:
Program Number
Scene Number
1-8
1-8
MIDI Channels 1-4 correspond to FX1-FX4 respectively. The
relationship between the bank number received by the VS1824 and the effect patch number it selects is shown here:
CC # 0
CC # 32
Bank # MSB
Bank # LSB
Program #
Patch #
0
0
1-100
P000-P099
0
1
1-100
P100-P199
0
2
1-40
P200-P239
0
3
1-100
U000-U099
0
4
1-100
U100-U199
* For more detailed information, refer to the “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 82).
207
Chapter 15
Scenes cannot be switched during song playback
without pausing playback as the settings are changed.
The VS-1824 will stop momentarily if it receives a
Program Change message during playback instructing it
to change Scenes. While it is stopped, the Scene is
switched, and then playback resumes. During recording,
only effect Program Change messages can be responded
to. Scenes cannot be switched during recording.
Chapter 15 Using External MIDI Devices
Adjusting Effects
You can use MIDI Control Change messages transmitted
from an external MIDI controller to control effects.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
menu icon appears in the display. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Use[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Control Type” and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select “C.C.”
Control Type
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be used
when transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI
device, or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI
device are used to control the mixer.
Off:
MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.:
The mixer is controlled using Control Change
message.
Excl:
The mixer is controlled using Exclusive
messages.
5. Use[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “C.C.Eff,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select “On.”
C.C.Eff (Control Change Effect)
With this set to “On,” the effect is adjusted when control
change messages are received.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
* If you wish to use Control Change messages to edit effects, use
NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Numbers). For more
information, refer to the “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices
p. 82; NRPN references begin on Appendices p. 83).
208
MIDI Machine Control
The VS-1824 supports MIDI Machine Control (MMC). This
means that when two VS-1824s are synchronized, or when a
VS-1824 is synchronized with a MIDI sequencer that also
implements MMC, operations such as Play, Stop, Fast
Forward, etc., can be accomplished by operating only the
Master device.
MMC messages include transport control functions and
location information, but not actual synchronization signals.
Synchronizing with MMC is done in a loop configuration,
with an MMC master device sending the command to start
the MMC slave device which, in turn, sends sync signal
(usually MTC or MIDI Clock) back to the MMC master
device. An MMC setup requires two-way MIDI
communication and the proper setting of the following
parameters on the VS-1824: Device ID, MIDI Out/Thru,
SysEx RX, SysEx Tx, MMC Mode (Master, Slave, or Off),
Sync Gen, and Internal Clock. For more information on these
settings, take a look at the synchronization example using
Cakewalk and the VS-1824 (p. 210).
MMC (See Appendices p. 12)
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Synchronizing the VS-1824 with a MIDI sequencer allows
you to add MIDI instruments without actually recording
them to tracks on the VS-1824. Because the VS-1824 includes
a 28-channel digital mixer, you can mix and process up to 10
live signals from a MIDI-based sequencing system along
with the recorded tracks in the VS-1824. This can reserve the
VS-1824’s tracks for recording vocals, guitar, etc.
This chapter explains how to synchronize the VS-1824 with
some common software sequencing programs. If you are
using a version of one of the following programs other than
the one described in this chapter, it is likely the steps here
will still apply—see the sequencer’s manual if the menus and
settings you find are different from those in this chapter.
Synchronization
When using a sequencer or a drum machine with the VS1824, it is often desirable for the two devices to start and stop
at the same time. This is referred to as “synchronization.”
Typically, you have a “master” device and a “slave” device.
When the master device is started, the slave device will start
at the same time. MIDI devices primarily use either of two
methods for synchronization: MIDI Clock (often used with
Song Position Pointer) or MIDI Time Code (sometimes used
with MIDI Machine Control).
Sequencer Tracks
MIDI Clock
MIDI Interface
Used for synchronizing two or more MIDI devices. MIDI
Clock (sometimes called MIDI Beat Clock) sends timing
information based on the number of beats per minute (e.g.
120bpm). MIDI Clock is available on almost all sequencers
and drum machines and is usually used in conjunction with
Song Position Pointer (see below).
A MIDI Interface is used to connect MIDI devices to your
computer. There are various types of MIDI interfaces
available to choose from. The setup procedure for your MIDI
interface will vary depending on the type of interface and
computer you are using. On the Macintosh, MIDI interfaces
are usually connected to the printer, modem, or USB port(s).
The interface is then controlled by the sequencing software
itself or by one of three programs: Apple MIDI Manager,
OMS (Opcode), or FreeMIDI (Mark of the Unicorn). On
Windows-based computers, MIDI interfaces are usually
connected to the serial port, parallel port, USB port, or
directly to a sound card. Each interface will likely have its
own software drivers that must be installed and configured
for the interface to operate correctly.
MIDI Time Code (MTC)
Another method of synchronizing two or more MIDI
devices. Unlike MIDI Clock, MTC uses time-based
information (Hours, Minutes, Seconds, Frames) to
synchronize devices and does not reference a specific tempo
or time signature. Because MTC uses a more complicated
signal, it is not implemented on some devices. When
available, MTC is usually more desirable for synchronizing
audio recorders and tape decks. MTC is sometimes used in
conjunction with MIDI Machine Control (see below).
MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
Transport and locate commands (Play, Stop, Record, etc.)
that are transmitted through MIDI. MMC is used to control a
device (e.g. the VS-1824) remotely. Another protocol (usually
MTC) is used to provide the sync signal.
Song Position Pointer (SPP)
This MIDI message allows you to locate to any point within a
song (e.g., bar 33, beat 4). SPP is normally used with MIDI
Clock. It does not work with MTC.
MIDI Interface Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble getting your MIDI interface to work
properly, there are a number of troubleshooting techniques
you can use to determine where the problem lies. On the
Macintosh, most setup problems are the result of conflicting
extensions in the System Folder. Try disabling any extensions
that are not absolutely necessary for the program to run, and
restart your computer. On Windows-based computers, most
setup problems are the result of conflicting IRQ and/or Port
Address settings. Make sure that each of the devices
connected to your computer is set to its own IRQ and Port
Address and that the corresponding software driver(s)
reflects those settings. Defective or incorrectly connected
MIDI cables are another common problem encountered
when configuring a MIDI sequencing setup.
209
Chapter 16
Common Terms
Tracks on the VS-1824 are similar to tracks on a sequencer.
Just as you can record an instrument (or multiple
instruments) on a track of the VS-1824, you can record MIDI
information on a sequencer track.
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Specific Software Applications
7. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
Cakewalk Pro Audio
8. Move the cursor to SysEx Rx and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “On.”
Cakewalk Pro Audio™ is available for IBM-compatible
computers. Version 8.0 is used in the following example.
9. Move the cursor to MMC and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select “Slave.”
Cakewalk as Master Device
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
There are two methods for synchronizing the VS-1824 with
Cakewalk: Using MTC/MMC with Cakewalk as the master,
or using MIDI Clock with the VS-1824 as the master. Using
the first method, the Play, Stop, etc. buttons in Cakewalk will
control the VS-1824.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface to
the MIDI IN port of the VS-1824.
2. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
Click on the Play icon in Cakewalk. The VS-1824 should
begin playback in sync with Cakewalk. If not, check the MIDI
connections and driver settings in your computer.
VS-1824 as Master Device
The second method for synchronizing the VS-1824 with
Cakewalk uses MIDI Clock messages. Using this method the
VS-1824 will control the playback of Cakewalk.
Connections
Cakewalk Settings
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
1. Click on “Project Options…” in the Tools menu.
Cakewalk Settings
2. Click on the “Clock” tab.
1. Click on “Project Options...” in the Tools menu.
3. Click on “SMPTE/MTC” under Source.
2. Click on the “CLOCK” tab.
4. Click on “30 Frame Non-Drop” under SMPTE/MTC
Format.
3. Click on “MIDI Sync” under Source.
5. Click on the “MIDI Out” tab.
6. Click on “Transmit MMC” under MIDI Machine Control.
7. Use your mouse to select “17” under Timecode Master’s
Unit ID.
8. Click on “OK.”
4. Click on “OK.”
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
VS-1824 Settings
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MIDIclk.”
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
4. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
5. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
Click on the Play icon in Cakewalk and “Waiting for MIDI
Sync” will be displayed. Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 and
Cakewalk will begin playback in sync with the VS-1824.
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Move the cursor to Device ID and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “17.”
210
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Cubase VST
VS-1824 as Master Device
Cubase VST™ is available for Mac or IBM-compatible
computers. Version 4.0 on a Macintosh is used in the
following example.
The next example also uses MTC, with the VS-1824
controlling the playback of Cubase.
Cubase as Master Device
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
There are various methods that can be used to synchronize
Cubase with the VS-1824. This example will use MTC with
Cubase controlling the playback of the VS-1824.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface to
the MIDI IN port of the VS-1824.
Cubase Settings
2. Click on the pop-up menu by MIDI Timecode and click
on the Interface that is connected to the VS-1824.
3. Click on the pop-up menu by Frame Rate, and click on
“30FPS.” Click on “OK.”
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “EXT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
4. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
5. Move the cursor to Device ID and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “17.”
6. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 (it will start flashing). Start
playback in Cubase, the VS-1824 should start playing in sync
with Cubase. If not, check your MIDI connections and driver
settings in your computer.
Cubase Settings
1. Click on “Synchronization” in the Options menu.
2. Click on the pop-up menu by From Input and click on
the interface that is connected to the VS-1824.
3. Click on the pop-up menu by SMPTE Sync and click on
“MTC.”
4. Click on the pop-up menu by Frame Rate and click on
“30FPS.”
5. Click on “OK,” then click on the SYNC box in the
Transport control bar so that it darkens.
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen. and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 and Cubase should start
playback in sync with the VS-1824. If it does not, check your
MIDI connections and the driver settings in your computer.
211
Chapter 16
1. Click on “Synchronization” in the Options menu.
Connections
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Logic Audio
VS-1824 as Master Device
Logic Audio™ is available for Mac or IBM-compatible
computers. Version 3.5 for Macintosh is used in this example.
The next example uses MTC, with the VS-1824 controlling
the playback of Logic.
Logic as Master Device
There are several methods that can be used to synchronize
Logic with the VS-1824. This example uses MTC and MMC,
with Logic controlling the playback of the VS-1824.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
Logic Settings
Connections
1. Click on “Open Arrange” in the Windows menu.
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface to
the MIDI IN port of the VS-1824.
2. Click on “MIDI Options” in the Options sub menu.
Logic Settings
4. Click on “OK.”
1. Click on “Open Arrange” in the Windows menu.
VS-1824 Settings
2. Click on “MIDI Options” in the Options sub menu.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
3. Click on “Transmit MTC (MIDI Time Code)” so it has an
“X” in its box.
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
4. Click on “MIDI Machine Control (MMC)” so there is not
an “X” in its box.
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
5. Click on “OK.”
4. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Click on “Synchronization” in the Options menu.
5. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
7. Click on “General” and click on “Intern” from the Sync
Mode pop-up menu.
8. Click on “30” in the Frame Rate (fps) pop-up menu, click
on the 30 button. Click on OK.
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “EXT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 and it will start to blink. Now
you can click on Play in Logic and the VS-1824 will begin
playing back as well.
212
3. Click on “Auto Sync In” so it has an “X: in its box.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 and Logic will play in sync with
the VS-1824. Logic will automatically recognize the frame
rate that the VS-1824 is using. If it is different than the frame
rate set in Logic, a pop-up window will appear allowing you
to adjust Logic’s frame rate accordingly.
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Digital Performer
Digital Performer™ is available for Macintosh computers.
Version 2.41 was used for this explanation.
FreeMIDI
FreeMIDI is a software program used by Performer to
coordinate the various devices in your MIDI studio. When
connecting a VS-1824 to Performer, the first thing you need
to do is create a VS-1824 device in your FreeMIDI setup. You
should only have to do this once.
FreeMIDI Configuration
1. From Performer, click on “Edit FreeMIDI Configuration”
in the Basics Menu.
3. Click on “Roland” in the Manufacturer pop-up menu
and click on “Other” in the Model pop-up menu.
4. Click in the Name box and type “VS-1824.”
5. Click in the Device ID box and select “17.”
6. Click on “Receives MTC,” “Transmits MTC,” and “MIDI
Machine” under the Properties menu.
7. Click on “Icons...” and select an icon for the VS-1824.
Click on “OK.”
8. Click and drag from the MIDI IN and OUT on the VS1824 icon to the MIDI IN and OUT on the MIDI Interface
icon. You should now see them connected on the screen.
9. Click on “Return” in the MIDI menu to return to
Performer.
Performer as Master Device
There are several methods that can be used to synchronize
Performer with the VS-1824. This example uses MTC and
MMC, with Performer controlling playback on the VS-1824.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface to
the MIDI IN port of the VS-1824.
2. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
1. Click on “Receive Sync” in the Basics menu.
2. Click on the MIDI interface port that is connected to the
VS-1824 in the Sync to Port pop-up menu.
3. Click on “MTC, DTL, or DTLe” under Type of Sync.
4. Click on “30 fps” under SMPTE Frame Format.
5. Click on “OK.”
6. Click on “Transmit Sync...” in the Basics menu.
7. Click on “None” under Transmit beat clocks via port(s).
8. Click on “OK.”
9. Click on “Slave to External Sync” in the Basics menu. A
check mark will appear next to it.
Chapter 16
2. Click on “Create Device” from the Configuration menu.
The FreeMIDI Device Specification window will appear.
Performer Settings
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Move the cursor to Device ID and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “17.”
7. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
8. Move the cursor to SysEx.Rx and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “On.”
9. Move the cursor to MMC and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select “Slave.”
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Click on the Play icon in Performer. The VS-1824 should
begin playback in sync with Performer. If not, check your
FreeMIDI settings and the MIDI connections to your
computer.
213
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
VS-1824 as Master Device
Vision DSP
The next example uses MTC with the VS-1824 controlling the
playback of Performer.
Vision DSP™ (referred to hereafter as “Vision”) is available
for Macintosh and IBM compatible computers. Version 4.1 on
a Macintosh is used in this example.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
Open MIDI System (OMS)
2. Click on “MTC, DTL, or DTLe” under Type of Sync.
OMS is a software program used by Vision to coordinate the
various devices in your MIDI studio. When using a VS-1824
with Vision, the first thing you need to do is create a VS-1824
device in your OMS setup. You should only have to do this
once.
3. Click on “30 fps” under SMPTE Frame Format.
OMS Configuration
4. Click on “OK.”
1. Click on “OMS Studio Setup...” in the Setups menu in
Vision.
Performer Settings
1. Click on “Receive Sync...” in the Basics menu.
5. Click on “Slave to External Sync” in the Basics menu so
that there is a check mark next to it.
2. Click on “New Device” in the Studio menu.
VS-1824 Settings
3. Click on “Roland” in the pop up menu next to Manuf.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
4. Click on “Other” in the pop-up menu next to Model.
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
5. Click in the “Name” box and type “VS-1824.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen. and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Click on the Play icon in Performer (it will start flashing).
Press [PLAY] on the VS-1824 and Performer should begin
playback in sync with the VS-1824. If not, check your
FreeMIDI settings and the MIDI connections to your
computer.
6. Click in the “is controller” and “is multitimbral” boxes so
that a checkmark appears.
7. Click in the “Receive Channels” boxes for all 16 MIDI
channels so that a checkmark appears.
8. Click in the “Receives” and “Sends” boxes for MTC and
MMC, and click in the “Sends” box for MIDI Beat Clock
so that a checkmark appears.
9. Click on “Device ID” and select “16.”
10. Click “OK.”
11. Click on the VS-1824 icon in the open window. Click on
“Device Icon” in the Studio menu and choose the desired
icon for the VS-1824.
12. Click on “Save,” followed by “Quit” in the File menu.
Vision as Master Device
There are several methods that can be used to synchronize
Vision with the VS-1824. This example uses MTC and MMC
with Vision controlling playback in the VS-1824.
Connections
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface to
the MIDI IN port of the VS-1824.
2. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
214
Chapter 16 Using Software Sequencers
Vision Settings
VS-1824 as Master Device
1. Click on “Sync Options...” in the Options menu.
The next example uses MTC, with the VS-1824 controlling
the playback of Vision.
2. Click on “MIDI Time Code” in the pop-up menu next to
Receive Sync.
Connections
3. Click on “30 fps, non drop” in the pop-up menu next to
SMPTE Format.
1. Connect the MIDI OUT port of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN port of your MIDI interface.
4. Click on “OK.”
Vision Settings
VS-1824 Settings
1. Click on “Sync Options...” in the Options menu.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Click on “MIDI Time Code” in the pop-up menu next to
Receive Sync.
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
6. Move the cursor to Device ID and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “17.”
7. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.”
8. Move the cursor to SysEx Rx and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “On.”
4. Click on “Remote Start,” so it is checked.
Chapter 16
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
3. Click on “30 fps, non drop” in the pop-up menu next to
SMPTE Format.
5. Click on “OK.”
VS-1824 Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Move the cursor to Sync Source and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “INT.”
3. Move the cursor to Sync Gen and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “MTC.”
4. Move the cursor to Sync MTC Type and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “30.”
9. Move the cursor to MMC and use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select “Slave.”
5. Press [F6 (Exit)], then press [F4 (MIDI)].
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
6. Move the cursor to Device ID and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “17.”
Click on the Play icon in Vision. The VS-1824 should begin
playback in sync with Vision. If not, check the MIDI
connections and OMS settings in your computer.
7. Move the cursor to MIDI Thru and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Out.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Click on the Play icon in Vision, it will start to flash. Press
[PLAY] on the VS-1824 and Vision should start playback in
sync with the VS-1824. If not, check the MIDI connections
and OMS settings in your computer.
215
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
This chapter explains basic concepts, internal structure, and
basic operation regarding the use of hard drives with the
VS-1824. Read this chapter thoroughly to gain a better
understanding of how the VS-1824 operates.
General Information
Regarding Hard Drives
The VS-1824 saves all of the data, such as performance data,
mixing data, system data, etc., on a hard disk drive.
The internal hard disk is not removable.
Drive Partitioning
The internal hard drive has 5 partitions. The size of each
partition is 2000 MB. If you would like to change partition
size, please refer to drive initializing on p. 229.
The VS-1824 is able to manage 500 MB, 1000 MB or 2000 MB
of disk space at once. If you use a disk drive with a capacity
that is greater than this, you will need to divide it into two or
more areas.
Each of these area is referred as a “partition.” Up to eight
partitions can be created in a single disk drive.
Ex. 1:
When the disk drive is 10 GB, and the
partition size is 2000 MB.
fig.01-05
Disk Drive
(10GB)
216
When the disk drive is 10 GB, and the
partition size is 1000 MB.
fig.01-04
Disk Drive
(10GB)
Partition 0
(1000MB)
Partition 1
(1000MB)
Partition 2
(1000MB)
Partition 3
(1000MB)
Partition 4
(1000MB)
Partition 5
(1000MB)
Partition 6
(1000MB)
Partition 7
(1000MB)
unusable
(2000MB)
Each partition on the VS-1824’s disk drive is treated as an
independent drive, and automatically given a partition
number (0–7). When a single hard disk has multiple
partitions, you can specify which partition drive will be used
(“Drive Select,” p. 228). This selected disk drive partition
used is referred to as the “current drive.”
* If you wish to use hard disks or song data with both the VS1824 and the VS-880/1680/880EX/890/VSR-880, there will
be limitations as to what you can do due to factors such as
differing partition sizes and numbers of tracks. For more
detailed information, please see “Drive Compatibility,” p. 245.
VS-1880's song data is identical to that of the VS-1824.
Partition 0
(2000MB)
Partition 1
(2000MB)
Partition 2
(2000MB)
Partition 3
(2000MB)
Partition 4
(2000MB)
Ex. 2:
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Recording Times vs. Sample
Rate/Recording Modes
The available recording time for a hard drive depends on a
number of factors, including the size of the drive, the sample
rate, the recording mode and the total number of tracks
recorded. Both the recording mode and sample rate can be
selected on a song-by-song basis. Recording time in track
minutes for a 2000 MB partition is shown below:
Checking Remaining Space
The amount of free drive space available for recording is
displayed under “Remain” in the upper part of the Playlist
display when Song Information is shown. Hold [SHIFT] and
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to switch Playlist display screens.
* “Remain” does not appear while the level meters or fader/pans
are displayed (p. 39).
fig.12-17
Track Minutes (see Appendices p. 13).
Recording
Mode
48 kHz
Sample Rate
44.1 kHz
32 kHz
742 mins.
808 mins.
1114 mins.
370 mins.
404 mins.
556 mins.
MT1
742 mins.
808 mins.
1114 mins.
MT2
990 mins.
1078 mins.
1484 mins.
LIV1
1188 mins.
1292 mins.
1782 mins.
LIV2
1484 mins.
1616 mins.
2228 mins.
(All times are approximate)
* The above chart is a general yardstick for estimating record
times. Actual times may vary slightly depending on your hard
drive’s specifications or the number of songs created.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], first press
[PAGE] until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1
(SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Remain Display.” If “Remain Display” is not
displayed, press [F2 (Prm2)].
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for
Remain Display.
Remain Display (Remaining Display)
This selects the units of measurements for the remaining
drive space.
Time:
The remaining time for recording is shown in minutes
and seconds.
CapaMB:
The remaining space on the hard drive is shown in
megabytes.
Capa %:
The remaining space on the hard drive is shown as a
percentage of the space originally available.
Event:
This shows the remaining number of events available
during for recording and mixing.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
217
Chapter 17
MTP
CDR/MAS
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Recovering Drive Space
1. Select the song you want to optimize as the current song
(p. 49).
There may be times when the remaining space becomes low.
You may want to recover drive space without initializing
(formatting) the hard drive.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song Menu icon appears in the display.
3. Press [F5 (OPTIM)].
Song Optimize
When operations such as overdubbing and punch-in
recording are repeated, the older data remains on the drive.
This storage of this material can be a great advantage because
it enables the VS-1824 to have an Undo function (p. 62) that
can, for example, recover data that was recorded-over by
accident.
In some cases, significant amounts of memory can be used by
this older data, decreasing the available space on the current
drive, and shortening the length of time available for
recording. You can free up drive space by erasing this old
data from the drive. The deletion of unnecessary data and the
freeing of available space on the drive is referred to as “Song
Optimize.” This operation cannot be undone with the Undo
function, and will erase all previous Undo levels.
For example, if you record on a track, then rewind and
record over again on the same track without selecting a
different V-Track, the first recording will reside on the hard
drive even though it cannot be heard during playback. Song
Optimize permanently removes these recordings that are
“covered up” by other recordings. V-Tracks that are not
currently selected will not be erased.
fig.11-30
Track 1
V-Track 1
V-Track 2
V-Track 3
Phrases erased in the Optimize operation
218
If “OPTIM” does not appear in the display above [F5],
press [PAGE] until “OPTIM” appears, and then press
[F5 (OPTIM)].
4. “Song Optimize, Execute ?” appears in the display. Press
[F4 (EXEC)]. Or, if you wish to cancel Song Optimize,
press [F6 (EXIT)].
5. “Optimize Sure ?” appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES]. Or, if you wish to cancel the procedure,
press [EXIT/NO].
6. “Optimize Really Sure?” appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES]. Or, if you wish to cancel the procedure,
press [EXIT/NO].
When Song Optimize is finished, the screen returns to
the Playlist display.
* It may take some time for the Song Optimize operation to
complete. This is not a malfunction. Do not turn the power off
until the Optimize operation is completed.
* Do not use the Undo function immediately after performing
the Song Optimize function. Undo information is deleted
during the Song Optimize procedure, and using Undo
immediately after Song Optimize may result in lost data.
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Song Erase
Eventually you will probably need to remove songs from the
hard drive. This may be done to increase the amount of
recording time available on the drive or because you no
longer need to keep a particular song. The Song Erase
function is used to delete song data from the current drive. If
you would like to use a song at a later time, make sure you
back that song up (p. 232) before you erase it, since the Song
Erase operation cannot be undone.
1. Select the drive that contains the song you want to erase
as the current drive (p. 228).
6. “Song Erase: Are you really sure ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] to continue, or if you wish
to cancel the procedure, press [EXIT/NO].
7. If the song you are erasing is not the current song,
“STORE Current ?” appears in the display. If you wish to
save the current song, press [ENTER/YES]. Otherwise,
press [EXIT/NO]. If the current song is a demo song,
then press [EXIT/NO].
When the Song Erase process is finished, the screen
returns to the Playlist display.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song Menu icon appears in the display.
3. Press [F6 (Erase)].
If “Erase” does not appear in the display above [F6],
press [PAGE] until “Erase” appears, and then press
[F6 (Erase)].
Chapter 17
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to erase, then press [F3 (MARK)]. A mark
is placed next to the song. Pressing [F3 (MARK)]
alternately places or deletes the mark. When [F2 (ALL)]
is pressed, you can place or remove marks from all songs
simultaneously.
Or, if you want to cancel the Song Erase operation, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
fig.11-31
5. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A Song Erase confirmation message
appears in the display. Press [ENTER/YES] to continue,
or if you wish to cancel Song Erase, press [EXIT/NO].
219
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Using External Hard Drives
External SCSI drives can be connected to the SCSI connector
on the VS-1824. This section will explain using external (both
fixed and removable) drives with the VS-1824. For more
information about SCSI drives, see “About SCSI”
(Appendices p. 4).
Connecting a Fixed External
Hard Drive
Use the following procedure to connect an external drive to
the VS-1824.
fig.07-01hd
Selecting an External Hard Drive
Most SCSI hard drives that adhere to AV specifications will
work with the VS-1824. Bear in mind that drives that do not
meet AV specs, though not recommended for recording and
playback, are often still reliable for data storage. The VS-1824
can format a compatible drive in either 1 GB or 2 GB
partitions and can also access up to eight partitions.
Therefore, up to 16 gigabyte drives can be fully utilized by
the VS-1824.
0
Suggested specifications for external SCSI hard drives:
• 13 ms access time
• No or intelligent recalibration
• Active termination
• 1:1 interleave
• Slip sectoring
• Macintosh-compatible
* Once the connections have been completed, turn on the power
to your various devices in the order specified. You can cause
malfunction and/or damage to your speakers and other devices
if you turn on devices in the wrong order.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before
switching on power. Even with the volume all the way down,
you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on,
but this is normal, and does not indicate a malfunction.
1. Make sure that the power for all SCSI and audio devices
is turned off, and connect the external SCSI device to the
25-pin SCSI port on the rear panel of the VS-1824.
WARNING: Only SCSI devices can be connected to the SCSI
port on the VS-1824. Connecting non-SCSI devices (including
parallel devices, which have a similar connector) can damage
the VS-1824.
2. Turn on the power of the external drive.
3. Turn on the power of the VS-1824 with the POWER
switch on the rear panel.
4. Turn on the power of the connected audio equipment.
5. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate
levels.
220
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Connecting a Removable
External Hard Drive
It is possible to connect a removable external hard drive,
such as a Zip® drive, to the SCSI connector on the VS-1824.
Use the following procedure to connect an external
removable drive to the VS-1824.
fig.06-01
Before Using the Zip Disk Drive
Handling the Zip Disk Drive
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from
vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle, be sure
the installation does not exceed the permissible range.
• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive and/or damage ZIP disks. When the unit has been
moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
• Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or
down.
• To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try to
hold the ZIP disk in a level position (not tilted in any
direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in
firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
Handling Zip Disks
* Once the connections have been completed, turn on the power
to your various devices in the order specified. You can cause
malfunction and or damage to your speakers and other devices
if you turn on devices in the wrong order.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before
switching on power. Even with the volume all the way down,
you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on,
but this is normal, and does not indicate a malfunction.
1. Make sure that the power for all SCSI and audio devices
is turned off and connect the external SCSI device to the
25-pin SCSI port on the rear panel of the VS-1824.
WARNING: Only SCSI devices can be connected to the SCSI
port on the VS-1824. Connecting non-SCSI devices (including
parallel devices, which have a similar connector) can damage
the VS-1824.
2. Turn on the power of the external drive.
• ZIP disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is
required to enable storage of large amounts of data on
such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,
please observe the following when handling ZIP disks:
- Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
- Do not use or store ZIP disks in dirty or dusty areas.
- Do not subject ZIP disks to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended
temperature range: -22 to 51° C (-7.6 to 123.8° F).
- Do not expose ZIP disks to strong magnetic fields, such
as those generated by loudspeakers.
• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the
disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the
drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
• Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and
to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By
using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the
disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
3. Turn on the power of the VS-1824 with the POWER
switch on the rear panel.
4. Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
5. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate
levels.
221
Chapter 17
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only ZIP disks into the disk drive. Never insert any other
type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any other
foreign objects inside the drive.
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Initializing (Formatting) the Drive
A new drive, or a drive that was used by another device,
cannot be used on the VS-1824 as is. You must initialize the
drive so it can be used by the VS-1824. When a drive is
initialized, all existing data on that drive is erased—all of its
contents are irretrievably lost. Check any such drive you plan
to initialize to make sure it does not contain anything you
don’t want deleted. Drives used with the VS-1824 cannot be
used on other devices, such as personal computers.
* If you accidentally delete data, that data cannot be restored to
its previous state. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
CAUTION: If you are using a drive or disk that has been
partitioned, you will not be able to choose a particular
partition to initialize. When you initialize a drive, the whole
drive and all of its partitions will be initialized at the same
time.
To initialize a new drive:
1. Confirm that power to the drive and the VS-1824 are
turned on.
2. If you are using a removable type drive insert a disk into
the drive.
Init Drive (Initialize Drive)
Select the drive (IDE, SCSI0-SCSI7). “IDE” indicates the
internal hard drive, and “SCSI” indicates external SCSI
drives. For example, use “SCSI5” or “SCSI6” to select a
Zip drive, depending on the Zip drive’s settings.
Partition
Select the partition size (500 MB, 1000 MB, 2000 MB). In
most cases, select “2000 MB.”
Physical Format
Select whether or not to use physical formatting. For new
drives, or drives that have been used by another device,
this should be set to “On.”
* If you are initializing a Zip 250 MB cartridge, set Physical
Format to “Off.”
Surface Scan
This confirms that the read and write functions in all of
the drive’s partitions are operating correctly when the
drive is initialized. In normal circumstances, set this to
“Off.” When you specifically want to conduct a test of
the read/write functions, set this to “On”.
The function buttons work as shown:
[F1 (DrSel)]:
Displays a directory of the currently connected drives.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the drive you want to initialize.
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
5. Press [F6 (DrIni)].
If “DrIni” does not appear in the display above [F6], first
press [PAGE] until “DrIni” is displayed, and then press
[F6 (DrIni)].
fig.06-04
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set each value.
fig.06-02
[F4 (Exec)]:
Executes initialization of the selected drive.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
222
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
7. When the settings are made, press [F4 (Exec)].
“Initialize *** OK ?” appears in the display. “***” refers
to the selected drive’s SCSI number. For example,
“SCSI5” indicates an external drive that is set to SCSI ID
#5.
8. Press [ENTER/YES] to confirm that you wish to
Initialize (“Initialize ****, Sure?” appears in the display),
or [EXIT/NO] to cancel the operation.
9. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] to store the current song;
otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
After the initialization is completed, the VS-1824 restarts
automatically, and returns to the Playlist display.
You can save a song created on the VS-1824 to an external
drive, such as a Zip drive. This is a good way to have the
song backed up in the event of possible drive problems, or to
get back drive space when little space on the internal IDE
remains. We recommend keeping multiple backup copies of
important songs.
* Incorrectly using the Song Copy procedure may result in loss
of data. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland does not warrant any
copied data, regardless of the performance or condition of the
external drive.
There are two ways to use Song Copy: Song Copy Playable
and Song Copy Archives. The method you choose depends
on the amount of free space on the destination disk (for
example, 100 MB for Zip disks). The size of the current song
is shown in the display.
Chapter 17
Be aware that initializing a drive requires some time. This is
not a malfunction. For example, when physical format is
turned “On,” the time required to format a 100MB Zip disk™
is approximately 10 minutes. The progress of initialization
will be shown in the display. Be sure not to turn the power
off until initialization is complete.
Saving a Song to an External
Drive (Song Copy)
Song Copy Playable (p. 224)
Use Song Copy Playable when the total size of the song is
less than the total size of available space on the removable
disk drive. For example, use Song Copy Playable to copy a
93MB song onto a 100MB disk.
fig.06-07
Song
223
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Song Copy Archives (p. 225)
Song Copy Playable
Use Song Copy Archives for removable drives when the total
size of the song is more than the total size of available space
on the disk. For example, use Song Copy Archives to copy a
247MB song onto three 100MB disks. The song data is
converted into a data format specifically for saving it across
multiple disks (archives format). The song is copied across
multiple disks according to the available space on each disk.
This means it is not possible to directly play back song data
from one disk. To play back song data copied using the Song
Copy Archives format, it must first be copied back onto the
VS-1824’s hard drive using the Song Copy Extract procedure.
If song data is copied onto disks that already have data on
them, the older data will be erased.
Use the following procedure to copy a song from the VS1824’s internal hard drive to a removable disk drive (such as
a Zip drive) that is set to SCSI ID 5:
fig.06-08
1. Select the drive containing the source song you want to
copy as the current drive (p. 228).
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song Menu icon is displayed.
4. Press [F1 (CP PL)]. If “CP PL” does not appear above
[F1], press [PAGE] until “CP PL” appears above [F1], and
then press [F1 (CP PL)].
fig.06-09
Song
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Before copying a song to an external removable drive, you
may want to use Optimize (See “Song Optimize,” p. 218) to
reduce the memory required to store the song.
5. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to “Source Song.”
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to copy and press [F3 (MARK)].
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove Marks
from all songs. Press [F1 (SelSg)] to view a directory of
songs. From here, after you have placed a Mark at the
song(s) you want to copy, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-09aa
224
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
7. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Destination Drive.”
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination drive
and partition. Press [F5 (SelDr)] to view a directory of
drives. Then use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
select the destination drive, and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the partition. Once you have selected the
destination drive, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-09ab
Song Copy Archives
Use the following procedure to copy a song that cannot fit on
a single disk:
1. Select the drive containing the source song you want to
copy as the current drive (p. 228).
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
4. Press [F2 (AcStr)].
If “AcStr” does not appear above [F2], press [PAGE] until
“AcStr” appears above [F2], and then press [F2 (AcStr)].
fig.06-10
Chapter 17
9. If the source and the destination drives are different,
press [
]. Move the cursor to “Erase All Songs” and
use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the value.
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” the destination drive is
initialized before the copy procedure is performed. If
you want to perform the Song Copy procedure without
erasing any songs currently on the destination drive,
leave this setting “Off.”
10. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
11. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes
made to the current song, otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
5. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Source Song.”
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to copy and press [F3 (MARK)]. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove Marks
from all songs. Press [F1 (SelSg)] to view a directory of
songs. From here, after you have Marked the song(s) you
want to copy, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-10a
12. When the Song Copy Playable procedure is finished, the
screen returns to the Playlist display.
If “Disk Memory Full” Appears in the
Display
This indicates the destination drive does not have
enough free space, or the number of songs on the
destination drive exceeds the maximum number (200
songs) that can be stored on the drive. If this message
appears, the Song Copy procedure is canceled.
7. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Destination Drive.”
225
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination drive
and partition. Press [F5 (SelDr)] to view a directory of
drives. Then use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
select the destination drive, and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the partition. Once you have selected the
destination drive, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-10b
Loading a Song from an
External Drive
Loading a Song from an External
Drive Using Song Copy Playable
To copy songs from an external drive into the internal drive,
first switch the current drive (the drive or partition in active
use) to the external drive’s SCSI ID using Drive Select, as
described below. Then use Song Copy Playable to copy the
song from the external drive to the internal drive.
* If you copy a song from the external drive back to the internal
drive without first erasing the original song from the internal
drive, the original song is not overwritten. A new song is
created with the same name as the original and is written to
the lowest available song number.
fig.06-09b
Internal Hard Disk
9. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
10. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes
made to the current song, otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
* All data currently on the removable disk will be deleted. Do
not use any disks for Song Copy Archives that contain data
you want to save.
11. When the first disk in the external drive (destination
drive) is full, the disk is ejected and the message “Please
Insert Disk” appears in the display. Insert the next disk
and press [ENTER/YES]. It is a good idea to write the
disk numbers on the labels to remember the order in
which the disks were used.
12. The message “Insert Disk # ” will appear in the display.
(# indicates the number in the order the disks were written).
Insert each disk as requested and press [ENTER/YES].
When the Song Copy Archives procedure is finished, the
screen returns to the Playlist display.
Handling Song Copy Archives Disks
When you save songs using the Song Copy Archives
method, the destination disks are initialized automatically.
This initialization differs from the usual Drive Initialize
formatting (p. 222). Since disks are initialized automatically,
you can use the Song Copy Archives procedure with newly
purchased disks, disks that were used with another device,
or other unformatted disks. However, any older data
residing on the disks is lost once the Archives procedure is
performed. Do not designate a disk that contains archive
song data as the current drive. If you try to do this, the disk
will be identified as an uninitialized disk.
226
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
Song 1
1. Confirm that the power on both the VS-1824 and the
external drive are turned on.
2. If you are using a removable-type drive, insert a disk into
the drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
5. Press [F4 (DrSel)].
If “DrSel” does not appear in the display above [F4], first
press [PAGE] until “DrSel” is displayed, and then press
[F4 (DrSel)]. A list of currently connected drives appears
in the display.
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Select the drive that contains the song you wish
to recover. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
correct partition (if necessary).
fig.06-06
Loading a Song from External
Disks using Song Archive Extract
Use the following procedure to restore a song saved using
Song Copy Archives.
1. Select the internal drive as the current drive.
2. Insert Disk #1 created from a Song Copy Archives into
the external drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song Menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F3 (AcExt)].
If “AcExt” does not appear in the display above [F3],
press [PAGE] until “AcExt” appears, and then press
[F3 (AcExt)].
fig.06-11
Chapter 17
7. After you have selected the drive and partition, press
[F4 (Exec)].
8. A confirmation message appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES].
9. “STORE Current ?” appears in the display.
Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes made to
the current song, otherwise press [EXIT/NO]. After the
current drive changes to the one you selected, the screen
returns to the Playlist display.
10. Follow the procedure described in “Song Copy Playable”
(p. 224), to make a copy of the song from the external
drive to the internal (IDE) drive. Make sure you select the
IDE drive as the destination drive so that the song is
copied to the internal drive.
6. If several external drives are connected to the VS-1824,
press [F5 (SelDr)] to view a list of drives. Use CURSORS
to select the drive that contains the Song Archive disk,
and press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-12
11. After the Song Copy procedure is complete, repeat Steps
3-10 to select the internal IDE drive as the current drive
(select the IDE drive in Step #6).
227
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
7. Use [
Song.”
] and [
] to move the cursor to “Source
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to extract and press [F3 (MARK)].
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove Marks
from all songs. Press [F1 (SelSg)] to view a directory of
songs. From here, after you have Marked the song(s) you
want to extract, press [F1 (Back)].
Drive Select
To select either another partition of your internal (IDE) drive,
or select another connected SCSI hard drive, use the
following procedure:
1. Press [Play (Display)].
2. Hold [Shift] and press [F6 (Utility)].
The Utility menu appears in the display.
fig.06-13
3. Press [F4 (DrSel)]. If “DrSel” does not appear in the
display above [F4],first press [PAGE] until “DrSel” is
displayed, and then press [F4 (DrSel)].
A list of partitions on the currently selected drive as well
as other external SCSI drives connected is displayed.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Select the drive that you wish to make current.
Use the TIME/Value dial to select the current partition.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
ig.06-06
9. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Erase All Songs” and
use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the value.
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” the destination drive is
initialized before the Song Archive Extract procedure is
performed. If you want to perform the extract procedure
without erasing any songs on the destination drive, leave
this “Off.”
10. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
11. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes
made to the current song; otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
[F4 (Exec)]:
12. Execute the Song Archives Extract. “Insert Disk #”
appears in the display. Insert the correct disk number
and press [ENTER/YES].
Exits the screen.
13. When the Song Archive Extract procedure is finished, the
screen returns to the Playlist display.
Executes selecting drive.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
5. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
6. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] to store the current song;
otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
7. If you switch the current drive, the screen returns to the
Playlist display.
228
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Hard Drive Maintenance
When a drive is initialized, its entire contents are
irretrievably lost. Make sure you make backups of any songs
on the drive that you want to keep before you use drive
initialize.
* If you accidentally delete data, that data cannot be restored to
its previous state. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
CAUTION: If you are using a drive or disk that has been
partitioned, you will not be able to choose a particular
partition that you wish to initialize. When you carry out
drive initialization, the whole drive and all its partitions will
be initialized at once.
Physical formatting is useful for new removable media and
for circumstances where you are experiencing problems with
your hard drive that cannot be corrected by normal
initialization.
To initialize a drive using Physical Format:
1. Confirm that the power of the drive and the VS-1824 is
turned on.
2. Insert a disk into the drive if you are using a removable
type drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F6 (DrIni)].
If “DrIni” does not appear in the display above [F6], first
press [PAGE] until “DrIni” is displayed, and then press
[F6 (DrIni)].
6. Use [
Drive Initialize
As you use a hard drive, the data on the drive is recorded
and erased repeatedly in whatever space is currently
available, and the data may become fragmented on the hard
drive. When this happens, the message “Error Drive Too
Slow” may appear in the display during certain operations.
In order to achieve maximum performance from the drive,
perform the Initializing (Formatting) procedure described on
this page.
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set each value
described below.
Init Drive (Initialize Drive)
Select the drive (IDE, SCSI0-SCSI7). “IDE” indicates the
internal hard drive, and “SCSI” indicates external SCSI
drives. For example, use “SCSI5” to select a Zip Drive.
The SCSI ID number of the internal CD-RW
drive is fixed at “0.”
Partition
Select the partition size (500 MB, 1000 MB, 2000 MB). In
most cases, select “2000 MB.”
Physical Format
Select whether or not to use physical formatting. For new
drives, new removable media, or drives that have been
used by another device, this must be set to “On.” Also
set this to “On” if you are experiencing problems with
your hard drive that cannot be corrected by normal
initialization.
229
Chapter 17
Be aware that initializing a drive may take some time. This is not a
malfunction. For example, when physical format is turned “On,”
the time required to format a 100MB Zip disk is approximately 10
minutes. The progress of initialization will be shown in the display.
Be sure not to turn the power off until initialization is complete.
Drive Initialize with Physical Formatting
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Surface Scan
This confirms that the read and write functions in all of
the drive’s partitions are operating correctly when the
drive is initialized. In normal circumstances, set this to
“Off.” When you want to conduct a test of the read/
write functions, such as when you are experiencing
problems with your hard drive that cannot be corrected
by normal initialization, set this to “On”.
The function buttons operate as shown.
[F1 (SelDr)]:
This displays a directory of the currently connected
drives. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the drive you want to initialize.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
fig.06-04
Drive Check
You can check the drive you are using to make sure it can be
read correctly. This is referred to as a “Drive Check.” A Drive
Check can determine whether a failure during Song Copy
(p. 224) or DAT Backup (p. 232) is due to a problem in the
song itself, whether the problem is with the connections, or if
there is a problem of some other kind. If data cannot be read
correctly, the display will indicate the song in which the error
occurred.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (DrChk)]. If “DrChk” does not appear in the
display above [F5], first press [PAGE] until “DrChk” is
displayed, and then press [F5 (DrChk)].
A list of currently connected drives appears in the
display.
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Select the drive you wish to check.
The function buttons work as shown.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
fig.11-48
[F4 (Exec)]:
Executes initialization of the selected drive.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
7. When the settings are made, press [F4 (Exec)]. “Initialize
*** OK ?” appears in the display. “***” refers to the
selected drive’s SCSI number. For example, “SCSI5”
indicates an external drive which is set to SCSI ID #5.
8. Press [ENTER/YES]. (Or, to cancel the operation, press
[EXIT/NO].) “Initialize ****, Sure?” appears in the
display.
9. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display. Press [ENTER/YES] to store the current song;
otherwise press [EXIT/NO].
10. After the initialization is completed, the VS-1824 restarts
automatically, and returns to the Playlist display.
230
[F4 (Exec)]:
Executes a Drive Check.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
4. When you have selected the drive you wish to check,
press [F4 (Exec)]. “Drive Check ***?” appears in the
display. “***” refers to the selected drive’s ID number.
5. Press [ENTER/YES] to continue, or if you wish to cancel
Drive Check, press [EXIT/NO].
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
6. “STORE Current ?” appears in the display. Press
[ENTER/YES] to store the current song; otherwise press
[EXIT/NO].
During the Drive Check process, the progress of the
operation is shown in the display. When the procedure is
finished, the “Result List” will be displayed. If any errors
are found, they will be reported here. Songs that do not
contain any errors are indicated by “OK,” songs
containing errors are indicated by “ERR.” If all of your
songs are not displayed, use the TIME/VALUE dial to
view the remaining songs. Do not turn off the power
until the operation is completed. When you are finished
viewing the result list, press [ENTER/YES] to return to
the main Play screen.
To Cancel Drive Check
You can use the following procedure to cancel the Drive
Check.
1. Press [EXIT/NO]. “Cancel ?” appears in the display.
If Errors are Found
If the Drive Check function indicates that there are errors
within the data on the drive, it is possible to erase the portion
of the data that contains the error while keeping the
remaining data as intact as possible. This can be very useful
if you cannot access all of the songs on a drive because of an
error in one of the songs.
When initializing a hard drive, you can confirm that the read
and write functions in all the drive partitions are operating
correctly. This is referred to as a “Surface Scan.” If there are
any places on the drive where the reading or writing of data
cannot be performed, the VS-1824 registers this as unusable
memory. The VS-1824 subsequently avoids that area during
recording or playback.
Performing this procedure deletes all contents saved on the
drive. Conduct this check when initializing a newly
purchased drive or a drive that had previously been used
with a personal computer or other device. Be sure to make a
backup copy of any songs on the drive that you want to keep
before carrying out a Surface Scan.
1. Follow the procedure described in “Initializing
(Formatting) the Drive” (p. 222), and set “Surface Scan”
to “On.” After the drive has been initialized, Surface Scan
begins immediately.
* The Surface Scan procedure takes time. This is not a malfunction.
For example, the time required to conduct Surface Scan on a 100
MB Zip disk is approximately 10 minutes. The time it will take to
conduct Surface Scan on your drive is based on the size (capacity)
of the disk. The progress of the Surface Scan procedure is shown
in the display.
* Once the drive is initialized and Surface Scan has begun,
you may cancel Surface Scan by performing the following
procedure.
1. Press [EXIT/NO]. “Cancel ?” appears in the display.
This procedure does not correct the disk error. All error
locations will be erased. This means that, depending on the
location in which the error occurred, a take that was recorded
may no longer be playable, Automix data may be lost, or the
entire song itself may even be erased. If the error has
occurred in the system or song list, the probability of this
happening is especially high.
1. After the Drive Check procedure is finished, press
[ENTER/YES].
“You’ll Lose Data” will be displayed.
2. Press [ENTER/YES] to proceed with the recover
function, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel the operation.
After the recover operation is finished, the results will be
displayed. Songs that were partially altered are indicated
by “Adj” and songs that have been deleted are indicated
by “Del.”
3. Press [ENTER/YES] to return to the main Play screen.
2. Press [ENTER/YES]. Surface Scan is now
canceled. Note that any unusable memory found
up to that point is not registered by the VS-1824.
3. The VS-1824 restarts automatically.
2. When Surface Scan is completed, one of the following
messages appears in the display.
“– Complete –”:
This drive is good to use. All memory areas were found
to be usable.
“_______ Defect”:
The underlined portion will indicate the number of
unusable memory locations in this drive. The larger this
number, the lower the reliability of this drive.
“File System Err”:
A read or write failure has occurred in a location that
stores basic data used by the VS-1824 for recording and
playback. This drive cannot be used by the VS-1824.
231
Chapter 17
2. Press [ENTER/YES]. Drive Check is canceled.
Check Drive Reliability using
Surface Scan
Chapter 17 Using Hard Drives
Backup Options
There are several methods you can use to backup song data
from the VS-1824. It is important to remember that simply
backing up a song does not automatically remove it from the
current drive. If you wish to free up drive space, backup the
song using one of the methods described below, and then use
Song Erase to remove it from the current drive.
DAT Backup
Data backup to DAT tape is very economical, since DAT
tapes are rather inexpensive. However, the process can take a
long time. One 60-minute DAT tape can hold approximately
330 MB of song data. Large amounts of song data will
automatically be copied across multiple DAT tapes as
necessary. DAT tapes are also reusable. For more detailed
information regarding using a DAT recorder for data
backup, see Chapter 19, starting on p. 238.
External Removable Drive
You can copy songs from the current drive to an external
removable hard disk such as a Zip disk using the Song Copy
function. This is a great way to quickly backup a song before
temporarily removing it from the current drive. This method
is fast; however, the cost per MB of storage is higher than it
would be with DAT tape or CD-R/CD-RW disks. One Zip
disk can hold approximately 100 MB of song data. Using the
Song Copy Archives, large amounts of song data will
automatically be copied across multiple Zip disks as
necessary. Zip disks and other types of removable disks are
also reusable. For more detailed information regarding using
an external removable hard drive for data backup, see
“Saving a Song to an External Drive (Song Copy),” p. 223.
CD-R Backup
Using an optional VS-CDR or VS-CDRII drive, or the internal
drive in a VS-1824CD, you can back up song data to
recordable CDs. This method is fast, reliable,
and economical. One blank CD-R disc can hold
approximately 650 MB of song data. Large amounts of song
data will automatically be copied across multiple CD-R discs
as necessary. CD-RW disks are reusable, but regular CD-R
discs are not reusable. For more detailed information
regarding using a CD-R drive for data backup, see Chapter
18, starting on p. 233.
232
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup
This chapter explains how to create your own original audio
CD and backup song data to CD-R/CD-RW discs.
This chapter describes various general CD-R or CD-RW
operations. See Chapter 13 to learn about mastering a song to
a CD-R or CD-RW.
CD-R Backup and Recover
You can save song data stored on the VS-1824’s hard drive to
CD-R/CD-RW discs. This procedure is called “CD-R
backup.” The process of loading backed-up song data from a
CD-R/CD-RW disc onto the VS-1824 hard drive is referred to
as “CD-R recover.” Besides all V-Track recordings, backedup data also includes locators, markers, mixer Scenes,
Automix data, and Undo levels.
* Only song data on the internal drive can be backed up onto
CD-R/CD-RW discs.
* Song data cannot be backed up to discs that already have songs
(audio tracks) recorded on them.
* You may lose song data by incorrectly performing the CD-R
backup procedure. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland does not
warrant any copied data, regardless of the performance or
condition of the CD-R/CD-RW drive.
* It is impossible to backup songs created by other VS models or
in other VS model formats. For these types of songs, Execute
Song Import first, then perform the Backup.
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only discs with
into the CD-RW drive. Never
insert any other type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips,
coins, or any other foreign objects inside the drive.
• Do not attempt to remove the disc from the CD-RW
drive while the drive is functioning (while the MIDI/
DISK indicator of VS-1824 or busy indicator of external
CD-RW drive is lit).
• Do not attempt to carry a VS-1824 equipped with a
CD-RW drive (VS-1824 CD) while a disc is loaded in the
CD-RW drive.
• Do not touch the lens.
• When the lens is dirty, clean the lens with a commercial
lens blower.
Handling CD-R/CD-RW Discs
• DO NOT play a CD-R/RW disc (CD-R/RW disc on
which song data has been backed up) on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to
speakers or other system components may result.
• Upon handling the discs, please observe the following.
❍ Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.
❍ Do not use in dusty areas.
❍ Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed
vehicle.
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty discs
may not read/write properly. Keep your discs clean
using a commercially available CD cleaner.
• Keep the disc in the case.
• Do not keep the disc in the CD-RW drive for a long time.
Before Using the CD-RW drive
• Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc.
Handling the CD-RW Drive
• Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from
inside to outside. Do not wipe along circumference.
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free
from vibration.
• Do not use benzine, record cleaner spray or solvents of
any kind.
• Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or
down.
• Do not bend the disc.
• Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
233
Chapter 18
In CD-R backup, song data is converted into a data format
specifically for saving. This means it is not possible to play
back song data directly from the CD-R/CD-RW drive. If you
wish to play the backup data, it must be recovered onto a
VS-1824 hard drive first. A song that will not fit on a single
disc will be copied across multiple discs based on the
available free space on the discs.
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the drive
and/or damage discs. When the unit has been moved,
allow it to become accustomed to the new environment
(allow a few hours) before operating it.
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup
Items Necessary for CD-R Backup
• VS-1824
• Blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable) or CD-RW
(Compact Disc-Rewritable) disc
* You cannot use high-speed compatible
CD-RW discs. This mark is printed on
high-speed compatible CD-RW discs.
It is recommended to use CD-R discs from the following
manufacturers.
Taiyo Yuden Co., TDK Co., Mitsui Chemicals Co.,
Mitsubishi Chemicals Inc., Ricoh Co.,Ltd,
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.
Inserting a CD
1. Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
2. Pull out a disc tray.
3. Locate the position of center hole of CD at stopper of
CD-RW drive.
4. Press the CD downward. The CD will be locked by 3
clips of the stopper.
It is recommended to use CD-RW discs from the
following manufacturers.
Ricoh Co., Ltd, Mitsubishi Chemicals Inc.
Recommended CD-R/CD-RW discs (approved by Roland)
are shown in the owner's manual of the CD-R/RW drive.
If you are using a VS-1824 that is not equipped
with an internal CD-RW drive, you will need to purchase a
separately available CD-RW drive (approved by Roland). For
instructions on connecting the drive, refer to “Connecting an
External CD-R/CD-RW Drive” (p. 194).
5. Press disc tray until it is locked in the VS-1824.
If a disc tray does not open
If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive
(such as due to a power failure), the disc tray cannot be
opened by pressing the eject button. In this case, you can
insert a piece of wire to force the tray open.
It is strictly restricted to eject tray using emergency eject
hall during VS-1824 is operating. This is cause error of
software.
1. Turn off the power of the VS-1824.
2. Insert a thin object such as a wire into the emergency
eject hole. The disc tray will open.
Emergency Eject Hole
234
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup
CD-R Backup
1. Select the drive (internal IDE hard drive) containing the
source song to be backed up as the current drive.
2. Place a blank CD-R/CD-RW disc in the CD-R/CD-RW
drive.
SOURSE SONG
Mark the songs you want to back up.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to back up, and then press [F3 (MARK)].
You can choose more than just one song to backup. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], all songs will be marked for backup.
For details refer to the column
“Inserting a CD” (see p. 234).
3. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
Press [F1 (SelSg)] to display a directory of songs. From the
song directory, press [F1 (Back)].
4. Press [F4 (CDRBk)].
If you are using a finalized CD-RW disc that contains
data, “Erase?” appears in the display. To erase the
existing data, press [ENTER/YES]. “Erase Disc” appears
and the contents of the CD-RW disc are erased. If you do
not wish to erase the data, press [EXIT/NO], and insert a
new disc.
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
settings.
fig.07-14
If this is turned “On,” verification will be performed
after the dong data has been backed up, to check
whether or not the data was saved correctly.
* When backing up to a CD-R, we recommend that you also
execute +Verify to check whether the data was bask up
correctly.
* Since +Verify checks the entire CD-R disc, the operation will
take a certain amount of time.
* If as a result of the “+Verify” operation you receive a warning
that was not written correctly, please make a backup on
another disc.
CD Speed
x4:
The song will be written at quadruple speed
(706 kilobytes per second).
x2:
The song will be written at double speed (353
kilobytes per second).
The available speeds will depend on the Rolandapproved CD drive connected to the VS-1824.
235
Chapter 18
+Verify
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup
6. If several CD-R/CD-RW drives are connected to the
VS-1824, you can press [F5 (SelDr)] to display a directory
of drives. From this screen, use [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to select the CD-R/CD-RW backup
destination drive, then press [F1 (Back)].
fig.07-06
CD-R Recover
1. Place a CD-R/CD-RW disc containing song data in the
CD-R/CD-RW drive.
For details refer to the column
“Inserting a CD” (see p. 234).
2. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
3. Press [F5 (CDRRc)].
7. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message will ask you to confirm.
8. Press [ENTER/YES]. (Or, press [EXIT/NO] to cancel the
operation.)
9. “Store Current ?” appears in the display. Press [ENTER/
YES] to store changes made to the current song, or press
[EXIT/NO] if you don’t want to save changes made to
the current song. If the current song is a demo song,
press [EXIT/NO].
10. If the song or selected songs data will not fit on a single
CD-R/CD-RW disc, the first disc is ejected and the
message “Insert Disc #” (# indicating the next disc
number in the sequence) appears in the display. Insert
another blank CD-R/CD-RW disc and press
[ENTER/YES]. Write the disc numbers on the labels
using a permanent-ink, soft-tipped pen to keep track of
the order in which the discs were inserted into the drive.
(When you recover data from this disc set, you will need
to insert the discs in the same order.) When copying song
data across multiple CD-R/CD-RW discs, the message
“Insert Disc #” may appear several times. Continue to
insert the discs in the order as instructed and press
[ENTER/YES].
11. When the CD-R backup procedure is finished, the screen
will return to the Playlist display.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
settings.
fig.07-17
SOURSE SONG
Mark the songs you want to recover.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to recover, and then press [F4 (MARK)].
You can choose more than just one song to recover. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], all songs will be marked for
recovery.
236
Chapter 18 CD-R Backup
6. Press [F5 (Exec)].
Press [F2 (SelSg)] to display a directory of songs. From the
song directory, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.07-19
A message will ask you to confirm.
7. Press [ENTER/YES] (or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel the
operation).“Store Current ?” appears in the display.
8. Press [ENTER/YES] to store changes made to the current
song and begin the recovery process. Or, press
[EXIT/NO] if you don’t want to save changes made to
the current song. If the current song is a demo song,
press [EXIT/NO].
9. If song data is spread out across more than one disc, the
disc will be ejected and “Insert Disc #” (# indicates the
number in the order of insertion) appears in the display.
Insert the next disc in the sequence and press
[ENTER/YES]. When the CD-R backup procedure is
finished, the screen will return to the Playlist display.
Erase All Songs
Chapter 18
When this is set to “On,” the destination drive is
initialized before the recover procedure is carried out.
This will erase all songs from the destination drive. If
you want to recover a song from CD-R/CD-RW without
erasing any songs on the current drive, make sure this
setting is “Off.”
CD Speed
x24:
The song will be recovered at twenty-fourfold
speed (4234 kilobytes per second).
x14:
The song will be recovered at fourteenfold
speed (2470 kilobytes per second).
x4:
The song will be recovered at fourhold speed
(706 kilobytes per second).
The available speeds will depend on the Rolandapproved CD drive connected to the VS-1824.
Even if the “CD SPEED” is set to “x24” or “x14” the time it
takes for recovery is onto always 1/24 or 1/14 of the base.
This is because writing to the internal hard disk can take a lot
of time, or disc read errors can sometimes occur.
5. Mark the songs you want to recover. Use the TIME/
VALUE dial to move the cursor to the song you want to
recover, then press [F4 (MARK)]. You can choose more
than just one song to recover. By pressing [F3 (ALL)], all
songs will be marked for recovery.
237
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
This chapter explains the procedures for using a DAT
recorder in conjunction with the VS-1824. Refer to the
owner’s manual for your DAT recorder as you read this
section.
Before Backing Up to DAT
Song data can be saved using a DAT recorder by connecting
the VS-1824’s DIGITAL OUT connector (coaxial or optical) to
a DAT (“digital audio tape”) recorder. This procedure is
referred to as “DAT Backup.” The procedure of loading
previously backed-up song data into the VS-1824 is referred
to as “DAT Recover.” The backed up song data includes the
data of all V-Tracks, and song settings such as locators,
markers, mixer Scenes and Automix data. Make backups of
your data as a precaution against unexpected problems, or
when your drive is full and no more recording is possible.
Since DAT tapes are easily transported, they are good for
exchanging song data with other VS-1824 users. We
recommend important data be backed up to multiple tapes.
DAT (See Appendices p. 12)
* You may lose song data if you incorrectly perform the DAT
Backup procedure. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning the loss of such data. Furthermore, Roland does not
warrant any copied data, regardless of the performance or
condition of the DAT recorder.
*
It is impossible to backup songs created by other VS models or
in other VS model formats.
For these types of songs, Execute Song Import first, then
perform the Backup.
Items Necessary for DAT Backup
• VS-1824
• DAT recorder
• Blank DAT tapes
• Digital connection cables (coaxial or optical)
238
About the Devices Used in DAT
Backup
DAT recorder:
You can use a conventional DAT recorder. Other digital
recording devices such as MD recorders or DCC recorders
cannot be used to back up data. You cannot use a DAT
recorder that alters recorded data during playback; for
example, DAT recorders featuring internal digital signal
recorded on the drive.
* Portable DAT recorders may require a special adapter when
connecting to the VS-1824’s DIGITAL IN and OUT. Check
the owner’s manual for your DAT recorder, or consult your
dealer or service center to find out what your model may
require.
Tape:
You can use conventional DAT tapes. However, 180-minute
tapes are very thin, and may easily stretch or become tangled
in the recorder. Avoid using 180-minute tapes.
When you need more than one tape to do the backup,
prepare whatever number of tapes you need. It is
recommended that you write down the numbers of the tapes
to indicate the order in which they are to be used during the
backup, and that you use tapes that are of the same recording
length.
Audio equipment:
Turn down the volume of any connected audio devices while
song data is being backed up. During DAT backups, no
audio is output from the VS-1824’s analog output jacks. The
song data sent to the DAT recorder from the VS-1824 is a
particular signal recorded on the drive. Monitoring this with
the DAT recorder’s volume raised may result in damage to
your speakers, and may adversely affect your hearing.
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Saving Song Data to DAT
(DAT Backup)
Use the following procedure to back up song data on the
current drive.
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the DAT recorder as shown
below.
2. Set the DAT recorder so it is able to record digital signals.
* Normally the sample rate at which song data is transmitted is
set to 48kHz. This sample rate has no relation to the sample
rate of the song data. If your DAT recorder requires you to set
the sample rate, set it to 48 kHz.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility Menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [PAGE] so “DATBk” appears in the display above
[F6]. Press [F6 (DATBk)].
fig.09-02a
Optical
“DAT Backup Ready?” appears in the display.
5. Press [ENTER/YES] and “Store Current?” will be
displayed.
If you wish to save changes made to the current song,
press [ENTER/YES]; if not, press [EXIT/NO]
fig.09-03
Digtal In
6. Press [
], [
], [
cursor to “Source Song.”
Coaxial
], and [
] to move the
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to copy and press [F3 (MARK)].
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove marks
from all songs.
Press [F1 (SelSg)] to view a directory of songs. After
marking songs, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.09-03a
Digital In
DAT recorder
239
Chapter 19
DAT recorder
fig.09-02b
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Digital Out Select
* If you wish to cancel the backup, press [EXIT/NO]. This stops
backup at any time during the procedure. Song data recorded
to a DAT up to that point cannot be loaded into the VS-1824.
Select either “DIGOUT1” (coaxial) or “DIGOUT2”
(optical).
* To check whether or not a backup has been performed correctly,
we recommend you carry out the Verify procedure (p. 243).
8. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set each of the values described below.
Sample Rate
This sets the sample rate (48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) used
during DAT backup. This sample rate has no relation to
the sample rate of the song data. This defaults to 48 kHz.
Backup Wait
When this is set to “On,” the data transmission speed
will be slower. Turn this on when using an external drive
(such as a Zip drive) whose data read/write speed is
slower. When this is set to “On,” although it takes longer
for the backup to finish, problems resulting from the
data transfer, such as data loss, are minimized. The
default setting is “Off.”
Tape Length
Specify the interval at which the backup will be paused
in order to change tapes. Set this so the interval is no less
than five minutes shorter than the length of tape on
which you are recording. When using tapes with
different recording lengths, set this to the recording time
of the shortest tape.
9. The approximate time it will take and the number of
tapes needed to back up the data are indicated in the
display. Make sure you have the correct number of tapes.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
11. Press [ENTER/YES]. “Please Rec DAT” appears in the
display.
12. Put the DAT recorder in Record Standby, press [ENTER/
YES] on the VS-1824 once more, then start recording on
your DAT machine.
13. If you cannot back everything up on one tape, the
operation is carried out for the length of time designated
in “Tape Length.” When “Insert Tape” is displayed,
insert the next tape into the DAT recorder and again put
it in Record Standby, press [ENTER/YES] on the VS1824, then start recording on your DAT machine. The
backup procedure continues in this fashion. Write the
tape numbers on the labels in the order they are backed
up.
14. When the backup procedure is finished, “Please Stop
DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder and
press [ENTER/YES].
15. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
240
Tape Quantity Needed for DAT Backup
One 60-minute tape can back up approximately 330 MB
of song data. For example, you would need four 60minute (or two 120-minute) tapes to back up 1000MB of
song data. Check the display to see the number of tapes
required for the backup.
Time Needed to Backup
It takes about 60 minutes to back up 330 MB of song
data. Backing up 1000 MB of song data takes about 190
minutes. However, if the number of songs being backed
up is high compared to the total MB size of the data, it
may take longer.
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Recovering Data from a DAT
DAT Recover
Use the following procedure to load song data that was
backed up to a DAT recorder. If two or more songs were
saved together during the backup, the data of all songs will
be loaded.
* You can recover VS-880/880EX/1680 song data backed up
using DAT backup. However you cannot edit or resave the
recovered data on the VS-1824 while it is still in a VS-880/
880EX/1680 format. If you wish to edit VS-880/880EX/1680
song data with the VS-1824, you will need to convert it to VS1824 format using the Song Import procedure (p. 246).
2. Insert the tape that contains the song data into the DAT
recorder.
If the song data is backed up on two or more tapes, insert
the first tape.
3. Rewind the tape to begin playback from the beginning of
song data.
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility Menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [PAGE] so “DATRc” appears in the display above
[F1]. Press [F1 (DATRc)].
fig.09-05a
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the DAT recorder as shown below.
fig.09-05b
Optical
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Set each of the values described below.
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical).
Erase All Songs
DAT recorder
When this is set to “On,” the destination drive is
initialized before the DAT Recover procedure is carried
out. This will erase all songs from the destination drive.
If you want to recover a song from DAT without erasing
any songs on the current drive, make sure this is set to
“Off.”
fig.09-05c
Coaxial
7. Press [F4 (Exec)].
“STORE Current ?” appears in the display.
8. Press [ENTER/YES] to save changes to the current song.
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display, or press
[EXIT/NO] to exit the procedure.
9. Put the DAT recorder in play. The data begins to load.
Digital Out
DAT recorder
10. If you have backed up data to multiple tapes, the
operation will pause when the end of each tape is
reached. Insert the next-numbered tape as indicated in
the display, press [ENTER/YES], and start the DAT
recorder playing again.
241
Chapter 19
Digital In Select
Digtal Out
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
11. When the backup procedure is finished, “Please Stop
DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder and
press [ENTER/YES].
12. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Canceling the Recover Operation
You can cancel the recover operation by pressing [EXIT/NO]
during the recover. Also, when there is an error in song data
backed up on a tape, the recover operation is temporarily
halted. In such instances, you can choose whether to leave or
delete the unfinished song data recovered up to that point.
Checking DAT Tape Contents
This operation lets you view the names of songs saved to a
DAT tape. Even if you have saved the data of two or more
songs in a single backup operation, you can check the name
of each song.
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the DAT recorder as shown
below.
fig.09-06c
Optical
* This procedure does not correct the drive error, but tries to
restore the song and save as much of the data as possible.
Depending on the location where the error occurred, some
noises may be generated, or settings for the mixer, tempo map,
and/or sync track may be lost.
* Loud noises may damage your amplifier and speakers. Turn
down the headphones and master volume of the VS-1824 when
you check for errors in the song data.
Canceling a DAT Recovery Operation
in Progress
1. Press [EXIT/NO] during the DAT recovery.
Digital Out
Recovery is stopped, and “Delete Err Song?” (Delete the
song containing the error?) appears in the display.
2. If you would like to delete the problem song data that
stopped the recovery operation from the hard drive,
press [ENTER/YES]. If you would like to leave it
unchanged, even though recovery is not complete, press
[EXIT/NO].
DAT recorder
fig.09-06d
Coaxial
When an Error is Found in the Song
Data
1. If an error is found in song data that was recovered with
the DAT Recover operation, “Recover Err Retry ?”—“An
error was found, retry the recovery?”—appears in the
display.
2. If you want to recover the data, press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to cancel the recovery, press [EXIT/NO].
3. If you press [EXIT/NO] in Step 2, “Delete Err Song ?”
appears in the display.
4. If you would like to delete the song data from the hard
drive, press [ENTER/YES]. If you would like to keep it
as is even though the error is included, press [EXIT/NO].
Digital Out
DAT recorder
242
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
2. Insert the tape that contains the song data into the DAT
recorder. If the song data is backed up on two or more
tapes, insert the first tape.
3. Rewind the tape to begin playback from the beginning of
song data.
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility Menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [PAGE] so “DATRc” appears in the display above
[F1]. Press [F1 (DATRc)].
6. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Digital In Select” and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial.
Digital In Select
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical).
7. Press [F1 (Name)].
DAT Backup Verification
This operation checks the condition of song data that was
recorded to a DAT tape. It does not perform a comparison of
the song data on the hard drive and the song data on the
tape. If the DAT verify operation results in a warning that
data is not recorded properly, it is possible the tape has been
scratched or stretched. If the original song data still exists on
the drive, perform the DAT backup procedure once again
using a different DAT tape.
* After performing DAT backups, in order to confirm the data
has indeed been properly backed up, we strongly recommend
you carry out the Verify procedure.
1. Connect the VS-1824 and the DAT recorder as shown
below.
fig.09-06c
Optical
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
8. Put the DAT recorder in play. The song name will load.
9. When the procedure is finished, “Please Stop DAT”
appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder and press
[ENTER/YES]. The DAT Name screen appears in the
display.
fig.09-06a
Chapter 19
Digital Out
DAT recorder
fig.09-06d
Coaxial
10. If you wish to end the operation after checking the song
names, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist
display.
If you wish to recover the song data, please refer to
“Recovering Data from a DAT,” p. 241.
Digital Out
DAT recorder
243
Chapter 19 Using a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
2. Insert the tape that contains the song data into the DAT
recorder. If the song data is backed up on two or more
tapes, insert the first tape.
3. Rewind the tape to begin playback from the beginning of
song data.
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility Menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [PAGE] so “DATRc” appears in the display above
[F1]. Press [F1 (DATRc)].
6. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Digital In Select.”
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to make the choice for
“Digital In Select.”
Digital In Select
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical).
7. Press [F2 (Verify)].
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
8. Put the DAT recorder in play.
The Verify process begins. If you have backed up data to
multiple tapes, the operation will suspend when the end
of each tape is reached. Insert the next-numbered tape as
indicated in the display, press [ENTER/YES], and start
the DAT recorder playing again.
9. When the verify procedure is finished, “Please Stop
DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder and
press [ENTER/YES].
10. If there is no problem with the condition of the recorded
song data, “Complete” appears in the display. If a
warning message appears when the song data is loaded,
then that song data cannot be loaded correctly. If you
wish to check a tape again, insert the tape with the
number indicated in the display, press [ENTER/YES]
and play the DAT recorder. Press [EXIT/NO] if you
want to finish the procedure without checking the tape
again.
* To cancel the Verify operation, press [EXIT/NO].
244
Chapter 20 Compatibility with Other VS Recorders
Drives used with Roland’s VS-890, 1680, VS-880/880EX or
VSR-880 can also be used by the VS-1824. Song data recorded
on such drives can be loaded by the VS-1824. Because of
differences in the structure of drive space and song data
between the VS-1680, VS-880/880EX,VS-890 and the
VSR-880, there are a number of precautions concerning the
loading and saving of data that should be observed.
VS-1880's song data is identical to that of the VS-1824.
VS-2480’s song data cannot be used on VS-1824.
The internal hard disk is not removable. Therefor, internal
hard disks used on other VS series (VS-1680, VS-880/
880EX,VS-890 and the VSR-880) cannot be used on VS-1824.
Drive Compatibility
VS-1680, VS-880/880EX,
VS-890 or VSR-880 → VS-1824
When external hard drives that have been used by a
VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 are attached to a
VS-1824, they are recognized as a formatted disk.
The VS-1824 can be used for playing back songs recorded
with the VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880.
However, before you can use the VS-1824 to edit such songs,
or save new versions of them, you must first use Song Import
to convert the songs to VS-1824 format.
VS-890/VSR-880 Partition numbers:
Song Copy Archive Data
VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 song data that
has been saved to a hard drive or CD-R using the Song Copy
Archive or CD-R Backup procedure can be restored to the
VS-1824. However, you cannot edit or re-save the recovered
data on the VS-1824 until you have used Song Import.
Song data that has been saved using the DAT backup
procedure on the VS-1680 or VS-880/880EX can be recovered
by the VS-1824.
VS-1824 → VS-1680, VS-880/
880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880
When external hard drives that have been used by a VS-1824
are attached to a VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880,
they are recognized as a formatted disk, provided they meet
the conditions below. The VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890
and VSR-880, however, cannot load VS-1824 songs unless
they have been converted to the desired VS’s format using
the VS-1824’s Song Export procedure (p. 247).
* Partition space: With the VS-880/880EX, VS-890 and VSR880, only a partition of one GB or less can be used.
VS-880/880EX Partition numbers:
With the VS-880/880EX, only Partitions 0-3 can be used.
Partitions 5-8 cannot be used.
Song Copy Archive Data
Song data that has been saved using the Song Copy Archive
or CD-R Backup procedure on the VS-1824 cannot be
restored (extracted) by the VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or
VSR-880.
DAT Backup Data
Song data that has been saved using the DAT backup
procedure on the VS-1824 cannot be recovered by the
VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880.
Chapter 20
The VSR-880 supports the use of up to 10 (0-9) partitions,
while the VS-1824 supports the use of up to eight. VS-890/
VSR-880 Partitions 8 and 9 will not be recognized by the
VS-1824.
DAT Backup Data
VS-840/840EX ↔ VS-1824
Zip disks used on the VS-840/840EX and VS-1824 are not
mutually compatible. The disk cannot be accessed directly,
but song data can be converted to VS-880 format. This will
allow you to transfer song data between the VS-1824 and the
VS-840/840EX.
* If you wish to edit VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR880 song data with the VS-1824, use the Song Copy Archives
Extract (p. 227) or the CD-R Recover procedure (p. 241) first.
Then convert it to a VS-1824 song using Song Import.
245
Chapter 20 Compatibility with Other VS Recorders
Song Import
3. Select the internal drive (IDE hard drive) so that it is the
current drive (see “Drive Select,” p. 228).
You can convert songs created on a VS-1680/880/880EX/
840/840EX/890 or VSR-880 for use in the VS-1824 and copy
them as new songs to the current drive. This is called “Song
Import.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
When VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 song data
is converted, all the data such as mixer settings including EQ
(where applicable) and Channel Link, system settings such as
sync track and tempo map, locators and markers and effect
settings will be copied.
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)]. The Song Menu
icon is displayed.
6. Press [F4 (Imprt)]. If you do not see “Imprt” in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until you see “Imprt,”
and then press [F4 (Imprt)].
fig.10-01a
VS-840/840EX song data recorded on Zip disks only includes
the performance data (audio) and information describing the
tracks on which the performance data is recorded. Therefore,
mixer settings such as EQ and Channel Link, locators and
markers and effect settings are not imported.
* You can only create a song using Song Import that has the
same sample rate and recording mode as the source song.
* If there is insufficient free space on the current drive, Song
Import cannot be carried out.
The procedure for importing a playable copy of a song from
a Zip disk is explained below. If you wish to import song
data created by using Song Copy Archive or DAT backup,
proceed to Step 3.
1. Make connections as shown below.
fig.10-01
7. Press [F1 (SelDr)]. A list of drives appears in the display.
8. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select the
source drive, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
source drive partition. Then press [F1 (Back)].
fig.10-02
2. Insert the Zip disk on which a VS-1680/880/880EX/840/
840EX/890 or VSR-880 song has been recorded.
246
9. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
song you want to import and press [F4 (Mark)]. When
[F3 (All)] is pressed, you can place or remove marks from
all songs. By pressing [F2 (SelSg)], you can view a
directory of available songs.
Chapter 20 Compatibility with Other VS Recorders
fig.10-03
Song Export
You can convert the data of the current song for use with a
VS-1680/880/880EX/890 or VSR-880 and copy it as a new
song to an external drive (such as a Zip drive) connected to
the VS-1824’s SCSI port. This is referred to as “Song Export.”
All song data, including mixer settings such as EQ (where
applicable) and Channel Link, system settings such as sync
tracks and tempo maps, locators, markers, effect settings,
etc., are copied.
Limits of Song Export to VS-1680
Tracks:
Song modes:
From this screen, select the songs you want to import by
pressing [F3 (Mark)]. Then press [F1 (Back)].
10. Press [F5 (Exec)]. A confirmation message appears in the
display.
11. Press [ENTER/YES]. “STORE Current ?” appears in the
display.
12. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes made to
the current song; otherwise press [EXIT/NO]. (If the
current song is a demo song, press [EXIT/NO].) After
Song Import is completed, the screen returns to the
Playlist display. The song imported for use by the VS1824 becomes the current song.
1-16 or 3-18
MTP, MAS, MT1, MT2, LIV, LV2
Limits of Song Export to VS-880EX
Tracks:
1-8, 9-16 or 11-18
V-Tracks:
1-8 to Bank A, 9-18 to Bank B
Locators:
Bank 1-Bank 4
Song modes:
MAS, MT1, MT2, LIV
Limits of Song Export to VS-880
Tracks:
1-8, 9-16 or 11-18
V-Tracks:
Locators:
Song modes:
1-8
Bank 1-Bank 4
MAS, MT1, MT2, LIV
Limits of Song Export to VSR-880
Tracks:
1-8, 9-16 or 11-18
V-Tracks:
1-8 to Bank A, 9-18 to Bank B
Locators:
Bank 1-Bank 4
A VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890 or VSR-880 song created
as a result of Song Import will have both the same sample
rate and recording mode as the source song.
An audio CD image file cannot be exported to the VS-1680 or
VS-880/880EX.
When you export a song containing an image file, only the
song data—and not the image file—will be included in the
exported file.
If there is insufficient free space on the destination drive,
Song Export cannot be carried out.
The procedure on the next page demonstrates the Song
Export procedure using an Zip drive (other drives can be
used in its place).
247
Chapter 20
Song modes: MTP (automatically converted to VSR),
CDR, MAS, MT1, MT2, LIV, LV2
Chapter 20 Compatibility with Other VS Recorders
1. Make your connections as shown in the diagram below.
fig.10-04
8. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select the
destination drive (the Zip drive). Then press [F1 (Back)].
fig.10-05
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
desired value for the following parameters.
2. Select the song you want to export as the current song.
3. Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)]. The Song Menu
icon is displayed.
6. Press [F5 (Exprt)]. If you do not see “Exprt” in the
display above [F5], press [PAGE] until you see “Exprt,”
and then press [F5 (Exprt)].
fig.10-04a
Save As
This selects the format for the exported song: VS-1680/880/
880EX or VSR-880.
Export Track
This selects the tracks to be exported.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
11. Press [ENTER/YES].
“STORE Current ?” appears in the display.
7. Press [F5 (SelDr)]. A list of drives appears in the display.
12. Press [ENTER/YES] if you want to save changes made to
the current song; otherwise, press [EXIT/NO]. (If the
current song is a demo song, press [EXIT/NO].)
13. After Song Export is completed, the screen returns to the
Playlist display.
248
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
System Settings for Each Song
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for
Fader Match.
These are overall system settings that can be saved with each
song. These settings are lost if the power is turned off
without the song being saved, or if the system settings are
reset to their original conditions.
Jump:
Fader Match
Null:
During Automix playback, or when you use [FADER/MUTE]
to reassign the physical faders from track channels to input
channels, there will be times when the physical fader
positions may not correspond to their actual stored volume
settings. In such instances, the position of each fader is
represented by a black dot, and the actual level that is set is
represented by a white circle. Use the following procedure to
adjust the Fader Match settings:
The actual stored fader value will change the instant the
physical fader is moved. The stored value will instantly
update to match the physical fader position. (This is the
default setting.)
The stored fader value will change only after the
physical fader matches the position of the stored value.
The physical fader must be moved to the stored fader
position before the value will change.
5. When you are done setting Fader Match, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
fig.12-15
Actual volume level
Each fader position
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Fader Match.”
] to move the
If “Fader Match” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm1)].
Chapter 21
The left/right [CURSOR] buttons can also be used to access
any additional parameters that are not displayed.
249
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Peak Hold
Remaining Recording Time
You can set the display to hold the maximum values (peaks)
while the level meter is shown in the graphic display.
The amount of free drive space available for recording in the
current song is displayed as “Remain” in the upper part of
the Playlist display when Song Information is shown. You
can select the units of measurement for this value.
fig.12-16
Peak indication
* “Remain” does not appear while the level meter or fader/pan
screens are displayed (p. 39). Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] until the Song Information screen is displayed.
fig.12-17
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Peak Hold Sw.” If “Peak H. Sw” is not
displayed, press [F1 (Prm1)].
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for Peak
Hold Switch.
Peak Hold Sw (Peak Hold Switch)
With this set to “On,” the level meter in the graphic
display holds the display of the maximum levels.
5. When you are done setting Peak Hold, press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Each time you press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], the peak display is
reset (cleared). Switching to a display that does not show level
meters, such as switching to the Track Mixer screen, Song
Information or other displays also resets the peak display.
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Remain Display.”
] to move the
If “Remain Display” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm1)].
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for the
Remain Display.
Remain Display (Remaining Display)
This selects the units of measurements in which the
remaining drive space is shown.
Time:
The remaining time for recording is shown in minutes
and seconds.
CapaMB:
The remaining time for recording is shown in available
megabytes of drive space.
Capa %:
The remaining time for recording is shown as a
percentage of total drive space.
Event:
This shows the remaining number of events available for
recording and mixing.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
250
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Global Settings
Foot Switch Settings
You can choose how the foot switch functions when an
optional foot switch—such as the Roland DP-2 or BOSS FS5U—is connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack.
These are settings related to the overall operation of the VS1824. Unlike system settings, these settings are not set on a
song-by-song basis.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed. If the System Menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)].
If “SYSPM” does not appear above [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” appears, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “Foot Sw.”
], and [
] to move the
If “Foot Sw” is not displayed, press [F1 (Prm1)].
Shift Lock
Many functions in the VS-1824 are accessed by holding
[SHIFT], and then pressing a second button. If you find it
inconvenient to use two hands, you can set Shift Lock to
temporarily lock in the [SHIFT] button. This allows you to
perform most [SHIFT] functions with one hand.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for Foot
Switch.
Play/Stop:
Repeats playback and stop each time the foot switch is
pressed.
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “Shift Lock.”
], and [
] to move the
Record:
Performs the same function as [REC]. Use this setting for
performing punch-ins and -outs using a foot switch.
TapMarker:
Performs the same function as [TAP]. Pressing the foot
switch places a marker at the current position of the
song.
Next:
Performs the same function as [NEXT]. Moves to the
beginning or end of the next phrase each time the foot
switch is pressed.
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for Shift
Lock.
Shift Lock
Set this to “On” to enable the Shift Lock function.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
6. The [SHIFT] button indicator lights on and off each time
the button is pressed. [SHIFT] is in effect when the
indicator is lit. The [SHIFT] state changes when another
button is pressed or the TIME/VALUE dial is turned.
Previous:
Chapter 21
Performs the same function as [PREVIOUS]. Moves to
the beginning or end of the previous phrase each time
the foot switch is pressed.
GPI:
Controls playback and recording of the song depending
on the GPI trigger signal received from the FOOT
SWITCH jack.
GPI (See Appendices p. 12)
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
251
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Numerics Type
Shift Lock Shortcut
You can quickly toggle the Shift Lock feature on and off
by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [ENTER/YES].
When using the Jump function, or typing in the values of a
punch-in point, you can use the LOCATOR buttons to enter
numbers directly. The setting for Numerics Type determines
how the numbers are entered.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
To
To Display the Song Menu Icon
The System Menu icon is displayed.
1. Press [SHIFT] and immediately release the button.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
The button indicator lights. When the level meter is
not displayed, “SHIFT” appears in the upper left
part of the display and indicates the Shift Hold
function is in effect.
2. Press [F1 (SONG)]. The [SHIFT] button indicator
goes off, and the Song Menu icon appears in the
display.
When Holding Down [SHIFT]
If [SHIFT] is held down during an operation, the Shift
Lock function will be ignored. For example, if you hold
down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)], [SHIFT] will not
be rocked when you release [SHIFT]. The function of
[SHIFT] itself remains in effect, so the Song Menu icon is
displayed.
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “NUMERICS Type.”
] to move the
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for
Numerics Type.
NUMERICS Type
This sets how numerals are entered when you use the
LOCATOR buttons as a numbering keypad.
Up:
Numerals are entered from lower-place digits on up
(from the right).
Down:
In some cases, it is possible to quickly change value
settings by holding [SHIFT] while turning the TIME/
VALUE dial. Depending on what value is being
changed, holding [SHIFT] while turning the TIME/
VALUE dial will change the values by a factor of 10, or
in other cases, by a factor of 1/10.
252
Numerals are entered from higher-place digits on
down (from the left).
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Measure Display
Example of entering numerals with “Up”
Setting
This example explains how “01h23m45s00f” is entered
when the NUMERICS Type is “Up”.
VS-1824 can show measure and beat while it is sending MIDI
clock. About MIDI clock, see “Sync Gen.” on p. 198. VS-1824
can send MIDI clock in case “Sync Gen.” setting is
“MIDIClk” or “SyncTr.”
1. Press [NUMERICS]. The button indicator lights.
2. The cursor appears at the digit furthest to the right
(the lowest digit place). Press the LOCATOR buttons
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], and [SCENE/0] (four times), in
that order.
The numerals appear in the place furthest to the
right and shift to higher places as other numerals are
entered. You can also move the cursor to the desired
place by pressing [
] and [
].
3. When you are finished entering the numerals, press
[ENTER/YES]. The numerical value is set, and the
button indicator goes off.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Measure Display.”
] to move the
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting to
“Auto”.
Measure Display
Example of entering numerals with
“Down” Setting
This example explains how “01h23m45s00f” is entered
when the NUMERICS Type is “Down”.
1. Press [NUMERICS]. The button indicator lights.
2. The cursor appears at the digit furthest to the left
(the highest digit place). Press the LOCATOR
buttons [SCENE/0], [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [SCENE/0],
and [SCENE/0], in that order.
Use this to select whether or not the measures and beats
appear in the graphic display.
Always:
The measure and beat are always displayed.
Auto:
The measure and beat are not displayed when the
MIDI clock is not sending.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
The numerals appear from left to right, just as they are
entered. You can also move the cursor to the desired
place by pressing [
] and [
].
Chapter 21
3. When you are finished entering the numerals, press
[ENTER/YES]. The numerical value is set, and the
button indicator goes off.
253
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
SCSI ID Number
IDE Drive Switch
When connecting SCSI devices to the VS-1824, the SCSI ID
number of each device connected must be set so none of the
devices have the same ID number. The VS-1824’s ID number
is set to “7” at the factory. When connecting SCSI devices
(such as a Zip drive or a CD-R drive) to the VS-1824, be sure
to set the SCSI ID number for these devices to a number other
than “7.” If no other SCSI ID number is available, it is
possible to change the SCSI ID number of the VS-1824.
It is possible to use a VS-1824 with just an external hard drive
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “SCSI Self ID.”
connected to the SCSI port, with turning the internal hard
drive OFF. You can turn off the internal hard drive with
following procedure.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press
[PAGE] until “GLOBL” appears, and then press
[F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
cursor to “IDE Drive.”
], and [
] to move the
] to move the
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for IDE
Drive.
IDE Drive
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the setting for SCSI
Self ID.
When not using an internal hard drive, set this to “Off.”
The default setting is “On.”
SCSI Self ID
This sets the VS-1824’s own SCSI ID number (1-7).
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [ZERO].
“STORE OK ?” appears in the display.
6. Press [ENTER/YES].
The SCSI ID number of the internal CD-RW
drive is fixed at “0.”
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [ZERO]. “STORE OK ?” appears
in the display.
6. Press [ENTER/YES]. The current song is saved.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
You must Restart the VS-1824 for the new SCSI ID
number to become effective.
254
The current song is saved.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
The changed setting becomes effective the next time the
VS-1824 is turned on.
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Input Peak Level
Previous/Next Switch
You can designate the level at which the peak indicator lights
based on signal input via the INPUT jacks (1-8).
[PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] normally move the position of the
timeline to the beginning or end of the previous or next
phrase on the selected track.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
Menu icon is displayed. If the System Menu icon does
not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
fig.12-18
Current Time
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear above
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” appears, and then
press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Input Peak Level.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
You can change this function so [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT]
recall markers, similar to the manner in which the track skip
button on a CD player works.
fig.12-19
Input Peak Level
This sets the volume level at which the peak indicators
(above the Input Sens knobs) light.
M1
M2
Current Time
M3
M4
M5
CLIP:
The indicator lights when the input is at maximum
level (distortion).
-3 dB:
The indicator lights 3 dB before the input is at
maximum level.
-6 dB:
The indicator lights 6 dB before input is at maximum
level.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “PREVIOUS/NEXT Sw.” Use the TIME/
VALUE dial to change the setting.
Chapter 21
PREVIOUS/NEXT Sw (PREVIOUS NEXT Switch)
This sets how the [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] buttons
function.
PHRASE:
[PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] move the current playback
time to the beginning or end of the previous or next
phrase.
MARKER:
[PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] move the current playback
time to the previous or next marker.
255
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Fan Control
Holding [SHIFT] and pressing the [PREVIOUS] or [NEXT]
buttons will have the opposite effect of the Previous/Next
Sw setting on this screen. For example, if the Previous/Next
Sw is set to “PHRASE,” holding [SHIFT] and pressing
[NEXT] will advance you to the next marker.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
You may find the noise from the VS-1824’s cooling fan to be a
concern when recording with a mic nearby. If this is the case,
you can program the VS-1824 to turn off the fan during
certain operations.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
Adjusting the Button Sensitivity
Several buttons on the VS-1824 change functions depending
on whether they are pressed once or held down.
STATUS button
When pressed:
Changes track status.
When Held Down:
Displays the “Input Assign”
screen and shows which inputs
or tracks are connected/routed
to the track.
[EDIT/SOLO]
When pressed:
When Held Down:
Displays the Master Block
settings.
Turns on the SOLO function.
When Held Down:
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Fan Control.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Fan Control
This specifies which operations cause the cooling fan to
turn off.
Off:
The Fan Control feature is disabled. The fan operates
constantly.
[FADER/MUTE]
When pressed:
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
Toggles the physical fader
assignments from TR to IN.
Turns on the MUTE function.
You can specify the length of time the button must be held
down in order to use its secondary function.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
Play:
The fan stops during playback.
Rec&Play:
The fan stops when Record Standby is enabled, and
stays off during recording and playback.
While the cooling fan is stopped for long periods of time,
heat can build up and, as a result, may damage the
internal hard drive. To avoid this problem, do not leave this
set to “Play” or “Rec&Play” for long periods of time. Keep
the fan running as much as possible with the Fan Control set
to “Off.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Switching Time.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
Switching Time
This sets the time a button must be held down (0.3-2.0
seconds) in order to use its secondary function.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
256
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Removing a Direct Current Offset
from the MIX Bus
When the level meters of a device (mixer etc.) connected to
the output of the VS-1824 may move even though no sound
is being output from the VS-1824, you may be experiencing a
direct current offset on the MIX bus that is being output from
the VS-1824’s MASTER outputs. This can be removed.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
MIDI Model ID
MIDI devices communicating with the VS-1824 using System
Exclusive messages identify it by its model ID number. The
MIDI Model ID parameter allows you to switch the VS1824’s ID number to the number used by the VS-1680. When
MIDI Model ID is set to “VS-1680,” you can use VS-1680based software—such as Logic VS, v. 4.X—with the VS-1824.
The MIDI Model ID is not the same thing as a MIDI Device
ID—the VS-1824 provides a separate Device ID parameter
(p. 261).
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
3. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “DC Cut,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the desired setting.
If “DC Cut” is not shown, press [F2 (Prm2)], and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial.
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)].
If “GLOBL” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “GLOBL” appears, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [F2 (Prm 2)]. If “Prm 2” does not appear above [F2],
first press [PAGE] until “Prm 2” appears, and then press
[F2 (Prm 2)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Model ID.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial
to select the desired setting.
DC Cut
When this is turned on, any direct current offset on
the MIX bus will be removed before the VS-1824
MASTER outputs.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
MIDI Model ID
VS-1880:
The VS-1824 uses its factory-designated MIDI Model
ID number.
VS-1680:
The VS-1824 uses the MIDI Model ID number used by
the VS-1680.
If you are using a VS-1824 and a VS-1680 in the same MIDI
system, and you set the VS-1824’s MIDI Model ID parameter
to “VS-1680,” be sure to set the two recorders to different
Device ID numbers (see p. 261).
257
Chapter 21
When MIDI Model ID is set to “VS-1680,” you cannot
control the VS-1824’s Tracks 17 and 18 via MIDI.
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Play and Record Settings
These are settings related to the overall workings of the Play
and Record functions.
Marker Stop
You can program the VS-1824 to stop playing when a marker
is reached.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
Record Monitor
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
When a Track STATUS button is set for recording (blinking
red), you can hear the previously recorded material by
pressing play, and you can hear the input source during
recording. During playback, you can press STATUS to switch
between monitoring the recorded track and monitoring the
input source. It is also possible to set the VS-1824 so the input
source is always monitored.
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)].
If “PLAY” does not appear above [F3], first press [PAGE]
until “PLAY” appears, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Marker Stop.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
Marker Stop
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)].
If “PLAY” does not appear above [F3], first press [PAGE]
until “PLAY” appears, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Record Monitor.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial
to change the setting.
Record Monitor
This switches between track and source monitoring.
AUTO:
Monitoring switches between track and source.
SOURCE:
Source is monitored at all times.
Setting
Stopped
Playback
Recording
AUTO:
SOURCE
TRACK
SOURCE
SOURCE:
SOURCE
or SOURCE*
SOURCE
SOURCE
* With Record Monitor set to “AUTO,” during recording it is
possible to switch monitoring from TRACK to SOURCE by
pressing the STATUS button.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
258
When this is set to “On,” song playback stops
automatically when a marker is reached.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Press [PLAY] to begin song playback. When the song
reaches a marker location, playback stops.
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Fade Length
Scrolling the Waveform Display
During track editing, or punch-in and punch-out recording,
it is possible that a tiny audio click may occur. The VS-1824
can fade in and fade out these edges so no noise is heard.
Adjust the Fade Length if an objectionable noise occurs as a
result of editing or recording. A Fade Length setting applies
to both the fade-in at the beginning of a phrase, and the
fadeout at the end of the phrase.
When a song is played back while waveforms are shown in
the playlist (p. 33), the waveform display scrolls in keeping
with the playback time.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)].
If “PLAY” does not appear above [F3], first press [PAGE]
until “PLAY” appears, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Fade Length.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F3 (PLAY)].
If “PLAY” does not appear above [F3], first press [PAGE]
until “PLAY” appears, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Waveform.” Use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the setting.
Fade Length
This sets the length—2, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 ms—of the
fade-in and fadeout.
* It is not possible to set the Fade Length time to 0.
Waveform Scroll
When set to “On,” the waveform scrolls in keeping with
the playback time.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
The “Drive Busy” indication may appear more readily when
Waveform Scroll is on, which may result in recording being
cancelled. If this occurs, turn the Waveform Scroll function
off.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
6. Press [F5 (WAVE)].
If “WAVE” does not appear above [F5], first press [PAGE]
until “WAVE” appears, and then press [F5 (WAVE)].
7. Press [PLAY]
The waveform display is scrolled.
Chapter 21
259
Chapter 21 System and Global Settings
Alarm Clock
5. Press [F5 (MSG)].
The Message Edit appears in the display. Use[
The VS-1824 has a built-in clock with an alarm function. With
the alarm function, you can have a text message of your
choice appear in the display at a certain time of day, day of
week, month or year. Use the alarm to program reminders
such as “Back Up the Hard Drive” and other things you
don’t want to forget.
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to enter your message.
fig.12-21
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu icon is displayed.
If the System Menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (DATE)].
If “DATE” does not appear above [F2], first press [PAGE]
until “DATE” appears, and then press [F2 (DATE)].
3. Press [F5 (Alarm)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Specify the date and time you wish the message
to appear.
fig.12-20
The function buttons work as shown below.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all the characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]:
Saves the message and exits the screen.
Mode
[F6 (EXIT)]:
This specifies how often you want the message to appear.
Exits the screen without saving the message.
Off:
No message is displayed.
m/d/y:
Message appears on a specific month, day, and year,
such as 2000/June/20 (June 20, 2000).
m/d/-:
Message appears on a specific month and day, of
every year, such as December/31 (every year on
December 31).
-/d/-:
Message appears on a specific day of every month.
Week:
Message appears on a specific day of the week, every
week.
Time:
Message appears on a specific time of the day, every
day.
Every:
Message appears every day.
260
6. After you have entered your message, press [F5 (Write)].
You can store up to ten messages at a time. Repeat steps
4-6 if you wish to enter additional messages.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
This chapter explains some additional ways to use the
VS-1824, including synchronizing two VS-1824s, a VS-1824
and VS-1680, as well as synchronizing (“syncing”) a VS-1824
and a VS-880 or a VSR-880. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to begin
each operation from the Playlist display.
Off:
MIDI messages related to mixer settings are not
transmitted or received.
C.C.:
The mixer is controlled using Control Change messages.
Excl:
The following items will be used from the MIDI page of the
system section:
Device ID
This sets the Device ID number (1-32) used when exchanging
System Exclusive messages (mixer parameters) with an
external MIDI device. These messages can be transmitted
and received between devices that have the same Device ID
number.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
OUT:
The connector transmits MIDI messages such as
metronome note messages or MTC from the VS-1824.
THRU:
The connector transmits MIDI messages as received at
the MIDI IN connector without any changes.
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
System Exclusive messages are received when this is set to
“On.” System Exclusive messages can be received when the
VS-1824 is in the Play mode.
SysEx.Tx (System Exclusive Transmit Switch)
System Exclusive messages are transmitted when this is set
to “On.”
Cntrl Local (Control Local Switch)
When this is set to “Off,” volume levels of mixer channels
cannot be changed using the physical faders on the mixer.
The physical mixer faders are disabled. Normally, this
setting is turned on.
The mixer is controlled using System Exclusive
messages.
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, mixer adjustments made
on the master VS-1824 will result in the same mixer settings
occurring on the slave VS-1824. For more detailed information
about System Exclusive messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 82)
The following items will be used from the External Sync page
of the system section:
Sync Source
This determines how the VS-1824 is synchronized with other
devices.
INT:
The VS-1824 runs according to its own internal clock.
Use this setting when you are not synchronizing with
other devices or when you want external MIDI devices
to be controlled by sync signals from the VS-1824.
EXT:
The VS-1824 is controlled by synchronization signals
(MTC) from the external MIDI device. With this setting,
the VS-1824 will not go into Play or Record unless it is
receiving MTC signals. Use this setting when you want
to use the MTC from an external MIDI device to control
the VS-1824.
Sync Gen. (Generator)
This setting determines what type of MIDI signal is
generated at the MIDI OUT connector on the VS-1824.
MMC (MIDI Machine Control Mode)
Off:
No MIDI signals are transmitted.
This setting determines how the VS-1824 implements MMC.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIclk: The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
MMC is neither transmitted or received.
SyncTr: The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
MASTER:
Sync Error Level
MMC is transmitted. The VS-1824 functions as the
master device for controlling the machine controls
(transport controls) of external MIDI equipment.
This sets the interval (0-10) for checking MTC receiving
status when synchronizing to MTC from an external
MIDI device. If MTC is not being sent continuously, the
VS-1824 checks the MTC and if there is an error,
temporarily cancels synchronization. Selecting a longer
interval under such circumstances will allow
synchronization to continue, even if errors are present.
Normally, this is set to “5.”
SLAVE:
MMC is received. The VS-1824 functions as a slave
device to the machine controls (transport controls) of
external MIDI equipment.
Control Type (Mixer Control Types)
This selects the type of MIDI messages used when
transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device,
or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device
are used to control the mixer. For now, leave this “Off.”
Sync MTC Type (MTC Type)
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24). Set
this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS-1824.
261
Chapter 22
Off:
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Syncing Two VS-1824s or a
VS-1824 and a VS-1680
with MTC and MMC
SysEx.Tx (System Exclusive Transmit Switch)
The VS-1824 has the ability to generate and slave to MIDI
Time Code (MTC). It also has the ability to varispeed its
sample rate to account for fluctuations in the source clock
signal. This provides a sync that is frame-accurate and allows
you to do things such as lock to video and locate on the fly.
The following example explains how to synchronize two
VS-1824s using MTC and MMC. One VS-1824 or VS-1680 acts
as the MMC/MTC master, and the other acts as the MMC/
MTC slave. Make connections as described below:
Control Type (Mixer Control Types)
For this application, set this to “On.”
MMC (Midi Machine Control Mode)
For this application, set this to “MASTER.”
For this application, set this to “Off.”
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, mixer adjustments made
on the master VS will result in the same mixer settings
occurring on the slave VS. For more detailed information
about System Exclusive messages, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 82)
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
MMC (See Appendices p. 12)
fig.13-01
settings as described below.
Sync Source
For this application, set this to “INT.”
INPUT 7, 8
MIDI OUT
MASTER L, R
MIDI IN
Sync Gen. (Generator)
For this application, set this to “MTC.”
Sync MTC Type (MTC Type)
For this application, set this to “30.”
MASTER
SLAVE
* In this example, you can use the master’s Stereo In function
for the mix balance between the master and slave VS recorders
(p. 196) First adjust the individual track balances on both
machines. Of course, you can also send the output of both
recorders to an external mixer.
Settings for the Master VS
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
Menu appears in the display.
If the System Menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear above [F4],
press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears, then press [F4
(MIDI)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings
for each parameter as described below.
Device ID
This should be set to “17.”
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch) = OUT
For this application, set this to “OUT.”
262
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Settings for the Slave VS
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System Menu appears in the display. If the System
Menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)].
If “MIDI” does not appear above [F4], press [PAGE]
until “MIDI” appears, then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings
for each parameter as described below.
Device ID
This should be set to “17.”
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
For this application, set this to “On.”
MMC (Midi Machine Control Mode)
For this application, set this to “SLAVE.”
Control Type (Mixer Control Types)
For this application, leave this “Off.”
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC] button, located
above the TIME/VALUE dial.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
settings as described below.
Sync Error Level
Normally, this is set to “5.”
Sync MTC Type (MTC Type)
For this application, set this to “30.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
7. Press [EXT SYNC]. The button indicator blinks,
indicating the VS is ready to receive MTC. In this state,
the slave VS operates in sync with the master VS. The
EXT SYNC indicator is lit when the slave VS is waiting
for MTC.
Syncing a VS-1824 and
VS-880/880EX or VSR-880
This section explains how to synchronize a VS-1824 and a
VS-880/880EX or VSR-880. The VS-1824 functions as the
MMC/MTC master, and the VS-880/880EX or VSR-880
functions as the MMC/MTC slave. The first example
explains the procedure for synchronizing a VS-1824 with a
VS-880/880EX using MIDI Time Code—the same steps apply
when you’re synchronizing a VS-1824 and VSR-880. Make
connections as described below.
Syncing the VS-880 to the
VS-1824 Using MTC and MMC
Both the VS-1824 and the VS-880/880EX have the ability to
generate and slave to MIDI Time Code (MTC). They also
have the ability to varispeed their sample rate to account for
fluctuations in the source signal. This provides a sync that is
frame-accurate and allows you to do things such as lock to
video and locate on the fly. MMC allows you to control the
transport of the slave VS from the master. The following
example explains how to synchronize the VS-880/880EX as a
slave device to the VS-1824 using MTC and MMC.
Setup
The only items needed to synchronize the VS-1824 and VS880/880EX are a MIDI cable and a pair of audio cables. Use
the following procedure to setup a VS-1824 and
VS-880/880EX to operate in sync with the VS-1824 as the
master device:
1. Connect the MIDI OUT jack of the VS-1824 to the MIDI
IN jack of the VS-880/880EX.
2. Connect the left MASTER OUT jack of the VS-880/880EX
to INPUT 3 on the VS-1824.
3. Connect the right MASTER OUT jack of the VS-880/
880EX to INPUT 4 on the VS-1824.
Chapter 22
You can also use this method to transfer digital audio
between two VS recorders. Connect the DIGITAL OUT of the
master VS to the DIGITAL IN of the slave VS—since the
MTC generated by the master VS provides synchronization
to both VS recorders, its digital output must also supply
digital clock to the slave VS.
263
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
VS-1824 Settings
VS-880/880EX Settings
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
1. Press [SYSTEM] until “SYS MIDI PRM?” is displayed
and press [YES/ENTER].
The System Menu appears in the display.
If the System Menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)].
If “MIDI” does not appear above [F4], press [PAGE]
until “MIDI” appears, then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings
for each parameter as described below.
Device ID
For this application, set this to “17.”
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
For this application, set this to “OUT.”
2. Press the PARAMETER RIGHT button until “SYS EX
RX” is displayed and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
“ON.”
3. Press the PARAMETER RIGHT button until “MMC =” is
displayed and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
“SLAVE.”
4. Press the PARAMETER RIGHT button until “OUT/
THRU =” is displayed and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select “OUT.”
5. Press [SYSTEM] until “SYS SYNC/TEMPO” is displayed
and press [YES/ENTER].
SysEx.Tx (System Exclusive Transmit Switch)
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “EXT.”
For this application, set this to “On.”
For this application, set this to “MASTER.”
7. Press the PARAMETER RIGHT button so that “MTC
TYPE” is displayed and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select “30.”
Control Type (Mixer Control Types)
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the main screen.
MMC (Midi Machine Control Mode)
For this application, set this to “Off.”
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
settings as described below.
Sync Source
For this application, set this to “INT.”
Sync Gen. (Generator)
For this application, set this to “MTC.”
Sync MTC Type (MTC Type)
For this application, set this to “30.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
264
When you press PLAY on the VS-1824, both units will start
playing. The VS-1824’s stereo mix output will now contain
audio from both units.
You can also use this method to transfer digital audio
between the two VS recorders. Connect the DIGITAL OUT of
the master VS to the DIGITAL IN of the slave VS—since the
MTC generated by the master VS provides synchronization
to both VS recorders, its digital output must also supply
digital clock to the slave VS.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Using an External MIDI
Device to Control the Mixer
(Compu Mix)
The VS-1824 can send and receive mixer settings and fader
movements as MIDI messages. You can use an external MIDI
controller to control the VS-1824’s faders. You can also use an
external MIDI sequencer to record mixer settings and
movements during playback as MIDI song data, and the
mixer can be controlled automatically by the MIDI sequencer
when the song is played back later. This is referred to as
Compu Mix. Compu Mix uses Control Change messages or
System Exclusive messages.
When using System Exclusive Messages
When working in Compu Mix, you should normally use
Control Change messages. However, if the Control
Change messages affect the settings of other MIDI
devices in your setup, you can use System Exclusive
messages. For more detailed information about Control
Change messages and System Exclusive messages, refer
to “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p.82).
Controller numbers correspond to the track channel
parameters as follows for Tracks 1-16.
Controller Number
3
7
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Mixer Parameter
TRACK STATUS
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Pan
EQ L Freq.
EQ L Gain
EQ M Freq.
EQ M Gain
EQ M Q
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Pan/Balance
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Pan/Balance
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Level
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Pan/Balance
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Level
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Pan/Balance
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Level
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Pan/Balance
MIX Offset Level
MIX Offset Balance
* When you are installing two effect expansion boards.
Correspondence Between MIDI
Channels and Controller Numbers
MIDI channels correspond to the mixer channels as shown
below. For channels paired using the Channel Link function,
Control Change messages can be exchanged using the oddnumbered channel’s MIDI channel. Control Change
messages transmitted via the even-numbered channel’s MIDI
channel are ignored.
Input
Mixer
Track
Mixer
Master
Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIGITAL L
DIGITAL R
ST IN
FX1
FX2
FX3
FX4
-
1/17
2/18
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Master Block
Controller Number
35
39
42
44
45
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Mixer Parameter
TRACK STATUS
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Pan
EQ L Freq.
EQ L Gain
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Pan/Balance
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Pan/Balance
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Level
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Pan/Balance
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Level
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Pan/Balance
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Level
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Pan/Balance
MIX Offset Level
MIX Offset Balance
* When you are installing two effect expansion boards.
265
Chapter 22
MIDI
Channel
Controller numbers correspond to the track channel
parameters as follows for Tracks 17 and 18.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Controller numbers correspond to the input channel
parameters as follows.
Controller Number
68
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Mixer Parameter
MIX Send Level
MIX Send Pan
EQ L Freq.
EQ L Gain
EQ M Freq.
EQ M Gain
EQ M Q
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Pan/Balance
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Pan/Balance
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Level
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Pan/Balance
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Level
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Pan/Balance
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Level
AUX3 (* AUX) SND Pan/Balance
MIX Offset Level
MIX Offset Balance
Preparations for Compu Mix
1. Make connections as shown below.
fig.13-07
MIDI OUT
* When you are installing two effect expansion boards.
Controller numbers correspond to the Master Block
parameters as follows.
Controller Number
68
70
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
102
103
Mixer Parameter
Master Level
Master Balance
FX1 SND Level
FX1 SND Balance
FX2 SND Level
FX2 SND Balance
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Level
AUX1 (* FX3) SND Balance
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Level
AUX2 (* FX4) SND Balance
AUX3 (* AUX) Level
AUX3 (* AUX) Balance
Monitor Level
Monitor Balance
* When you are installing two effect expansion boards.
266
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
Menu appears in the display.
If the System Menu does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear above [F4],
press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears, then press [F4
(MIDI)].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings
for each parameter as described below.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
For this application, set this to “OUT.”
Cntrl Local (Control Local Switch)
For this application, set this to “On.”
Control Type (Mixer Control Types)
For this application, set this to “C.C.”
5. Follow the procedure described in “Synchronizing with
MIDI Sequencers” (“Synchronizing with MIDI
Sequencers,” p. 197) to make the necessary settings in
both the VS-1824 and the MIDI sequencer to synchronize
the two machines. Make sure to set the MIDI sequencer
so MIDI messages received at the MIDI In connector are
not output from the MIDI Out connector.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Recording with Compu Mix
1. Prepare the VS-1824’s initial mixer settings (e.g. panning,
faders, EQ, etc.) during song playback. Then press
[STOP] and rewind to the beginning of the song.
2. Put the MIDI sequencer into Record mode, and press
[PLAY] on the VS-1824.
3. As soon as playback of the VS-1824 starts, immediately
hold [SHIFT] and press [SCENE]. The mixer’s initial
settings are transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector.
4. As the song continues to play, make adjustments to the
faders and other mixer settings as desired.
5. When the song is finished playing, stop the MIDI
sequencer and the VS-1824.
This completes recording with Compu Mix. When you
rewind to the beginning of the MIDI sequence and the
VS-1824 song and then begin playback, all mixer settings are
controlled according to the Compu Mix. Save the MIDI song
file to a floppy disk or other storage media.
Synchronizing with Video
Equipment
When used in combination with the optional Roland SI-80S
LANC to MTC Converter, you can control the Play and Stop
functions of the VS-1824 using consumer video equipment.
This video equipment must provide a consumer video
interface that conforms to RCTC time code. On many video
products, this interface is labeled “LANC.” Make your
connections as shown below, and refer to the SI-80S owner’s
manual and the owner’s manual for your video device.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
Menu icon appears in the display. If the System Menu
icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in the
display above [F4], press [PAGE] until “MIDI” appears,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
setting.
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
For this application, set this to “On.”
MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
For this application, set this to “SLAVE.”
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC]. The Sync/Tempo
screen appears in the display.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor and use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
settings.
Sync Error Level
Normally, this is set to “5.” If you are having difficulties,
setting a longer interval allows synchronization to
continue even if there are errors in the source MTC.
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC frame rate (30, 29N, 29D, 25,24).
Select the MTC rate so it matches the rate of the SI-80S
(30, 29D or 29N).
7. Press [EXT SYNC]. The button indicator lights,
indicating the VS-1824 is synchronized using MTC
received from the SI-80S. In this state, commands such as
Play and Stop performed on the video equipment are
also performed on the VS-1824.
267
Chapter 22
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Chapter 22 Specific Applications
Using External Effects Units
11. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Adjust the
volume level (0-127) and pan (L63-R63) as needed.
When using external effects devices, the AUX A/B jacks
serve as effects send jacks. The following example describes
how effects can be added to a stereo recording on Track 9/10.
Follow these steps when you want to use an external effects
unit. Use the INPUT 7 and 8 jacks as the effect return jacks.
12. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
You are now ready to use the external effect unit.
1. Connect your effects unit as shown here:
fig.13-06
INPUT
OUTPUT
2. Press Track 9/10 SELECT. The Track Mixer appears in
the display.
3. Press [F5 (AUX)]. If “AUX” does not appear in the
display above [F5], press [PAGE] until you see “AUX,”
and then press [F5 (AUX)].
* If EFFECT B is not installed in the VS-1824, then [F4]
displays “AUX3.”
4. Move the cursor to “AUX Sw.” Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “Pst.”
5. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Adjust the
volume level (0-127) and pan (L63-R63) as needed.
6. Press [MASTER]. The Master Block appears in the
display.
7. Press [F3 (AUX.A)]. If “AUX.A” does not appear in the
display above [F3], press [PAGE] until you see “AUX.A,”
and then press [F3 (AUX.A)].
8. Move the cursor to “AUX.A.” Use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “AUX.”
9. Press [ST IN].
10. Use the TIME/VALUE to select “Input 7/8” for StereoIn
Select.
268
13. While playing back the song, adjust the sound of the
effect. To control the external effect return level using the
channel fader on the VS-1824, press [FADER/MUTE] so
“IN” is lit. Then use the “ST IN” fader (same as Track
Fader 11/12) to adjust external effect return level. When
you are satisfied with the level, press [FADER/MUTE]
so “TR” is lit.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
This chapter will answer some of the most frequently asked
questions by VS-1824 owners regarding its operation.
How Do I Control the Stereo
Tracks Independently?
When a new song is created with “VS-1880” selected as the
fader mode (p. 75), Channels 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14, 15/16,
and 17/18 are set with Channel Link ON and act as stereo
pairs.
Tracks 7-18 on the VS-1824 are configured as stereo tracks
but they can be controlled independently. To do this, the
Channel Link function must be turned off. Tracks 7, 9, 11, 13,
15 and 17 can then be controlled from the front panel just as
Tracks 1-6 are. Tracks 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18 can be
controlled by holding [SHIFT] and adjusting the desired
front panel control. For example, holding [SHIFT] and
moving the 7/8 fader will adjust the level for Track 8, but not
Track 7. The following procedure will guide you through the
process of recording a mono signal to Track 16.
1. Press Track 15/16 SELECT so “Track Mixer [TR=15/16]”
appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select “Link”
and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “OFF.”
3. Hold [SHIFT] and Track 15/16 STATUS and press the
Input SELECT button for the input you wish to record
(so that it begins to flash).
4. Hold [SHIFT] and press the Track 15/16 STATUS so it is
flashing red.
Why Do I Hear the Inputs All of
the Time?
The setting of the “MIX On/Off” switch determines whether
or not a track or input is sent to the MIX bus. This parameter
should be checked when you are hearing a track or input that
you don’t want to hear, or when you are having trouble
hearing a track or input that you should be hearing. The
default setting for this switch is “On,” even for the inputs.
This is why it is possible to hear your inputs when you first
plug in a microphone. If you are going to record an input
such as a microphone, the normal procedure would be to
route the input to the track you are going to record it on, and
then turn the MIX switch to OFF for the input. You will then
be monitoring your microphone from the track and not also
hearing it in the mix bus straight from the input channel
itself.
Use the following procedure to set the MIX On/Off switch:
1. Press the desired Input or Track SELECT button.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
parameter beneath “MIX” (in the upper right corner of
the display).
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “On” or “Off” as
desired. For example, if you are trying to prevent an
input from being heard at the MASTER outputs, you
would set this switch to “Off.”
4. Repeat Steps 1-3 for any additional tracks or inputs as
desired.
5. Use the appropriate INPUT SENS knob to set the
recording level as desired.
6. Press [REC] followed by [PLAY] to begin recording.
7. Press [STOP] when you are finished.
8. Press [PLAY] to hear the results. Hold [SHIFT] and use
the Channel 15/16 fader to adjust the playback volume
of Track 16 as desired.
Each time you press the Track 15/16 SELECT button when
Channel Linking is turned “off,” the display will alternate
between the Track Mixer for Tracks 15 and 16.
Chapter 23
269
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
What is the FADER/MUTE Button
Used For?
The position of the [FADER/MUTE] determines whether the
faders control track levels or input and effect return levels.
When “VS-1824” is selected as the fader
mode (p. 75)
When “TR” is lit:
You can adjust the volumes and change the status of Track
Channels 1–12.
When “TR” is blinking:
You can adjust the volumes and change the status of Track
Channels 13–18.
When “IN” is lit:
The faders are used to control the Input Mixer (8 analog
inputs, 2 digital inputs), the Stereo Input, plus the Effects 1/3
Return and Effects 2/4 Return.
Faders 16 and 18 will control the Effect 3 and 4 Returns
respectively. They are accessed by holding [SHIFT] while
adjusting the fader.
When “VS-1880” is selected as the fader
mode (p. 75)
When “TR” is lit:
You can adjust the volumes and change the status of Track
Channels 1–18.
When “IN” is lit:
The faders are used to control the Input Mixer (8 analog
inputs, 2 digital inputs), the Stereo Input, plus the Effects 1/3
Return and Effects 2/4 Return.
Faders 16 and 18 will control the Effect 3 and 4 Returns
respectively. They are accessed by holding [SHIFT] while
adjusting the fader.
How Do I Burn Audio CDs?
The VS-1824 allows you to take a project from its beginning
stages all the way to a finished CD. What steps need to be
taken to produce a finished CD? A general description of the
recording process might be as follows:
• Recording basic tracks
• Editing your tracks
• Mixing your tracks
• Mastering your tracks to a final stereo mix
• Preparing your stereo mix for CD
This section covers some of the common questions that arise
during the CD-preparation phase of the recording process. If
you haven’t already, you will need to mix your songs down
to a two-track stereo format. You can do this by recording to
an external device such as a DAT machine or cassette deck or
by “bouncing” your tracks down to a stereo pair within the
VS-1824 itself.
How Do I Choose Which Tracks are
Burned to the CD?
CDs use a stereo format. This means that you will always use
two tracks (left and right) to be burned onto the CD-R.
* We recommend using stereo Track 17/18 for this purpose.
Use the following procedure to designate a left and right
track for creating a CD:
1. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING]. The CD-RW/Mastering
Menu will be displayed. If it is not, press F6 [EXIT].
2. Press [F2 (CD Wt)] to display the “CD Write Ready?”
prompt.
3. Press [ENTER/YES] and “Store Current?” will be
displayed. If you have made any changes to your song
that have not been saved, press [ENTER/YES];
otherwise, press [EXIT/NO].
4. Press [F1 (SelTr)] to display the “Select Track” screen.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the track (and VTrack) that will become the left side of the CD and press
[F3 (Sel L)]. For example, if your stereo mix is recorded to
Tracks 17 and 18, you will highlight “17-1: V.T 17-1” and
press [F3 (Sel L)] to designate Track 17 (V-Track 1) as the
left track of the CD.
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the track (and VTrack) that will become the right side of the CD and
press [F4 (Sel R)].
7. Press [F1 (Back)] and the tracks you selected will be
displayed under “L-Ch Source Track” and “R-Ch Source
Track.” You can now continue with the CD Write
procedure on p. 188 of this manual.
270
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Set CD Markers?
When writing multiple songs to the CD at once, it is
important that CD number markers are created at the
beginning of each song. Otherwise, your audio will be
combined into one long song on the CD. The VS-1824
automatically creates the first CD marker at 00h00m00s00f.
You will need to create CD markers for any additional songs.
Use the following procedure to create CD markers:
1. Locate the VS-1824 to the point where the audio for your
second song begins.
2. Hold [PLAY (DISPLAY)] and press [TAP].
3. Locate the VS-1824 to the beginning of the third song.
4. Hold [PLAY (DISPLAY)] and press [TAP].
5. Continue this procedure for any additional songs.
* Note: CD standards require a song to be at least four seconds
in length. If you try to set a CD marker within four seconds of
another CD marker, the VS-1824 will respond with a “Can’t
Set Marker” message.
The Scrub and Preview functions can be very helpful in
locating the exact beginning of your songs. Use the
PREVIEW TO command to make sure that the current time is
right before the audio begins. Also, some CD players will cut
off the beginning of your song if it is too close to the CD
marker. If you set your CD markers around 0.5 second (15
frames) before your song actually begins, it should index
correctly on most CD players.
Why Does My Music Sound Different
on the CD?
If a song on a CD you make sounds drastically different than
it does when played on the VS-1824, remember that mixer
settings such as fader level, effects, and EQ do not translate
to the CD. Use the following procedure to listen to your song
as it will be recorded to the CD:
1. Solo the tracks that you have selected as the left and right
CD tracks.
2. Press [FADER/MUTE] so “TR” is lit and set the faders
for the selected tracks to 0dB (at the bold line
approximately two-thirds of the way up).
3. Press the Track SELECT button for the track selected as
the “L-Ch Source Track” so that the Track Mixer screen
appears in the display.
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
Link parameter and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
“On.”
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
Pan parameter (under the pan knob icon) and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “0.”
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
EQ Sw parameter and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select “Off.”
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
FX 1 parameter and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
“Off.” Do the same for FX 2, 3, and 4.
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
FX Ins parameter and press [ENTER/YES]. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “Off” for FX 1. Do the same
for FX 2, 3, and 4.
9. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
ATT parameter and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
“0dB.”
10. Press [AUTOMIX] so it is not lit.
11. Press the Track STATUS button for the track selected as
the “L-Ch Source Track” until it is in Play mode (green)
and set its fader to 0dB. Bring the remaining channel
faders all the way down.
271
Chapter 23
12. Set the Master fader to 0dB. Reset your song to the
beginning and press [PLAY] to hear your song as it will
sound on the CD.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Create a Tempo Map?
How Do I Use Automix?
The VS-1824 allows you to create a tempo map that controls
tempo and meter changes throughout your song. This is very
useful when you are integrating the VS-1824 with a MIDI
sequencer. Use the following procedure to create a tempo
map:
The Automix function of the VS-1824 allows you to perfect
your final mix before you commit to a master DAT tape or
CD. Instead of manually “riding” the faders while you are
recording to your master tape, Automix allows you to record
mixer changes such as level, pan, effects type, etc. You can
even automate the mixer settings for the inputs. This is
helpful when you have synchronized a keyboard or drum
machine and you want to mix it in with the audio tracks
without actually recording it. There are three main types of
Automix available on the VS-1824: realtime, Snapshot, and
gradation.
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The “System
Menu” page should be displayed. If it is not, press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F6 (SYNC)]. If “SYNC” does not appear above
[F6], press [PAGE] followed by [F6]. The “Sync/Tempo”
page will be displayed.
3. Press [F3 (Tmap)] to display the “Tempo Map” screen.
4. Use [
] to move the cursor to the current tempo
setting (e.g. q = 120) and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the desired starting tempo for your song.
Realtime
Realtime Automix allows you to record fader
movements as you make them. This is great for
perfecting your track mixes before you record them
down to two tracks. Use the following procedure to
create a realtime Automix:
1. Press [AUTOMIX] so it is lit.
Tempo Map #1 must always start at Measure One.
5. Use [
] to move the cursor to the beat setting (e.g. 4/
4) and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired
time signature.
6. Press [F2 (NEW)].
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
tempo setting and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
new tempo.
8. Use [
] to move the cursor to the measure setting
and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the measure
where you want the new tempo to begin.
9. Use [
] to move the cursor to the beat setting (e.g. 4/
4) and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired
time signature.
10. Repeat Steps 6-9 for any additional tempo and/or time
signature changes as desired.
Why Doesn’t it Change the Audio?
The tempo map can alter the tempo and meter of MIDI
sequences. It cannot, however, do the same for audio
recorded on the VS-1824. For this reason, it is best to
create your tempo map before you begin recording any
acoustic instruments whenever possible and to record
while listening to the metronome. It is only possible to
alter the playback speed of recorded audio by using the
Vari Pitch and/or Time Compression/Expansion
functions.
272
2. Hold [AUTOMIX] and press the Input and/or Track
SELECT buttons— so that they are flashing—for any
inputs or tracks that you want to automate.
3. Reset your song to the beginning and adjust the faders as
desired for the start of the song.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [REC] to enable realtime
Automix mode.
5. Press [PLAY] and adjust the faders as desired.
6. Press [STOP] when you are finished. Reset your song to
the beginning and press [PLAY] to hear the results.
Snapshot
Snapshot automation allows you to recall settings such
as fader levels, effect send levels, effect types, and
panning at a specific point in time. This is useful, for
instance, when you want to change effects during your
song. Use the following procedure to create a Snapshot:
1. Press [AUTOMIX] so it is lit.
2. Hold [AUTOMIX] and press the Input and/or Track
SELECT buttons— so that they are flashing—for any
inputs or tracks that you want to automate.
3. Reset your song to the beginning and adjust the settings
as desired for the beginning of your song.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP] to create a Snapshot of
your initial settings.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
5. Advance the VS-1824 to the point in time where you
want these settings to change and adjust them as desired.
Then, hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
6. Repeat Step 4 to create additional Snapshots as desired.
7. Reset your song to the beginning and press [PLAY] to
hear the results.
Gradation
Gradation allows you to designate two Snapshots and
have the VS-1824 automatically crossfade the faders and
panning between those two points to create a smooth
transition. This a very handy tool for creating fades. Use
the following procedure to create a fadeout using
gradation:
1. Press [AUTOMIX] so it is lit.
2. Hold [AUTOMIX] and press the Input and/or Track
SELECT buttons— so that they are flashing—for any
inputs or tracks that you want to automate.
3. Advance your song to the point in time where you want
the fadeout to begin and adjust the fader levels
(including the Master fader) as desired.
How Do I Create a User Template
in EZ Routing?
The the ability to save your own user EZ Routing templates
can be a huge timesaver. It can simplify the setup process for
frequently used recording or mixing configurations. These
user-programmable templates allow you to set up the
VS-1824 exactly the way you need, step-by-step, for a
particular task. Then, when you need to perform that same
task in the future, you simply select that user template and
your custom setup will be recalled automatically. The
following example will show you how to create a user EZ
Routing template for recording Inputs 1-8 to Tracks 1-8 with
a compressor effect inserted on each input.
1. Press [EZ ROUTING] so it is lit.
2. Press [PAGE] so that “INPUT” appears in the display
above [F2].
3. Press [F2 (INPUT)] to display the Input Mixer settings.
4. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set the Send for Inputs 1-8 to Tracks 1-8.
For example, the Send for Input 1 would appear as
“1/-.”
5. Advance your song to the point in time where the
fadeout should end, and pull the Master fader all the
way down.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set FX 1 to “INL” for Input 1 and “INR”
for Input 2.
6. Hold [SCENE] and press [TAP].
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set FX 2 to “INL” for Input 3 and “INR”
for Input 4.
7. Hold [SCENE] and press PREVIOUS. “Gradation Marker
#000-#001?” appears in the display.
8. Press [ENTER/YES] and the VS-1824 will create a
fadeout between those marker points.
9. Reset your song to a point before the first marker and
press [PLAY] to hear the fadeout.
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set FX 3 to “INL” for Input 5 and “INR”
for Input 6.
8. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set FX 4 to “INL” for Input 7 and “INR”
for Input 8.
9. Press [F3 (TRACK)] to display the Track Routing screen.
10. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set Send for Tracks 1-8 to “MIX.”
11. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set Status for Tracks 1-8 to “REC.”
13. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “P096 Dual Comp/Lim” for Effects
1-4.
273
Chapter 23
12. Press [F4 (FX)] to display the Effect Settings screen.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
14. Press [F6 (Save)] and the Routing Save screen will appear
in the display.
15. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to enter a name for this user EZ Routing
template (e.g. “8 Ins w/comp”).
16. Press [F5 (Write)] and your template will be saved.
17. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
Use the following procedure to recall your user template:
How Do I Bounce Tracks?
Bouncing tracks is a common recording technique used to
free up additional recording tracks, or as you prepare a song
for CD production by combining (“or bouncing”) audio
recorded on multiple tracks to a single track or stereo pair of
tracks. New material can then be recorded to the original
tracks if necessary. On the VS-1824, you can record new
tracks without recording over the original material by
recording on different V-Tracks. Also, because the bouncing
is performed digitally, so you are not adding noise each time
you bounce tracks. Use the following procedure to bounce
Tracks 1-16 to Tracks 17 and 18:
1. Press [EZ ROUTING] so it is lit.
2. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to highlight your user
template.
3. Press [PAGE] so that “EXEC” appears above F4.
4. Press [F4 (EXEC)] twice. “Apply this Routing?” will
appear in the display.
5. Press [ENTER/YES] to apply your user template.
If you want to switch the STATUS of tracks 13-18 and adjust
their mixer settings, press [FADER/MUTE] several times
until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press the SELECT button for track 17
or track 18.
2. Press [F1 (Link)].
If “Link” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] until
you see “Link” above [F1], and then press [F1 (Link)].
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ON.”
4. Press [FADER/MUTE] several times until the “TR”
indicator lights.
5. Hold the track STATUS button (of any track) and press
[CLEAR].
6. Hold the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button and press
the Track 1-16 SELECT buttons consecutively so that
they are flashing.
7. Press the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button until it is
set to Source mode (orange). Press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 1-16 until they are set to Play mode (green).
8. Press [PLAY] and adjust the level and pan settings for
Tracks 1-16 as desired. Press [STOP] when you are
finished.
9. Press the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button until it is
set to Record Ready mode (flashing red).
10. Reset your song to the beginning and press [REC]
followed by [PLAY].
11. Press [STOP] when your song is finished playing. Now,
Tracks 17 and 18 contain a stereo mix of Tracks 1-16.
12. Reset your song to the beginning, turn off Tracks 1-16,
and press [PLAY] to hear the results. Make sure that the
EQ switch and all effects sends for Tracks 17 and 18 are
turned off. This will ensure that the “bounced” version of
Tracks 1-16 sounds the same as the original.
274
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Bounce Tracks with Effects?
Why Can’t I Hear My Effects?
If you are using effects, it can be beneficial to include the
output of the effects processor when you bounce tracks. This
is sometimes referred to as “printing” the effects. By printing
the effects, you make them a permanent part of the audio.
This also frees up the effect processor to be used on a
different track, or to add a different effect on the same track.
Use the following procedure to bounce Tracks 1-16 to Tracks
17 and 18 with effects:
If you have routed a track or input to one of the internal
effects processors (using the optional VS8F-2) and are having
difficulty hearing the output of the effects processor, the
problem can usually be traced to one of three scenarios: your
effects are either inserted on another track or input, the
output of the effects processor is routed to a RECORDING
bus instead of the MIX bus, or your effect return level for the
effect is set to zero.
If you want to switch the STATUS of tracks 13-18 and adjust
their mixer settings, press [FADER/MUTE] several times
until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
1. Assign Tracks 1-16 to any of the available effects
processors (1-4) as desired.
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press the SELECT button for the track
17 or track 18.
3. Press [F1 (Link)].
If “Link” does not appear above [F1], press [PAGE] until
you see “Link” above [F1], and then press [F1 (Link)].
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ON.”
5. Press [FADER/MUTE] several times until the “TR”
indicator lights.
6. Hold the track STATUS button (of any track) and press
[CLEAR].
7. Hold the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button and press
the Track 1-16 SELECT buttons consecutively so they are
flashing.
8. Hold the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button and press
the EFF RTN button for all of the effects processors being
used. For example, to record Effect 1 to Tracks 17 and 18,
hold the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button and press
EFFECT 1/3 RTN.
* If you are using Effects 3 or 4, you will need to hold Track 17/
18 STATUS, [SHIFT], and [EFFECT 1/3 RTN] or [EFFECT
2/4 RTN] to assign Effects 3 and/or 4 to be recorded on Tracks
17 and 18.
9. Press the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button until it is
set to Source mode (orange). Press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 1-16 until they are set to Play mode (green).
10. Press [PLAY] and adjust the level and pan settings for
Tracks 1-16 as desired. Press [STOP] when you are finished.
12. Reset your song to the beginning and press [REC]
followed by [PLAY].
13. Press [STOP] when your song is finished playing. Now,
Tracks 17 and 18 will contain a stereo mix of Tracks 1-16
with the effects included.
1. Press the Input 1 SELECT button to display the Input
Mixer screen.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
FX Ins icon and press [F6 (PRM.V)].
] to highlight the
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and TIME/
VALUE dial to set the Sw parameter to “Off” for all
inputs.
4. Press the Track 1 SELECT button to display the Track
Mixer screen.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to set the Sw parameter to “Off” for all
tracks.
6. Press the [EDIT/SOLO] button to display the Master
Block screen.
7. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
FX Ins icon and press [ENTER/YES]. Use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select “Off” for Effects 1-4.
Routing the outputs of the effects processors to a
RECORDING bus is common when bouncing tracks. If you
do not return the outputs of the effects processors to the MIX
bus, the effects might not be heard the next time you try and
use them. Use the following procedure to ensure the outputs
of the effects processors are sent to the MIX bus:
If you want to select track 1–12 STATUS, press [FADER/
MUTE] several times until the “TR” indicator lights.
If you want to select track 13–18 STATUS, press [FADER/
MUTE] several times until the “TR” indicator blinks.
→ “Switching the Fader Functions” (p. 71)
275
Chapter 23
11. Press the track 17 or track 18 STATUS button until it is
set to Record Ready mode (flashing red).
If you have inserted an effect on a certain track or input, you
cannot use that effects processor on any other track or input.
Use the following procedure to ensure that Effects 1-4 are not
being used as insert effects:
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
1. Hold the Track 1 STATUS button. If the EFFECT 1/3
RTN or EFFECT 2/4 RTN buttons begin to flash, press
them so they stop flashing.
Another common reason for being unable to hear an effects
processor is that effect return for that effect is set to “0.” Use
the following procedure to check the effect return level:
The position of the cursor in the time display will control the
amount of time advanced with each turn of the TIME/
VALUE dial. You can set the dial to advance in hour, minute,
second, frame, or even subframe increments. You can also set
it to advance by measures, beats, or markers. Setting the
cursor under the frame portion of the time display will work
best for most editing applications. Use the following
procedure to adjust the position of the cursor in the time
display:
1. Press the [EDIT/SOLO] button to display the Master
screen.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] so that the main Play screen
appears in the display.
2. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the desired return level for FX 1-4
(100 is the default value).
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [
the display is selected.
2. Repeat this procedure for Tracks 2-18.
How Do I Use the Scrub and
Waveform Display Features?
The Scrub and Waveform Display functions of the VS-1824
are extremely useful when performing track edits such as
Cut, Copy, and Erase. The Waveform Display helps you find
exact edit points in your audio by providing a graphic
representation of a particular audio waveform. The Scrub
function allows you to hear that edit point by playing back a
loop (with a resolution as fine as 25ms) of your audio. You
can control the audio that is being looped by selecting the
track you want to hear and using the dial to move the audio
back and forth across the “Now Line” (the solid line that
runs across the middle of the Waveform display). To use the
Scrub and Waveform Display functions effectively, it is
important that you understand the control parameters used
in each function.
Setting the Scrub Length
] until the time portion of
3. Use [
] and [
] to place the cursor under the
desired increment for advancing the time display. For
example, if you want the VS-1824 to move one frame at a
time when the TIME/VALUE dial is turned, the time
display would be as follows: 00h00m00s00f00.
To advance the time display in subframe increments, set the
cursor under the frame portion of the time display and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial. The counter will move in increments
of 10 subframes. To advance the time display in single
subframe increments, hold [SHIFT] while you turn the
TIME/VALUE dial.
What do the X and Y Parameters do?
The VS-1824 allows you to zoom in and out on both the
amplitude (level) and time values of the Waveform display.
The default zoom values for amplitude and time are 1 and
16, respectively. Use the following procedure to adjust the
zoom controls on the Waveform display:
There are two factors that can affect the precision with which
you can scrub audio in the VS-1824: the Scrub Length and the
position of the cursor in the time display. Scrub Length
controls the size (in milliseconds) of the section of audio that
is looped, and can set as low as 25ms or as high as 100ms.
The default value is 45ms. Use the following procedure to
adjust the Scrub Length:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] so that the main Play screen
appears.
1. Press [STOP] if the VS-1824 is currently playing.
4. Use [F1 (ZOOM+)] and [F2 (ZOOM-)] to zoom in and out
on the amplitude (level) portion of the display (vertical).
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [SCRUB], and the “Scrub
Length” screen will appear in the display.
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the scrub length as
desired.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
276
2. Use [
] and [
] to select the track to be viewed in
the Waveform display and advance the song to a point
where there is audio present on that track.
3. Press [F5 (WAVE)] to view the Waveform display.
5. Use [F3 (←→)] and [F4 (→←)] to zoom in and out on the
time portion of the display (horizontal).
6. Press [F5 (WAVE)] when you are finished to close the
Waveform display.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Record a Stereo
Signal?
Recording a stereo signal is nearly identical to recording a
mono signal with the exception that you will need to use two
inputs and two tracks. The easiest way to record a stereo
signal is to link the source (inputs and/or tracks) and the
destination tracks. Use the following procedure to link
Tracks 3 and 4:
], [
], [
], and [
While you are recording with the VS-1824, it is important to
know exactly how much recording time is available to you
on the current hard drive, or, more accurately, the current
partition of that drive. The VS-1824 allows you to view this
information in one of the following forms:
Remaining Time:
1. Press the Track 3 SELECT button.
2. Use [
“Link.”
How Do I Know How Much Time
I Have Left On My Hard Drive,
and How Big Is My Song?
] to highlight
The amount of available time shown in minutes and
seconds.
Capacity MB:
3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “ON.”
The amount of available space shown in megabytes.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
You can now use the Track 3 fader to control the volume
of Tracks 3 and 4.
Capacity %:
The amount of free space shown as a percentage.
Capacity Event:
The number of events available.
How Do I Restore the Mixer
Parameters to the Factory Settings?
The VS-1824 gives you the ability to return all of your mixer
and system parameters back to their original factory settings.
This is convenient if you want to reset the mixer and system
settings to their original values without having to adjust each
parameter manually. This is also a good beginning for
troubleshooting when you are having difficulties that appear
to be mixer-related. Use the following procedure to initialize
the VS-1824 mixer and system parameters:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The “System
Menu” page should be displayed. If it is not, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [PAGE] so that INIT appears in the display above
[F1].
3. Press [F1] and “Init Mix/Sys Prm Sure?” will be
displayed.
4. Press [ENTER/YES] and “Initializing...Please Wait” will
be displayed.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the main Play
screen.
Use the following procedure to select the format for showing
the amount of available space on the current drive:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The System
Menu appears in the display. If the System Menu does
not appear, press [F6 (Exit)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)] followed by [F2 (Prm 2)].
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight
“Remain Display” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the desired format (time, megabytes, percentage,
or events).
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
5. Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] until the
name of the current song appears in the display. The
amount of space left on the drive will be indicated next to
“REMAIN” in the format selected in Step 3.
How Many Megabytes Does My Song Use?
In addition to viewing the remaining space on your hard
drive, it is also important to know how many megabytes
a song uses. Use the following procedure to view the size
of the current song in megabytes:
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
277
Chapter 23
2. Hold [SHIFT] and press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] until the
name of the current song appears in the display. The size
of the current song will be displayed in megabytes next
to “Size:” under the song name.
Chapter 23 Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Import VS-1680,
VS-880/880EX, VS-890/VSR-880
and VS-840/840EX Songs?
If you have songs created on a VS-1680, VS-880/880EX,
VS-890/VSR-880 or VS-840/840EX that you would like to
edit on the VS-1824, you will need to convert them to the
VS-1824’s format using the Song Import function. If your
VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-890/VSR-880 or VS-840/840EX
backup is not in a playable form (e.g. DAT, CD-R, or on a Zip
disk in archive format), you will need to recover that material
on to a VS-1824-formatted drive first.
* VS-1880's song data is identical to that of the VS-1824.
* VS-2480’s song data cannot be used on VS-1824.
9. When “Please Stop DAT” appears in the display, stop
your DAT machine and press [ENTER/YES] on the VS1824.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
In order to edit a VS-1680, VS-880/880EX, VS-840/840EX or
VS-890/VSR-880 song on the VS-1824, you must use the Song
Import function to convert it to a VS-1824 formatted song.
Use the following procedure to import a song into the VS1824:
1. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)]. The Song Menu
appears in the display. If Song Menu does not appear,
press [F6 (Exit)].
Use the following steps to recover a VS-1680, VS-1880 or VS880/880EX DAT:
2. Press [PAGE] until “IMPORT” appears in the display
above [F4].
1. Connect the digital output of your DAT machine to the
VS-1824’s digital input (DIGIN1 for coaxial or DIGIN 2
for optical).
3. Press [F4 (IMPORT)].
2. Load the DAT tape that contains the desired song and set
the tape to play back from the beginning of that song
backup.
3. Hold [SHIFT] and press [F6 (Utility)] to display the
Utility Menu.
4. Press [PAGE] so that “DATRc” appears above F1 (if
necessary). Press [F1 (DATRc)] to display the DAT
Recover screen.
5. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the appropriate “Digital In Source”
(DIGIN 1for coaxial or DIGIN 2 for optical).
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the song to be recovered under
“Source Song.”
Warning: If you have any songs on the VS-1824’s internal
drive that you do not want erased, make sure that “Off” is
selected under “Erase All Songs.”
7. Press [F4 (Exec)]. “Store Current?” appears in the
display. If you have any changes in the current song that
have not been saved, press [ENTER/YES]. Otherwise,
press [EXIT/NO].
8. When “Please Play DAT” appears in the display, start
playing your DAT machine.
278
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to highlight the
song you wish to convert and press [F4 (MARK)].
5. Repeat Step 3 for any additional songs that you wish to
convert.
6. Press [F4 (EXECUTE)]. A new copy of the selected
song(s) will be created in VS-1824 format.
Index
Numerics
1–8 (Scene) button ................................................... 21
1–8 button ................................................................... 18
2 Band EQ ................................................................... 81
24 fps ........................................................................... 197
25 fps ........................................................................... 197
29 fps (drop) ............................................................ 197
29 fps (non-drop) ................................................... 197
3 Band EQ ................................................................... 81
30 fps (non-drop) ................................................... 197
A
AC IN jack .................................................................. 22
Access Indicator ....................................................... 23
Alarm clock .............................................................. 260
Algorithms ............................................................... 103
Arrow buttons. ........................See CURSOR buttons
Attenuation .......................................................... 55, 82
Input Mixer ................................................................ 89
Track Mixer ................................................................ 94
Auto Punch ................................................................ 58
AUTO PUNCH button ......................................... 21
Automation. ............................................ See Automix
Automix ............................................................. 124–138
copying data ............................................................ 133
crossfade .................................................................. 130
decreasing data values ........................................... 136
displaying ................................................................ 125
editing
Micro Edit overview .......................................... 132
erasing
all .......................................................................... 138
from one area ...................................................... 132
from specific channels ....................................... 138
selected data ........................................................ 138
exiting ....................................................................... 138
fadeout ...................................................................... 130
Fader Match ............................................................. 249
general procedure ................................................... 125
how do I use it? ....................................................... 272
increasing data values ............................................ 136
realtime
described ............................................................. 125
effect returns ....................................................... 126
input faders ......................................................... 126
master mix ........................................................... 126
monitor output ................................................... 126
track faders .......................................................... 125
saving data ............................................................... 138
scaling data values .................................................. 136
Shift/Expand ........................................................... 136
Snapshots
contents ................................................................ 124
determining .................................................... 128
described .............................................................. 127
erasing .................................................................. 138
gradation ............................................................. 129
examples ......................................................... 130
overview .......................................................... 129
recalling ............................................................... 128
recording .............................................................. 127
Snap mode ........................................................... 128
transitions ............................................................ 129
transitions
smoothing ............................................................ 135
updating ................................................................... 131
selected faders ..................................................... 131
song section ......................................................... 131
AUTOMIX button ................................................... 19
AUX A & B jacks ................................................ 22, 73
routing signals to ...................................................... 95
AUX bus ...................................................................... 27
master level and balance .......................................... 98
routing to
Input Mixer ........................................................... 87
B
Backup
options ...................................................................... 232
DAT ...................................................................... 232
removable drive .................................................. 232
VS-CDR ................................................................ 232
Balanced inputs ........................................................ 23
BANK/9 button ....................................................... 21
Beat Clock. .........................See MIDI synchronization
Blank Disc ................................................................. 192
Bouncing tracks ........................................................ 64
with effects ................................................................. 65
Burning a CD. ...........................................See CD, 183
Busses
AUX bus ..................................................................... 27
EFFECT ....................................................................... 27
introduced .................................................................. 27
MIX ............................................................................. 27
RECORDING ............................................................. 27
Button sensitivity .................................................. 256
C
Cakewalk ................................................................... 210
Can’t Set Marker .................................................... 178
Capture ...................................................................... 192
Index
279
Index
CD
connecting a CD-R/CD-RW drive ....................... 194
creating an audio CD ............................................. 183
adding songs ....................................................... 190
all songs at once .................................................. 190
CD-RW ................................................................. 188
disk at once .......................................................... 185
necessary items ........................................... 184, 234
rules ...................................................................... 185
Table of Contents ............................................... 185
track at once ........................................................ 185
track markers ...................................................... 186
track numbers ..................................................... 186
why it sounds different ..................................... 271
writing one song ................................................. 188
creating and audio CD
choosing tracks ................................................... 270
playing ...................................................................... 191
recording from .......................................................... 67
Red Book standard ................................................. 183
CD Player .................................................................. 191
CD-RW
creating an audio CD ............................................. 188
Channel faders ......................................................... 19
Channel Link ....................................................... 55, 77
Input Mixer ................................................................ 89
Track Mixer ................................................................ 94
............................................. See also Linking channels
Channels
defined ........................................................................
equalization ...............................................................
grouping .....................................................................
Input Mixer ................................................................
linking ........................................................................
Input Mixer ...........................................................
Track Mixer ...........................................................
muting ........................................................................
selecting ......................................................................
soloing ........................................................................
Track Mixer ................................................................
CLEAR (Back Space) button ..............................
25
80
79
86
77
89
94
42
19
42
90
21
Clock
internal, setting ......................................................... 34
master
selection ................................................................. 66
MIDI .......................................................................... 201
Clock alarm .............................................................. 260
Compu Mix
external control of VS ............................................. 265
preparations ............................................................. 266
recording .................................................................. 267
Connecting
electric guitar ............................................................. 53
instruments ................................................................ 53
Contents of package .............................................. 16
280
CONTRAST knob ................................................... 21
Control Changes. ........................................ See MIDI
Controllers. .................................................... See MIDI
Cooling Fan Exhaust .............................................. 22
Copying
mixer settings ............................................................ 83
Copyright .......................................................... 181, 186
Cubase VST .............................................................. 211
Cursor ........................................................................... 36
CURSOR buttons ............................................... 21, 36
D
DAO ............................................................................. 185
DAT Backup ............................................ 232, 238–240
about the devices used ........................................... 238
before backing up ................................................... 238
checking tape contents ........................................... 242
necessary items ........................................................ 238
performing the backup .......................................... 239
tape required ........................................................... 240
time required ........................................................... 240
verifying data .......................................................... 243
DAT Recover ................................................... 241–242
checking tape contents ........................................... 242
restoring the data .................................................... 241
DC offset removal ................................................. 257
Delete Err Song? .................................................... 242
Digital
inputs
connecting ............................................................. 23
recording ................................................................ 66
selecting ................................................................. 66
outputs
connecting ............................................................. 23
routing signals to ............................................ 73, 96
DIGITAL button ...................................................... 18
DIGITAL IN & OUT jacks ................................... 23
Digital In Lock .......................................................... 66
Digital In Unlock ..................................................... 66
Digital Performer .................................................. 213
Direct current offset removal .......................... 257
Direct outputs ........................................................... 74
assigning tracks to .................................................... 98
Disc at Once ............................................................. 189
Disc Tray ..................................................................... 23
Disk at once ...................................................... 185–186
Disk drive. .......................................... See Hard drives
Disk Memory Full ................................................. 225
Disk space remaining ............................................ 52
Index
Display ......................................................................... 38
Automix ................................................................... 125
regions ........................................................................ 38
understanding ........................................................... 38
DP-2 ............................................................................. 251
DR20 → 87 ................................................................ 106
Drive Busy! ................................................................. 52
Drive Check ............................................................. 230
Drive Initialize ........................................................ 229
Drive Select .............................................................. 228
Drop frames described ....................................... 197
Drum reverb ............................................................ 108
E
EDIT/SOLO button ............................................... 19
Editing
Undo and Redo ......................................................... 62
Editing phrases. ........................... See Phrase editing
Editing tracks. ................................. See Track editing
Effect
return ........................................................................ 100
send ........................................................................... 100
EFFECT 1/3 RTN button ..................................... 18
EFFECT 2/4 RTN button ..................................... 18
EFFECT bus ............................................................... 27
master level and balance ......................................... 98
Effects
Equalization
Input Mixer ................................................................ 86
Track Mixer ................................................................ 90
using ........................................................................... 80
Error Drive Too Slow .......................................... 229
Events
and Automix data ..................................................... 26
and Song Optimize ................................................... 26
and Song Store ........................................................... 26
explained .................................................................... 26
EXIT/NO button ..................................................... 21
EXT SYNC button ................................................... 21
External effects ....................................................... 268
EZ Routing ................................................................. 84
templates
deleting ................................................................ 123
storing .................................................................. 121
bouncing setup ............................................... 117
mastering setup .............................................. 119
mixing setup ................................................... 116
recording setup .............................................. 114
EZ routing
templates
recalling ............................................................... 123
EZ ROUTING button ............................................ 19
F
F buttons ...................................................................... 36
Factory reset ............................................................... 37
Fade Length ............................................................. 259
Fadeout ...................................................................... 130
Fader Group .............................................................. 79
281
Index
algorithms ................................................................ 103
and MIDI Control Changes ................................... 208
bus levels and balance ............................................. 98
Effect mode ................................................................ 35
external ..................................................................... 268
important reminders .............................................. 112
insert
connecting ........................................... 103, 105, 107
described ............................................................... 99
examples .............................................................. 105
Input Mixer ........................................................... 88
Master Block ......................................................... 96
Track Mixer ........................................................... 92
location of controls ................................................... 99
loop
connecting ........................................................... 107
described ............................................................. 100
examples .............................................................. 108
Input Mixer ........................................................... 86
Track Mixer ........................................................... 91
overview .................................................................... 31
patches
creating ................................................................ 102
saving ................................................................... 102
in a Scene ........................................................ 103
selecting ............................................................... 101
printing ..................................................................... 109
procedure for using ................................................ 100
recording .................................................................. 109
in stereo ................................................................ 112
return
automating .......................................................... 126
controls ................................................................ 107
routing
Input Mixer ..................................................... 86–89
Master Block .................................................... 96–97
Track Mixer ..................................................... 91–94
two types
explained ......................................................... 31, 99
insert ................................................................. 31, 99
loop ................................................................. 31, 100
why can’t I hear them? ........................................... 275
Eject Button ................................................................ 23
Emergency eject hole ............................................. 23
END ............................................................................. 164
ENTER/YES button ......................................... 21, 37
EQ. ......................................................... See Equalization
Index
Fader Match ............................................................. 249
Fader Mode ................................................................ 75
FADER/MUTE button ........................... 19, 71, 270
Faders ........................................................................... 19
automating ....................................................... 125–126
independent control of stereo faders ................... 269
level control ............................................................... 71
Input Mixer ........................................................... 90
Track Mixer ........................................................... 95
switching between input and track ........................ 28
............................... See also Input Mixer, Track Mixer
Fan noise control ................................................... 256
FF button ............................................................... 21, 47
Finalize ....................................................................... 189
Finalizing .................................................................. 185
Finishing a CD. .................................... See Finalizing
FOOT SWITCH jack .............................................. 22
settings ..................................................................... 251
Formatting. ........................................ See Hard drives
FreeMIDI ................................................................... 213
FROM ......................................................................... 164
FS-5U ........................................................................... 251
Function (F) buttons .............................................. 36
FUNCTION button ................................................ 20
G
Global settings ................................................ 251–256
button sensitivity ....................................................
Fade Length .............................................................
Fan Control ..............................................................
input peak level .......................................................
Numerics Type ........................................................
Shift Lock .................................................................
256
259
256
255
252
251
global settings
PREVIOUS/NEXT switch ..................................... 255
GPI ................................................................................. 58
Gradation. ................................................. See Automix
Graphic display ........................................................ 20
Grouping channels ................................................. 79
GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack ......................................... 23, 53
Guitar amp simulator ......................................... 105
GuitarMulti1 .................................................... 105, 128
Hard drives
282
I
Icon display ................................................................ 49
ID
H
backing up
options .................................................................
DAT .................................................................
removable drive .............................................
VS-CDR ...........................................................
compatibility with
VS-1680 ................................................................ 245
VS-840/840EX ..................................................... 245
VS-880/880EX ..................................................... 245
VSR-880 ................................................................ 245
external
connecting
a fixed drive .................................................... 220
a removable drive .......................................... 221
purchasing ........................................................... 220
removable drives ................................................ 232
using ..................................................................... 220
initializing/formatting ................................... 222, 229
physical formatting ............................................ 229
maintenance ............................................................. 229
partitions .................................................................... 24
selecting ............................................................... 228
recording time ......................................................... 217
checking ............................................................... 217
recovering space ...................................................... 218
testing
drive check .......................................................... 230
surface scan ......................................................... 231
Hi-level signals. ............................... See Attenuation
How big is my song? ........................................... 277
How can I store my connections? .................. 273
How do I automate the VS-1824? .................. 272
How do I bounce tracks? ................................... 274
How do I bounce with effects? ....................... 275
How do I burn audio CDs? .............................. 270
How do I choose tracks to burn on a CD? ..... 270
How do I control stereo tracks separately? ... 269
How do I do a factory reset? ............................ 277
How do I import songs from other recorders? . 277
How do I make a tempo map? ........................ 272
How do I record in stereo? ............................... 277
How do I set CD markers? ............................... 271
How do I use Automix? ..................................... 272
How do I use scrubbing? ................................... 276
How do I use the waveform display? ......... 276
How much time is left? ...................................... 277
Hum removal .......................................................... 257
232
232
232
232
MIDI Device ID ....................................................... 261
MIDI Model ID ........................................................ 257
SCSI ........................................................................... 254
Image file
defined ...................................................................... 183
Importing tracks .................................................... 151
Index
IN MIDI jack .............................................................. 22
Initialize
LOCATOR/SCENE button ................................ 20
Locators
System/Mixer ........................................................... 37
banks, changing ........................................................ 43
described .................................................................... 43
editing ......................................................................... 43
recalling ...................................................................... 43
START, END, FROM and TO ............................... 165
storing ......................................................................... 43
using ........................................................................... 43
Locking to picture ................................................. 267
Logic Audio ............................................................. 212
Long Delay ............................................................... 108
LOOP button ............................................................. 21
Initializing
a hard drive ............................................................. 222
the VS-1824 ............................................................... 277
INPUT jacks ............................................................... 23
INPUT Knobs ............................................................ 18
Input Mixer
channel parameters .................................................. 86
default routing .......................................................... 76
diagram ...................................................................... 28
faders .......................................................................... 71
mode ........................................................................... 35
Input peak level ..................................................... 255
Inputs
adjusting level ........................................................... 90
setting meter peaking ............................................. 255
turning off unwanted signals ................................ 269
Insert effects
connecting ................................................ 103, 105, 107
described .............................................................. 31, 99
examples .................................................................. 105
important reminders .............................................. 112
Input Mixer ................................................................ 88
Master Block .............................................................. 96
Track Mixer ................................................................ 92
Internal fan control ............................................... 256
J
Jump .............................................................................. 47
L
Lack of EVENT!! .................................................... 126
Letters, typing ......................................................... 195
Levels
connecting ................................................................ 107
described ............................................................ 31, 100
examples ................................................................... 108
important reminders .............................................. 112
Input Mixer ................................................................ 86
Track Mixer ................................................................ 91
Loop recording ......................................................... 60
and punching ............................................................. 61
setup during playback ............................................. 60
using locators ............................................................. 60
using markers ............................................................ 60
Looping
using Track Copy .................................................... 171
Loud signals. ..................................... See Attenuation
Low-level signals. ........................... See Attenuation
LV2 ................................................................................. 51
M
Main features ............................................................ 16
Marker Stop ............................................................. 258
Markers
and synchronization ............................................... 204
CD track markers .................................................... 186
clearing ....................................................................... 46
described .................................................................... 45
displaying .................................................................. 45
editing ......................................................................... 46
moving between ........................................................ 45
numbering .................................................................. 45
stopping playback at .............................................. 258
storing ......................................................................... 45
using ........................................................................... 45
MAS ............................................................................... 51
Master (synchronization) .................................. 197
Master Block
diagram ...................................................................... 29
mode ........................................................................... 35
routing outputs ................................................... 72, 95
Master clock ............................................................... 66
283
Index
setting
for recording ......................................................... 54
in linked channels ................................................ 77
Undo and Redo ......................................................... 62
Limiter ........................................................................ 106
Linking channels ..................................................... 77
in a group ................................................................... 79
setting levels .............................................................. 77
setting panning ......................................................... 78
unlinking stereo channels ...................................... 269
List display ................................................................. 49
Listening to inputs ................................................ 258
LIV .................................................................................. 51
Live input. .......................................... See Stereo Input
Loading songs ........................................................... 49
Loop effects
Index
Master fader ............................................................... 19
MASTER OUT jacks ............................................... 22
level & balance adjustment ..................................... 95
Mastering Room .................................................... 177
creating mastering tracks ...................................... 177
Mastering Tool Kit ................................................ 181
Mastering tracks
defined ...................................................................... 177
playing back ............................................................ 180
recording .................................................................. 177
with effects .......................................................... 181
setting status
shortcut ................................................................ 179
Mastering. ................................... See Mastering Room
Meter. ..........................................................See Metering
Metering
Input Mixer ................................................................ 90
Peak Hold ................................................................ 250
setting peak level .................................................... 255
Track Mixer ................................................................ 94
Metronome ................................................................. 67
activating .................................................................... 67
settings ....................................................................... 68
tempo map ................................................................. 68
using an external MIDI source ................................ 68
Micro Edit. ................................................ See Automix
Microphone simulator ........................................ 106
MIDI
channels .................................................................... 265
channels vs. controller numbers ........................... 265
Compu Mix
external control ................................................... 265
preparations ........................................................ 266
recording ............................................................. 267
Control Changes
and effects ............................................................ 208
controllers ........................................................ 206, 265
and track status .................................................. 206
FreeMIDI .................................................................. 213
interface .................................................................... 209
troubleshooting tips ........................................... 209
machine control ............................................... 208–209
metronome ................................................................. 68
model ID .................................................................. 257
OMS .......................................................................... 214
Program Changes
and Scenes ........................................................... 207
sequencers ................................................................ 209
Cakewalk ............................................................. 210
Cubase VST ......................................................... 211
Digital Performer ............................................... 213
Logic Audio ........................................................ 212
Vision DSP ........................................................... 214
Song Position Pointer ..................................... 200, 209
284
synchronization ....................................................... 197
clock ...................................................................... 209
clocks .................................................................... 201
described .............................................................. 209
MTC .............................................................. 197, 209
sync track ..................................... 200–202, 204–206
tempo map .......................................... 202, 204–206
System Exclusive
receive switch ...................................................... 261
transmit switch ................................................... 261
when using .......................................................... 265
thru switch ............................................................... 261
MIDI Clock ............................................................... 209
MIDI connectors ...................................................... 22
MIDI Machine Control. ........................... See MMC
MIDI Model ID ....................................................... 257
MIDI Thru Switch ................................................. 261
MIDI Time Code. .........................................See MTC
MIDI/DISK indicator ............................................ 21
MIX bus ........................................................................ 27
routing inputs to ....................................................... 86
routing tracks to ........................................................ 90
Mix limiter ................................................................ 106
Mixdown
mastering .................................................................. 177
Mixer
automation ............................................................... 124
........................................................See also Automix
channel display ......................................................... 41
copying settings .................................................. 51, 83
initialization ............................................................... 37
Scenes .......................................................................... 84
section overview ................................................. 18, 27
understanding ........................................................... 70
Mixing
process overview ...................................................... 53
MMC ................................................................... 208–209
setting mode ............................................................ 261
Modes ........................................................................... 35
MONITOR jacks ................................................ 22, 72
level & balance adjustment ..................................... 95
MONITOR knob .............................................. 19, 196
Monitoring inputs ................................................. 258
MT1 ................................................................................ 51
MT2 ................................................................................ 51
MTC ..................................................................... 197, 209
offset ......................................................................... 200
types .......................................................................... 197
unstable .................................................................... 199
MTP ............................................................................... 51
Multitracking ............................................................ 56
Index
Muting channels ...................................................... 42
Input Mixer ................................................................ 90
Track Mixer ................................................................ 95
N
Naming by typing ................................................ 195
NEXT button ....................................................... 20, 45
No Effect Board ...................................................... 101
Non-drop .................................................................. 197
Not 44.1kHz Song ! .............................................. 190
NTSC ........................................................................... 197
Numbers, typing ........................................... 195, 252
Numerics Type ....................................................... 252
NUMERICS/ASCII button ................................. 21
using ......................................................................... 195
O
OMS ............................................................................. 214
Operating modes ..................................................... 35
Options ......................................................................... 17
OUT MIDI jack ......................................................... 22
Overdubbing ............................................................. 56
P
PAGE (JUMP) button ................................ 20, 36, 47
PAL .............................................................................. 197
Panning
in linked channels ..................................................... 78
Input Mixer ................................................................ 86
Track mixer ................................................................ 90
using MONITOR knob .......................................... 196
Parameters
Input Mixer channels ............................................... 86
Track Mixer channels ............................................... 90
Partitioning ................................................................ 24
selecting partitions ................................................. 228
Patches. .......................................................... See Effects
Peak Hold ................................................................. 250
PEAK Indicators ...................................................... 18
Performer .................................................................. 213
PHANTOM switch ................................................. 23
Phase
Input Mixer ................................................................ 90
problems .................................................................... 82
Track Mixer ................................................................ 94
PHONES jack ............................................................ 22
PHONES knob .......................................................... 19
Phrase Copy ............................................................. 157
Phrase Delete ........................................................... 152
Phrase Divide .......................................................... 153
Phrase Move ............................................................ 155
Phrase Name ........................................................... 162
Phrase New .............................................................. 161
Phrase Split .............................................................. 154
Phrase Trim In ........................................................ 159
Phrase Trim Out .................................................... 160
Phrases
creating ..................................................................... 161
defined ................................................................ 25, 170
editing
copying ................................................................ 157
deleting ................................................................ 152
dividing ................................................................ 153
moving ................................................................. 155
naming ................................................................. 162
note of caution .................................................... 171
overview .............................................................. 152
splitting ........................................................ 153–154
trimming
back .................................................................. 160
front ................................................................. 159
vs. track editing .................................................. 170
when to edit phrases .......................................... 170
Picture, locking to ................................................. 267
Ping-ponging. ............................ See Bouncing tracks
Pitch correction ...................................................... 195
PLAY (DISPLAY) button ............................... 21, 37
Play (DISPLAY) button ........................................ 35
Play and Record settings
Marker Stop ............................................................. 258
Play and record settings ..................................... 258
Record Monitor ....................................................... 258
PLAY button .............................................................. 21
Play mode ................................................................... 35
Playlist display ......................................................... 39
selecting type of ........................................................ 39
Please Insert Disc! ......................................... 190, 192
Power
turning off .................................................................. 32
turning on .................................................................. 32
POWER switch ......................................................... 22
Presets. ............................................ See Effects patches
Preview
TO, THRU and FROM ........................................... 166
PREVIEW button ..................................................... 20
Preview function
285
Index
overview ................................................................... 166
PREVIOUS button ............................................ 20, 45
PREVIOUS/NEXT switch ................................. 255
Printing effects ........................................................ 109
Index
Program Changes. ...................................... See MIDI
Program numbers. ......See Track numbers on a CD
Protecting songs ...................................................... 48
Punch-in
defined ........................................................................ 57
...........................................................See also Punching
Punching
and phrases .............................................................. 170
Auto Punch ................................................................ 58
setting during playback ...................................... 59
using locators ........................................................ 58
using markers ....................................................... 58
described .................................................................... 57
manual ........................................................................ 57
foot switch ............................................................. 57
front panel ............................................................. 57
setting crossfade length ......................................... 259
with looping .............................................................. 61
Punch-out
defined ........................................................................ 57
...........................................................See also Punching
Q
Quiet signals. .................................... See Attenuation
R
Random access ......................................................... 29
Realtime automation. .......................... See Automix
Rear panel ................................................................... 22
REC button ................................................................. 21
Record Monitor ...................................................... 258
Recorder section
overview .................................................................... 20
Recording .................................................................... 50
a digital source .......................................................... 66
effects
in stereo ............................................................... 112
from a CD ................................................................... 67
how it works .............................................................. 29
in stereo .............................................................. 55, 277
loop recording ........................................................... 60
mode, selecting .......................................................... 51
modes
times ............................................................... 52, 217
checking .......................................................... 217
monitoring inputs ................................................... 258
overdubbing .............................................................. 56
process overview ...................................................... 53
setting fade length .................................................. 259
time available ...................................................... 30, 52
checking ....................................................... 217, 250
with effects ............................................................... 109
286
RECORDING bus ................................................... 27
Recording mode ....................................................... 51
Recover Err Retry ? ............................................... 242
Red Book ................................................................... 183
Redo
defined ........................................................................ 62
Reinitializing ........................................................... 277
Remaining recording time ................................ 250
Removable drives. ........................... See hard drives
Return. ................................................See Effects return
REW button .......................................................... 21, 47
S
Sample rate ................................................................. 50
Scaling. ....................................................... See Automix
Scene Mode ................................................................ 85
SCENE/0 button ..................................................... 21
Scenes
and MIDI Program Changes ................................. 207
copying ....................................................................... 51
defined ........................................................................ 84
deleting ....................................................................... 85
recalling ...................................................................... 85
storing ......................................................................... 84
updating ..................................................................... 85
SCMS ........................................................................... 181
Scrub ............................................................ 166–168, 276
SCSI
connector .................................................................... 22
ID number ................................................................ 254
...................................................... See also Hard drives
SECAM ....................................................................... 197
SELECT/CH EDIT ................................................. 36
1-18 .............................................................................. 19
Selecting songs ......................................................... 49
Send. ...................................................... See Effects send
Sequencers. ............................................. See MIDI, 197
SHIFT button ....................................................... 21, 36
Shift Lock ................................................................. 251
Shift Lock .................................................................. 251
Shrinking time. ..See Time compression/expansion
Shutdown procedure ............................................. 33
Signal flow .................................................................. 27
Slave (synchronization) ...................................... 197
SMPTE. ..............................................................See MTC
Snap Mode ................................................................ 128
Snapshots. ..............................See Automix Snapshots
Solo. ...............................................See Soloing channels
Index
Soloing channels ...................................................... 42
Input Mixer ................................................................ 90
quick solo ................................................................... 43
Solo mode .................................................................. 43
Track Mixer ................................................................ 95
Song Archive Extract ........................................... 227
Song Arrange .......................................................... 173
Song Combine ........................................................ 175
Song Copy Archives ............................................ 225
handling ................................................................... 226
Song Copy Playable ............................................. 224
Song Erase ................................................................ 219
Song Export ............................................................. 247
Song Import ............................................................. 246
Song mode .................................................................. 35
Song Optimize ........................................................ 218
Song Position Pointer .................................. 200, 209
Song Protect ............................................................... 48
Song Split .................................................................. 174
Song Store ................................................................... 33
Songs
archiving .................................................................. 225
automation. .............................................. See Automix
backing up
to DAT
backup steps ................................................... 239
checking tape contents .................................. 242
recovering data .............................................. 241
verifying data ................................................. 243
CD requirements ..................................................... 185
contents of .................................................................. 25
copying
using Song Copy Archives ............................... 225
using Song Copy Playable ................................ 224
using Song Split .................................................. 174
creating new .............................................................. 50
defined ........................................................................ 25
editing
structure ............................................................... 173
erasing ...................................................................... 219
exporting to other VS recorders ........................... 247
icon .............................................................................. 51
importing from other VS recorders ...................... 246
importing tracks ...................................................... 175
loading ........................................................................ 49
using Song Archive Extract .............................. 227
using Song Copy Playable ................................ 226
naming ........................................................................ 50
numbers ..................................................................... 52
optimizing ................................................................ 218
protecting ................................................................... 48
recording on a CD
a song ................................................................... 188
adding new songs .............................................. 190
all songs at once .................................................. 190
saving .......................................................................... 33
to an external drive .................................... 223–228
selecting ...................................................................... 49
system settings ................................................ 249–251
Fader Match ........................................................ 249
foot switch ........................................................... 251
Peak Hold ............................................................ 250
remaining time .................................................... 250
Sources
defined ........................................................................ 25
routing to tracks ........................................................ 54
Speed control ........................................................... 195
SPP. ............................. See MIDI Song Position Pointer
ST IN button .............................................................. 18
START ........................................................................ 164
Starting over .............................................................. 35
STATUS buttons ...................................................... 19
blinking red ................................................................ 19
blinking red & orange .............................................. 19
green ........................................................................... 19
orange ......................................................................... 19
unlit ............................................................................. 19
Stereo channels, independent control ......... 269
Stereo Input .............................................................. 196
Stereo placement. ...................................See Panning
Stereo recording ..................................................... 277
STOP button .............................................................. 21
Stretching time. ...See Time compression/expansion
Surface scan ............................................................. 231
Swapping tracks. .......................See Track Exchange
Sync track .......................................... 200–202, 204–206
Synchronization with MIDI devices ............ 197
described .................................................................. 209
master and slave ..................................................... 197
necessary items ........................................................ 197
sync track ......................................... 200–202, 204–206
tempo map ............................................... 202, 204–206
unstable .................................................................... 199
Synchronization with video equipment ..... 267
Synchronization with VS recorders ...... 261–264
another VS-1824 ...................................................... 262
VS-1680 ..................................................................... 262
VS-880/880EX ......................................................... 263
System initialization .............................................. 37
System mode ............................................................. 35
System parameters
copying ....................................................................... 51
Index
287
Index
T
Table of Contents .................................................. 185
Takes
defined ........................................................................ 25
naming ...................................................................... 162
TAP button ................................................................. 20
Tempo map ...................................................... 202–206
and the metronome .................................................. 68
creating ..................................................................... 272
THRU MIDI jack ...................................................... 22
Time compression/expansion ........................ 148
Time remaining ...................................................... 250
Time stamp ................................................................ 34
TIME/VALUE dial ..................................... 21, 37, 47
TO ................................................................................. 164
TOC. .............................................See Table of Contents
Track at Once .......................................................... 189
Track Copy ....................................................... 144, 171
Track Cut ................................................................... 140
Track Erase ............................................................... 139
Track Exchange ...................................................... 147
Track Import ............................................................ 151
Track Insert .............................................................. 146
Track minutes ........................................................... 30
Track Mixer
channel parameters .................................................. 90
diagram ...................................................................... 28
faders .......................................................................... 71
mode ........................................................................... 35
Track Move .............................................................. 142
Track Name ............................................................. 150
Track numbers on a CD ..................................... 186
Tracks
adjusting playback level .......................................... 95
assigning sources to .................................................. 54
bouncing .................................................................... 64
how do I bounce
with effects? .................................................... 275
how do I bounce? ............................................... 274
changing status ................................................... 42, 94
combining from different songs ........................... 175
defined ........................................................................ 25
editing
a practical application ........................................ 171
basic procedure ................................................... 164
copying ................................................................ 144
seamless looping ............................................ 171
cutting .................................................................. 140
entering time values .......................................... 169
using [F2 (Now)]............................................. 169
using locator buttons ..................................... 169
using the TIME/VALUE dial ...................... 169
288
erasing .................................................................. 139
exchanging .......................................................... 147
inserting blank space ......................................... 146
moving ................................................................. 142
naming ................................................................. 150
note of caution .................................................... 171
overview .............................................................. 139
setting edit points ............................................... 165
using Preview ................................................. 166
using Scrub ..................................................... 166
with locators ................................................... 165
swapping ............................................................. 147
time-compression/expansion ........................... 148
vs. phrase editing ............................................... 170
Waveform Display ............................................. 168
extracting from a song ............................................ 174
importing ................................................................. 151
muting ........................................................................ 42
recording to ................................................................ 54
soloing ........................................................................ 42
Track mode ................................................................ 35
Transitions. ............................See Automix Snapshots
Transport controls .................................................. 21
Turning off the VS-1824 ....................................... 32
Turning on the VS-1824 ........................................ 32
Typing numbers and letters ..................... 195, 252
U
Undo
defined ........................................................................ 62
................................................See also Undo and Redo
UNDO (REDO) button ......................................... 21
Undo and Redo
explained .................................................................... 62
levels ........................................................................... 62
using ........................................................................... 62
when recording ......................................................... 62
UNDO message ....................................................... 63
Utility mode ............................................................... 35
V
Vari Pitch ................................................................... 195
VARI PITCH button .............................................. 21
Video synchronization ........................................ 267
Virtual tracks. .........................................See V-Tracks
Vision DSP ................................................................ 214
Vocal delay ............................................................... 108
Volume
setting
for recording ......................................................... 54
in linked channels ................................................ 77
Index
VS-1680
compatibility ............................................................ 245
syncing with ............................................................ 262
VS-840/840EX
compatibility ............................................................ 245
VS-880/880EX
compatibility ............................................................ 245
syncing with ............................................................ 263
VS8F-1 ........................................................................... 17
VS8F-2 ........................................................................... 17
VSR-880
compatibility ............................................................ 245
V-Tracks
explained .................................................................... 30
recording .................................................................... 56
selecting .......................................................... 56, 80, 91
W
Wake-up call ............................................................ 260
Waveform Display ....................................... 168, 276
Why can’t I hear effects? .................................... 275
Why do I hear all of the inputs? ..................... 269
Why does the CD sound different? .............. 271
Write Method .......................................................... 189
X
X and Y ....................................................................... 276
XLR ................................................................................ 23
wiring ......................................................................... 53
Z
ZERO button ............................................................. 21
Index
289
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
PANAMA
ITALY
ISRAEL
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Roland Italy S. p. A.
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 846-3676
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
PARAGUAY
NORWAY
SINGAPORE
Swee Lee Company
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 243 9555
TAIWAN
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
PERU
POLAND
Portinari 199 (ESQ. HALS),
San Borja, Lima 41,
REP. OF PERU
TEL: (01) 4758226
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
SOUTH AFRICA
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
VIDEO Broadcast S.A.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
THAILAND
URUGUAY
PORTUGAL
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
ASIA
CHINA
Beijing Xinghai Musical
Instruments Co., Ltd.
6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 6774 7491
Shanghai Xingtong Acoustics
Equipment CO.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
New East Club Plaza, Shanghai,
CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 498 3079
INDONESIA
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
VIETNAM
ROMANIA
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
Comercial Fancy
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: (039)16 6200
FRANCE
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
Roland Brasil Ltda
CHILE
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
Roland France SA
BRAZIL
Cosmos Corporation
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo ,
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: 668-0480
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Lauttasaarentie 54 B
Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (9) 682 4020
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
FBS LINES
RUSSIA
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (08) 702 0020
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Musitronic AG
Gerberstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4410 Liestal, SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
UKRAINE
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
MIDDLE EAST
GREECE
BAHRAIN
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: (061) 43-5400
HUNGARY
Intermusica Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
LEBANON
A. Chahine & Fils
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
Musicland Digital C.A.
EUROPE
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
QATAR
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
KUWAIT
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
VENEZUELA
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
MALAYSIA
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Saigon Music
PT Citra IntiRama
KOREA
Todo Musica S.A.
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 273 0074
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (02) 66-9426
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Bldg. No. 47,
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 221-1230
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (0604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
Unit 2, 109 Woodbine Downs
Blvd, Etobicoke, ON
M9W 6Y1 CANADA
TEL: (0416) 213 9707
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
IRAN
MOCO, INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
As of January 1, 2002 (Roland)
To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover to left or right.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
For EU Countries
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
ADVARSEL!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. When the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Never use with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table except as specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
2
To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover to left or right.
Copyright
• When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument, this unit can
perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS).
This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production, and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works (such as your own compositions) that do not infringe on the
copyrights of others. (SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and later copying through a digital
connection. It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio equipment as a copyrightprotection feature.)
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party. We assume no
responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights arising through your
use of this unit.
About the License Agreement
• The VS-1824 and its CD-R/RW capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding
technical prohibiting features of second-generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes
copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use
and enjoyment (private use). Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
VS-1824 Owner’s Manual
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or
in part, of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the like) whose copyright is
held by a third party is prohibited by law.
Owner’s Manual
Disclaimer of liability
Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other damages”
which may result from your use of the VS-1824. These damages may include but are not limited to the following
events which can occur when using the VS-1824.
• Any loss of profit that may occur to you
• Permanent loss of your music or data
• Inability to continue using the VS-1824 itself or a connected device
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s Manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” (Owner’s Manual p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s
Manual p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning the
proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you
have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, User
Guide, Owner’s Manual, and Appendices should be read in its entirety.
These manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
* IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
* Iomega is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* ZIP is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* Cakewalk Pro Audio and Cakewalk Professional are trademarks of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.
* FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn, Inc.
* VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG.
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
This owner’s manual is printed on recycled paper.
02781256
’02-6-E2-41KS
Roland Web Site: http://www.roland.co.jp/
Capture Audio data from Audio CD (Capture function)
VS-1824 have function to capture Audio data from Audio
CDs.
This can capture audio from CD only in case the
sampling rate setting of current song is 44.1kHz.
If you are using a VS-1824 that is not
equipped with an internal CD-RW drive, you will need to
purchase a separately available CD-RW drive.
For instructions on connecting the drive, refer to “Connecting
an External CD-R/CD-RW Drive” (Owner’s Manual p. 192).
PX-4220Te, PX-8220Te, PX-W124TSe, and PX-W1210TSE
manufactured by PLEXTOR is supported. In case you
are using other drives approved by Roland, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor.
1. Load an Audio CD or CD-R/RW disc that contains audio
you like to capture on CD-RW drive.
2. Press [CD-RW/MASTERING].
CD-RW/Mastering Menu will appear.
4. Press [
][
][
][
]to move curser and set
each of following parameters using TIME/VALUE dial.
If following cases, the tracks to capture audio must be set as
Stereo Pair. In case it is not set as Stereo Pair, a message of
“Illegal Track Pair!” appears and unable to capture audio.
• “CDR” is selected as recording mode of the current song.
• Any phrases in CD-R mode is recorded in destination
tracks.
● L-Ch Dest Track (L channel destination track)
Select the destination track of audio to capture. Select the
destination track of left channel audio here.
● R-Ch Dest Track (R channel destination track)
Select the destination track of audio to capture. Select the
destination track of right channel audio here.
*
In case the track which contain any phrases in CD-R mode is
selected as destination of “L-Ch Dest Track,” it is impossible to
change “R-Ch Dest Track” with TIME/VALUE dial.
● Capture TO
You can adjust the time of placement.
to ZERO:
Place the audio data starting at 00h00m00s00f.
to Last Phrs:0S:
Place the audio data after the end of the last phrase in the
destination tracks.
to Last Phrs:2S:
Place the audio data two seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the destination tracks.
to Last Phrs:4S:
Place the audio data four seconds after the end of the last
phrase in the destination tracks.
3. Press [F6 (CDCap].
CD Capture screen will appear.
5. Once the above parameters are set, select the track of CD
shown under “CD Track” pressing [PREVIOUS] or
[NEXT]. The highlighted track is the target to capture.
● CD Track
Select the track of CD shown under “CD Track.”
Press [PLAY] to play the highlighted track.
When the cursor is in list of “CD Track,” you can select track
of CD pressing [
][
].
Capture Audio data from Audio CD (Capture function)
6. Press [F5 (Exec)] after completion all the settings.
A message concerning copyright appears in the display.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES].
The same message appears in the back cover of Owner’s
Manual.
Canceling the capture
If you want to cancel capture in the middle, operate as follows.
1. Press [EXIT/NO]
A message “Abort?” appears.
2. Press [ENTER/YES] to cease capture.
A message of “Capture to Mastering Tr. In CDR mode?”
appears in case of followings.
• 17 and 18 tracks * are selected as destination tracks and
• those tracks are selected as stereo pair and
Press [EXIT/NO] to re-start capture.
Capturing Time
Capturing time differs according to recording mode as
follows.
• no song data exists on 17 and 18 tracks *.
*
This is applicable to 7 and 8 tracks instead of 17 and 18 in case
the Recording mode is “MAS.”
Press [ENTER/YES] when you want to capture in CDR mode.
If you press [EXIT/NO], the recording mode of current song
will be applied.
Recording Mode
CDR (CD writing) ....Approx 40% of actual time
MAS (Mastering) ......Approx 80% of actual time
Others .........................Approx 150% of actual time
If you find message “Illegal Track Pair!”
In the following cases, the tracks to capture audio must
be set as Stereo Pair. Unless, unable to capture.
• “CDR” is selected as recording mode of the current
song.
• Any phrases in CD-R mode is recorded in destination
tracks.
In this case, press [ENTER/YES] and re-set destination
track. (See process 4. above)
7. A message concerning Licensing Conditions is displayed.
After reading this message, press [ENTER/YES]. This
message appears in the back cover of Owner’s manual.
A message “CD Capture..” appears on display and starts
capture.
8. If you want to capture other audio data from same CD, go
back to process 4. above.
9. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to the Playlist display.
40455145
’01-8-REC 1st Edition
VS-1824
A demo song is pre-installed!
A demo song is pre-installed in internal hard disk of VS-1824.
Therefore, it is not necessary to execute process of “How To Load a Demo Song (CD-R Recover)”
(p. 21–23) in the User Guide.
When listening to a demo song, please execute operation after “For Making the Preparations Which
Listen to a Demo Song (Song Select)” (p. 24) in the User Guide.
● User Guide p. 19 “About the Demo Songs”
should read
The CD-ROM comes with the VS-1824 contains a
demo song that is also pre-installed in internal
hard disk shown below.
incorrect
The CD-ROM comes with the VS-1824 contains a
demo song shown below. It is necessary to load song
data form the CD-ROM to hard disk of VS-1824. See
“How to Load a Demo Song (CD-R Recover)” on
p. 21.
● User Guide p. 21–23 “How To Load a Demo Song (CD-R Recover)”
Please skip step 1–12 of “How To Load a Demo Song (CD-R Recover).”
40457545
1*REC